Recycling Christmas lights and decorations is an important step towards reducing waste, and with electric lights, the idea is no different. They can be recycled and repurposed just like any other item.
Christmas lights are a beloved holiday tradition, adding a warm and festive glow to homes and streets during the holiday season. However, what many may not realize is that the widespread use of Christmas lights also contributes to a significant amount of trash each year.
Countless strings of broken, outdated, or unwanted Christmas lights end up in landfills, posing environmental challenges. In this article, you will find out the ways to recycle Christmas lights and reduce their impact on the environment.
Determine the Condition of Your Christmas Lights
Lights, camera, check! Before you bid farewell to your holiday adornments, it is crucial to perform a little inspection of their condition. Why, you ask? Because not all lights are created equal, and some may require attention before the recycling process.
Based on my first-hand experience, I can say that recycling lights that are in good condition ensure that they can be repurposed. On the other hand, lights that are damaged or broken can potentially cause issues in the recycling process.
Here are some flags to determine if you can consider the option of recycling your electric light strings or not:
Green Flags
Red Flags
The holiday lights are made of glass and not plastic or polyvinyl chloride, which can be more difficult to recycle
The old Christmas lights are made of non-recyclable materials
They are not damaged or broken, as this can make it difficult to recycle safely
The bulbs are still functional and can be reused or donated rather than recycled as municipal solid waste
The old lights have an accepted type of bulb, such as incandescent, compact fluorescent (CFL), or light-emitting diode (LED)
The holiday lights are heavily damaged or contaminated, such that the cost of recycling outweighs the environmental benefits
The old holiday lights are not tangled or knotted with other materials
The holiday lights are coated with paint, glue, or other substances that cannot be easily removed
The recycling center or program in your area does accept Christmas lights and is equipped to recycle them properly
The bulbs are specialty or unique types that cannot be processed by the available equipment and facilities
Exploring Different Recycling Options
My research indicates that there are several recycling options available to dispose of unwanted holiday lights in an environmentally responsible way.
One option is to check with your hardware store. Some hardware stores like The Home Depot, Lowe's, Ace Hardware, and True Value accept lights in special recycling programs. Some organizations even offer mail-in programs where you can send in your old lights, and they will recycle Christmas lights for you.
If you prefer to recycle your lights locally, you can look for a materials recovery facility or a local recycling center that accepts electronic waste.
My findings show that many municipalities have designated drop-off locations for electronic items, and they may also have curbside pick-up programs for e-waste. Check with your city's landfill management or recycling agency for more information on available options in your area.
If you're looking for a more charitable option, consider donating your unwanted lights to organizations like Toys for Tots, which may accept new or gently used lights as part of their toy donation programs during the Christmas and holiday season.
Whichever option you choose, be sure to follow safety guidelines for handling electronics, as Christmas lights may contain hazardous materials like lead.
Repurposing Lights With DIY Recycling Ideas
Try these five DIY ideas using string lights that allow you to recycle old Christmas lights while creating a cozy and inviting atmosphere in your space.
First up, you can repurpose your Christmas light strings with a DIY photo display. Attach the bulbs to a wooden frame or wire grid, and use mini clothespins to hang your favorite photos, postcards, or artwork. This unique and personalized photo frame can be hung on your wall, creating a warm and nostalgic ambiance.
Next, you can consider making outdoor pathway lighting using recycled Christmas lights. Align the bulbs along a pathway or wrap them around trees. This not only creates a magical atmosphere for evening strolls or outdoor gatherings but also assures you of a nostalgic feeling every time you look at it.
For a touch of elegance and functionality, repurpose your old Christmas lights with a DIY-lighted mirror. Wrap the bulbs around the border of a mirror to create a flattering look for your vanity or bathroom. It's a simple yet stylish addition that can elevate your beauty routine while giving new life to your Christmas tree lights.
You can make a custom illuminated sign using your old holiday lights. Spell out words or create shapes on a wooden or metal frame using holiday string lights. For cozy and inviting outdoor lighting, you can also try DIY patio or balcony lighting.
Last, but not the least, you can decorate your kids' room with holiday LEDs. You can wrap them around a bunk bed, a play tent, or a bookshelf to create a lighting element that your kids will love. It's a sure way to bring magic and joy to their space.
Can I recycle Christmas light strings with my regular curbside recycling?
Based on our observations, no. Christmas lights are considered e-waste and need special recycling. You may need to check with your local recycling centers for specific instructions.
Are there any safety precautions I should take when recycling broken lights?
Yes, avoid placing broken lights in your recycling bin. Wrap them securely in packing material or place them in a sturdy box to prevent injuries.
Can I donate my old Christmas lights instead of recycling them?
Absolutely! If they're still working, consider donating them to local charities or community programs. It's a great way to give back and help others light up their holidays.
Can LED Christmas lights be recycled?
Giving it a try showed me that, yes, LED lights can be recycled. But it's always a good idea to check with your local recycling program or center for specific instructions to ensure they're recycled properly.
What are some creative ways to reuse or repurpose old Christmas lights instead of recycling them?
You can use them for decorative lighting in your home, garden, or patio or repurpose them for crafts.
Conclusion
Christmas light recycling can help reduce the demand for raw materials, such as copper, and other valuable metals, which are used in the production of new holiday lights. This conserves natural resources and reduces the need for mining and extraction.
It will also set a positive example for others, encouraging them to adopt more sustainable waste disposal practices.
By recycling your Christmas lights through any of these ways, you can do your part to reduce electronic waste and prevent valuable materials from ending up in landfills. So, instead of adding to the trash pile, consider recycling your holiday lights and giving them a new lease on life while also supporting a greener and more sustainable holiday season.
To maintain the freshness of holiday wreaths and greenery by storing them in a cool, sun-free spot in breathable containers. Avoid stacking or crushing the greenery to preserve its structure and extend the life of your holiday décor.
Are you tired of spending money on fresh wreaths and greenery every holiday season, only to have them dry out and wither away after a week?
It's a frustrating and all-too-common problem, but fear not! With a few expert tips and tricks, you can keep wreaths and greenery fresh looking, and vibrant all season long. So put down that wilted wreath and keep reading to learn the secrets of the pros.
How to Keep Wreaths and Greenery Fresh
First off, always start with fresh greenery. The freshest greenery can be found at a farmers market or even in your own backyard if you live in a cold climate. Look for greenery with firm, pliable stems and vibrant colors to ensure that it's fresh and healthy.
Now, before using the greenery to create wreaths or garlands, make sure to soak it in water overnight or for a few hours to hydrate it properly. Think of it as giving your greenery a good ol' hydrating spa treatment. And if you want to be extra kind, gently crush the cut ends of the stems to help the greenery absorb even more water. Voila! Your greenery is now feeling fresh and rejuvenated.
To keep your live greenery looking its best, it's important to keep it away from direct sunlight and heat sources like fireplaces or heating vents. Direct sunlight and heat can cause premature drying, which can make your greenery look dull and lifeless. It's like a sunburn for your greenery, and nobody likes a sunburn. So keep your greenery happy and healthy in a cool, shaded spot.
One of the best ways to keep your greenery fresh is by using a moisture sealant spray like Wilt-Pruf. This anti-transpirant spray helps to retain moisture in the foliage and keeps your greenery looking crisp and vibrant. For outdoor displays, it's essential to mist the greenery regularly with a misting or spray bottle to help it stay hydrated. You can also use an anti-desiccant spray to prevent your greenery from drying out.
Lastly, don't forget to use pine, cedar, other evergreens, and even berries to create beautiful arrangements for your holiday décor. Hang your fresh wreaths and garlands indoors or outdoors to add a festive touch to your home or office.
How to Properly Store Fresh Holiday Greenery
Now that you know how to keep your wreaths and greenery fresh during the holiday season, it's important to talk about how to store them properly. After all, you don't want to go through all that effort just to have your greenery wilt and dry out a few days later.
Finding the Perfect Storage Spot
Step one: Find a top-secret hiding spot. I'm talking about a location that is cool, dark, and perfect for keeping your greenery fresh for longer. This will help slow the drying process and keep the greenery fresh. Think of it as your very own Greenery Fort Knox!
Bonus points if your hiding spot is pet-proof! We all know how much our furry friends love to munch on anything that resembles a tasty snack. But not this time! Keep your fresh Christmas greenery safe and sound from any four-legged intruders by finding a spot that is off-limits to your pets.
Use Breathable Containers for Storage
Step two: Find a storage container with breathing holes - just like how we need fresh air, your greenery needs it too! Don't let your plants suffocate in a sealed container. By using a storage container with ventilation, your evergreen cuttings, spruce stems, and holly berries can thrive in a cool and fresh environment.
Proper storage is the first step to ensuring that your fresh garlands, live wreaths, and cedar boughs last the entire season, both for indoor and outdoor decorations. So don't just hang your fresh greens anywhere - find the perfect spot with as much water, cool temperatures, and daily misting as possible.
Don't Stack or Crush The Holiday Greenery
Step three: Don't flatten your holiday greenery like a pancake - give it the love and care it deserves! Your fresh garlands, evergreen boughs, and juniper sprigs are not just decorations. They are living plants that need to maintain their shape and structure.
To prevent your fresh greenery from wilting and losing its shape, avoid stacking or crushing it. By giving your fresh greenery room to breathe and space to maintain its shape, you can ensure that your Christmas décor looks fresh and beautiful throughout the season.
Additional Tips and Tricks
1. Use Fresh Elements
Consider using natural decorations like pinecones, magnolia leaves, cedar branches, or even fruit, like berries, to decorate your wreaths and garlands. These can add texture and perfume to your decorations while also helping to keep the greenery fresh.
2. Repurpose The Greenery
After the holiday season is over, you can repurpose the greenery by using it in floral arrangements or as a natural decoration for your home. Just be sure to remove any dead or wilted leaves before using them.
3. Add a Few Drops of Essential Oils
Adding essential oils like peppermint or eucalyptus to the greenery can help keep it smelling fresh and fragrant.
4. Hang Greenery Upside Down
Hanging live greenery upside down can help them last longer by allowing the moisture to be distributed more evenly.
5. Consider Using Artificial Greenery
If you want the look of fresh greenery without maintenance, consider using a mix of fresh and artificial greenery. This can give your decorations a more natural look while also making them easier to care for.
6. Use a Bleach Solution
Mix a small amount of bleach with water and dip the ends of the greenery into the solution before attaching them to the wreath or garland. This will help kill any bacteria that can cause the greenery to wilt or decay.
7. Avoid Using Wire
Using wire to attach greenery to wreaths or garlands can damage the stems and cause them to dry out more quickly.
8. Use Floral Foam
If you're creating a wreath or centerpiece with fresh flowers, use floral foam to keep the flowers hydrated. Soak the foam in water for at least 30 minutes before use and keep it moist throughout the season.
9. Add Aspirin
Crush a few aspirin tablets and mix them with water, then dip the ends of the greenery into the solution before attaching them to the wreath or fresh garland. The salicylic acid in aspirin can help keep the greenery fresh.
What are some natural ways to preserve fresh-cut greens and wreaths without using chemicals?
Natural ways to preserve fresh greens include soaking them in water, misting them regularly, using anti-transpirant sprays or anti-desiccant, and keeping them away from direct sunlight and heat sources.
What are some ways to repurpose wreaths and greenery after the holiday season is over?
After the Christmas and holiday season is over, wreaths and greenery can be repurposed as a decorative touch for the front door, porch, ribbon, garden, fireplace mantel, or as part of floral arrangements. They can also be used for floristry.
How long can wreaths and greenery typically last when properly cared for?
The lifespan of wreaths and greenery depends on the specific type of plant and how well they are cared for. Typically, with proper care, they can last for several weeks outdoors and up to a month or more indoors.
Can wreaths and fresh greenery be stored for future use? If so, what is the best way to store them?
Yes, wreaths and fresh greenery can be stored for future use. It's best to store them in a cool, dry place, wrapped in paper, or stored in a container to prevent moisture loss.
What are some common mistakes people make when trying to keep wreaths and greenery fresh?
Common mistakes people make when trying to keep wreaths and greenery fresh include exposing them to too much sunlight or heat, not watering or misting them regularly, and not properly pruning or trimming the plant stem and leaves.
What types of greenery are best for wreaths and garlands?
Fir, cedrus, pine, and magnolia are popular choices for wreaths and garlands due to their durability and fragrance. Buxus, Tsuga, and other evergreens can also be used to add texture and variety to your holiday décor.
Conclusion
There's nothing quite like the sight and smell of fresh wreaths and greenery to set the festive mood. And with these tips and tricks, you can make sure your decorations stay fresh and lively throughout the entire season.
Go ahead and add a few drops of essential oils, avoid using wire, mist regularly, and use a water-resistant sealant, among other tips. These simple but effective strategies will ensure your wreaths and greenery stay fresh, vibrant, and fragrant all season long. From the warm and cozy scent of peppermint to the refreshing aroma of eucalyptus, your decorations will bring joy and happiness to all who enter your home.
So, don't hesitate to give these tips a try and see the difference for yourself.
Pre-lit Christmas trees can be used outdoors, provided they are marked as outdoor-safe by the manufacturer. To protect them from weather damage and prolong their life, ensure they are adequately covered or sheltered from the elements.
Ah, the age-old question: can you put a pre-lit Christmas tree outside? As we approach the festive season, many of us are faced with the dilemma of whether to deck the halls indoors or bring the holiday cheer outside.
But let's be real, who doesn't love the idea of a dazzling pre-lit tree twinkling in their yard for all to see? Let's take a closer look at the pros and cons of this festive feat.
What is a Prelit Christmas Tree?
You see, a pre-lit Christmas tree is like a real tree but with a little extra holiday cheer built right in. A pre-lit outdoor Christmas tree is a modern marvel of holiday technology that comes equipped with built-in lights. These fake Christmas trees save you the hassle of stringing up lights yourself and provide an effortless way to add a little sparkle to your holiday décor.
Unlike traditional Christmas trees, pre-lit trees come with a variety of lighting options, including LED and incandescent lights. Some pre-lit trees even come with different lighting modes, like twinkle or steady-on, to suit your decorating preferences.
Can A Prelit Christmas Tree Be Placed Outside?
The answer isn't as simple as a "yes" or "no." There are some factors you need to consider before making such a bold move.
Firstly, you need to check if your pre-lit tree is certified for outdoor use. Most pre-lit artificial Christmas trees are designed for indoor use only, and placing them outside can lead to a disastrous combination of water and electricity. And we all know that water and electricity don't mix.
Even if your pre-lit artificial Christmas tree is certified for outdoor use, you still need to protect it from the elements. Rain, wind, and snow can all wreak havoc on your tree's delicate electrical components, turning your once beautiful tree into a shocking hazard.
The Arguments For and Against
Arguments For
It's an easy way to add outdoor holiday lighting! You can skip the hassle of stringing up lights and simply place your pre-lit tree outside.
It's a unique decoration! A pre-lit artificial Christmas tree in your front yard will certainly stand out and add to the festive atmosphere.<
Arguments Against
It's a fire hazard! Pre-lit Christmas trees are not designed for outdoor use and could potentially ignite if exposed to moisture or extreme temperatures.
It's a waste of good indoor decoration! Your pre-lit tree is meant to be enjoyed inside, where it can be properly appreciated and protected from the elements.
The Logistics of Outdoor Tree Placement
Consider the Weather
When it comes to outdoor Christmas trees, the weather is a major factor to consider. If you live in an area with frequent rain or snow, it's important to take precautions to prevent your artificial Christmas tree from becoming a fire hazard.
This is especially important if you have a pre-lit tree. To prevent short-circuiting, make sure to keep the cord covered and protected from the elements.
Avoid Tripping Hazards
Another important factor to consider is the location of your tree. Make sure to place it in a secure spot where it won't fall over or trip anyone walking by. If you have children or pets, make sure to keep the tree out of their reach to prevent any accidents.
Choose the Right Location
When it comes to placing an outdoor Christmas tree, location is everything. You want to make sure the tree is visible from the street but not in a spot where it will be easily blown over by strong winds. It's also important to consider the location of your front door, as you don't want your tree blocking the entrance to your home.
Use Heavy Duty Ground Stakes
To prevent your tree from blowing over in strong winds, it's important to use heavy-duty ground stakes to secure it to the ground. This will ensure that your tree stays in place, even during the windiest of days.
Additional Tips for Safely Placing a Pre-lit Christmas Tree Outdoors
Make sure the fake tree is fully dry before placing it outside to avoid mold growth.
Check the artificial tree for any damaged or burnt-out lights before placing it outside.
Place the outdoor Christmas tree in an umbrella stand to provide extra stability.
Use a tree skirt to protect the outdoor Christmas tree from moisture and dirt.
Use decorative boxes to add extra weight to the tree base.
Trim any branches that are blocking the view of the outdoor Christmas tree or creating a safety hazard.
Use outdoor-rated extension cords to connect the lights on the outdoor Christmas tree to a power source.
Check the cords and lights periodically to ensure they are still functioning properly.
By following these tips and tricks, you can enjoy a beautiful and safe outdoor Christmas tree that will bring joy and cheer to your home throughout the holiday season.
Can you leave an artificial Christmas tree out overnight?
It's generally not recommended to leave a fake Christmas tree outside overnight, especially if it's not specifically designed for outdoor use. If you do decide to leave a fake tree outside, make sure it's covered with plastic store bags or some other type of protective covering to prevent damage.
Do pre-lit artificial Christmas trees need to be covered or protected from the elements when used outside?
Yes, pre-lit Christmas trees should be covered or protected from the elements when used outside. The metal parts of the tree may rust or corrode if exposed to moisture. The lights may also blow out due to the cold weather. It's best to keep the outdoor Christmas tree on a covered porch or patio or in a spot that's sheltered from the wind and rain.
Can you use a fake Christmas tree outside in rainy or snowy conditions?
Some fake Christmas trees may be able to withstand rainy or snowy conditions, but it's best to check the manufacturer's instructions before using one outdoors. If it is not an outdoor Christmas tree, it could become damaged or fade over time.
What kind of outdoor lighting is best for an outdoor Christmas tree?
LED lights are generally the best choice for pre-lit Christmas trees used outdoors. They are energy efficient, long-lasting, and won't get as hot as traditional incandescent lights.
How long can a prelit Christmas tree be left outside?
The length of time a prelit Christmas tree can be left outside depends on a variety of factors, including the type of Christmas tree, the weather conditions, and whether it is designed for outdoor use.
Are there any special maintenance requirements for pre-lit indoor trees used outside?
Yes, regular maintenance, such as cleaning the branches and checking the lights, can help ensure that the Christmas tree stays in good condition throughout the festive season.
Conclusion
Let's wrap up with some final thoughts on the burning question of whether it's safe to put a pre-lit Christmas tree outside. Drumroll, please... The decision is ultimately yours! You're the master of your own festive destiny.
But before you dive headfirst into your decorating plans, it's important to remember that with great power (i.e., the ability to put a pre-lit tree outside) comes great responsibility (i.e., ensuring it doesn't become a safety hazard).
So, let's get creative and find ways to minimize the risks. With some simple precautions, you can enjoy the twinkling lights and holiday cheer without worrying about any mishaps. Now go forth and decorate to your heart's content!
Already built up your game engine but have no game assets or sprites to work with?
Then we have just the perfect list of websites for you today, which house some of the most versatile and unique range of game images and models present on the internet.
When one is planning to create their very own indie game, developing the game engine itself is not all that difficult. Especially when compared to choosing and picking the right sprites and stock images that can go incredibly well with the narrative and gameplay.
And with so many game assets sites out there today, it can indeed be difficult to invest your time browsing through one and looking for particularly free and public domain images.
Featured Image | Creature Quest by West Studio & Heather Poon
However, with our list today, we seek to solve this very problem that most beginner developers tend to face.
So, here is our top 7 list of the best websites for free game assets and sprites.
Free Game Assets and Sprites Websites
League of Legends by Riot Games Worldbuilding Team
A lot of beginners and amateur game developers today, have made the digital marketplace Itch.io their number-one go-to because of the variety and versatility of game sprites and assets that the site provides.
However, most of their more premium content is not free to download, but the ones that are free are incredibly amazing, to begin with, and are capable of serving multiple purposes.
Just make sure that when you’re browsing through their content, you filter the results based on what you need and what comes with and without a license.
Each of the game assets and sprites present on the website comes in different resolutions ranging from 8-bit to 16-bit, each with a different appearance and texture.
There are 3D-rendered models as well which you can opt into if you’re looking to design a much more complex game.
One amazing thing about Itch.io is the Itch community. They have a lot of members who are small-time indie game designers and have created a lot of games that are up for download on the website itself.
Some of the games you need to pay for, while the others are absolutely free. You can install and play these games and get an idea about all the amazing things that you will be able to do with the game assets present on the website.
This website is just perfect for beginner game designers and artists who are looking for some simple yet effective game sprites to work with.
Now, OpenGameArt is by far the largest game asset website today. It caters to the needs of both amateur and professional game designers alike and comes with a range of assets that will help you to design anything you want from scratch
The best part about this website is that it was made solely for Creative Commons art, which means that every single sprite and game asset on it is free to use and download.
In terms of licensing, most of the assets fall under the public domain; hence, you will be able to use them for a lot of commercial purposes as well without having to worry about credit.
Their game asset range consists of 2D along with a lot of 3D art. There are also smaller asset categories that have items like sound FX and background music, which can help you to add the final touches to your game design.
There is one aspect of this website, which professionals absolutely love, and that is the concept art panel. There is this specific place in the website, which allows any artist to post their own concept art for free and is open to the wider public to view, share, and provide feedback.
However, the website design and the filter bar are not that easy to use and take a rather long time to get the hang of. But once you do start getting used to it, you will definitely find their library to be absolutely amazing.
The GameDev market is much like Itch.Io when it comes to its library and supports a mixture of free as well as premium game assets.
They also have a panel where artists are allowed to sell their games, as well as provide them to the public for free.
To be able to browse all the free content, you can look through the categories in the main menu, and use the convenient filter to search the ones which you need.
This is what makes GameDev Market one of the easiest-to-use and beginner-friendly game asset websites today. The sidebar has all the categories listed carefully, so if you’re looking for some 2D art or sprites which are absolutely free, then all you need to do is to click on the right options.
When it comes to the category of free character assets, the site provides a lot of easy downloadable links to help you out.
Moreover, to make things even easier for the newer developer and artist, the asset pages apart from housing, the content zip file also has detailed information about what's inside it. It also catalogs as well as houses the download links of the software that are compatible with these assets, so that the newcomer doesn't have to worry about much.
GameDev Market is just amazing when it comes to promoting indie game developers and indie concept artists. With the right marketing and game design, this website can indeed help you with making your own customer base as well as securing a decent side income.
The Game Art 2D website has one of the biggest catalogs of 2D arts, assets, and sprites in the entire world.
They have an incredible gallery of royalty-free game assets which is perfect for making both commercial as well as personal game projects and artworks, without having to worry about credits all that much.
However, many of the assets do tend to come with a price tag on this website, and the content of free stuff is quite limited in comparison to some of the other websites out there.
As the site mainly deals with having a vast library of 2D assets, the 3D and sound FX category suffers as a result, but there isn’t all that much to complain about here.
The quality of the assets is incredible, to say the least, and the wide range of versatile uses that they offer the designer is just amazing, making the website a must-visit for every game developer.
The game sprites, like a lot of the conventional stock images, come in many styles ranging from your more popular sprites to tilesets to even some basic concept art.
Though their collection of free downloads is rather small, there are still worth checking out, as you can really do a lot of amazing work with just the ones that they have.
This site is not exactly capable of being a staple go-to for any designer, but its unique and trustworthy library does have a lot of assets that you can look into from time to time.
CraftPix is a relatively newer website and features some of the most unique and craziest game assets and sprites that one can ask for.
It will allow you access to a lot of casino GUIs for making mobile games, as well as custom 2D backgrounds for side-scroller games.
As it caters to helping developers make games for various platforms, its library and asset formatting are quite versatile and sizeable. Hence, this website will not make you feel limited if you’re planning to do something different with the available assets.
But, what we love the most about CraftPix is that their asset list is constantly growing, and newer sprites and character designs are being added almost every day. Moreover, most of these game assets are added by the creators of the website themselves; this makes the forum highly personalized and well-maintained with a convenient search bar and filter.
However, this doesn’t mean that the website is not open to others offering their very own sprite and model designs. CraftPrix is a fantastic platform to upload and share your own character images on and get a considerable customer base as well as a fan following.
The website is also an incredible indie game developer’s hub. The custom sprites and assets that are already present in their library are just perfect for making a lot of engaging and interactive side-scroller games.
So, when it comes to building recognition for your work and promoting premium assets as well as some high-quality freebies for some extra income, then this website is simply one of the best.
No matter what you’re looking for, Reddit will most probably have it.
It has a community for almost everything, so, it’s really not all that surprising that there are a lot of subreddit forums on art, digital painting, and innovative game assets.
However, we will not be asking you to scour through every Reddit forum to find the one that houses the best game sprites and character models. We have done the hard work for you and found that /r/GameAssets is going to be the best page for all game assets-related content.
/r/GameAssets has an amazingly large library of curated free game assets from all across the web.
There is no designated character model that you will not find here. From fanart to even cosplays to unique and creatively designed sprites, the forum has some of the best assets that the internet has ever come up with.
However, the submissions are not exactly direct in this forum. It’s done through the inclusion of primary links, which leads to the main website from which you can very easily download the zip file.
The community here is also not as big as some of the other websites out there, but even with just 9,500 subscribers, the users are much more active than most groups and provide links to fantastic 2D and 3D models every now and then.
This might seem rather slow to the more active game developers, but if given the right time and patience, this forum can indeed provide you with some gems.
This Netherlands, based game asset website, has for some time now created some of the best RPG-themed character art and game sprite.
So, if you’re looking to create your own role-playing adventure, then this website is going to come incredibly handy in providing you with all the elements for your project.
They have some really cool free assets which have been made part of the public domain, and you are not going to have any problems with their licensing and crediting if you wish to use them for commercial purposes.
The site search bar and filter tools are also very easy to use, and you can browse through all the free game graphics sections by just selecting the category and then filtering out the themes and genres that you’re looking for.
Moreover, Kenny.nl also makes sound FX as well as game sources to help more beginner developers along to getting their first project up and running.
The site is very beautifully designed and is often frequented by indie game developers who are trying to achieve a wider customer and earn some money on the side by selling their games to the wider public.
Conclusion
Picking the perfect website that has the exact images that you are looking for in your game is not all that easy to achieve. But we hope that out of the seven that we have listed today, at least one out of them was able to provide you with what you wanted.
The mobile app Procreate is a creative application that has become a popular choice among digital artists.
This is not just a drawing tool but will help to bring your tablet to life. The designs that were previously possible to be created only on the graphics monitor or the desktop computer can be made now on your iPad.
There are some stunning third-party brush sets that you can download for Procreate which have been made by different creators. The brushes are designed in a unique way so they can emulate various media, such as pencils, inks, and paints. Few of the brush sets can be downloaded for free, while you have to purchase the brush packs which are of high quality.
The wide range of available brushes makes it possible for you to create projects with different styles, strokes, textures, and forms. This guide will cover all the types of brushes which you need for sketching, drawing, lettering, painting, and more.
Without further ado, let’s look into the list of the 80 best Procreate sets of brushes!
This comes in a set of 42 brushes and is suitable if you don’t like a mess while working (who does?). And you prefer the look of pastel and charcoal.
These paid brushes provide a dirty look to the pastel or charcoal which have been applied lightly. You can also find different textures of chalk. Moreover, these custom brushes give a shine to the heavily used pastels that give full coverage.
Irrespective of your drawing style the brushes are perfect for use in illustration and concept art.
If you want to have the same effect as watercolor techniques (Salting, drops, washes, sponging, and wet on wet) used in real-life, then get this set of 50 brushes.
You can select different brushes to help you adjust the amount of water that is preferred in the brush. It will help you to control the texture of the brushes.
The final texture can be further played with to adjust the level of opacity. There are a few brushes that can also emulate the look of watercolor on different kinds of paper, this is a paid brush set.
If you’re looking to try out different kinds of brushes for Procreate, then you should get this megapack of 450+ brushes.
Will be a good investment if you love the look of traditional art mediums, and you want to try digital drawing. These brushes tend to closely imitate the look of physical art mediums like pastel, oil, graphite, paint, and ink.
With some practice, you have the chance to find the Apple Pencil to be a more comfortable option than the traditional mediums. They also tend to work in the same fashion.
When you purchase this megapack, it also includes updates to the collection and brushes of artists. This gives you the privilege to work with top-quality and up-to-date brushes.
You can get this natural fiber brush to give an appearance of paint to your canvas. If you prefer the look of acrylic painting or oil, then get this brush to look at your work on Procreate.
This brush is free of cost, and you can also get it by making a small donation.
Get this set of 10 Procreate brushes if you’re looking to create some stunning, painterly illustrations with different kinds of textures, from busy and scratchy to well-blended and smooth.
These brushes can appear like graphite and gouache as you can use it in different textures and sizes.
Get this set of 8 highly textured brushes for your digital painting to help you create some scratchy, fun, and gritty layers.
These eight brushes come in different textures; some appear like splatter spray paint while some appear like chalk. The set is suitable for illustration work or concept art when you want to create a texture of stone or concrete, or if you’re looking for softer shapes.
If you have recently shifted from Photoshop to Procreate, then this set is perfect for you. The brushes available in this pack are similar to the ones in Photoshop so you can easily get adjusted to using them.
You’ll get a few cool scatter brushes to give a unique detail to your artwork, as well as line brushes and primary markers with various textures. The artist also provides you with guidance on how the different brushes can be used.
Here you’ll get a set of 20 brushes for pencil drawing and inking, which makes it perfect for any artwork. This is a well-built set, as the different brushes can also be blended easily.
You can use them for your complete drawings, for the base sketches, or to add small details to your entire piece.
This set of 16 brushes has quite a competitive edge to them. It gives you the look of charcoal that is perfectly blended, which is challenging to get without getting your work smudged in real life.
If you like to blend your work, then you’ll love this set!
Custom-designed for sketching, the brushes that are given in this set can be compared to just any number of pencils that are available in the standard drawing pack.
The set also comes with brushes for adding an excess amount of pressure to create deep values and for cross-hatching with the Apple pencil.
These brushes can help you improve your shading skills and to save time.
This mega pack of 68 gouache brushes has all that will be required by you to add perfect textures and details to your illustrations.
It allows you to select your level of opacity to create an acrylic look, dried gouache, or watercolor-like appearance. You can choose to create an entire illustration with just these brushes, or you can mix them with other mediums.
This natural media brushes come in a set of 15, which gives your work a traditional, artistic appearance that you’ll generally find in acrylic or oil paintings.
Besides, you’ll also get five smudge brushes for lifelike blending and for adding textures. These brushes can be used for creating broad strokes that will give your work full coverage. You can also add fine details to provide an edge of realism in your work.
This set will be perfect for pastel artists and painters who are switching to Procreate.
The brushes give a unique look of an oil painting, that is completed with a characteristic of chunky blending and canvas texture that you’ll usually get with a palette knife or a paintbrush.
You also have the option to blend smoothly if that’s what you prefer. The pack contains different brushes which are similar to the traditional oil painting brushes and the ones used for different canvas textures.
Learning to draw portraits accurately will require a reasonable amount of time, especially when you’re shifting from the traditional medium to digital art. But this set of 20 brushes will make your work a lot easier.
By using these brushes, you can create the textures for the eyelashes, freckles, hair, and skin quite seamlessly. It also includes a few custom brushes for blocking and blending colors in your portraits.
Airbrushing your illustration work will give it a smooth, soft, and smoky effect. You can try this set of custom-style brushes for creating a classical airbrushed look.
You can use just this set of brushes to create a texture for your drawings, or you can mix it with other brushes.
This massive pack of 130 brushes has been specially designed for inking purposes. Whether you’re a novice in illustration or a cartoonist and seasoned illustrator, you’ll get all that is required for blocking in and inking of color.
When you get this pack, you can try exploring the brushes one at a time to understand the different line qualities and textures of them. Getting just this pack will be sufficient for your inking requirements.
Out of all the premium packs, this is the most affordable one. It is perfect for charcoal, pastel, or chalk-style drawings. The textures of these brushes are fantastic as they add a lot of life to your pieces.
From the set of 15 brushes, you can choose to recreate any texture that you can see in real-life chalk pastels.
If you’re a fan of Manga, then you’ll love this pack, as it will help you create the dynamic-looking pages of Manga right from scratch.
All of the brushes in this pack have been tailor-made for coloring, texturing, drawing, and inking traditional Manga. You’ll be getting brushes that mimic watercolor, graphite, and charcoal perfectly along with brushes that give a unique texture for foliage.
If you’re a painter looking to get the same texture, layering effects, and brush strokes in Procreate, then this pack will be perfect for you. Just like oil paint, these 25 brushes also help you push and mix different colors on your canvas.
You can choose to use dry brushes for a dusty and lighter texture, or chunky strokes with brushes loaded with paint. This pack can be used for your complete painting, and it also comes with a pastel painting brush for creating the base sketches. By using this pack in your artwork, it gives your piece the appearance of traditional mediums.
This pack of 52 brushes will help you add any texture that you want in your work with a spark of life that adds an extra dimension. The different textures available can be used for fur, wood, smoke, particles, denim, stone, cross-hatching, various dry brushes, and other surfaces which you can use in different manners.
It will be a perfect package if you want to add just texture without having to draw everything by hand or for giving a touch of roughness to your piece.
The 50 pieces of markers in this pack will make you feel like you’re working with natural material. There are different textures and marker ‘tips’ like a classic fine tip, chisel, or brush pen that you can experiment with within this pack.
You can select the brushes that give perfect color coverage or the drier and inky markers, which are best for texture. There is a tutorial that comes with this pack along with a user guide of 17 pages on Procreate; highlighting the benefits for you to get this brush pack!
These 15 brushes have been made with a unique design for illustration work. It captures the mid-century aesthetics of American illustration.
The brushes can be used to give your work a retro and vintage finish. They are perfect for comics, logos, ads, and children’s book illustrations, while the possibilities have no limit. The entire appearance of your art can change by using just a few of these brushes. So, do give it a try!
If you love the radiance and opacity of the alcohol markers, then we’re sure you’ll love this set of 28 markers for your digital work.
To help you get the authentic marker to look as it comes with a free tutorial. As you follow the tutorial and practice along, you’ll get better at using them for cartooning, illustrations, and whatever you want to create.
Using markers might not always give you a smooth finish, but this set allows you to try out different levels of coverage and texture, which is an added benefit.
These markers give your work a very realistic outlook, which makes it challenging to understand whether it's made from Copic markers or not.
Do you want to recreate the look of any vintage superhero?
Then you should give this set of 15 brushes a try! This pack comes with many brushes that have different dot patterns usually found in old comic books and a pair of inking brushes.
You can play with bright colors if you want a punchy and classic appearance of a comic strip, or for a dark look, you can choose black, white, and gray tones. You can create an entire piece of work by just using these colors or, if you want different styles, then try mixing them with other brushes.
This is an unusual set; it comes with ten stamp brushes and six roller brushes. If you want to give your piece a crisp monotype appearance, or grungy texture then getting this is a good option for you.
Once you learn how to use them, you will be able to understand the range of variety available in these brushes. There are a few roller brushes that apply more ink, while some apply less, depending on the look you want to create.
Using the stamp brushes makes the work appear like it has been made by applying ink with a monotyping technique, block, or sponge.
When you use a fine-tipped pen, and you opt for a dense texture, then cross-hatching by hand can consume a lot of your time.
By using these 15 brushes, you can make cross-hatching appear pretty straightforward. These brushes will help you to create scratchy shadows using different line qualities, textures, and styles for cross-hatching in your drawings.
If you want to make drawings using a mixed media style within a few seconds, then you’ll enjoy using this set of brushes.
This massive kit has 150 brushes, out of which 137 of them are stamp brushes. It will help you to quickly add whatever you want like different branches, paint splatters, branches, dashes, dots, swirls, scribbles, leaves, cross-hatching, and several others.
This pack has been designed for comic book drawings, so it comes with a unique brush setting. Even though Procreate has several great brushes, it can get difficult to figure out the right settings for your work.
If you like drawing cartoons or comics, you should get this artist’s set up to help you seamlessly draw, ink, and color. This will be a high starting point to work classically, while you can change the settings later in Procreate.
This digital pack emulates the traditional drawing set, and it includes brushes for graphic pencils and traditional charcoal in Procreate.
Using these brushes will help you avoid smudging, while you get the look of different types of charcoal and pencils for a realistic appearance. These brushes will be perfect if you want to create traditional-style charcoal and graphite drawings or add some real deep shades to your work.
Getting this pack will help you to master different qualities and textures of charcoal, which might be tedious while using traditional charcoal.
Learning to draw hair can be time-consuming and difficult; even the artist who has mastered the art will tell you the same. But using these brushes can help you save time and make the process more straightforward.
This pack gives you the option to draw different types of hairstyles, while there are also brushes to help you add highlights or tendrils and make the drawing appear real. If you want curls, then there are brushes for that too! Getting this pack will fulfill your needs for hair rendering as you draw an animal, a wig, or a human.
This pack of 16 brushes will help you to make your portraits and to capture the different skin tones.
For creating smooth-looking skin, you can use high-quality brushes while for setting up a portrait opt for the essential brush. The pack also includes some special brushes to help you render the eyes and hair quickly.
Mastering the art of making portraits can get a little tricky, and making the eyes can get a bit difficult.
Getting this pack will help you to render the eyes more easily and quickly. The different innovative stamp brushes will help you layer the iris within a few seconds. Eventually, you can explore the other brushes to add a spark of life to the eye by adding veins and eyeshadow.
Learning to draw fur can be as tricky as drawing hair, but having good brushes will simplify the process. If you’re into drawing furry fantasy creatures or animals, then you should give this pack a try.
This pack of 8 brushes is a stunning combination for drawing fur with a mix of lifelike fur and cartoony fur. It comes along with options for choosing a brush to create coarse fur, porous fur, thick fur, matted fur, messy fur, and brushes which help you add strands of hair to make the coat appear polished.
This set of unique brushes focuses on creating pixelated drawings with the right geometry. The 20 brushes in this pack pair up with the shape tool in Procreate to help you draw perfect pixelated squares, triangles, and circles.
The set also has pixel brushes with variations in opacity level, shading and blending brushes, and brushes for dirt, bricks, dots, and more. Overall, this helps you add a slight texture to your pixelated drawings.
This single piece of light effect brush helps you to add an instant glow to your artwork. The possibilities of the way this brush can be used are endless, even though it might appear dull.
This brush will help you add a bioluminescence effect to different environments and fantasy characters, and it also creates dramatic lighting in your work.
This is a small marker set with just three brushes which come in three variants. They have different ‘tips’ such as translucent flat tip, opaque flat tip, and round tip for creating layers that give the marker effect. It also helps you to create different types of line quality.
As you get comfortable using this set, you can then get the larger packs of marker brushes, and mix them to create some fantastic pieces of art.
Just like the Prismacolors, which are high-quality color pencils, this set of 11 brushes also provides you with different textures similar to the traditional medium.
Try these versatile brushes in your Procreate art to add some new and colorful lines.
If you’re a fan of the Tombow brush, then you’ll enjoy using this set. These brushes were created to work and look just like the Tombow brush pen. It is perfect for doodling and lettering, as they feel very flowy and smooth while it is being used.
When you have this set in your toolbox, then your linework and doodling will turn out to be great.
If you’re looking to create a piece of art with some fun messiness, then get this pack of 20 brushes which will help you get paint splatter marks with a realistic appearance.
These brushes come in a variety of splatter densities, opacity, and sizes. Few of them tend to look like a spray bottle has been used to apply watered-down paint, while some of them are compressed and opaque speckles.
Some of the brushes help to create a look as though you have applied paint using a dry brush and some appear like huge, loose droplets.
Use these brushes to create a sense of movement in your illustrations.
This set of 17 ink brushes will help you create some fun textures with different levels of splatter. You can draw backgrounds by using a few of the ink wash brushes and create fine lines with the pair of ink drawing brushes.
These brushes help you to make perfect ink artwork as you can also use them to add a messy or drippy quality to your illustrations, drawings, and paintings.
It is a set of 11 tailor-made pastel, pencil, marker, and ink brushes. It will help you create some fantastic calligraphy or other artworks that you want to make; stylistic scrawling or print lettering for logos, comics, and anything else which you can make digitally.
The brushes are sensitive to tilt, and they are super flowy so that you can manipulate the lines quickly. It can also be used for sketching, doodling, or drawing.
If you’re new to using Procreate, then this might not be the most feasible option for you as the price is slightly on the heavier side.
By using this brush pack, you can get any paint texture or brush stroke. This pack has several brushes for smudging, dry brushing paint, applying solid colors, and literally everything that you will require to work as a master in Procreate.
You can also use them in your illustration to create a fuzzy and soft look.
This set of 18 brushes is tilt and pressure-sensitive, so you can use them as a real brush to help you get the same design just like the ones in real life.
The brushes come in different shapes and are generally used for oil painting. You can also have a variety of textures by selecting smooth, dry, or wet paints.
When you use these brushes, the canvas also tends to shine to look at a realistic painting. It is an excellent option for digital painters shifting from an oil background.
Blending and smudging comprise a large part of creating beautiful artwork, irrespective of whether you’re using traditional mediums or Procreate.
This comes in a set of 18 brushes which is perfect for smudging, blending, and creating pieces with smudgy textures. Using these brushes can alter the mood of the entire piece by changing the look of the color gradients.
You can get this fantastic pack of art markers, water brushes, and ink; it will be of great use to illustrators. You can use them for your illustration work or for designing different characters and creatures.
These marker brushes emulate different ink saturation levels and marker tips. The other brushes mimic textures like dry water brush effects, salting with watercolor, and sponging.
You will also get a variety of fine pens which can be used for any sketching or drawing that you would want to do digitally.
This pack has ten custom-designed shadings, and stippling brushes can be used to add shadows and grainy textures to your work. This list includes brushes that have different densities and grain qualities which can be used for every design.
You can try these brushes to add a faraway, distressed, or faded look to your different illustrations. You can also use them to add stars to your night sky.
This massive bundle comes with brushes for graphite, paint, marker, ink, pencil, and every material that you can think is included. You get the option of several painting brushes and around 50 colors to select from the set.
As you download this, you’ll also get different texture brushes to choose from according to your preference, which will help you to apply paint using various thicknesses and styles.
There are plenty of opportunities waiting for you as you get this bundle.
If you get this free set of 3 simple brushes, then you will probably feel like using this set every time you’re creating art on Procreate.
This pack comes with a dense grain pencil, a grain pencil, and a Copic marker. It is a fantastic mix to help you unleash your creative power. This basic set is a good option for you when you're a beginner, or you are looking towards branching out from the default settings Procreate.
This set of 48 media brushes will give your work a watery finish, by making it appear like there is a splash of water and give it a watercolor effect. These features go beyond the tools that are available on Procreate.
It is a free pack, but donating will help you to fund the brush projects in the future.
This brush kit by Milo Garret is ideal for helping you create neon signs which appear like it has been handwritten in real life. Using these brushes will help to give your work a stunning glowing appearance. In this set, you’ll get around 12 brushes for neon writing, along with a brush to create effects and three light pen brushes to add life to your artwork.
The list doesn’t end there as you get a bonus of 19 ready-to-use background images.
The collection by Studio Burg is a fantastic package, as it offers a selection of brushes that will help you with your basic graphic design and illustration requirements.
To help you select your desired signature, this pack also comes with a pencil, pen, and paintbrushes.
This texturific bundle by Lisa Bardot has 14 pastels, 14 liners, and 30 shaders. The different textures in these brushes will help you create different art styles and effects without needing to use a traditional pen and paper.
All of the 58 brushes in this set are made with different varieties of high-resolution, texture sources, and they are also pressure sensitive.
This set is perfect if you’re into comic illustration. When you get this pack, it will be an ideal addition to your collection of creating illustrations on Procreate; it includes the SFX additions and inking brushes from the ’50s. Mark has created this set to pay tribute to Will Elder the reputed comic book illustrator of American origin.
This collection of brushes has been inspired by the old faithful of the artist Ian Bernard. Once you get this set, you’ll feel like using them every time you start lettering. The brushes have varying textures which give your work a textured or a solid finish depending on the look you want to create.
The vegetation brush set by Matthew Baldwin will help you to instantly set the scene right and create a painterly effect, which will make your job as a concept artist much more comfortable. Baldwin has ensured that these brushes can help you to get any type and style of stroke, which usually concept artists try to master all the time.
There are a plethora of free brushes for Procreate which is available on the website of designer Missy Meyer. The brushes are perfect for helping you create a graphic script. This dearest dotty set has a unique retro vibe which gives a touch of versatility to your lettering work.
This pack created by Summit Avenue has 12 confetti brushes along with 24 glitter and foil textures, which helps to give a touch of sparkle to your designs. Using this set will help you design different wedding invites and event flyers.
The Nitty Gritty Set of texture brushes by Jammie Bartlett is going to be a brilliant selection to help you add an aging effect instantly and give a fine gritty texture to your pieces.
This MilksKS brush set will help you to create the look of the black and white classic engraving. Using this pack of brushes, you will be able to add a delicate touch to your design project or illustration. You can combine a few of the brushes to create a cross-hatching effect with a vintage look while you pick a clean-cut style.
By using this set, you can create different designs of hand lettering, the form and style appear perfect, and you wouldn’t require any further illustrations. This bistro marker by Leftyscript is going to be an amazing freebie pen that will help you capture different type-faces of hand-written styles.
This set has three essential freebie brushes such as the round-edge calligraphy brush, the rough-edge calligraphy brush, and the original calligraphy brush. The brushes from this set will help you to get down to the basics and will help you to create some simple and beautiful designs.
This Procreate brush kit by Nicole Mauloni, who is a reputed calligraphy artist, has over 100 brushes. Getting this set will you to decorate your digital calligraphy works as you can also create different design stamps with various shapes, flourishes and motifs.
The brush pack by Studio FabianFischer has four brushes for Procreate which are feline-named textured for hand lettering. All of the brushes are pressure-sensitive and will help to give your work a realistic edge.
This brush set by Guerilla Craft will help you create different chalked masterpieces on your digital iPad. This pack will help you avoid dusty hands, and you can select from the different varieties of chalk such as round chalk, loose chalk, wet chalk, flat chalk, smudge chalk, and more.
70. Rad & Happy
Tara, who is the founder of Rad & Happy, has made these brushes for making different lettering designs, and you can download them for free.
71. Thin Ink
The ‘ Thin Ink’ brushes by Sasha Hickson are famous for making modern and quirky designs. They can easily emulate the thin and thick strokes and help you add feminine flourishes quickly to your designs.
If you’re looking for bold brushes which will help your lettering to pop off and stand out then get this pack. This set by Sarahtype comes with a super smooth brush which will help to create a sense of contrast between the thin and thick strokes in your work.
73. Dry Marker
If you love the effortless look of a dry marker, then you’ll enjoy using this Ben Ralec’s collection of 15 varieties of marker pens that you can select from. This set also has an original calligraphy brush that will help you in creating your calligraphy designs.
This extensive brush set produced by calligraphy artist Jake Rainis, who is Boston-based has researched different sets that are available on the market to create this collection.
Nikolai Lockertsen is a highly reputed Procreate digital artist, who has made his favorite set of 5 brushes available for you to download. There are some unique designs that you can create using this set of brushes.
This set of 14 custom lettering brushes by Ryan Hamrick will help you to create some high-end, lettering work like a professional on your iPad. The collection has been entirely curated by Hamrick, and these brushes have several uses.
This brush is similar to the quill of the 18th century and its quite sensitive to pressure, which makes it an excellent option for calligraphy. You can also this brush for making your grey and black line drawings.
This is a small package of ink brushes by Dizzy Tara which has board marking brushes and different ink-shaped pens. You can use this pack of inky brushes for your sketching.
80. Whiskers
This brush by Inky Hand is a fantastic tiny brush, which is a perfect choice for helping you create scratchy effects and unique hand designs. This brush will be suitable to create rough sketches and to add a slight touch of originality to your artwork.
You can find this brush pack here.
Price: Free
Conclusion
Each of these brushes can help you create some amazing artwork on paid your tablet. Don’t overlook any of these precious tools, as you try finding the right brushes which will help to make your overall work become simpler. You might need to go through them again, to get your hands on the perfect set.
If you're wondering how long your artificial Christmas tree will last, there are several factors to consider. The quality, storage conditions, and usage can all affect its lifespan. While some Christmas trees can last for decades with proper care, others may only last a few years.
The Christmas and holiday season is upon us, and for many, that means decking the halls with a Christmas tree. While there's nothing quite like the smell of fresh pine needles, artificial trees are preferred for cost savings and convenience.
However, one question that often comes up is how long these fake trees can last. Discover the factors that can impact the lifespan of an artificial Christmas tree and make it last for years of festivities.
Factors that Make or Break the Lifespan of Your Artificial Christmas Tree
Let's talk about everyone's favorite holiday decoration - the Christmas tree! Specifically, the artificial ones that we all love to put up year after year. But how long do they actually last, you ask? Well, that depends on a few factors, so let's understand.
First off, the quality of materials used to make the fake tree can have a big impact on its lifespan. So if you opt for a cheaper fake tree made from lower-quality materials, you may not get as many years of use out of it as you would with a more expensive, higher-quality fake tree. It's all about finding that sweet spot between cost and quality.
Another important factor is how frequently you use the tree and how you store it when it's not in use. If you're putting it up and taking it down every year, it's going to endure more wear and tear than if you leave it up all year round. And if you're not storing it properly - say, just throwing it in a damp basement or attic - that can also impact its lifespan. So be sure to take good care of your tree when it's not in use!
Finally, environmental factors like humidity and temperature can also play a role in how long your artificial tree lasts. If you live in a hot, humid climate, for example, your fake tree may not fare as well as it would in a cooler, drier environment. But don't worry too much about this one - as long as you're not subjecting your fake tree to extreme conditions, it should be just fine.
Average Lifespan of Artificial Christmas Trees
Artificial Christmas trees can last for many years, with the American Christmas Tree Association stating that they can typically last up to ten years or more. However, this lifespan can depend on several factors, including the quality of the tree, how well it's maintained, and how often it's used.
Proper maintenance is crucial in extending the lifespan of an artificial tree. It's important to store the tree in a dry place, preferably in a specialized storage bag or box, to prevent moisture and damage from pests. Avoiding overloading the tree with heavy decorations or ornaments can also prevent damage to the branches, leading to a longer lifespan.
In addition, the frequency of use can impact the lifespan of an artificial tree. Using the tree excessively, such as leaving it up for extended periods or exposing it to harsh weather conditions, can lead to wear and tear and shorten its lifespan.
Another factor that can impact the lifespan of a fake Christmas tree is the number of branch tips or "needles" it has. A fresh tree with a higher number of branch tips will generally look fuller and more realistic, but it may also be more prone to damage if it's not properly maintained. The weight of ornaments and decorations can weigh down the branches, causing them to break or bend over time.
Some artificial trees come pre-lit with incandescent bulbs, while others may require separate strings of lights. A pre-lit tree may be more convenient to set up and use, but the lights can also be a factor in the tree's lifespan. If the lights are not replaceable or repairable, the tree may need to be discarded once the lights burn out, reducing its overall lifespan.
Real Christmas Trees Or Artificial Christmas Trees
A real Christmas tree has a much shorter lifespan than an artificial one, typically lasting only a few weeks before it begins to shed needles and dry out. Additionally, real Christmas trees require regular watering and can be a fire hazard if they're not properly cared for.
When deciding whether to purchase a real or artificial tree, it's important to consider cost, environmental factors, and your personal preference.
Artificial Christmas trees can be a more eco-friendly option if they're used for several years, reducing the demand for real trees and supporting the local economy. But when it comes to environmental factors, the choice between real Christmas trees and artificial trees is not always clear-cut.
A real Christmas tree can be sourced from Christmas tree farms or harvested from the wild. These real trees are typically grown in these Christmas tree farms several years before they are harvested. While real Christmas trees are biodegradable and can be recycled or repurposed after use, they do require resources such as water and transportation to grow and distribute.
Artificial Christmas trees, while reusable, are often made from non-biodegradable materials and may have been produced and shipped from overseas, contributing to carbon emissions.
Ultimately, the right choice of real or artificial will depend on your individual needs and priorities. By carefully considering the important factors and maintaining your live Christmas tree well, you can enjoy a beautiful and festive holiday season with the perfect tree for your home.
Is It Time to Bid Farewell to Your Artificial Christmas Tree?
Your Christmas tree has been a part of your holiday memories for years. But how do you know when it's time to retire your artificial tree and get a new one? Here are some tips to help you decide if it's time to say goodbye to your trusty holiday décor and shop for a new one.
Signs That Your Artificial Tree Is Past its Prime
A lot of branches are missing, and it's starting to look sparse
The tree is discolored, faded, or has an odd smell
The needles are falling off, or the branches are drooping
The tree is lopsided and can't stand up straight
The lights or other decorations won't stay on or work
Why You Should Replace Your Damaged Tree
Damaged or degraded Christmas trees can pose a serious fire hazard, and they can also be a breeding ground for mold and mildew, which can be dangerous to your health. Additionally, older artificial trees may contain harmful chemicals or lead.
Artificial trees are a type of plastic, and as such, they can take hundreds of years to decompose in landfills. This means that when you throw away your old tree, it will be sitting in a landfill for a long time, releasing harmful chemicals into the environment. By disposing of your old artificial tree responsibly, you're not only protecting your family's health and safety, but you're also doing your part to protect the environment.
Ultimately, the decision of whether to replace your artificial tree is a personal one, based on your own preferences and budget. However, if your tree is showing signs of wear and tear or is more than six years old, it's probably time to start shopping for a new one. By choosing a high-quality tree and taking good care of it, you can enjoy many years of holiday cheer and create lasting memories with your family.
Maintaining Your Artificial Christmas Tree to Maximize Lifespan
When it comes to maintaining your artificial tree, there are a few tips you can follow to maximize its lifespan. Whether you're a fan of fake trees or prefer the real evergreen, proper storage and maintenance can help ensure your tree stays in good condition for years to come.
Storage and Maintenance
First and foremost, it's important to store your tree properly. Many artificial trees come with their own storage bag or box, which can be useful for keeping the tree free from dust and moisture. If your tree doesn't come with a storage solution, you can purchase a storage bag or box separately. Make sure to disassemble the tree and pack it away neatly to avoid any damage.
When it's time to set up your tree for the Christmas and holiday season, take care when unpacking and assembling it. Be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions carefully to avoid any mishaps or damage to the tree. It's also a good idea to check the tree for any wear and tear before setting it up, as this can help you address any potential issues before they become more serious.
Getting the Most Out of Your Artificial Christmas Tree
Once your Christmas tree is set up and decorated, there are a few things you can do to get the most out of it. For example, you can try using fewer lights or decorations to help reduce wear and tear on the tree. This can help extend its lifespan and keep it looking fresh and vibrant year after year.
With a little bit of fluffing, preserving, and decorating, you can transform your Christmas tree into a picture-perfect centerpiece that will impress all of your guests.
Fluffing - Your Tree's Ticket to Fullness
Fluffing is done not to let your tree look like it's been squished in a box for the past year, and it's an essential part of decorating a beautiful and full-looking Christmas tree. And if you've just unboxed your tree, you'll definitely want to make sure that every branch is fluffed and styled to perfection.
Start at the bottom of the tree and work your way up to ensure that every branch is fluffed
Don't forget to fluff the inner branches, as they can add depth and dimension to the tree
Consider using a steamer to gently soften and fluff the branches
Use a mirror to check for any gaps or bare spots that need attention
Use wire to shape and position branches as needed
Preserving - Making Your Tree Last Through the Season
There's nothing worse than a droopy, dried-out Christmas tree before the season is even over. Luckily, there are plenty of tips and tricks for keeping your tree healthy:
Keep your tree away from direct sunlight and heat sources, such as fireplaces and heaters
Use LED lights instead of incandescent lights to reduce the amount of heat generated
Clean your tree with a soft-bristled brush or cloth to remove dust and debris
Use a light mist to help remove any remaining dust and give the tree a fresh appearance
Consider using a tree deodorizer to keep your tree smelling fresh and clean
Avoid using harsh cleaning chemicals as they can damage the material and color
Decorating - Adding the Final Touches to Your Christmas Tree
Decorating your Christmas tree gives it the personality and character that reflects your style and taste. Here are some tips to help you add the final touches to your tree without compromising its shape and structure:
Choose lightweight decorations that won't weigh down the branches
Consider using ribbon or tinsel instead of heavy garlands
Hang smaller decorations towards the tips of the branches to create depth and dimension
Avoid overloading any one area of the tree to prevent it from looking unbalanced
Use battery-operated lights to reduce heat and prolong the life of your tree
Add a tree topper that is lightweight and easy to secure to the tree
Your Christmas tree deserves some love, and with a little bit of fluffing, preserving, and decorating, you can turn it into a picture-perfect showstopper that will make all of your neighbors jealous. With these tips, your Christmas tree will be the belle of the ball and last many holiday seasons with ease.
Can an artificial Christmas tree be repaired or refurbished to extend its lifespan?
Yes, an artificial tree can be repaired or refurbished to extend its lifespan. Depending on the type of damage, you can replace individual branches or parts, add Christmas lights or decorations, or even spray paint the tree to give it a fresh look.
How do you properly store an artificial tree to ensure its longevity?
To properly store an artificial Christmas tree, disassemble it carefully and place it in a storage bag or container designed for the purpose. Keep the tree in a cool, dry place and avoid storing it in areas with high humidity or extreme temperatures. Proper storage will help prevent damage to the tree and ensure its longevity.
Are there any maintenance tips for reusing a single Christmas tree over the years?
Yes, there are several maintenance tips for reusing a single artificial Christmas tree over the years. These include dusting the tree regularly, fluffing and shaping the branches, and using a tree storage bag or container when not in use. Additionally, it's important to inspect the tree each year before use and replace any damaged or missing parts.
Are there any environmental benefits to using artificial trees instead of real Christmas trees?
There are some environmental benefits to using an artificial Christmas tree instead of a real Christians tree. Since artificial trees can be reused for many years, they can reduce the demand for real trees and help conserve natural resources. However, it's important to consider the environmental impact of the manufacturing and disposal of artificial trees.
What are some common materials used to make artificial Christmas trees, and how do they impact their lifespan?
The artificial Christmas tree industry uses materials like PVC, PE, and metal to make Christmas trees. PVC is the most common material used for the needles, while metal is used for the frame and branches.
Are there any special considerations for pre-lit Christmas trees in terms of longevity?
Yes, there are some special considerations for pre-lit trees in terms of longevity. It's important to inspect the Christmas lights each year before use and replace any burned-out bulbs or damaged wiring.
Final Thoughts
Now you know that your artificial Christmas tree can last for many years if you take good care of it. With a little TLC and a touch of creativity, your tree can be the star of your holiday celebrations for seasons to come. Who knows, maybe your tree will become a family heirloom, passed down from generation to generation.
So go ahead, give your tree a hug, and tell it how much you appreciate its everlasting beauty. A little glitter and a few quirky ornaments can make even the oldest tree sparkle like new. Remember, a well-preserved tree is a happy tree, and a happy tree is a happy you!
Artificial Christmas trees accumulate dust from being on display or after being kept in storage. Whenever you notice that the artificial tree is too dusty for hanging decorations, it would be best to clean it with a vacuum or clean cloth.
Using an artificial Christmas tree for the holidays is advantageous, considering such trees are reusable. This isn’t possible with a real tree, which you must dispose safely.
But be cautious as you inspect attached lights on a pre-lit tree and make sure to wipe individual branches, stems, and the foot with a drip-dry, soft cloth or a fiber duster. Also, begin cleaning at the top of the tree using a vacuum furniture brush having a bristle or crevice adapter.
What You'll Require
Equipment/Tools
A sizable fiberglass washbasin, bathtub, or tub
Nozzle for a sprayer on a garden hose
Shop-vac
Portable hair dryer
A hose adapter
Old sheet or a blanket
Large plastic container for trash
Spray bottle
Dishwashing liquid or a mild cleanser
Microfiber cloth
A static-charged brush
Salt
Preparation On How To Clean An Artificial Christmas Tree
1. Take The Tree Out Of The Package
Firmly put the base together after taking the tree out of the package. As you clean each component, stretch out the limbs to be attached to the tree. You should also spread a sheet across the floor around the tree to capture any falling debris.
2. On The Branch, Try Out Your Hoover
Test a spot at the very root of the tree using a furniture bristle brush attachment. Your vacuum should quickly remove the dirt on the limbs without damaging the tree.
3. Start Vacuuming
Use a vacuum brush to carefully suck dust off the tree's branches and trunk as you work your way down, starting at the top. But avoid cleaning artificial Christmas trees with the hose.
4. Wash With Warm Water
Avoid harsh substances that could harm your tree, and fill a container with warm water and gentle dish soap. To prevent the cloth from getting tangled in the limbs, safely clean the tree with a delicate dish or dust rag. Moreover, if your tree has lights integrated into it, make sure to unplug them.
5. Clean The Stem And The Branches
In soapy water, dunk your cloth and thoroughly wring it out before working your way up the tree, carefully cleaning it with the rag. To stop wet dust from getting stuck on other areas of the tree, frequently wipe your rag.
6. Get The Space Around The Tree Clean
To remove any dust that might have landed on the floor, vacuum the area close to the tree.
7. Remove The Grime
The edges of your dust sheet should be folded toward the middle. This will create a bag to help you carry the sheet without letting the dirt leak. Then dump the contents of the sheet in the trash by taking it outside.
8. Decorate Your Tree
Put your ornaments and textile on the tree but before connecting the light bulb, check the tree to be sure all the limbs are dry after cleaning.
Cleaning Methods For Artificial Christmas Trees
1. Utilize A Cleaner
Different types of dusters exist on the market, such as conventional comfortable cotton cloths, microfiber cloths, puffy dusters with handles, and more.
Whichever you choose will depend on factors, such as the dimension of the plant. A small, delicate tree may benefit from a soft cloth that is easy to control, while a larger tree may benefit from an extended duster on a pole.
Starting from the top and working your way down is a good cleaning strategy. However, it's important to note that when you clean higher up, some of the dust may settle on lower surfaces that you've already cleaned. To avoid this, it's recommended to use a duster that is appropriate for the job, so take into account the size of the area to be cleaned and the amount of dust present.
Additionally, it's important to clean the outer area of various surfaces as well, especially if they are frequently exposed to dust and dirt. This could include windows, doors, and outdoor furniture.
2. Utilize A Brush
Use a standard paintbrush or an anti-static cleaning brush. Commence at the highest point and go down, cleaning as you would with a duster.
For example, you could use a four-inch paint brush for bigger leaves, like those on a cheddar plant, while an artist's brush is ideal for reaching small spaces.
3. Clean The Artificial Tree With A Handheld Vacuum
You can quickly vacuum the dirty particles off your plant if your hand vacuum has a fabric option and a soft brush attachment. Avoid damaging the tree by using the wrong attachment instrument or choosing high suction power.
Although you might feel uneasy using an upright vacuum on the leaves of a plant, using it on the central stem or trunk could have excellent results.
4. Use A Hair Dryer
This can work, but remember that all you do is remove the grit stuck on the tree. To prevent plant dust from penetrating the carpet deeply, you may even have to vacuum afterward.
Plus, if you have hardwood surfaces, dust or mop them after cleaning the plant. And focus briefly on only a single region of the tree with the hairdryer in a relaxed setting.
Using bursts of compressed air would be an alternative and helpful on smaller, more delicate plants. Your keyboard cleaner, which comes in a can with an adjustable straw should work, in such instances.
5. Apply A Wet Towel
Again, you can disinfect a fake plant with a damp towel by beginning at the top and moving down leaf by leaf. Before cleaning, make sure the cloth is colorfast and dry it with a previous tea cloth or paper towel.
Even if you don't use a damp cloth to clean the entire tree, it can help to clean specific areas that require extra care. After that, you can take advantage of a leaf blower to clean the rest of the tree.
6. Remove Any Grime Or Residue From The Tree
Excess water can harm fabrics, leading to color fading and shape loss in leaves or petals. Take extreme caution when using freshwater to rinse a fake plant even if it is waterproof.
It would be best to give the tree several light showers or one heavy burst of water. Carefully wrap the pot to keep the water out before you use the faucet to clean the tree in a refreshing, gentle setting.
Immersing the tree in a container, basin, or bathtub is not recommended because there's no assurance your fake plant will make it through the wash cycle. Some plants, perhaps succulents or those made of material comparable to it, might be able to withstand it but silk won't, becoming stained or destroyed.
7. Cleaning And Upkeep
Make sure to position your tree away from excessive moisture or direct sunlight, keeping it in a dry and cool area. To avoid dust buildup, give the tree a light dusting at least once weekly while on display. You may utilize a dry, clean towel or a duster made of dense fibers but exercise caution as you maneuver around the lights.
Can I clean my artificial Christmas tree with water?
Yes, you can clean your artificial Christmas tree with water but make sure to remove all the lights and ornaments from the branches.
How do I remove dust from my artificial Christmas tree?
Utilize a vacuum, which involves cleaning each area separately and is best used when your artificial tree is exceptionally dusty. Please move your vacuum cleaner nozzle over each limb, using the lowest setting, and vacuum from the inside towards the outside.
How do I clean sticky or greasy spots on my artificial Christmas tree?
Spray a small amount of soapy water on a specific section of the artificial tree. Wait for 30 seconds and then use a clean white cloth to wipe the area. If any color comes off, avoid using water to clean the tree and instead opt for dry cleaning. But when there’s no fading, you can use soapy water on the stained area to clean it.
Can I use cleaning products on my artificial Christmas tree?
Yes, you can use cleaning products on an artificial Christmas tree.
How do I store my artificial Christmas tree after cleaning?
Put your artificial tree within its storage container or a box after cleaning. Wrapping your tree in white, clean paper before storing it in the basement is an additional step you can take to keep it clean.
Tip
Start by dusting all the branches and needles using a feather duster or a soft-bristled brush. Use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to remove any dirt, dust, or debris accumulated on the tree. Mix a mild cleaning solution of water and dish soap in a spray bottle for a deeper clean, and lightly mist the tree. Allow the tree to air dry completely before storing it for the following year.
Conclusion
It's important to take your time and ask for help if needed when putting up an artificial Christmas tree. Rather than using real trees, it's best to clean the area before setting up the artificial tree. And often a quick vacuum is all that's needed before storing the tree after the holiday season.
If you're looking for an affordable and convenient storage option for your fake Christmas tree, consider using large cardboard cylinders commonly available in concrete forms. To store the tree, attach a rope to the tree's base and carefully insert it into the tube. Finally, secure the edges with tape and plastic bags to keep them safe.
Properly storing an artificial Christmas tree can extend its lifespan by several years, allowing it to last several holiday seasons. Based on tree orientation, size, and decoration options, artificial Christmas trees can be stored in upright storage bags, tree bags, plastic wraps or boxes.
If you ask me, artificial Christmas trees are low-maintenance counterparts to real ones, bringing many benefits over a real tree.
Despite the relatively higher upfront price, you will recoup your investment in the artificial tree over time by storing it properly. As such, in the long run, artificial trees end up being more cost-effective than real ones, making them preferable overall.
So, I’ve created this guide for you to extend the artificial tree’s life for as long as possible. Feel free to follow along these steps!
Why Store A Christmas Tree?
In the modern age, where our fast-paced professional lives take up most of our time, convenience is paramount. After all, maintaining a Christmas tree until the next holiday season isn’t always possible, which is where artificial trees come in.
One of the most significant benefits of keeping an artificial Christmas tree is that it can be stored away neatly in a corner of your house. You can keep it in your closet, where the artificial tree will remain in tip-top shapeuntil the holiday season arrives again.
With regular trees, this simply isn’t possible, as they would perish very quickly. Moreover, regular trees take up a lot of space, something that is completely avoided by artificial trees.
Another primary benefit of artificial trees is that they can be used year after year without requiring maintenance. With them, you don’t need to brush leaf blades off the ground, trim them to keep in good shape, or keep them as a permanent fixture at your home.
Many people like me are also allergic to Christmas trees, which is caused by the mold that grows on the tree. Artificial trees have no chance of aggravating allergies, making them great for those suffering from seasonal allergies.
Year after year, your artificial tree will look as good as new, provided that you’ve stored it properly. In fact, if you do so, a good artificial Christmas tree can last up to a decade, which saves money in the long run and is convenient as well.
Cleaning The Tree For Storage
Most people need a new artificial Christmas tree after a couple of years, which can be quite costly if purchased frequently enough. The main reason for this is that the tree is not cleaned before storage to ensure it endures the remainder of the year.
So, at the end of the holiday season, you can start by taking all the decorations down and cleaning the artificial Christmas treethoroughly. Additionally, you may want to make sure that you have a storage spot for all the lights, ornaments, garlands, wreaths, and other decorative pieces. They can take up a significant amount of space, too.
Using some warm water mixed with a small amount of dish soap, wipe the stained areas of the tree down. You can use a spray bottle and a brush or soft cloth for this as well.
Once you’ve cleaned the tree, allow it to dry completely before storing it. Lingering moisture can damage the tree in storage, after all, drastically reducing its lifespan.
Tip
Before you begin cleaning the artificial Christmas tree thoroughly, consider using a brush or vacuum on low settings to dust it off properly. And to make sure that the tree can handle the vacuuming power, you may test it on the small tree sections at its base.
Options To Store Artificial Christmas Tree
For the tree to remain in pristine condition, you’ll need to store it in a cool, dry place. The tree needs to be kept safe from the sun, as prolonged exposure to solar heat can discolor or even melt it. And as mentioned earlier, the tree needs to be kept away from moisture.
So, attics and garages make for poor storage spaces for artificial trees. The attic can become quite hot during the summer due to solar exposure, while garages may accumulate moisture during the rainy season. That leaves out the closet, which may very well be the best storage space for artificial trees.
But the storage space alone won’t keep your tree safe and in a displayable condition. For this, you’ll need a proper means of long-term storage.
Some of the storage options are as follows:
1. Upright Storage Bags
If you have the space for it, then an upright storage bag may be the best option for you. While more expensive than some of the other options, a good-quality upright bag simplifies the storage process.
When you need to have your tree stored upright, simply slide the bag over it from the top and zip it up. And to unpack it, simply undo the zip, and the tree will be ready to be decorated.
Upright Christmas tree storage bags are especially helpful if your artificial tree is delicate or requires a specific kind of care. The tree remains motionless and untouched by external elements, and it can be transported easily in its stand.
2. Christmas Tree Bags
Christmas tree storage bags are some of the most popular options for storing artificial trees as they can easily store them in a compact package. Typically in a box-like shape, these tree bags are easy to carry thanks to the included handles and wheels.
The primary objective of these polyester or canvas tree bags is to keep the tree safe from external elements like humidity, heat, and pests. And the Christmas tree storage bags successfully achieve this, allowing you to take apart the tree for storage and reassemble it when Christmas rolls around.
Artificial trees slide into these bags horizontally once disassembled. They remain free of musty smell and any visible damage after storing them and leaving them undisturbed for the rest of the year.
The only real hassle with Christmas tree storage bags is having to assemble or disassemble them during on- and off-season. This is something that upright bags circumvent completely, making these just slightly less effective.
On the other hand, Christmas tree storage bags are also more affordable than upright bags and take up less space. So, choosing between the two depends on what you need from the bag.
3. Plastic Wrap
You can simply use plastic wrap to store the tree. Plastic is moisture-resistant and durable by nature, making it suitable for larger trees particularly. And for this, you must make sure to compress all the branches carefully without putting any strain on them.
Like upright bags, plastic-wrapped trees don’t require the tree to be taken apart to store away. Once wrapped, simply tie a cord or a ribbon around the branches to secure them properly, and your tree is ready to be stored away.
A flaw that plastic wrap does share with upright bags is the storage space it needs, as it does very little to compress the tree. So, if you have the space for it, plastic wrap may very well be a cost-effective and hassle-free way of storing your Christmas tree.
Tip
Plastic wrap is particularly useful for flocked trees, which can lose their visual appeal if clumps of artificial snowfall off from external activity.
4. Boxes
Consider cardboard boxes to be the last resort when storing your Christmas tree.
They offer neither good protection from external elements like heat, pests, or moisture nor do they take up less space than solutions like tree bags. For everything that they are capable of doing, an alternative method can do better.
Moreover, a cardboard box may crush the lights, cause the flocking to fall off, or leave the trunk pole peeking out from a hole. Due to the way, cardboard boxes are constructed, they are simply not very effective at their job.
On the flip side, hard boxes are better at storing trees than cardboard. They lack all the flaws mentioned above while being sturdy and reliable enough to be used for storage.
You may consider hard plastic boxes to be a sibling to the Christmas tree storage bags mentioned earlier. These make storage quite simple and make for one of the best options to store your artificial Christmas tree. And with features like sealable lids and wheels, you won’t find any trouble during transport either.
Storage Tips
Here are a few small tidbits that you should be mindful of when storing your artificial Christmas tree. These are simple storage solutions that don’t usually require extensive planning, allowing you to adapt as you proceed to store the tree.
Keep the tree safely in a dry area, away from sunlight or moisture
Label the Christmas tree storage bag or box when storing it away in your closet
Remember to store the ornaments in a safe place, preferably close to the tree
Consider using a dedicated box for Christmas tree decorations
If you move frequently, consider using a rolling tree stand for upright tree bags
Use some sodium bicarbonate in the Christmas tree storage bag to prevent foul smells
When should I take down my artificial Christmas tree?
The answer to this question depends entirely on you. Some say that it’s bad luck to take down a Christmas tree before January 6th, while others do it as soon as the New Year arrives.
From a practical standpoint, you may want to take it down sometime in January to preserve the good looks of your artificial Christmas tree. The festivities slow down during the month, which can be a good time to wind down the celebrations.
How do I disassemble my artificial Christmas tree?
Most artificial trees share a disassembly process. Once you have taken off all the decorations and cleaned the faux tree, take apart each branch and pack them up separately. You must take care to keep them in a duffel bag so that you don’t lose them anytime soon.
After this, you can disassemble its trunk and begin storing it in a tree bag or box. This can depend on the model as well, so be sure to refer to the instructions manual for any model-specific quirks.
Can I store my artificial Christmas tree outside?
Storing your artificial tree in a shed or outdoors is a bad idea as exposure to sun can quickly discolor or damage it. The best place to store your tree is in a basement closet or a dedicated storage room.
How long can I store my artificial Christmas tree?
When stored properly, artificial Christmas trees can last up to 10 years. This longevity is what gives faux trees a leg up on real trees, giving you plenty of value for the extra upfront cash you spend.
Conclusion
Christmas trees represent delight in the Christmas and holiday season, and by preserving them, you will be carrying the holiday spirit forward each year. Needless to say, it’s important to keep them safe so that they last for several holiday seasons ahead.
There are plenty of considerations surrounding the storage of an artificial Christmas tree, but the storage process itself remains fairly simple across the board. Whether you need to take the tree apart or not depends entirely on the type of storage used and the space you have.
At the end of the day, choosing a storage option is a matter of what you need out of it. If you need the tree to be ready for display, you can go for an upright bag. Otherwise, a tree bag or box will serve you equally as well.
To shape an artificial Christmas tree, you’ll need to gather the equipment and prepare the workplace first. Then, start shaping the main and side branches, spread the branches from the center and move outward and bend them accordingly. Trim any odd branches, check the lights and decorations, and you will be done.
A lot of people nowadays use artificial trees over real Christmas trees, thanks to their convenience.
However, after unboxing an artificial tree, you might have noticed that its leaves and overall shape look a bit flattened. This is usually done for packaging convenience, and it means that you will need to shape the tree to make it look natural.
But if you don’t know how to shape artificial Christmas trees, then no need to worry. In this guide, I have discussed how you can shape and fluff an artificial Christmas tree easily. So, dive in!
The Basics Of Shaping An Artificial Christmas Tree
Let’s be honest - it is near impossible to imagine a Christmas without the proper Christmas décor. And the lovely Christmas tree is the most recognizable décor for the holiday season.
Unfortunately, growing a natural Christmas tree is a hectic task. There are a lot of things that you need to consider, such as soil quality, climate, and so on. Besides, you cannot move a real tree that easily.
That is why artificial Christmas trees are so popular these days. Not only do they look similar to real Christmas trees, but they can also be moved around easily. On top of that, you can customize different aspects of the tree, such as its shape and size, for instance. In fact, you can even purchase a pre-lit tree that comes with different decorations already attached to it.
However, before you can put your tree on display for everyone to see, you will need to shape it up. After all, it is a fake tree, and unlike a natural tree, it won’t get a natural shape unless you fluff it manually.
Luckily, fluffing an artificial tree is not a very difficult task, and once you complete it, it becomes almost indistinguishable from the real thing. On that note, if you are a bit creative, you can turn the shaping process into a fun holiday activity for everyone to enjoy before the actual festivities begin!
Things You’ll Need For Shaping An Artificial Christmas Tree
Before you get started, it is important to gather the necessary equipment and supplies beforehand. That way, you can complete the process without any hassles or interruptions. Below is a list of all the things you will need for this task.
Gloves
Scissors
Brushes
A hair dryer or a steamer
Dustpans
A step-stool or a ladder
As you can see, you don’t need a lot of expensive equipment and supplies to accomplish this task. In that context, if you are using a pre-lit tree, you might want to get some extra equipment, such as a wiring kit, wires, and spare bulbs. Likewise, I would suggest that you wear a long-sleeved top to prevent your arms from getting scratched by the tree branches.
Steps For Shaping An Artificial Christmas Tree
Once you have gathered your gear, it is time to begin shaping the tree. For this purpose, you can follow the steps I have described below.
Step 1: Prepare The Working Area
First, you will need to prepare the working space so that you can get the job done neatly and efficiently. See to it that the space around the tree is clean and organized.
Get rid of any unwanted items, and make sure that you can easily sweep or vacuum the place after you are done. Believe me - this will make the clean-up a lot less problematic. Moreover, if you have any pets, such as cats, you will need to keep them away from the tree during this time.
Step 2: Start Shaping The Bottom Branches
In this step, you will need to shape the branches near the bottom section of your artificial tree and then gradually work your way up from there. This method will allow you to see what you are working on, and it will help cover every branch of the tree.
Step 3: Spread The Fronds And Tips Of Each Branch
As you move up the tree, you need to ensure that the tip and fronds of each branch have been properly spread out with a brush. Just give the branches a gentle shake, and then fan out the leafy portions. Then, move the tips to the sides of the top so that the branches resemble a peacock’s fanned tail.
Make sure to follow this process for all the remaining branches. If you have a tall tree, though, you should fan the branches out before attaching them to the central pole to make the process easier.
Step 4: Pull Out The Side Branches
Next, it is time to spread out the side branches present on the tree. These branches make the tree look fuller while simultaneously helping to cover up the central pole.
However, these side branches are not present on every branch of the tree. In order to shape them, you can shake them gently and fan out the leafy portions at different angles, just like you did before.
Step 5: Fluff From The Inside
Now that the basic fluffing is complete, you will need to start the next step, which is to fluff all the branches from the inside. This will help to spread the branches even more and make the foliage look natural.
Get your hands inside each branch, and ruffle them from the inside. Make sure to move outward slowly to spread the branches uniformly. You can even use a steamer or a hair dryer to spread out the branches. Same as before, you need to start from the lower section and steadily move toward the top.
Step 6: Shape The Top Of The Tree
After you are done with the lower branches, you can get on a step stool and shape the branches present near the top using a similar technique as above.
If you have a really tall tree of over seven feet in height, you can use a ladder instead of a step stool to reach the top potion. You should use a ladder that has a secure base or have someone hold the base of the ladder. If you are not careful here, you might fall and injure yourself.
Step 7: Bend The Branches
In this step, you will need to bend the branches to give your artificial tree a more authentic appearance. Typically, an artificial Christmas tree has all the branches swept at an upward angle. So, you can bend some of them at a different angle to make the tree look realistic. Besides, it can be useful to cover up the central pole and get rid of any shape imperfections.
Warning
Do not bend the branches too much during this step, or they may break and ruin your whole tree. Just bend them slightly so that they do not look out of place on the tree. Furthermore, make sure to vary the angle at which you bend each branch for the best results.
Step 8: Cut Off Any Odd Branches
Next, using the scissors, you need to cut off any branches that are too long or oddly placed. These branches will protrude from the tree in an awkward manner, which means that they shouldn’t be too difficult to identify. Likewise, you can trim the foliage of the other branches to maintain uniformity.
Step 9: Take A Break And Check Your Work
Here, you need to take a step back and evaluate the work that you have done so far. This is crucial since it helps you to assess the tree from different angles and identify any issues. In case you notice any problems, you can take care of them to ensure uniformity in the tree.
Step 10: Check The Lights And Accessories
If you have a pre-lit or pre-decorated Christmas tree, you will need to complete this step. Here, you have to ensure that all the lights and extra ornaments in the tree are working as expected. If you notice any defects, you can swap out the problematic component with a spare part.
Tips And Tricks For Shaping An Artificial Christmas Tree
Below, I have mentioned some handy tips and tricks for shaping and fluffing an artificial Christmas tree. If you follow them, you can complete the task quickly and with better results.
Consult the photo of your tree and its manual (if included) before shaping it
Try to involve your family and friends to make it more enjoyable
Make sure to purchase a tree that has easily adjustable branches
Use extra decorations to fill gaps and cover up the main stem
Always wear gloves on both hands when shaping the tree
How Long Does It Take To Shape An Artificial Christmas Tree?
On average, it will take around an hour to shape your artificial Christmas tree. But it may take you longer if you have a bigger tree. And if you take frequent breaks in between to inspect your work, it will naturally take you a long time to finish the job.
Similarly, if you have a pre-lit tree, it might take you a while to inspect all the bulbs. On that note, adding extra ornaments and decorations will take a fair amount of time as well.
How Do I Store An Artificial Christmas Tree After Shaping It?
Once the festivities are done, it is a good idea to store your artificial Christmas tree till the next Christmas. However, you do not need to stuff it back into the packaging. That will flatten the leaves, which means that you’ll have to shape the tree again the next time.
Instead, you can use a dedicated tree storage bag to store it. Such bags will protect the tree from dust and sun damage and retain its shape for a long time.
How Often Do I Need To Shape My Artificial Christmas Tree?
You need to shape your artificial tree only once before the Christmas festivities begin. And if you use your tree carefully, you won’t need to go through this process again for the rest of the season.
That said, if you have pets and children in your household, their shenanigans can cause the tree to become untidy and out of shape. Naturally, you will have to shape it again after a few days.
Conclusion
So, that is how you can shape your newly-bought artificial Christmas tree. Now that you know, the process seems quite straightforward, doesn’t it?
I mean, all you need to do is gather a few supplies and get started. After a preliminary shaping process, you can fluff it from the center to give it a natural feel.
Also, starting from the bottom will allow you to complete the process smoothly. Subsequently, trim any outlying branches, and check the lights and decorations, and your tree will be good to go!
In any case, now it is time for me to wrap it up. Enjoy your holidays, folks!
Clip Studio Paint, or Manga Studio as it was known earlier, remains a preferred tool of many Manga and Anime designers. If you haven’t used it yet, you should try it as soon as you can - simply because it’s one of the most useful tools out there and thanks to a wonderful community you can find the best manga studio & clip studio paint brushes free of charge.
This software has proved to be a wonderful companion to all digital artists who work on animations or integrate animated components into their work. The brush functionality is one of the most flexible ones amongst software you can get today.
While there are a number of paid brush sets available for use, many people have been kind enough to make their implementations available to the general public for free.
Today, we’ll get to know about 21 of the best free brushes you can get for Manga Studio online.
This brush set on DeviantArt by user martinacecilia is one of the best ones we could find for Manga Studio, which still works well with Clip Studio Paint. These clip studio paint brushes give you a wonderful feeling like you’re painting with oil colors, which is especially useful for people who are frequent digital painters.
This set of brushes gives you the classic Manga Studio feels - while this doesn’t offer you anything beyond the basic designs, it does that pretty well. It comes highly recommended from the designer community as well; simply because they’re easy to use and offer a wide variety of patterns and finishes.
Solid brushes, as well as some which emulate “hairy” brushes, are just some of the brushes this pack features. Even if you’re just beginning with digital art, you should give this set of brushes a try. You will be surprised how these brushes just “do” what you want them to do.
This set of brushes gives you a number of basic tools which you can use to design complex characters, environments, and objects. Hence, you should give this brush set a chance if you’re looking for something to either get started with or to fine-tune your brushes to get more control over the scene.
This brush set delivers on both varieties as well as offering a fair amount of control over the drawing. You get a number of brushes such as a Variable Rectangle, a Variable Sponge, and a Variable Ink Smudge - these are all pretty self-explanatory in their use. The Cel tool helps you to give your detailing chops regardless of the size of your brushes.
Also, if you want to go for a more paintbrush-like feel, the Digi Bristles tool on this brush set will do the job perfectly well. Further, there’s another tool that you may like - Ink Paint 8, which gives you a starry, speckled finish for those days when you just need to get a night scene done. Hence, these brushes work well for almost any scenario - give these a shot!
3. SerketStalker’s Assorted Brushes
If you’re someone who just wants one brush set to cover as much ground as possible, here’s your best shot. SerketStalker has uploaded this vast, comprehensive brush set which includes a few speed painting brushes which are useful in almost any scenario when deadlines approach or you have other things to attend to.
This brush set gives you small brushes, brushes shaped like crystals, a number of spray-like and dot-like brushes as well as certain complex patterns such as flowers. There are 18 of these brushes in particular, but the great thing here is that they’re all useful in their own right. For the average artist who works in multiple areas, these brushes cover a lot of ground.
One more point - you should usually have some idea about using Clip Studio Paint before you end up using this set. It can get a bit tricky and technical at times, and some prior experience with the default brush set is very helpful for gaining mastery of the brushes in this set.
These Gouache Brushes will be of immense use to the artists who are already used to painting with Gouache as a medium. Thus, these brushes are perfect who intend to transition from traditional to digital painting, as well as those who want to get started with a new set of brushes. The brushes have a fair bit of variety in width and work well with mice or styluses.
When someone is transitioning from traditional media to digital media, especially as an artist, the biggest complaint is that it doesn’t “feel” the same way - and this is generally a valid criticism. However, there’s no reason why you can’t get to work on digital media with brushes like this even if you don’t have too much experience working on screens.
There are 10 brushes in this pack, with the most possible finishes that gouache can give you whilst painting.
TheInkyWay gives you a number of brushes that can do calligraphy. Not only that, they can do them very well. Part of the overall experience of designing on Manga Studio/Clip Studio Paint is creating written art as well, which includes calligraphy. These clip studio paint brushes are one of the best ones we could find which do calligraphy in as varied a fashion as these do.
The brush gives you a wonderful way of interacting with the screen via text. Calligraphy is one of the cornerstones of manga and a lot of digital art, especially comics. The range of brushes in this set is astonishing - we’ve never seen as wide a collection of calligraphy brushes as this for free. However, it also has a number of other brushes as well for general drawing use.
Many of the brushes on this set can be anti-aliased in order to render it better. You can also use the pencil, the repeating pattern brushes, as well as use 1, 2, and 3-point perspective with this set.
Keeping in line with the Gouache brushes above, the same designer went ahead and published this free dry brush pack. It carries many of the same aspects of the Gouache brushes which we reviewed earlier, only it’s much closer to dry brushes rather than gouache painting. Dry brushes have a certain distinct finish to them which Gouache brushes or other brushes can’t give.
This set of brushes gives you a lot of mobility and flexibility in what you’re drawing. Dry brushes are a wonderful method for painting scenery right from scratch. This is generally avoided by digital artists since digital art is compiled from a number of sources and not necessarily drawn from scratch. Hence, these brushes make life easier.
However, they are kind of loose when compared to regular brushes you see for Clip Studio Paint which are used to draw a number of environments, objects, and characters. There’s a wide variety of natural-looking brushes on offer in this pack, some of which rival paid brush implementations as well!
Variety is the spice of life, and there is a lot of variety in this set of brushes. This set gives you all of the brushes you can think of, including cloud brushes, pencil based brushes, you can also choose between a variety of flat brushes. These are perfect for making artwork such as digital illustrations and are also useful while working on digital paintings.
These brushes are some of the best you can fit Clip Studio Paint with, simply because of how many brushes and settings you can change easily. You can change the opacity, the sizes, and the shapes on the fly, making sure you can get the finest of details just right based on your preferences.
There’s one caveat - these brushes are generally used only by experts since they require a fair amount of effort to get the hang of. Beginners are, however, requested to try this brush pack as well since it gives you a lot of brushes and it’s worth learning how to use them, even if the learning curve is somewhat high for beginners.
Custom brushes are a far cry away from the generic brush packs which can give you variety, but not specificity. These brushes come in a pack with cloud brushes, some nature brushes as well, and a bunch of custom shapes which you are unlikely to find in any other brush pack on the internet. These brushes are super high quality and give you a very easy experience.
Generally, one expects brushes found on the internet, that too for free, to be very difficult to use since Clip Studio Paint didn’t officially make these. There are a number of clip studio paint brushes in this set which are truly unique, including bubbles, thorns, flowers, candy patterns, stars of course as well as special designs which are repeated in patterns.
You also get a few chaotic patterns that you generally don’t get elsewhere. Also, you obtain a number of eccentric yet well-designed fish patterns. This kind of quirkiness is largely the domain of independent designers who make stuff for themselves and end up publishing it. While you may find better quality brushes that are paid for, you cannot get such uniqueness in design.
Some brushes find themselves being used very frequently, while others give you the option of being used only if you really want to use them on special occasions. This side pencil brush has just one job: to help you make the digital equivalent of a side pencil sketch. While it does only one function, it does the job very well.
There are few other brushes that can pull off the side pencil as well as this particular brush can. A few brush packs can come close to this brush, but don’t have an easy-going feel. This brush is highly recommended by digital artists and painters alike. This brush gets flattened with tilting, a wonderful feature you usually don’t see in brushes.
Hence, this brush makes a lot of sense if you’re into using pencils and pencil brushes.
These brushes are the only free set we could find which can handle digital inking just as well as the professional paid sets of brushes. Digital inking is a wonderful skill that you can learn - it’s helpful particularly when you are into digital illustrations or tattoo design. Tattoo design, when digitally done, can help you give a wonderful touch to your designs.
While digital inking does not nearly have the same feel as doing it on a piece of paper or better yet, on the skin, it does help you get an idea of what it really would look like. Furthermore, you get the feeling of an actual ink design. This particular set of brushes gives you a feeling as similar to actual inking as you can.
Hence, go for this set of brushes if you’re into inks, even though no set of brushes really comes close to actual inking on the Clip Studio Paint.
The Essential CSP set by hattersarts gives anyone who takes this brush set a huge advantage in terms of getting started with Clip Studio Paint. This set gives you textured or smooth sketch brushes, then the flat brush which is wonderful. Couple this with all the other brushes you get with this set, and you have a wonderful starter pack that will teach you a lot about CSP.
This CSP set gives you a wonderful kickstart when it comes to drawing as a beginner using Clip Studio Paint. The Essential CSP doesn’t give you a whole lot of brushes, but the ones which it does have will prime you with the basics well enough to give you a great start in digital artistry. However, it doesn’t mean that professionals can’t be helped by this brush set.
This brush set, courtesy of hattersarts, lets you explore Clip Studio Back inside and out, so you gain a whole lot of expertise with this brush set.
They say one-size-fits-all doesn’t exist - however, this one set will give you a whole lot of brushes that are usable at all stages of learning how to design. They also give you a number of varied brushes, including simple shaded brushes, rectangular brushes, circular brushes as well as the ubiquitous line brush.
This brush set will give you the best possible drawing experience you can possibly have on the Clip Studio Paint - and imagine, this is just the free sample of the actual brush set! You have enough variety to get started on almost any kind of design that you may have in mind, and especially beginners will have a field day with this set of brushes.
There are only a few brushes that pull off the fantasy-themed look well, however, this is one of the few free brush sets for Clip Studio Paint. This is one of those essential brushes which you absolutely have to have as a digital artist working in the fantasy domain. The fine spray, the marker, the soft texture, and the other brushes really make it invaluable for working with CSP.
This brush set doesn’t come with a lot of brushes but be assured that the quality of brushes that you get with this set is surely among the best you see on this list. Why’s that? Each and every one of the brushes in this set is crucial to drawing almost any character, object, or environment you can think of.
The brushes make it incredibly easy to conjure up the images that you have in your mind right onto the drawing area. Angular ink is another brush that makes life much easier if you’re switching over from traditional painting to digital media. Hence, you should definitely give these brushes a try, whether you’re a beginner or a professional.
When it comes to learning new software for animation, graphic designing, or even manga drawing, having the right set of brushes at your disposal is key to grasping the various facets of the platform.
And the DeviantArt user Yetten knows the very issues that artists face when mastering CSP.
Yetten has created its very own brush pack set to use for the CSP platform, which is one of the more user-friendly sets out there. This set is a very basic one and comes with a set of handy and easy-to-use brushes to make patterns such as markings as well as some foliage designs.
The pack might seem small at first, but it’s surprisingly versatile and every user can find something useful here that they can add to their art piece. This set will help you get a proper grasp of the platform along with its tools.
The second brush set from Yetten is a bit more catered to fit the needs of the more advanced CSP users. It’s a much more enhanced version of the previous pack and comes with additional features which adept CSP users will find helpful when working on their next art project.
The pack contains a lot of foliage brushes mixed in with a bit of spackle brush sets as well as brushes that are perfect for making certain designs like forests as well as custom tree tops.
On first thought, these improved and additional sets may not sound much or even as versatile, but you will be surprised by the various amount of patterns that you can get out of them.
They even have a lot of textures for each brush along with certain cloud brushes, making it one of the more popular packs out there.
This is a much older set and comes with 14 Manga Studio 5 brushes which are just perfect for making background themes and various outline patterns.
Though these brushes were primarily made for the previous versions of Clip Studio Paint, it works perfectly on the newest version as well, without any glitches or bugs.
Now, what makes these brushes perfect for setting a particular theme is that each of the 14 models represents a particular theme. They consist of simple cloud blending brushes, as well as patchy charcoal-style brushes along with glitchy pixel-y brushes, which are rarely ever found inside most free brush packs.
Some of the pixel brush designs borrow their design inspirations from Minecraft, making them quite versatile in their approach to what you can ultimately make out of these sets.
The custom brush pack set from Elisven is just amazing when it comes to creating some of the most unique color art pieces in CSP.
Elisven has designed the brushes to fit a variety of painting styles, hence, it comes with a handy pack of brushes that is versatile enough to fit into any project or theme.
The pack boasts a couple of concept brushes along with brushes that deal primarily with the texturing of the stroke and varies greatly in terms of quality and clarity.
There are a few organic brushes thrown into the mix as well, which are ideal for making a lot of landscape and nature-themed art pieces.
In total, there are 6 brushes in the set, which might seem rather small, but their versatility more than makes up for it. These brushes cater to the needs of professionals and amateurs equally well.
The Mama madzia custom set from MagdaProski is going to be one of our favorite custom CSP brush packs.
The brushes included in the pack are just top-tier and boast incredibly high-quality strokes which will help you to focus on painting and making intricate art pieces.
The DeviantArt user MagdaProski makes this free-to-download pack rather unique by including particular brushes like oil brushes, textured brushes, wet and dry stroke mixes as well as ‘hairy’ brushes.
The so-called ‘hairy’ brushes are amazing when it comes to making particular animal features such as fur and human hair and beard. None of the brushes are all that hard to grasp, so it can be easily used by both amateurs and adept CSP users.
The brushes also come with their very own tutorial, on the main DA page of the creator. So feel free to grab it and give it a try.
19. The Blue and Red Pencil brushes by SerketXXL
Using red and blue color pencils to mark sketches or even practice drawing, has become a very popular and traditional trend among artists.
SerketXXL now makes it possible to do the very same on the digital platform of CSP, along with helping you to add a bit more color to your art projects as well.
Now, just two pencil brushes included in the set might not seem like much at all, but what grants these brushes their fantastic versatility and a spot on our list is the various textures that both these brushes come with.
From looking like pencil sketches to thicker paint strokes, the textures on them are just amazing and you can get a lot of use out of them and make both simple and complex art pieces.
The DV brush set by Darkodev contains one of the highest amounts of brush styles on our list today. The whole pack comes with over 100 different styles, so you know that you will have the exact type of brushes that you’re looking for in this set.
It’s quite surprising to know that a free-to-download brush pack has so many different varieties and styles inside it. Darkodev includes a lot of stylistic models inside the pack, like weather brushes, custom textures, as well as many ‘basic’ brushes which most artists use almost daily.
So from amateur-friendly to more complex brushes, this pack has something to offer for every CSP user.
If you feel like doing some landscape painting or making animal fur, dinosaur scales, or even intricate meadow scenes, these brushes are bound to have you covered.
This is a very simple brush pack from the DA user DAUB. They are ideal for short, regular projects as these brushes are quite easy to use, without boasting many intricacies in their stroke texture or tool functions.
The pack has 20 brushes inside it that work perfectly well with both Manga Studio 5 and CSP and are fantastic for getting the newer user thoroughly oriented in either of the platforms.
Additionally, DAUB includes some extra textures into the pack, so that you can alter some of the stroke patterns of the brushes and ultimately change the final laydown to suit your theme and match the style that you’re looking for.
The various styles and textures include watercolors, oil paints, pencil sketches as well as ink.
It’s the perfect artist’s brush set, for those who are looking for some unique brush styles to add to their next art project.
Conclusion
This brings us to the end of the top 21 brushes you have available for free for the Clip Studio Paint or Manga Studio as known earlier. These brushes are all different in their own ways, but they all give you the same high-quality experience. Best of all is the fact that you get all of these from the community, free of charge.
Clip Studio Paint is a wonderful piece of software that you can use to create some absolutely stunning visuals and designs. These brushes represent only a small part of the totality of brushes you can find online - however, these are some of the best today. Have fun trying them out and inching closer to being a better digital artist!
Flocking a Christmas tree is a great way to add a snowy, wintery touch to your holiday decorations. Today, I'll take you through the process of flocking, so that you can create your own winter wonderland this holiday season.
Get ready to add some extra sparkle to your holiday décor with flocked Christmas trees! Flocking adds layers of artificial snow to your tree, creating a stunning white Christmas effect. Not only does flocking make your Christmas tree look like it's been freshly dusted with real snow, but it also provides a host of benefits.
You will discover just how easy it is to create a beautiful and unique centerpiece for your holiday festivities by flocking. So, let’s not wait and learn how to flock to a Christmas tree!
Finding the Perfect Flocking Material for Your Tree
Now that you're ready to give your Christmas tree a cozy and wintery look, it's time to choose the perfect flocking material!
You'll find a variety of flocking options available in the market, including spray bottle flocking, powder flocking, and even pre-flocked artificial Christmas trees. Each of these options has its own advantages and disadvantages, so it's essential to consider what factors will work best for you and your tree.
Choosing the right flocking material is an important step in creating the perfect white Christmas look for your Christmas tree. When considering the size and type of your tree, think about how much flocking material you will need to achieve the desired effect.
Larger trees will require more flocking material than mini trees, and certain types of pre-lit Christmas trees may hold the flocking material better than others.
In terms of personal preferences for the finished look, consider what type of snow-covered effect you want for your tree. Some flocking materials create a light dusting of snow, while others create a heavy, frosted look.
Additionally, some flocking materials come in different colors, allowing you to customize the look of your tree. You can even mix and match different types of flocking materials to create a unique look that will make your tree stand out.
Safety is also a crucial factor to consider, as some flocking materials may contain chemicals or other materials that can be harmful if ingested or inhaled. If you have young children or pets like cats in your home, it's especially important to choose a flocking material that is safe for them.
Preparing the Entire Tree for Flocking
Before knowing how to flock to a Christmas tree, there are a few important steps you'll need to take to ensure that the process goes smoothly and safely.
A. Cleaning And Prepping The Tree
The first step is to clean and prep your tree. Start by giving it a thorough shake to remove any loose needles and debris. Next, use a clean drop cloth or brush and gently wipe down each branch and remove any dirt or dust that may be clinging to the needles.
If you're using a farm-fresh tree from a Christmas tree cultivation farm, wash it with soap and allow it to sit in a basement for a few days before flocking it to avoid any potential issues with moisture. Flocking a tree that is still too moist can result in the flocking material clumping and not adhering properly to the branches.
B. Protecting the Area Where You'll Be Flocking
When flocking your tree, make sure to protect the area where you'll be working. Flocking materials can be messy and difficult to clean up, so you'll want to take steps to prevent any damage to your floors or furniture.
Lay down a drop cloth or plastic sheeting underneath your tree to catch any excess flocking material that falls off during the process. You may also want to consider placing the entire tree in a large cardboard box or plastic tub to contain the flocking material and make the drop cloth removal and cleanup easier.
Additionally, be mindful of nearby objects and furniture that could be damaged by the flocking material, and cover them with additional drop cloth or plastic sheeting as needed.
C. Choosing the Right Location
Once you have chosen the perfect flocking material for your tree, be sure to find the right location to do the flocking. Ideally, you'll want to work in a well-ventilated space with enough room to accommodate your tree and flocking materials.
If you’re planning to flock your tree indoors, make sure the space is protected from the flocking material. You can cover the floors and surrounding furniture with plastic sheeting or old newspapers to avoid any potential damage. It's also a good idea to wear old clothes that you don't mind getting dirty, as the flocking material can be quite messy.
D. Safety Considerations
When flocking your tree, it's vital to take the necessary safety precautions to protect yourself and others in your home. Wear gloves and a face mask to avoid inhaling or ingesting any of the flocking material.
It is important to wear goggles, gloves, and protective clothing to avoid any harm caused by the flocking material.
Make sure to read and follow the instructions on the flocking material carefully, and avoid using any materials that contain harmful chemicals. Additionally, make sure to work in a well-ventilated area to minimize the risk of inhaling any harmful particles.
Applying the Flocking Material: Let's Get Flocking!
Now that your tree is prepped and ready, it's time to add some snow! Applying the flocking material is the most exciting part of the process, but it requires some patience and attention to detail to achieve the perfect look.
A. Mixing and Applying the Flocking Material
Start by mixing your flocking material according to the manufacturer's instructions, make sure to sift it through a sieve to ensure that it's clump-free. Some materials may require mixing with water, while others are ready to use straight out of the container.
Once the flocking material is mixed, it's time to apply it to your tree. Sieving the snow powder before mixing it with adhesive and applying it using pressure-sensitive adhesive is crucial to ensure that the flocking is even and doesn't clump together.
One popular method is to use a flocking spray bottle to apply the flocking material in a fine mist, working in small sections and using a sweeping motion to distribute the material evenly. Alternatively, you can use a flocking gun or shaker to apply the material.
B. Techniques for Achieving the Desired Look
To achieve the perfect winter wonderland look, it's essential to pay attention to the details. Take the time to fluff out the branches and apply the flocking material evenly to create a natural-looking snow effect.
Experiment with different application techniques to achieve the desired level of coverage and texture. To flock a wreath or textile, follow the same do-it-yourself process used for Christmas trees, adjusting the amount of flocking material as needed. For a heavier snowfall effect, consider adding more flocking material or layering multiple coats.
C. Timing is Everything
You need to time your flocking process carefully to ensure that the flocking material has enough time to dry before you decorate your tree.
It is also essential to let the tree dry for at least 24 hours on a tarpaulin to prevent any damage to the surrounding area. But depending on the type of material and the amount applied, it can take a few more hours or even days for the flocking to dry completely.
Be patient and resist the urge to touch or move the tree while the flocking is drying, as this can cause the material to flake off.
D. Dealing with Mistakes and Touch-ups
Even with the best preparation and techniques, mistakes can happen when flocking your tree. If you notice any areas that need touch-ups or corrections, you can use a small paintbrush or spray bottle to add extra flocking material.
Take care not to overdo it, as adding too much flocking can make your tree look unnatural and clumpy. If you're unsure about how to make touch-ups, you can also refer to online tutorials or consult with a professional.
E. Cleaning Up, Disposal, and Maintenance
After the flocking is dry, carefully remove the drop cloths and dispose of any excess flocking material. Use a vacuum or broom to sweep up any remaining flocking material from the floor or surrounding area.
While flocking can help protect your tree from drying out, do continue caring for your tree throughout the holiday season. Keep your tree watered and avoid exposing it to sunlight or heat sources that might cause the flocking material to melt or fade.
Safety Considerations
As with any Do-it-Yourself project, safety is essential when flocking your tree. Wear gloves and a dust mask when handling the flocking material to avoid skin irritation or inhaling particles. Keep the flocking material away from open flames or heat sources, as some materials may be flammable.
Allowing the Flocked Tree to Dry
All right then! Once you're done applying the flocking material, it's time to let it dry properly. The amount of time it takes for the flocking to dry depends on the type of material you use and the humidity of your environment. Typically, it takes around 24-48 hours for the flocking to dry and set fully.
But hey, don't just leave your tree to dry without taking some precautions to ensure it dries properly. Here are some tips to help:
Make sure your tree is in a well-ventilated area. Proper ventilation will help the flocking dry faster and more evenly.
Keep your tree away from radiators, fireplaces, or other heat sources to avoid damaging your tree or starting a fire.
Avoid touching the flocking while it's still wet. Flocking can be delicate while it's drying, so be careful not to disturb it.
If you need to move the tree, try to do it as gently as possible to avoid damaging the flocking.
As with every step in this process, safety is always a top priority. Now, go ahead and let your tree dry completely before moving on to the next step. The wait will be worth it when you see your beautifully flocked Christmas tree!
Decorating Your Flocked Christmas Tree
Now that you've successfully flocked your Christmas tree, it's time to add the finishing touches! Decorating a flocked artificial Christmas tree can be a little different than decorating a traditional tree, so you need to keep a few things in mind.
When it comes to decorating your flocked tree, less is often more. The flocking material already adds a lot of texture and interest to the tree, so you don't want to overwhelm it with too many ornaments.
Consider using a mix of textures and finishes to add depth and dimension to the tree. Christmas tree lights, matte and shiny ornaments all look great on a flocked tree. You can also add some natural elements, such as pine cones or berries, to play up the winter wonderland theme.
When it comes to placing the ornaments, start with the larger ones first and work your way down to the smaller ones. This will help you balance the tree and ensure that the ornaments are evenly distributed.
With these tips and ideas, you're sure to have a stunning and unique flocked Christmas tree that will be the centerpiece of your holiday décor. So go ahead and let your creativity shine!
Maintenance and Storage
As the holiday season winds down, it will be time to start thinking about how to care for and store your flocked Christmas tree. But to ensure your flocked tree stays beautiful throughout the holiday season, it's essential to give it proper care.
Regularly misting the flocking material with water can help keep it from shedding or becoming too dry. It's also a good idea to keep an eye on any lights or ornaments that may be weighing down branches and causing them to sag.
Carefully remove all ornaments, lights, and any other decorations. Make sure the tree is completely dry before disassembling it, as mold can develop in a damp tree. Gently fold the branches and pack them away in a storage bag or box.
If your pre-lit tree has a stand, it's best to store it separately to avoid any damage to the flocking material.
Safety considerations are just as important during storage as they are during the flocking process. Always handle your flocked artificial Christmas tree with care, and avoid dragging it or bending branches too harshly. With these tips in mind, you can enjoy your flocked tree for many holiday seasons to come.
Can I flock to an artificial tree?
Yes, you can flock to an artificial Christmas tree. In fact, flocking a fake Christmas tree can make it look more like a real tree and add a touch of holiday magic to your décor.
What is the best way to apply flocking material to a Christmas tree?
The best way to apply flocking material to a tree is to use a flocking gun or flocking spray bottle. Apply the flocking material in thin, even layers, making sure to cover all parts of the tree.
How long does the flocking material take to dry?
The flocking material can take anywhere from several hours to a full day to dry completely. It's essential to allow enough time for the flocking material to dry before decorating your tree.
Can I use a hair dryer to speed up the drying process?
While a hair dryer may help speed up the drying process, it's not recommended. Using a hair dryer can cause the flocking material to clump and may result in an uneven finish.
How do I maintain the flocking on my tree?
To maintain the flocking on your tree, avoid touching it or brushing against it too much. To clean the tree, use a soft-bristled brush or duster and remove any dust or debris gently.
Can I flock to a Christmas tree that has already been decorated?
While it is possible to flock to a Christmas tree that has already been decorated, it may be challenging to achieve an even finish. That’s why it’s better to flock to your tree before decorating it.
How do I store a fake tree after the holidays?
When storing flocked trees after the holidays, wrap them in a plastic bag or cover them with a sheet to protect them from dust and debris. Store the flocked Christmas tree in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight or moisture.
Final Thoughts
Flocking a Christmas tree is a fun and easy DIY project that can give your holiday décor a touch of magic and whimsy. By following the steps outlined in this guide, you now know how to flock to a Christmas tree. I hope you can create a stunning snow-covered tree that will be the centerpiece of your festive celebrations.
Just remember to choose the right flocking material, prepare your flocked Christmas tree properly, and take the necessary safety precautions to ensure a successful and safe flocking process. And if you’re still unsure about how to flock a Christmas tree, I recommend going through the above process again.
I hope this guide has inspired you to try flocking your own Christmas tree this year! Share photos of your flocked Christmas trees and inspire others to create their own winter wonderlands at home. Happy flocking!
Learning how to draw poses is one of the key skills artists must possess, whether digital or traditional. Hence, knowing where to derive some inspiration becomes a fundamental task for any artist.
Traditionally, this inspiration has come from live figure sessions - but inspiration does not necessarily strike at the same moment as you might be at those sessions. Further, you may need to draw some figures which aren’t derivable from live figure sessions.
Hence, to take back control, it’s best to keep gesture poses in your hands by either keeping pose photos on your computer or using online resources in order to achieve the same.
Today, we walk you through the latter process of using online pose reference photo websites which give you access to the best quality material. We feature the 7 best resources you can find online today; let’s begin with the reviews!
Line of Action is one of the websites which gives you access to some of the highest-quality pose and figure content you can get. You get access to photos of animals, human figures, and faces are available as well. Their figure drawing tool is one of the best you can find out there.
The figure drawing tool gives you the option of having either semi-nude, fully nude, or fully clothed figure models as per your need. After this, you can decide the sex of the desired figure as well as the duration of the models - and you’re off to work!
Options similar to what you find on Quickposes are also useful for quick drawings, but also for longer studies. Now, while the duration can be set anywhere between 30 seconds to 5 minutes, as leading figures point out, short gestures and longer poses are both equally important and hence need to be practiced equally.
While there is no non-timed option on the poses, you can set the timer to 99999 seconds to have access to the pose for as long as it’s possible. The website is neatly partitioned into different areas for each subject, so you can focus on different kinds of subjects on your own time.
One of the best features is that you can see the work of other artists, so you can get some direction in case you ever get stuck while drawing while looking at poses.
Quickposes is one of the oldest and most wonderful pose-drawing websites you can find out there. It is less a helping website and more of a system that slowly helps you get better at drawing poses and figures. They have a timed web app where you can queue up your desired set of photos with a time slot of your choice, and get to drawing!
You can set timers for poses from 30 seconds to 90 seconds. You can also design sessions where you focus on some parts of poses which you feel you’re not as confident doing with custom time slots.
However, if you so choose, you can let the poses be decided by the website randomly just to see how well you can do with unfamiliar or unknown poses. For the reference images flashing, you can choose between:
The type of poses; the website has a huge variety of these
The gender of the model
Clothed/semi-nude/fully-nude
Portrait/landscape/90-degree rotation
One of the best things about this website is that you can see all the pose photos independently and download those photos whenever you want to practice by yourself, offline. Most websites don’t have downloadable images - this is one of the few which does. These are a few reasons why this website remains so popular to date.
Different from the other websites we have reviewed so far, this website is completely community-run. All of the images on the website are licensed under Creative Commons and hence are available for free! There are plenty of community-sourced gesture images you can use for free, and most of the images come from DeviantArt.
There are many different gestures you can choose from. However, what if you want to have timed and structured practice? The SenshiShock Sketch website gives you the opportunity to do exactly that - it’s a very well-structured website that gives you a number of options.
You can also use your mobile devices (devices such as the iPad Pro and Note 9, especially) to draw as well!
You will notice one major difference between the usual pose web apps and this one. While this gives you the timer like other apps, the photographs are curated by means of tags.
These tags give you photos that belong to different categories as per your intended types of figures to practice.
It’s very easy to get started, though the UI feels a little clunky and unintuitive at first - it gives you an easy way to practice, much easier in the long run than most other competing platforms. The best part is that their website is optimized for all platforms and makes for some great figure-drawing exercises.
Some community efforts take a very different approach towards helping out their own - and an example is this. This particular tool comes as a community project from the Reddit “SketchDaily” subreddit community. A few of these people decided that what they needed was an easy-to-use and intuitive online tool that could handle much of their design needs.
At reddit.com/r/SketchDaily, you’re forced to face the unknown as compared to most other apps which gives you a fine-tuned degree of control. This makes it perfect for those who are looking for something challenging.
The online tool, however, is much more flexible. You get to choose your intended poses from among human gesture poses, human body parts, or animal photos. You also decide how long each photo stays on the screen, like most other tools.
Unlike most other tools, this one is absolutely free, with a decently large repository of images with a variety of different poses and figures. You can also tune those settings on the go, should you get tired of your current setup while sketching.
You can leverage the fact that this is a community-built tool in a number of ways. First off, there’s the comprehensive software support - since this has been built by this community, it’s quite easy to find solutions to problems.
The small caveat this website has is that even though it comes from the community, the number of images and the variety of poses is lesser compared to many other sources we have listed today. Furthermore, some of the other sources have better curation of resources than this tool.
This tool makes a lot of sense for people who are just starting out and want to get a taste of what figure drawing feels like when you have digital references.
Proko is something of a deity in the figure-drawing arena. He has a wonderful sketching course that teaches you how to sketch like a professional which is available online. The real kicker here is the fact that you can access some of the most useful learning materials for free on the Proko Poses website.
The newsletter will give you a number of insights on how to be a better artist, hence it’s beneficial to subscribe to the newsletter regardless of the free images you get.
When you sign up for the Proko Poses newsletter, you instantly receive a set of high-quality images that you can use for figure drawing practice. If you want to see how to utilize these photos to the maximum possible extent, make sure to check out Proko’s free playlist on figure drawing.
The best part about these photos is definitely the resolution you get. You can easily get a very high-quality, high-definition set of figure-drawing images. There is one caveat, however - you get only a very limited number of images to work with. For more of the same kind of images, you should get the (paid) image packs.
One of his general packs features around 300-400 photos, but some of the recent packs are more comprehensive and feature over 1500 of the highest quality, most detailed pose photographs with some rarer parts of the body on them.
While this may seem like generic advice at first, Pinterest does have a large repository of figure drawing pose reference photographs. However, it’s not as easy as simply searching for photos on Pinterest with this tagline - there are more photos on Pinterest than one can count.
Further, the origins of these images are sometimes suspect as they may have been taken without the necessary permissions, but they’re available anyway. Hence, it makes sense for beginners to stick to more trustworthy and structured sources of images on websites that preferably have some features related to figure drawing.
At the same time, you should also know that the variety of images on Pinterest is immense. It’s clearly a much larger repository of images than any of the websites listed above. However, finding images is a very problematic and time-taking proposition on Pinterest. It’s like finding a needle in a haystack but is worth the trouble in quite a few cases.
For the professionals who’ve got their timing down, heading to Pinterest and using that as a figure drawing reference happens to be a pretty hard task to pull off.
However, there are some features unique to Pinterest that make it a credible alternative to other websites. First, you can create your own private boards for your specialized figure drawing references that cover either different techniques, objects, body parts, and much more.
Then, Pinterest has one of the largest selections you can think of. While creating your own board is very time-consuming, you can easily take a peek at how people have designed theirs. This way, you can easily create a board by taking some much-needed inspiration from people who’ve been using Pinterest for a long time.
What to look for in a figure drawing website
These seven websites are not the only ones that are available on the market today - even among those which offer a free tier or are free, these rule the roost. What connects all of them despite their apparent differences is the fact that you can easily get to work on them, and they’re highly customizable.
Going for websites that allow downloading is always a good bet, especially if you can get to the point where seeing sources that you aren’t familiar with is not a challenge anymore.
Another problem that plagues many websites is the user interface. If the websites do not offer a reasonably easy and fluid interface, it becomes hard to look at pictures you want to take inspiration from after a while.
Conclusion
Figure drawing is a skill that accumulates after much effort. It is the end product of countless hours of toil, getting stuck, redoing your sketches, taking a better look at the subject (if possible) - rinse and repeat. Hence it becomes essential to have good quality resources to practice figure drawing.
The ubiquity of the internet is immense. Being the behemoth it is, everything you need or want is available after a few clicks from the website of your choice. Figure drawing, once an arduous process with lots of waiting and luck involved, has become much easier than anyone would’ve imagined.
Hence, don’t waste time - pick a website and get to work! Have fun painting!
There are basically two dates for when you can take your Christmas tree down. According to Christian tradition, you can take the tree down on the twelfth day of Christmas, that is, 12 days after Christmas. On the other hand, the new and secular tradition is to take the tree down after New Year’s.
Every year Christmas decorations and Christmas trees are put up. And every year, the same question crosses our minds: when is it the right time to take a Christmas tree down?
Tradition dictates that the Christmas decorations and the tree should be taken down on the twelfth night of Christmas, that is, January 5 or January 6, also known as the Feast of Epiphany. However, many people also tend to take down the tree after New Year’s.
You definitely don’t want to run the risk of encountering the Ghost of Christmas Past, so read ahead to find out when you should take down your Christmas tree.
The 12 Days Of Christmas Tradition
Christian theology observes a period of 12 days after Christmas, known as the 12 days of Christmas. It is the period of time from the birth of Jesus Christ to the visit of the Magi, also known as the three wise men.
The Christian Tradition Of Taking Down The Tree By Epiphany (January 6)
Obviously, there can be no universal agreement on this tantalizing question. But there is a general opinion on when you can leave Christmas decorations and the tree up.
Most people tend to take down their Christmas tree and holiday decorations around January 5 or January 6. This is because that is the twelfth night of Christmas.
This is in accordance with the Christian tradition. January 6, or the Feast of Epiphany, marked the visit of the Magi, the three wise men, to baby Jesus in Bethlehem and the baptism of baby Jesus.
There is also some debate on the date marking the Feast of Epiphany. Some Western churches like the Roman Catholics, the Lutherans, and the Anglicans, observe the Feast of Epiphany on January 6. On the other hand, several Eastern Orthodox churches believe the Feast of Epiphany to fall on January 19 and Christmas Eve to fall on January 6.
The Church of England observed the twelfth night on January 5. However, some others celebrate the 6th of January as the twelfth night since they count the 12 days after Christmas day. This is why there is confusion on what is the correct date.
The Secular Tradition Of New Year’s Day
This secular tradition is lesser known than the 12 days of Christmas tradition. Many people believe that leaving the Christmas tree and Christmas decorations up for too long might bring bad luck. This is why they don’t want to start the new year celebration with the decorations of the previous year. You can also call this a superstitious tradition.
Factors To Consider When Deciding When To Take Your Christmas Tree Down
Personal preference
Ultimately, it all comes down to your personal preference. The date depends on the ease of keeping up the tree and the decorations. If the cheery brightness of the Christmas lights is hiking up your energy bills, it might be better for you to take down your Christmas decorations and tree as soon as possible.
Superstitions and beliefs
Superstitions and beliefs are a part of the package during the Christmas celebrations. Deciding when to take down your Christmas decorations and Christmas tree boils down to your superstitions and beliefs. For instance, many believe against carrying the decorations into the new year to avoid bad luck. So, you would fare better by taking down the tree and decorations on New Year’s Eve.
As for your beliefs, you can always follow the old Bethlehem tradition. If you believe in the story of the three wise men, you should follow the twelfth-night tradition. It will help reaffirm your beliefs and also keep you connected to your religion.
Practical considerations
No matter how beautiful your Christmas trees and decorations might be, you will have to take them down after a point. This is because they might sometimes act as a safety hazard. You might trip over the decorations, some kid might swallow the small decorations, start a fire, etc.
Tips For Disposing Of Your Tree
You can reuse the holiday décor, but you cannot reuse a real Christmas tree. So, here are some ecological ways you can dispose of your Christmas tree.
Recycling options
Some cities offer locations where you can drop off your Christmas trees after taking them down. Some of it might get ground up and then used as mulch on city lands. They are sometimes also just collected and dropped off at the nearest landfill. There, they can decompose and break down slowly over time. You can browse the Internet for recycling options near you.
Composting options
Any used Christmas tree can be used as compost to improve the fertility of the soil. Note that the technique for composting remains the same as for any other compost. This compost can then be used to fertilize crops or vegetable gardens.
Many cities set up these composting services to get compost in large quantities. Just look around on the Internet to find such a service near you.
Disposal options for artificial Christmas trees
Unlike a real Christmas tree, you can actually reuse an artificial Christmas tree. So, why dispose of it in the first place? Take the more eco-friendly way, and store it securely. Use some zip ties or fishing lines to tie the tree in place. Store it away safely in a tree bag to reuse it again next year in all its glory.
How long can I keep a Christmas tree up without it becoming a fire hazard?
Technically, a Christmas tree is always a fire hazard for your house. However, you can safely keep it up for about 4 weeks, provided you keep watering it during that time frame.
How can I make sure my Christmas tree stays fresh as long as possible?
Taking proper care of your tree is essential to make sure it lasts the entire holiday season.
Make a clean, straight cut across the bottom of the tree
Keep the tree in water
Keep the tree in a cool place
Opt for LED lights for less heat
What are some creative ways to repurpose a Christmas tree?
You can actually use your tree in many creative ways after the festive season is over.
Use the branches to make a wreath
Cut the trunk into small pieces and use it around your garden
Use the branches to make a bird feeder
Use it as compost
Use it as firewood
Replant it in your garden
How do I store the Christmas tree decorations?
Decorating your tree with ornaments, stockings, lights, etc., is part of the Christmas traditions. Here are some tips on how to store those decorations after you take the Christmas tree down:
Wrap the fragile items in bubble wrap for protection
Wrap the lights around cardboard to avoid entanglement
Put all in cardboard boxes and label them accordingly
What is epiphany?
Epiphany, also known as the Three Kings Day, marks the official end of the holiday season, dated January 6th every year. It signifies the ancient Christian feast day, celebrating the baptism of Jesus Christ and the arrival of the Magi. Celebrations take place across the world in the form of special services in accordance with the Christian calendar.
Conclusion
Thus, there is no right or wrong answer for when to take down your Christmas decorations and tree. It all comes down to your personal preferences and beliefs. If you follow Christian traditions, it is best to take your tree down on the twelfth day of Christmas. Or, you can just take it down before the new year begins to avoid any bad luck that may come your way.
Whenever you take down the tree, the important thing is to spend your Christmas in peace with your loved ones. So, whether it’s New Year’s Eve or the twelfth night, make sure to have a jolly good Christmas season before you take your tree down.
Storing icicle lights in a light box with compartments is the best way to ensure the lights are stored tangle-free for the next holiday season. Putting the wrapped lights in a Ziploc bag or bubble wrap will further keep them protected.
Icicle lights, a frugal alternative to the customary nubby Christmas string lights, are among the more tasteful iterations of holiday decorations.
Though modest, each bulb in icicle lighting lasts about 75,000 hours– that’s beyond 3,000 days! You can reuse them year after year by storing them properly, but because they are tangle-prone, many find storing icicle lights challenging.
Nevertheless, here are tangle-free tips and tricks for storing icicle Christmas lights. Keep reading, then!
Best Way To Store Icicle Lights For Christmas
These dangling, versatile icicle lights, when installed on a Christmas tree or other areas of the home, lend a wintery theme to the Christmas décor without overwhelming it. And because they last for a good number of years, storing them properly will allow you to use them in Christmas decorations without buying new ones.
1. Prepare The Lights For Storage
Icicle Christmas lights feature lengthy cords and are delicate in nature, which is why they get tangled very easily. Storing them in a tangled condition will render the lights useless, so detangling them is necessary.
To detangle the icicle Christmas lights, take a small segment of the tangled lights and unravel it slowly and carefully, twisting and turning the wire around a book, tabletop, or other flat surfaces.
While detangling, keep the tension on the strands and let the ends of the wire hang off the edge, so they don’t get tangled again. Also, keep an eye out for the bulbs to ensure they don’t crack or break in the process.
As soon as you’re done with one section, proceed to the other section and untangle the strands in the same manner. Be sure to straighten out the strands in the same direction; otherwise, the lights will tangle again. Occasionally, hold the light strings up to check if they are crooked or aligned in a straight line.
Then, remove debris and dirt by scrubbing them with soapy water using a toothbrush. After a while, rinse off the lights with water and wipe them dry with paper towels or clothing, which will make them as good as new.
Tip
Don’t forget to inspect each and every bulb by holding it up in the light to see if there is any physical damage. And test the functionality of the string lights by plugging them into an electrical outlet.
2. Choose The Right Storage Container
Store icicle lights in a plastic storage container after taking them off the Christmas tree. However, that isn’t the only way to store your Christmas lights and there are several other containers that can be used as storage bins for icicle lights.
In regards to icicle light storage, containers that come with spools are my go-to pick because they prevent the lights from getting entangled, no matter how long they are stored. Such containers are available online but be sure to go for high-quality boxes that come with a dozen set-and-store fasteners. That’s because such a storage bin prevents light strings from turning into perilous knots and keeps them tied up in neat loops.
Another viable option for storing Christmas lights is to use PVC piping. All you need to do is wrap the light strings around the pipe, secure them with an elastic band, cable tie or a zip tie, and that’s it.
Or perhaps, simply use the original box to store icicle lights, as it keeps them protected.
Tips For Selecting The Right Size And Material For The Container
Consider the space where you’ll store the lights
Choose a container that is large enough to hold the strings of Christmas lights
Go for boxes made of heavy-duty polyester, preferably 600D
Boxes with acid-free lining are a bonus
Make sure the walls are sturdy
An easy-access zipper and reinforced handles are a must-have
Choose a storage box that comes with an ID window
Labeling The Storage Container For Easy Identification
Labeling the Christmas light storage container is important if you don’t wish to spend countless hours searching for them the next holiday season. Writing directly on the plastic box, using masking tape and printable labels– I tried almost everything, but nothing worked.
So, here’s a new solution to labeling the storage box of the icicle lights: creating a name tag.
Only 3 things are needed to label the box which is used to store Christmas lights, and they are:
Binder clips
Badge holders
Zip ties
Here’s how to create a label for your Christmas light storage box:
Write “Christmas light” on a piece of paper
Using a utility knife, cut it to the size of the holder
Insert a zip tie and secure it properly
Squeeze the binder clip to take off its handles
Insert it inside the zip tie loop and reattach the handles
Clip the badge to the cover of the container
3. Coiling And Wrapping The Lights
Prior to storing, you’ll have to wrap the lights around a reel or a bobbin to make sure they do not get entangled in storage. Here’s how to coil and wrap the lights like an extension cord so that they remain tangle free.
Step 1
Place the light in the storage container. Take one end, and start wrapping it around the cardboard from the bottom up in a winding motion.
Step 2
Use your hand to create a neat and tidy circle and continue wrapping them like you’d coil long extension cords until you reach the other end.
Step 3
After the lights are wrapped around the storage box or tube, take a rubber band or two and tie it around the coiled lights to secure them.
4. Storing The Lights In A Safe Place
After wrapping and coiling, you’ll have to store the Christmas lights in a safe place so that they are in a usable condition next year.
The best areas to store your Christmas lights are away from sunlight in a cool, dry space, such as closets, attics, garages, or waterproof garden sheds. Whichever place you decide to store the light, make sure the roof isn’t prone to leaking; otherwise, water will damage the lights.
Prior to storing Christmas lights, wrap the lights in bubble wrap or add a few packets of desiccant within the box. Then shut the lid and store it wherever you intend to.
For extra protection against pests, dust, and moisture, wrap the lights in a tissue paper or paper towel. You can even use Ziploc bags to prevent mice from chewing the strings.
Tips For Maintaining Christmas Lights
Dispose of broken or damaged bulbs
Use wooden ladders instead of metal ones
Replace broken or burnt light bulbs
Use a light tester to check each incandescent light bulb
Hang them on a clothes hanger to prevent them from entangling.
How long can I store icicle lights?
With proper maintenance, you can store icicle lights for about 4 to 6 years. However, in the meantime, don’t forget to replace broken or damaged bulbs.
How do I know if my icicle lights are no longer safe to use?
It’s best to dispose of your icicle lights whenever the wires turn brittle or are exposed because then the bulbs become unsafe for use.
Can I store icicle lights outdoors, or should they always be stored indoors?
Icicle lights will be usable the next Christmas and holiday season only if you store them indoors away from the heat source. Exposure to the rays of the sun, water, or other elements can damage them, rendering them useless.
Conclusion
Like Christmas trees, icicle lights are integral to Christmas festivities.
From the fence and the front porch to the tree, icicle lights are versatile and make the festive season bright and merry. Once purchased, they can last for a long time– the only thing you have to do is store them properly to reap their benefits for years.
Cleaning dust, debris, and other impurities from the lights are essential. Thereafter, coil the lights around a cardboard or tube and put them in a box, and store it in a cool place.
Remember, excess heat and water can damage the lights, so take extra care when it comes to storing them. Hopefully, you learned a thing or two about storing icicle lights to celebrate a merry Christmas!
Your Christmas lights may malfunction due to several reasons, including loose connection, broken sockets or fuse, or burnt bulbs. These problems can be easily resolved by checking the connection and replacing the faulty parts, and you can prevent them from occurring again by following some precautions.
Finding out the exact issue with an electric light string can be incredibly frustrating and annoying, especially when you’re in the holiday spirit.
Burnt-out holiday lights are quite easy to fix if you know what exactly went wrong - yes, even the cheaper ones. They require minimal time and investment, and the simplest fix can help you avoid accidents this Christmas and holiday season.
So, here’s a step-by-step guide on repairing Christmas lights quickly and efficiently by identifying the right issue. Keep in mind that these steps will also help you fix your outdoor lights for Christmas.
How To Fix Christmas Lights: A Step-by-Step Guide
Tools and Materials Needed
Bulb or voltage tester
Replacement for faulty Christmas light bulb
Replacement Fuse (electrical)
Wire cutters
Diagonal pliers
Small, flat screwdriver
A bulb or voltage tester is a tool used to check if electricity is properly flowing through a socket, plug-in (computing), and even in incandescent light bulbs. If the voltage tester doesn’t respond, it denotes faulty electrical wiring, a broken socket, or a bad bulb. Wire cutters and pliers will be required to repair Christmas lights, especially for fixing the electrical connection or the circuit breaker box.
String lights aren’t the most durable holiday lights since various malfunctions can occur throughout the entire string. But our informational guide will help you identify the possible issues to fix your light strings quickly.
1. Check If The Power Source Has Electric Current
Among the various issues that can make LED string lights faulty, improper electrical current flow sits at the top of the list. If you have attached the light string to the electrical connector, and it's still not working, check if there’s power in the AC power plugs and sockets.
You can do this using voltage testers or a pen tester. Are you scared to try these tools? Simply plug in a functional light string to check if it's working.
If the string of Christmas lights isn’t working or the test light doesn’t respond, go to the breaker box to repair the shunt.
2. Check Your Christmas Light Fuses
The next thing you should check regarding your Christmas light is the possibility of a bad fuse. Most strings of lights have two tiny fuses on each light, which are usually present behind the small sliding door in the Christmas light plug. If you find that they’re popped, then you’ve got to figure out how to repair the fuse.
3. Check For Bare Wires And Burnt Out Bulbs
If you see that the light strand is not working even after switching out the fuses, there’s either a faulty bulb or an internal break in the wires. You have to be extremely careful when dealing with wires, but changing the problem bulb is comparatively easy. We’ll explain the process in greater detail in the next section.
Before you enthusiastically work on your outdoor light ideas or decorate your Christmas tree, it’s important to check for any faults and troubleshoot them to prevent any accidents. Based on the different problems we’ve discussed in the previous sections, here are the steps to troubleshoot them:
1. Change The Bad Bulb
Identifying the faulty bulb can be really tricky, given there are quite a few of them. Light testers are very handy in this case - or you may simply plug in the Christmas light set into the outlet and see which ones aren’t working. Most string lights require every bulb to function for electricity to run through its entire length, so even one bad bulb may cause significant problems.
Sometimes, gently tightening the bulb’s socket secures the loose connection, but if that doesn’t work, you must replace the bad bulb. To do that, unplug your Christmas light, remove the bad bulb, and replace it with a new bulb with the same voltage, design, and size. When you get the new bulb back in its place, you’ll successfully establish the electrical connection again.
Tip
While replacing the incandescent light bulb, look at the two wires at the base, and ensure they’re in their place and not touching each other.
2. Change The Fuse
If your string of lights won’t turn on at all, then you’re with a malfunctioning fuse. Simply slide back the plastic cover on the plug to access the male end of the fuse. Then, carefully remove the fuse using a screwdriver and replace it with a new fuse, and you’re good to go!
3. Don’t Let Your Outlet Overload
A common reason your string of lights flickers or won’t stay on is the heavy wattage demand on a single electrical outlet. If this is your case, you should consider dividing the light string among two or three outlets. Another way to prevent overwhelming wattage demand on a single outlet is by purchasing a twist-on wire connector or splitter which helps evenly distribute current flow.
Moreover, you can purchase light strings with a voltage requirement less than that of your outlet. To learn the capacity of the outlet, go to the breaker box and find the amp value shown - and, ideally, you should purchase lights. Alternatively, you can use solar-powered Christmas lights to prevent overloading and bulb burns.
4. Repair the Shunt
Every Christmas light has sockets that contain something called a ‘shunt.’ The shunt (electrical) maintains the current flow, especially during bulb burns. But when it malfunctions, entire sections of a Christmas light turn dark even if you replace one bulb. You’ll need a shunt repairer or kit to troubleshoot this problem.
An inexpensive holiday light set isn’t the most durable decorative alternative, so it’s important to handle them with care. Don’t pull the lights too hard since it can lead to broken bulbs, wiring, or socket, making the entire string malfunction. When you’ve taken down the lights, plug them into the outlet again to ensure they still work.
2. Store Them Properly
A common mistake many consumers make is throwing away the containers or boxes the Christmas light originally came in. This makes storing them properly a tedious job. Moreover, you must not entangle the light strands into tight balls since detangling them will be very frustrating, especially if you’re about to fix Christmas lights.
Loosely bunch them up, making sure the light bulbs don’t clash with each other - this will make the decorating process a lot easier for your next holiday season.
3. Upgrade Your Christmas Lights
On average, a Christmas light lasts up to three holiday seasons, sometimes even less, so you can't always fix them. To ensure your Christmas spirit lasts longer, consider switching to LED lights. LED (Light-emitting diode) also use significantly less electricity and are much safer to handle than traditional light strings.
4. Drape/Attach the String Lights Properly
Draping the string lights on a Christmas tree is harmless and easy, but you must be careful while attaching them to the wall or siding. Use plastic light hangers for this purpose instead of staplers since the metal can break or fray the wires, which can permanently damage your holiday lights.
Why won't my Christmas lights turn on?
If your Christmas lights don’t turn on at all, then there must be a problem with the fuse, shunt, or outlet. For a faulty fuse, access the male end of the light plug, and replace it with a new one.
Got a broken shunt? Purchase a shunt repairing kit and follow the manual to fix it. Moreover, you can try distributing your string lights among two or more electrical outlets to prevent overloading a single one.
How can I tell if a bulb is burnt out?
A light bulb in the string might not work due to a number of reasons - it can be a loose electrical connection, improper plugging, or, most commonly, a burnt bulb. To check if a bulb is burnt, carefully look at the filament connecting the negative to the positive contact, which is held by a glass mount.
If you see the filament is not taut but rather loose and burnt, you have the classic case of a burnt bulb.
Can I replace individual bulbs on my Christmas lights?
Of course. We’ve covered the ways to replace individual light bulbs further up in our article. Many string lights don’t light up all the way if even one bulb is malfunctioning, so it becomes imperative to change individual light bulbs in some cases.
What is the best way to store Christmas lights to prevent damage?
The best way to increase the longevity of your string lights is by storing them properly. And this includes storing them in their designated packaging boxes, not bundling them up into tight balls, and keeping them away from moisture. Remember to clean them after you take them off your tree or walls to prevent debris buildup within the wires and fuses.
Can I use LED bulbs to replace traditional incandescent bulbs on my Christmas lighting?
LED bulbs are a much more popular alternative to traditional bulbs due to their durability and energy-saving properties. Switching out the old bulbs with LED ones from your Christmas lights is a smart move, especially if you don’t want high energy bills to dampen the holiday mood.
Moreover, they are much safer to use and usually don’t cause accidents, such as electrical fires. You can also purchase a new string of LED lights with an insulator (electricity) if you’re worried about other electrical risks.
Is it safe to use Christmas lights that have a frayed cord?
No, you shouldn’t use Christmas lights with frayed cords - they will expose you to higher chances of electrocution or, worse, electrical fires. If you can’t fix the frayed cord, it’s best to replace the entire light string with a new one. They aren’t that expensive anyway, and you’d rather not set your house on fire.
What should I do if my Christmas lights get wet or are exposed to moisture?
Ideally, you must keep your Christmas lights away from any water source, but accidents do happen, and the string lights may be exposed to moisture. In this case, you must ensure it’s unplugged and then wipe away the moisture with a microfiber cloth. You can also let the cord dry in the sun - but if it gets too hot, the entire string light might malfunction.
To Sum It Up
Many people lose a lot of money by throwing out their Christmas lights when they find they aren’t working. As you’ve read in this article, there are various ways you can revive a faulty Christmas light by changing the bulbs and fuses or reconnecting some wires. Moreover, we’ve curated some tips and tricks for handling your holiday lights to ensure they last long.
However, if you’re having persistent issues with your power supply or electrical outlets, we recommend calling an electrician to resolve the issue at its root.
That being said, we’ll be signing off for now. If you liked reading this informational guide, check out our article, 'Best Christmas Net Lights.’
Until next time, goodbye!
Some popular outdoor Christmas light ideas include using fairy lights around trees, hanging lighted wreaths on the door, and adding electric festive figures to the yard. Considering your budget and the overall look you want, you can experiment with a plethora of outdoor lighting options.
Nothing gives me as much joy as the sparkle of outdoor Christmas lights.
From classic white string lights to colorful candy cane lights - the possibilities for outdoor Christmas lights ideas are endless. You can go traditional with free-standing festive figures or try a modern twist with minimal, monochromatic outdoor Christmas lights.
That said, in this article, I’ll be sharing some of the most enchanting outdoor Christmas light ideas that you can try out in the next holiday season. So, grab a cup of hot cocoa and get ready to spread some festive cheer!
27 Outdoor Christmas Lights Ideas
1. Invite Santa, His Reindeer, Or A Snowman!
What’s a better way to ring in the festive season than to have Santa and his sleigh right in your yard?
In this particular outdoor setup, you can see a stag with Santa’s sleigh decked up with gifts. Place it on your porch to welcome guests, or move it to the roof to save some outdoor space. Alternatively, you can choose other free-standing festive figures and storybook elements to narrate different sections of the Bible. Regardless, your outdoor lighting setup will be a sight to behold!
2. Welcome The Christmas Cheer With Icicle Lights
When used right, frosted icicle lights can make the perfect Christmas décor. You can give your home a wintry feel this holiday season by placing icicle lights along the rooftop. This will make them stand out beautifully against the dark sky.
You can take this idea up a notch by incorporating the same color of lights into your trees. Simply follow the branches of the trees to achieve a wintery look. The effect is simple, refreshing, and uncluttered, yet it exudes an incredibly festive vibe.
3. Add A Whimsical Touch With Lanterns
You can add a whimsical Christmas touch to your porch by filling old lanterns with white or yellow fairy lights. Then you can drape some string lights around the lantern and leave some on the floor for an effortlessly aesthetic vibe.
4. Embrace The Festive Feel With Colored Lights
Don’t be afraid to go overboard with colors. After all, ‘tis the season to be jolly! So, whether it’s your yard, the front door, or the entire house - deck it up with multicolored lights.
A few colorful Christmas lights scattered around can create a joyful atmosphere and a kid-friendly vibe, emanating a constant and vibrant gleam, which is ideal for the festive season. You can select a traditional red and green color combination or go for color-changing fairy lights to make a bigger impression.
5. Transform Your Porch Into A Winter Wonderland
If you think adding color lights all over the house is too much for your taste, try adorning the front porch only. For instance, this ornamental round side porch looks no less than a winter wonderland with twinkling lights all over the Christmas tree and the balustrade. So simple, yet so stunning!
6. Sprinkle Some Starlight
Not everyone has the budget to buy extravagant outdoor lights, and that’s okay - your house can still make heads turn, just like this Scandinavian-inspired Christmas porch. Simply make some paper lanterns in the shape of stars and snowflakes - this can be a fun activity for the kids too.
Once the DIY paper lanterns are ready, insert bulb lights inside and hang them on the ceiling.
7. Make It Moody
If you dig the moody vibe, try using white lights or white bulbs with lush wreaths, mistletoes, and plants all around the doorway. Not only is this one of the easiest outdoor Christmas light ideas, but it is also a unique and minimal way to embrace the holiday spirit.
8. Deck The Porch Columns
Here is another Christmas décor idea for those who like to keep things simple. Just wrap each column with chunky green garlands, complete with big red bows and Christmas lighting. Keep everything else as it is and simply turn on the usual lights on the porch. You could also use some light strings indoors to give a sneak peek through the doors and windows.
And this entire setup will look even better if your porch or yard is covered with sparkling white snow!
9. Add A Twinkling Door Wreath
Next, I have another effortless DIY Christmas project for you and your little ones. Take some pre-lit Christmas wreaths or garlands and a red bow. I suggest using three wreaths, like the aforementioned picture. Assemble them together and place the bow in the middle so that it reflects the warm white light from the wreaths and the rest of the décor.
Consider placing this three-ring wreath on your front door and add two mini Christmas trees on each side. This outdoor Christmas lighting setup is sure to add a festive glow to the front porch without occupying much outdoor space.
10. Keep It Simple
If your house features a sloping roof, or you’ve got a 60s-inspired A-frame cabin, why not transform it into a life-sized gingerbread house nestled in the woods? Adorn the roofline and the path leading to the house with large bulb lights spaced at intervals, creating a striking visual effect with a simple, uncluttered approach.
11. Light Up The Outdoor Christmas Tree
If you are blessed with a vast front yard with an evergreen tree, consider adding a Christmas tree embellished with gleaming ornaments and colorful lights. This approach is an excellent and fun way to extend holiday wishes to visitors, especially if your house is situated far back from the road.
12. Carve Out Your House With Rope Lights
Have you ever considered using the nighttime darkness to your benefit when decorating your home? Try utilizing conventional multi-colored rope lights to create an outline of your home. Just make sure to follow each corner of the house precisely using the rope lights.
13. Brighten Your Home With a Christmas Light Projector
Welcome the Christmas spirit throughout your home by using an LED light projector. You can select from various displays, such as Santa Claus sneaking in, twinkling lights, snowflakes, and falling snow effects.
The most significant advantage of this type of Christmas lighting is that it eliminates the need to climb up ladders and untangle string lights. However, when purchasing a projector, ensure that it has display modes, brightness, and adequate coverage area. Additionally, verify that the projector is water-resistant and suitable for outdoor use.
14. Go All Out With Christmas Lights
This is an advanced technique that demands some commitment, but the outcome is incredibly stunning!
Essentially, you're using lights like paint and creating color blocks on your house. Start by collecting lights in various colors and arranging them. Adorn your walls with red lights, line your windows with green lights, and embellish your roof with white lights for a complete Christmas transformation.
15. Wrap Christmas Lights On Tree Trunks
Do you have large trees all over your front yard? Try covering the tree trunks with string lights of the same color. Doing so creates the impression of pillars, which is quite clever if you ask me!
Tip
The essential aspect of this idea is to leave the leaves and branches without any decorations. This way, the trees will appear as if they stop in the air, giving them the appearance of pillars.
16. Light Up The Front Yard
If your house is situated far from the road, you can use a string of lights to wrap some greenery or a mailbox on the front lawn. It’ll serve as a visual connection to the primary light display at the front of your home.
17. Spell It Out
You must have seen those light letters influencers use in their rooms, often spelling out their names. Well, you can shift them outdoors to spell out words like “joy,” “Xmas,” “merry,” and more. I think this simple outdoor Christmas light idea is effective yet gorgeous in spreading the warmth of the Christmas season to neighbors and passersby.
For a more subtle look, you can opt for smaller alphabet decorations to hang on your Christmas tree. Within a few minutes, you’ll have the cutest Christmas tree in town!
18. Add More Sparkle With Extra String Lights
If you’ve got some extra string lights left, consider including topiary in your outdoor Christmas light ideas. To achieve a modern and stylish look, you can use blue-white string lights to accentuate sleek shapes like cones, spheres, etc. However, if you prefer a more playful and whimsical feel, use the twinkle setting.
19. Don’t Forget The Fence
If you want to stand out in the next Christmas and holiday season, consider recreating this outdoor lighting setup. Rather than focusing on the yard or the porch, you can choose the fence as the focal point of the outdoor Christmas lights.
Embellish it with a lighted garland, complete with red bows and ribbons. You could also define the roofline with white string lights to add depth to the overall display.
20. Frame Your Windows With Extravagant Lights
Want to outdo mall light shows this Christmas? Well, use the power of festive lights to create innovative and unique frames for your windows. Purchase malleable string lights and wall clips, then outline the shape on your wall and fasten the lights in place using the clips.
Tip
It is best to use separate light strings for each window, so measure the required length before ordering them.
21. Create A White Christmas Vibe
If you live in an area where it seldom snows, you might need to think outside the box to experience a white Christmas.
Well, this lighting setup is ideal for a wraparound porch. All you have to do is adorn your bushes, stair rails, pillars, and roofline with sparkling white Christmas lights. Even without any additional decorations, this pure white theme evokes the feel of snow in the hottest of locations.
22. Enhance The Roofline
Make use of lighting to accentuate your home’s exterior, such as this cottage with a slanted roofline illuminated with enchanting white lights. This stunning yet simple outdoor Christmas lighting adds depth to your front yard on gloomy winter evenings.
23. Add A Warm Touch With Candles
Even if you use electric Christmas lights, keep some candles on hand for when you want a more intimate atmosphere or to share a drink without the jarring bright lights. For instance, you can keep the LED candles under your bench or place them along the handrail.
Or simply light a candle in the middle of your porch table for a candlelit Christmas ambiance.
24. Trim Your Bushes And Light ‘Em Up!
When it comes to incorporating Christmas into your home décor in a modern and refreshing way, here's a unique idea for your front yard. If you have many bushes, consider trimming them into spherical shapes to create a floating effect.
Next, adorn them with mini lights in white, green, and red colors for a fresh take on traditional Christmas decorations. This idea is particularly suitable for those looking to add a trendy touch to their home’s exterior.
25. Bask In The Golden Glow
This Christmas light idea is perfect if you’re got a bright red or green door. Or, you can paint your door for a fun, festive touch!
Then add some golden ball ornaments on potted Christmas trees and deck up the surrounding areas with warm string lights. Doing so will result in a soft and inviting glow that epitomizes the classic appeal of the holiday season.
Lastly, you can add a lighted garland on the front door to add a timeless charm to the overall look.
26. Create A Firework Scene With Starburst Lights
Using fireworks can be a hassle, but modern Christmas enthusiasts have found an alternative solution!
How about purchasing some starburst lights, which provide the appearance of a continuous firework display without any of the noise and smoke? They make for a stunning addition to a large light display or can be used alone to create a more otherworldly atmosphere.
27. Cover Large Spaces With Net Lights
If the thought of wrapping individual string lights around large surfaces like walls, hedges, and railings stresses you out, consider using a net version instead. This will not only save you time but also ensure that the lights are evenly distributed, resulting in a stunning and visually appealing backdrop.
However, when covering a large area, decide the overall vibe you want to go for. That said, cool-toned lights in white or blue colors will create a frosty winter wonderland effect. On the other hand, warm-toned outdoor lights will complement traditional decorations and create a cozy ambiance.
What are some popular types of outdoor Christmas lights?
String lights are the most common type of outdoor Christmas lights, consisting of a string of bulbs that can be wrapped around trees, bushes, and other outdoor features.
Net lights are a mesh of lights that can be easily draped over bushes or hedges to create a uniform look.
Icicle lights are designed to mimic the appearance of hanging icicles and are often hung from rooflines or eaves.
LED lights are energy-efficient and long-lasting, making them a popular choice for outdoor Christmas displays.
Battery-operated lights are convenient for outdoor displays that are far from electrical outlets and do not require any wiring or extension cords.
Are LED lights better for outdoor use than traditional incandescent bulbs?
Yes, LED lights are more energy-efficient, which means they use less electricity to produce the same amount of light as incandescent bulbs. They also have a longer lifespan and are more durable, making them more suitable for outdoor use.
Moreover, LED lights emit less heat than incandescent bulbs, reducing the risk of fire hazards. And the fact that LEDs are available in a variety of colors makes them all the more convenient for outdoor Christmas displays.
What are some safety tips to keep in mind when hanging outdoor Christmas lights?
Use Outdoor-rated Lights
Ensure that the lights you use are rated for outdoor use and are properly insulated to protect against environmental elements.
Inspect The Lights
Before hanging the lights, inspect them carefully to make sure there are no damaged wires or broken bulbs. Discard any damaged lights.
Use Proper Extension Cords
Use extension cords rated for outdoor use, featuring the appropriate length for your needs. Do not use indoor extension cords for outdoor lighting.
Avoid Overloading Outlets
Do not plug too many lights into a single outlet or extension cord, as this can create a fire hazard. Use multiple outlets and extension cords as needed.
Use A Ladder Safely
When hanging lights on tall trees or the roof, use a sturdy ladder that is positioned on a level surface. Do not stand on the top rungs of the ladder, and have someone hold the base for added stability.
Turn Off The Lights When Not In Use
Turn off the lights when you are not at home or when you go to bed at night to reduce the risk of fire.
Keep Electric Decorations Away From Power Lines
Do not hang decorations near power lines or other electrical equipment, as this can be dangerous.
Conclusion
And those were all the outdoor Christmas light ideas I had for you. I hope this guide will be helpful for those who want to make their home shine this holiday season!
Whether you're decorating a small front porch or a sprawling backyard, there's a way to add a festive touch to your abode. So, put on some Christmas songs, and get ready to jazz up your home with outdoor Christmas lights!
Nobody likes a messy or cluttered room, it's a fact. If you wish to keep things organized or at least hidden from view – having storage cabinets in your home is essential.
Out of all the types of storage cabinets in the market, the plastic kind is known to be the most common thanks to its affordability and weather resistance. Some prefer these because the best plastic storage cabinets are quite durable and come with a list of very useful features such as adjustable shelves and stacking systems that can be very versatile.
If any of the above sounds like what you’re looking for, then you should read through our reviews for the best plastic storage cabinets for 2023!
Best Plastic Storage Cabinets
Here's the list of the 5 best plastic storage cabinets for all your organizational needs.
This product from our list of best plastic storage cabinets is manufactured in America and consists of a total of 4 shelf spaces. The height of these shelves can be adjusted to your requirements while the product itself promises the best durability.
DIMENSIONS: Exterior measures 25 5/8" x 18 7/8" x 69 3/8",...
VERSATILE: Whether in garages, basements, or throughout the...
The Sterilite 4 Shelf Cabinet has been constructed in a manner that its doors can be opened easily while they can shut quite tightly. You will also be offered the option to lock your cabinet doors with the help of padlocks while the handles are made of pure titanium.
If you get yourself this product, you will find that its installation is entirely stress-free and will consume very less time. The product will also ensure that you have a lot of space to store away your belongings or even arrange them in a fashion your find best.
Pros
Doors open easily and close securely
Padlock-compatible for extra security
Easy and quick installation process
Ample storage space with 4 shelves
Easy to set up
Cons
Padlocks for added security are not included
Dimensions: 25.62"W x 18.87"D x 69.37"H | Weight: 39.5 lbs | No. of Shelves/Drawers: 4 shelves | Weight Capacity: 40 lbs per shelf | Lock Option: Yes
Now that we’re entering the greats of our list of best plastic storage cabinets, we’d like to introduce you to the Homak 12-Drawer Parts Organizer. This product has been constructed using hard plastic and it consists of 12 robust drawers. 8 of these drawers are small while the 4 below are larger.
Great for organizing small hardware accessories in the shop...
8 small drawers 2-1/8 W x 5-3/8 L/D x 1-1/2 H inches and 4...
This storage cabinet’s compact construction ensures that a lot of your belongings are stored away in a smart solution that can be employed in any corner of your home or office. The best reason to get yourself this product would be for official documents or archives as the transparent plastic drawers can help you locate things very easily.
What’s more? The organizer itself is quite lightweight, cheap, and requires no maintenance!
Pros
Offers 12 drawers with different sizes for versatile use
Transparent drawers for easy item identification
Lightweight and easy to move
Budget-friendly and low maintenance
Easy to set up
Cons
Not suitable for storing heavy or bulky items
Dimensions: 10.5"W x 6.25"D x 9.5"H | Weight: 4 lbs | No. of Shelves/Drawers: 12 drawers | Weight Capacity: N/A | Lock Option: No
Yet another great product from our list of best plastic storage cabinets, the Rubbermaid is a storage cabinet with double doors that have been manufactured using sturdy plastic. Due to the quality of this product, it has been well-matched for use in your garage, basement, or even workshop.
TOUGH AND DURABLE: Resin construction is durable and tough...
STURDY DESIGN: Unique, snap together cabinet design combines...
If you get yourself this product, you can fluently fix it anywhere without the need for utensils. Even the plastic surface of this product makes sure that it does not get damaged because of dust or rust corrosion.
This particular plastic storage cabinet can hold a maximum weight of about 336 lbs – which means you can store a wide range of heavy materials here without any problem. Even if you are concerned about the safety of these items, you should know that Rubbermaid offers you the option to lock the cabinet doors.
The shelves of this product have been fixed inside the cabinet itself and you’ll find that one of the shelves will be aerated while the other ones will be made of concrete.
Pros
Sturdy and high-quality plastic construction
Maximum weight capacity of 336 lbs
Tool-free assembly
Door locking option
Easy to set up
Cons
Fixed shelves limit customization possibilities
Dimensions: 36"W x 18"D x 37"H | Weight: 28 lbs | No. of Shelves/Drawers: 2 shelves/drawers | Weight Capacity: 336 lbs | Lock Option: Yes
Looking for a stylish and efficient storage solution? The KOUSI Large Cube Plastic Storage Cabinet may be the perfect fit for your needs. Known for its attractive design and user-friendly features, it brings both aesthetics and practicality to your space.
One of the things that initially caught our eye about the KOUSI storage cabinet was its attractive design. Stylish and elegant, it's a beautiful addition to any room. But looks aren't everything, and thankfully, this storage cabinet delivers on other fronts as well. The installation process is a breeze, thanks to an accompanying video that makes it simple to put together, even for first-timers.
Now let's talk about functionality. The soft, ergonomic handle allows users to effortlessly open and close the cabinet, making it a pleasure to use. Furthermore, the interior shelves are made of strong stainless steel, capable of holding up to 22 pounds each, ensuring durability and stability.
This combination of pleasing aesthetics, user-friendliness, and sturdiness truly sets it apart from its competitors.
Pros
Attractive, elegant design
Easy installation process with supporting video
Soft, ergonomic handle for easy access
Durable stainless steel interior shelves
Easy to set up
Cons
Plastic material may not be as sturdy as wood
Dimensions: 56"W x 18"D x 14"H | Weight: 17.66 lbs | No. of Shelves/Drawers: 12 shelves | Weight Capacity: 22 lbs per shelf | Lock Option: No
Nafenai Plastic Storage Cabinet is a versatile and stylish storage solution that makes a great addition to any home. This cabinet set comes in two fun and unique colors, offering a combination of various drawer sizes for all of your storage needs, while its high-grade plastic makes it easy to clean and maintain.
.Nafenai CHEST of DRAWER: Overall dimension 24"W x 16"D x...
.PLASTIC STORAGE DRESSER CABINET: Dresser made of high grade...
One of the main reasons we loved this Nafenai Plastic Storage Cabinet is its spacious storage drawers. These drawers come in multiple sizes, allowing you to efficiently organize your belongings however you see fit. Besides the multi-purpose design, the options of two fun colors – blue and pink – bring an element of liveliness and personal touch to your space.
Its use of high-quality plastic not only gives the cabinet a sturdy structure but also makes it extremely low maintenance.
So you can spend less time on upkeep and more time enjoying the benefits it brings.
Pros
Versatile storage options with multiple drawer sizes
Available in two fun and unique color choices
High-quality plastic construction for easy maintenance
Provides a personal touch to space
Easy to set up
Cons
Vibrant color options may not suit all design preferences
Dimensions: 24"W x 15"D x 39"H | Weight: 22 lbs | No. of Shelves/Drawers: 4 drawers | Weight Capacity: 33 lbs per drawer | Lock Option: No
When shopping for the best plastic storage cabinets, it is important to consider certain factors that could have an impact on your overall satisfaction with the product. In this comprehensive buying guide, we will highlight a few key aspects to take into account before purchasing a plastic storage cabinet.
Material Quality
The durability and longevity of a storage cabinet rely heavily on the quality of the material used in its construction. Ensure that the product is constructed from high-quality, heavy-duty plastic capable of withstanding daily use, as well as potential exposure to harsh weather conditions if meant for outdoor use.
Size and Storage Capacity
Before purchasing a storage cabinet, it's crucial to determine the amount of storage space needed, as well as the dimensions of the area where it will be placed. Remember to consider the size and quantity of the items you plan to store, and make sure the cabinet you choose is able to accommodate them appropriately.
Design and Functionality
The design of the storage cabinet should not only be aesthetically pleasing but also highly functional. Aim for a product that offers adjustable shelves, multiple compartments, or drawer combinations to maximize the organization of your items. In addition, ease of access, such as ergonomic handles and easy-to-open doors, is important for overall user satisfaction.
Assembly and Installation
Consider the complexity of the assembly and installation process when choosing a storage cabinet. Opt for a product that comes with clear instructions or an installation video, and ensure that the assembly process is manageable for you.
Maintenance and Cleaning
Lastly, factor in the effort needed to maintain the storage cabinet. Products made from high-grade plastic typically require little maintenance and are easy to clean. To save time and effort, opt for a storage cabinet that is simple to keep in good condition.
Remember, investing in a high-quality, functional, and aesthetically pleasing plastic storage cabinet can not only enhance the organization and efficiency of your space but also improve its overall appearance.
Keep these factors in mind to find the storage solution that will best serve your needs.
Plastic Storage Cabinets FAQs
Are plastic storage cabinets durable and sturdy enough for long-term use?
Yes, plastic storage cabinets are generally durable and sturdy enough for long-term use. They are constructed from high-quality plastic materials that resist wear and tear and protect your stored items.
However, the durability may vary depending on the specific model and the weight of the items you plan to store.
Can I adjust the shelves in a plastic storage cabinet?
Some plastic storage cabinets offer adjustable shelves, while others come with fixed shelves. It would be best to check the product description or user manual to confirm whether the shelves in the cabinet you are considering can be adjusted to your requirements.
Are plastic storage cabinets easy to clean and maintain?
Yes, plastic storage cabinets are generally low-maintenance and easy to clean. To clean them, simply wipe the surfaces with a damp cloth and mild soap. Their plastic construction means they won’t rust or corrode like metal cabinets, making them ideal for long-term use.
Are these cabinets suitable for heavy items?
Plastic storage cabinets are generally designed to hold a range of light to moderately heavy items. However, their weight capacity varies depending on the specific model. It’s essential to check the maximum weight limit of the cabinet you’re considering and ensure it can accommodate the weight of your stored items.
Can I lock my plastic storage cabinet for added security?
Some plastic storage cabinets come with the option to lock the cabinet doors with padlocks or built-in locks for added security. Check the product description to see if the specific cabinet model you’re considering offers locking features.
How easy is it to assemble a plastic storage cabinet?
Plastic storage cabinets are generally easy to assemble, often requiring minimal tools and time. Many cabinets come with a user manual or instructional video to help guide you through the assembly process, making it even more convenient.
Conclusion
Before you go out to buy any of the above best plastic storage cabinets, you should truly understand your purpose of use. If you wish to store items as you would in a drawer, then tower storage cabinets are going to be a great option.
If, however, you wish to store outdoor items such as long-handled tools, then you should think about the dimensions of storage cabinets. There are many types of plastic storage cabinets out there, and your requirements will help you get yourself the best ones.
For a spacious storage option that's both practical and customizable, the Sterilite 4-Shelf Cabinet is an ideal option.
If you're seeking a compact choice for small spaces and love transparent drawers for quick access, the Homak 12-Drawer Parts Organizer is a good option.
We're confident that our expert insights will help you find the perfect storage cabinet for your specific needs. Selecting the right product can make a world of difference in maximizing your space and maintaining a clean and organized environment. Best of luck on your journey to tidier living, and remember, don't hesitate to revisit our article if you need more information or inspiration.
Happy organizing!
An artificial Christmas tree is made of plastics, like PVC or PE, which makes them low maintenance compared to live trees. But they are non-biodegradable and have a much higher carbon footprint, so disposing of them is much more challenging.
Were you late in visiting the tree farm and failed to get a real Christmas tree to surprise the kids? In such a situation, you probably brought home a synthetic tree that costs less and lasts longer.
Seems like a fantastic deal, right? But disposing of used artificial trees is challenging, as their plastic construction is a health risk. Read my guide to stay safe during the holiday season and dispose of artificial Christmas tree properly.
To dispose of a fake Christmas tree, it would be wise to know about the type and material of your artificial Christmas tree. Here is a list of the most popular artificial Christmas trees that people have -
A. Different Types Of Artificial Trees
Unlit fake Christmas trees
Pre-lit Christmas tree
Realistic Christmas tree
Fiber optic Christmas tree
Pop-up Christmas tree
Slim Christmas tree
Outdoor artificial Christmas tree
Half Christmas tree
Blossom artificial trees
Color Christmas tree
B. How To Identify The Type Of Tree
Although several artificial trees look similar to a real Christmas tree, most options are available in 2 branch types - hinged and hook-in. An old artificial Christmas tree with a hinged branch is easier to assemble because they have fewer parts and permanently affixed branches.
Meanwhile, an artificial tree with hook-in branches has each part attached to a particular point on the central pole of the tree. These faux trees aren’t available in a pre-lit model and take much longer to set up, which could be an added hassle during the holiday season. But they cost less than other artificial trees.
Other than this, a major part of distinguishing an artificial Christmas tree depends on the material. Usually, artificial trees are either made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) or PE, a type of plastic. However, the appearance of Christmas trees varies based on your preferred material.
Manufacturers use wires to attach PVC needles to an artificial tree, while PE trees are fabricated, so the needles and branches are similar to real Christmas trees. Moreover, if the tips of the branches are sculpted, they look like Evergreen trees.
Donate Artificial Christmas Trees
One of the best things you can do with your old artificial tree is to donate it to local organizations to spread joy during the holiday season or repurpose it. Contact some nursing homes or thrift stores to see if they require Christmas trees. But remove all non-permanent attachments like tinsel, ornaments, and lights before handing over the tree.
You can even repurpose Christmas trees if you are good at DIY tasks. People who want to get creative can cut, shape, or bend real and artificial trees into a garland or decorative wreaths. Plus, homeowners can reuse the fake tree, with some effort, as a holder for napkin rings or as a table centerpiece.
Tip
Remove all light strings from the tree before cutting it, and ensure not to damage any electrical wires. You can search online or research creative projects for more inspiration on repurposing used artificial trees.
Recycle An Artificial Christmas Tree
Christmas tree recycling only applies to real or live Christmas trees because artificial Christmas trees are made of plastics, like PVC. Plastics aren’t environment-friendly, and your local waste collection company will confirm that they don’t break down in a landfill, unlike a real tree.
Moreover, many artificial trees aren’t accepted in most recycling centers because the decorative fibers added to such trees are glued or fixed to the metal frame. So, how will you enjoy the Christmas spirit when your local recycling center doesn’t accept your old artificial tree since it will lead to environmental issues?
Instead of being heartbroken, you can look for special recycling programs to accept your old tree. Such organizations possess the latest tools and accept flocked trees, turning them into mulch or other reusable materials.
Thus, you can avoid the damaging effects of a landfill and enjoy the holiday spirit with a clear conscience.
Disposing of an old Christmas tree is more challenging than collecting live trees from yard waste. Most people use these trees because artificial trees last longer and are also low maintenance compared to live trees, but there are fewer disposal options.
1. Curbside Collection
One of the most popular methods to dispose of an artificial tree is to place it outside your apartment building for curbside collection. Many cities or local recycling centers often accept old fake trees as general household waste, offering curbside pickup for an eco-friendly solution.
But even if your trees are made of metal or plastic, you must break them down into smaller pieces. This means using wire cutters to remove the needles, Christmas lights, and other decorations or waiting for bulk pickup day to remove old trees.
2. Drop-Off Location
There are a few other ideas, such as free drop-off locations where you can leave an old tree in the United States after the Christmas and holiday season. Some of these include the following -
Charity shops or senior centers
Regional landfills
Home improvement services
Government organizations
Municipal solid waste programs
3. Dumpster
You can dispose of a flocked tree in a dumpster by treating it as regular trash but not as yard waste. Instead of the local landfill, place the tree in the dumpster in front of the apartment by breaking it down into smaller pieces to fit into the waste container.
However, it would be wise to check with the local waste management company or landlord to see if they collect trees that are made of plastic. People living in large housing complexes can also rent a roll-off dumpster or inquire with home improvement services to dump their synthetic trees.
Are there any environmental concerns associated with disposing of an artificial Christmas tree?
An artificial Christmas tree can harm the environment in a few ways, but the most frightening aspect is they are made of chemicals or PVC. Such materials are normally harmful to both people and the environment, but even more so because they are non-biodegradable and add to the carbon footprint.
Can I compost my artificial Christmas tree?
Since an artificial tree is made of plastic, it’s not possible to compost or recycle them. You can only compost a real or live tree by reducing such trees to mulch.
Are there any laws or regulations regarding the disposal of artificial Christmas trees?
Different cities have different laws regarding the disposal of artificial Christmas trees in the United States. Usually, government officials ask people not to store the tree in the garage or basement for next year, even if it’s in good shape.
But if you don’t want to dump the tree in a landfill, it would be best to get it incinerated. Also, the appropriate time for disposing of such trees is within a month, and during the holiday season, many agencies provide same-day pickup.
Most importantly, never burn artificial Christmas trees yourself since they are a fire hazard, and the flames can get out of control.
What is the best way to dispose of an artificial Christmas tree in my area?
The best way to dispose of an artificial Christmas tree is to contact your local waste collection service. You can also use social media sites like Facebook to know how other people remove their used artificial trees.
An easy technique is placing the tree in a dumpster or contacting a business with a large dumpster by chopping the tree into small pieces. I have also seen people disassemble various parts of the tree and put them into the trash can, which might take several weeks.
Or, like me, you can arrange for a bulk item pickup and place the tree on the curb.
Conclusion
Don’t just place the old tree near the trash bin and consider it job done. Whether you have a real or artificial Christmas tree, it’s essential to dispose of it properly to reduce environmental impact and guarantee safety.
Christmas trees are a fire hazard; the longer you keep them in your home, the greater the chance of an accident. Instead, a tree donation to a charity is better to help other people enjoy the holidays, or contact a professional agency to dump it carefully.
You should also adhere to the regulations in your area when disposing of Christmas trees, so contact government agencies or your building manager to know more.
Aire Serv is a leading AC installation company that offers services in 42 states, provides phone and online appointment scheduling, and offers free heat gain and loss evaluations. Another company, American Residential Services, LLP, provides the widest range of services and third-party financing.
Summer is fast approaching, and you may be planning to replace your old air conditioning unit with a new one.
In that case, the first thing to do is to find the best AC installation companies in the area. But with so many options to choose from, it can be quite challenging to determine which one to go with.
That's where this guide on the best AC installation companies can help you out.
How To Choose The Best AC Installation Company?
When you're planning to get a new air conditioner installed at home, finding the right installation company is one of the most important decisions. And you need to look at several aspects, such as services offered, products available, and customer support post-installation, when making this decision.
Putting in the time and effort to find the right company will ensure you have the best experience and help avoid a lot of hassle in the future. Here, I've mentioned some factors that should be considered when selecting an air conditioning company.
1. Scheduling And Service Area
Generally, there are two options when it comes to AC installation service. You can either find contractors who work locally and provide service to select towns or bigger companies that offer nationwide services. For any specific city, local air conditioning contractors are better suited since they have limited products, services, staff, and availability.
However, selecting a well-known AC installation company might be a better option if you have an extremely busy schedule. They cater to a larger area, have a bigger staff made up of experienced HVAC technicians, and are generally more easily available.
Some AC installation companies are also willing to visit locations outside their service area for an extra fee. In such cases, you should ask them how the total price will be calculated before making a decision.
Also, the installation or repair service depends upon how the AC installation company schedules appointments, as some companies require on-site consultation. In such cases, you will have to make more than a single appointment. Additionally, while the majority of companies allow making appointments over the phone, some offer the facility of online scheduling.
2. Emergency Services
If your air conditioner breaks down in the middle of summer, finding a reliable AC installation and repair company that offers emergency services becomes necessary. And doing so quickly is crucial since, in some cases, extremely high temperatures may pose health risks.
Having a dependable air conditioner repair or replacement company on-call can help you avoid such situations. But I would like to point out that companies providing emergency services generally charge an emergency fee for them. So, it is a good idea to find out about the cost breakdown before hiring an air conditioning service company.
3. Brands Offered
Most AC installation companies offer several brands, but these can vary considerably from one company to the next. If you plan to purchase from a different brand, it is generally treated as a special order and leads to an increase in the installation cost. Small air conditioning contractors usually have a limited stock of AC units you can purchase immediately.
Alternatively, some AC installation companies deal in specific brands for which they provide installation and maintenance services. I also suggest checking with the company you plan to hire if any restrictions prohibit other technicians from performing repair and maintenance activities.
Since the AC brand plays such an important part in the selection of the installation company, make sure to research different brands and products properly. For this purpose, the suggestions and expertise of an AC professional might come in handy.
4. Insurance And Licensing
Before hiring a professional to install your air conditioning system, make sure to check that they are properly insured, certified, and trained as required by the law. States like Wyoming do not have any insurance or licensing requirements for AC installers, while others, like California, require contractors to take various licensing examinations.
Apart from these legal requirements, a company that imparts further training and provides additional certifications to its technicians can be relied upon to deliver good service.
5. Guarantee
One of the most important factors to consider when searching for AC installation companies is the guarantee offered on the service provided. The best AC installation companies provide a guarantee on the repairs or services performed. But this generally differs from the manufacturer's warranty, which covers your AC unit.
The guarantee provided by installation and maintenance companies usually covers improper installations, faulty wiring, and similar issues. You should try to find out all you can about the guarantee provided by the installation company, which will help avoid making multiple payments for the same thing.
6. Customer Support
Businesses operating in the service industry should have customer support as their topmost priority. In the case of AC installation companies, this means that the company should provide complete information regarding products, services, pricing, insurance, licensing, and other aspects. If it fails to do so, you will not be able to determine whether that business is reliable or not.
In such instances, selecting a different company that can provide the required information might be a more sensible choice. Most leading AC installation companies have a dedicated customer support team that is often not found in the case of smaller contractors.
This team can help with all your queries, guide you through the appointment booking process, and clear any doubts regarding various aspects of the process. Additionally, they can provide much-needed support in case of emergencies.
Now that you know what factors to consider when searching for the best AC installation companies, let us look at the top options.
Aire Serv is among the most well-known heating and air conditioning companies operating in the United States. Established in 1992, the company caters to customers throughout the nation and even in Canada.
It has more than 200 franchise locations spread across the two nations and provides a wide range of commercial and residential heating and cooling services. These include installations, repairs, maintenance, and replacements.
Apart from that, Aire Serv provides air conditioners from almost all the major brands, such as Coleman, Armstrong Air, American Standard, etc. The company also has a team of expert HVAC technicians that are fully certified and well-trained to provide all types of AC installation services. And they can work with different types of air conditioning systems.
So, whether you have a central air conditioning system, wall, and window AC units, or even a ductless mini-split AC, there won't be any problem. But the most important reason I recommend this company is that it provides evaluations regarding heat gain and loss, which can help determine the energy efficiency of your home.
The emergency services are also quick and responsive, and the company provides full information regarding the pricing before any work is started. On top of that, you do not need to pay extra for hiring them on a holiday or a weekend or even for overtime.
As for the technicians, they arrive properly uniformed and also send you a text before their visit. Then, there are various guarantees, such as the Performance and Satisfaction Guarantee, which ensure that the highest quality standards will be maintained.
That being said, you should remember that Aire Serv offers a warranty for only 60 days, which is a bit less compared to what other companies offer.
Availability: 42 states | Appointment Scheduling: Phone, online | Emergency Services: Yes | Guarantee: 60 days | Customer Support: Phone
American Residential Services, LLC was established in 1975 in Memphis, Tennessee, and currently offers services in over 20 states. Unlike some of the other AC installation companies, American Residential Services, or ARS, offers a wide selection of home improvement solutions, not just AC installations and repairs.
These include plumbing, electrical, smart technologies, insulation, and other services. In fact, the company only started offering air conditioning installation and maintenance services in 1998 but has now become a leader in the industry.
ARS can also help you select the best cooling system for your home, which can be very helpful when getting an air conditioning system for the first time. Another advantage of selecting this company is that it offers upfront pricing, making it easy to know about the breakdown of the total cost.
What's more, you can finance the cost of repairs, installations, or other activities by any third-party lender. Many AC installation companies do not provide this facility, which is why I find ARS a better option in this respect.
As for the installation procedure, the company employs licensed and experienced professionals. They are familiar with most brands and can install and replace almost any type of AC unit and cooling system. And on all AC installation services, you get an Exceptional Service Guarantee that lasts for a year.
If you are unhappy with the service provided, the company will try to remedy it within the guarantee period. In case it fails to do so, it will refund 100% of the price charged for the installation. You can schedule appointments online or through the phone, and ARS also provides a free estimate for installations and offers 24/7 emergency services.
Availability: 22 states | Appointment Scheduling: Phone, online | Emergency Services: Yes | Guarantee: 1 year | Customer Support: Phone, live chat
Different AC installation companies have varying USPs, and the USP for the One Hour Heating And Air Conditioning Company is delivering prompt service. The company strives to set itself apart by providing same-day services, whether you require the installation of a new HVAC system or emergency repairs.
And if it fails to deliver the services within the stipulated time, customers do not need to make any payments. For people with a very busy schedule, the same-day services of One Hour Heating and Air Conditioning can be the ideal option for getting an AC unit installed.
Additionally, all air conditioning technicians hired by the company are selected only after they pass drug tests and background checks. This helps eliminate any worries that you might have regarding the quality of the services offered.
Speaking of the services, you get all the standard services that the best AC installation companies offer. These include installing the air conditioning system, repairs, heating, and indoor air quality control.
The pricing policy of the company is also great, and One Hour Heating And Air Conditioning has transparent pricing without any hidden charges. And as for the warranty, you get a two-year warranty on labor and materials, besides the manufacturer's warranty on the AC unit.
Customer service can be contacted online or over the phone, and you can even sign up for the Home Comfort Club annual maintenance program to get discounts. Appointments can similarly be booked online or by phone, though I should let you know that navigating the website using a mobile phone or tablet is not an enjoyable experience.
Also, while the company does not provide service to all the states in the country, it can provide assistance if you are located close to a serviceable location.
Dr. Energy Saver is an AC installation company that has built its reputation by focusing on energy efficiency. Ensuring that your AC unit is installed in the most efficient manner possible is of utmost importance for the company. To do that, it conducts home energy audits to find problems resulting in high energy bills.
While the company has its branches in 25 states, the scheduling, services offered, and customer support can vary depending on the location. The reason is that Dr. Energy Saver operates as a dealership, so branches in different locations tend to vary in how they operate.
Also, this air conditioner installation and repair business caters mostly to the eastern states of the United States. This means you may not find any branches in states like Washington and Oregon, which are located on the western side.
Aside from that, Dr. Energy Service is known for its wide selection of heating and cooling services for residential properties, which include installation, repairs, maintenance, whole-home insulation, and energy audits. Other services include ductwork and window and door work, which can make your air conditioning more effective.
If you opt for the energy audit, the company can recommend the most suitable air conditioning upgrades, more efficient insulation, and other solutions that can help ensure efficient energy use. Some branches also offer emergency services, but the warranty terms and conditions can vary by location.
So, if you're planning to hire this company to get a new AC unit installed or fixed, I would suggest checking with the local branch first. Another way to find out about the services that Dr. Energy Service offers in the area is to visit the website and fill out the provided form. This can also help you get a free estimate.
Availability: 25 states | Appointment Scheduling: Location dependent | Emergency Services: Location dependent | Guarantee: Depends on the service | Customer Support: Location dependent
The Home Depot is best known for being the largest home improvement retail service in the world and operates over 2300 stores in the US, Mexico, and Canada. But the business does not limit itself to selling home improvement tools and hardware, and its HVAC services are also quite remarkable, especially when it comes to window AC installations.
To get a new AC unit installed, simply visit the website and select the unit you want, and click on the button provided for installation services. Once the order is confirmed, you will get a call from an installation professional within one business day, who will schedule an appointment for the installation.
The Home Depot works with local contractors through partnerships to provide air conditioner installation, repair, and maintenance services. This means that you can rest assured that the professional will be familiar with most makes and models available in the area and can deliver quality service.
Also, since the company operates across three countries, you can find its branches in all 50 states, including Alaska and Hawaii, and it offers both in-home and virtual consultations. For the installation, the professional will remove the old air conditioner (if any) and check that the new AC unit is properly secured and completely weatherproof.
Moreover, The Home Depot provides flexible financing options, including both interest-free short payment periods and longer 120-month periods. You also get upfront pricing, a one-year warranty on the AC unit, and a 90-day one on tune-ups and repairs.
I would like to point out that most locations also offer emergency services, but not all of them. So, make sure to check with your nearby branch to know whether such a service is available or not.
Availability: 50 states | Appointment Scheduling: Online | Emergency Services: Location dependent | Guarantee: 1 year on installations, 90 days on labor | Customer Support: Phone
Wide range of commercial installation and maintenance services
Certified and licensed professionals
Online tools
Free estimate
Cons
No warranty on labor
The above-mentioned options are great if you need to get an air conditioner installed at home, but when it comes to commercial requirements, I would recommend TemperaturePro. This company was founded in 1986 in Cherry Hill, New Jersey, to provide installation and repair services for HVAC systems.
TemperaturePro provides a wide range of HVAC services for commercial establishments across various sectors, including education, healthcare, retail, etc. The services include air conditioner installations, repairs, maintenance, and others. In addition, the company offers preventive programs to ensure your AC unit continues functioning properly for the long term.
To provide such services, TemperaturePro has a team of fully certified HVAC technicians with several years of experience. The professionals are also certified with the North American Technician Excellence (NATE), so you can count on a good experience.
Another thing that helps this company maintain its reputation as a leading air conditioner installation company is that it works with several manufacturers, including Goodman, Lennox, and Honeywell. And it offers several online tools that make the customer experience better. These include tracking tools, online chat, and more.
When you schedule an appointment, the installation professional will visit the site and conduct an evaluation of the property and the air conditioning requirements. Once done, the company can send you a quote along with recommendations for the property.
You can even get a free estimate by contacting the nearby TemperaturePro branch. Additionally, 24/7 emergency services are available, and the company offers various financing options while also allowing monthly payments.
However, the business does not provide clear information regarding the warranty offered since the website only mentions a standard factory or manufacturing warranty. And this warranty may not be available at all locations.
Selecting The Best AC Installation Companies - The Methodology Used
To determine which companies offer the best AC installation, maintenance, and repair services, I had to research numerous businesses in the industry. Since this was a very long list, it was important to eliminate businesses that were not worth considering, for which certain factors had to be taken into account.
Some of these included the reputation of the company, residential and commercial services offered, brands offered, customer satisfaction, etc. Considering these factors allowed me to make the list more manageable and begin the next phase of the process. In this, I looked at the procedure followed by the remaining companies for installing AC units, repairing them, and providing maintenance.
This also covered the service area in which the services were offered since a company that does not operate in many locations is not suitable for most customers. In the end, the businesses offering all these services in a wider area were included in this list.
Each of the selected companies specializes in a certain area. For instance, American Residential Services, LLP offers the widest selection of services, while TemperaturePro offers the best services for commercial establishments.
Similarly, for customers who want sustainable options, Dr. Energy Saver is the ideal choice, while The Home Depot is great if you want to get window AC units installed. Here are some of the parameters that I considered when finalizing the list:
Availability in different states
Emergency services
Warranty period
Appointment scheduling options
Customer service
Available financing options
Other services offered
What Is The Cost Of An AC Installation?
There are no standard charges when it comes to getting air conditioners installed in residential or commercial properties. In most cases, the price depends on the type and size of the air conditioning unit that needs to be installed. The installation cost can range from $3,800 to $7,900, with the average cost being around $5,800.
For instance, if you plan to get a window unit installed, which is usually smaller, the installation process will be less labor intensive, and therefore, the cost will be less. On the other hand, getting a central heating and AC unit installed can cost you thousands of dollars.
But other factors, such as the brand of the product and the location of the property, can also affect it. And the size of the building in which it has to be installed plays a major role in determining the cost.
The capacity of an air conditioning unit is measured in British Thermal Units or BTUs. One square foot of area requires about 18 BTUs for effective cooling, and air conditioners with a higher capacity tend to be more expensive. So, a bigger house will require a larger and more powerful HVAC system, and you need to pay more for cooling.
To find out the exact cost of AC installation, I recommend contacting the installation company and getting an accurate quote from them.
Tip
When hiring an AC installation company, considering your budget is among the most important things. But even more than that, it is important to find a company that can provide reliable service. Going with a cheap contractor can lead to problems later on if the air conditioner is not installed properly.
And when asking for a quote, try to get a complete breakdown of the total cost before making a final decision. This can help avoid hidden charges that can increase the price of installation.
Services Provided By AC Installation Companies
AC installation companies generally provide a wide range of services related to installing, repairing, and maintaining HVAC systems. Services included in installation generally involve installing new plumbing, ductwork, or electrical fixtures required for the air conditioning unit and the unit itself.
Depending on the company, it can provide installation services for different types of air conditioners, such as a central AC system, ductless mini split air conditioners, windows ACs, and others.
Then there are repair services, which involve diagnosing problems with the AC system, repairing parts and components that are malfunctioning, and performing replacements of such parts if required. Finally, the HVAC technicians perform inspections, cleaning, and tune-ups under the maintenance services offered by AC installation companies to keep the system running optimally.
Besides these, AC installation companies often offer emergency services, which can be especially beneficial if your air conditioner breaks down suddenly and requires quick repairs. In such cases, companies usually send a technician within a few hours who can perform an inspection to identify the issue and resolve it.
Such 24/7 services can also be very useful if there are other issues with your AC system, such as strange noises, unusual smells, or water leaks near the unit.
Benefits Of Hiring A Good AC Installation Company
If your old air conditioner is malfunctioning, waiting to get it repaired or replaced will only make the problem worse. Similarly, if the unit is due for maintenance, I suggest calling up a professional AC maintenance company as soon as possible. Timely maintenance can help prevent and resolve problems that may be caused by clogged filters, dust, and dirt.
Delaying the maintenance or waiting to get a faulty air conditioner replaced can lead to various problems. Firstly, old air conditioners that are not operating properly usually consume more energy, leading to higher power bills. Additionally, such units reduce the air quality, which can be a potential health hazard.
By hiring a reputed AC installation and repair company in time, you can get the issues affecting the air conditioner looked at. Properly trained HVAC professionals can perform repairs, undertake regular maintenance activities, and replace faulty air conditioners efficiently.
Thus, you can enjoy the benefits of improved air quality, greater energy savings, and maximum comfort.
Conclusion
Finding the right AC installation company can take considerable time and effort. But hopefully, with the options I've mentioned in this guide, you will find the process a bit simpler. The first thing to do is to check which of these businesses offers services at your location.
Then, select from the ones in the area and try to obtain quotes from them. I would also recommend going through their website to gather all the required information and checking out customer reviews. And when making price comparisons, consider additional factors, like emergency services, warranties offered, and customer services.
This will help you select the most suitable option.
The best air conditioner brands have achieved their position because of tried-and-true quality, outstanding customer service, and durable products. Frigidaire is one such brand that has been providing reliable ACs and compact comfort for decades. If you're looking for an affordable option, American Standard delivers tough, long-lasting ACs that function quickly and efficiently.
When you're looking for the best air conditioner, you usually look up individual products first and feel confused. This is because the models are just reflections of their brand, and factoring that into your decision from the start will help you make better choices.
So, if you're going back and forth between your central air conditioner options and wondering which one suits you better, pause for a while and look at the bigger picture. You need good features, but you also need a brand you can depend upon.
Thus, I've curated a list of the best air conditioning brands and provided explanations to help you see my reasoning. Let’s begin!
Common Factors In The Best Air Conditioning Brands
While reading this article, you might have doubts about the criteria I considered to include a brand on this list. To answer your query, there are sure signs of a good brand that I've learned to recognize over the years. I've described some of them below and explained why I trust this judgment. I hope this information helps you make better decisions, too.
1. Customer Service
You may not consider it at the time of purchase, but customer service is the most crucial factor when choosing an air conditioning brand.
An air conditioner is a long commitment, and you're bound to encounter some problems along the way. So, you need a brand that you can trust with consistent servicing, repairs, and honest communication. Furthermore, malfunctioning central air conditioning units can be dangerous. You will spend a lot of time with it in a small, enclosed space. Thus, you should ensure that any health or fire hazards will be addressed immediately.
However, it's more than just repairs. A company with helpful and swift customer service is a company that values you, and you can trust that they put the same efforts into their product quality. Thus, investing in such an air conditioner will help you maintain it for years.
2. Additional Services Provided
You should choose an air conditioning brand that delivers the product most suited to your needs, but you should also consider some extra services. For example, perfectly functional central air conditioning units will be frustrating to install if the dealers don't provide help. On the other hand, if you choose the right HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning) company, their staff will deliver the air conditioning system to your home and set it up in your room within a few hours.
Similarly, you'd prefer calling experienced professionals for repair and servicing instead of looking for a local electrician who may not know your central air conditioner. It's not only easier to contact the brand's dedicated electricians, but it's also safer and quicker than the other options.
3. Warranty
When choosing a central air conditioner, you should always opt for a warranty of 1 year or more. However, there's more to it than the numbers on individual products. To shop smart, you'll need to find the trends in the product warranties of each brand.
No HVAC business wants to lose money by promising a warranty for attic HVAC units likely to require frequent repair or replacement. Thus, it makes sense that a brand consistently providing more extended warranties for its central air conditioners has confidence in their durability and functionality. Similarly, it's best to avoid air conditioner sellers that don't bother with good warranties.
Also, the best tip I can give you is to pay attention to the fine print on the warranty. A central air conditioner can have different warranties for regular functions, installation, and parts. Thus, don't be amazed by big numbers, and choose wisely.
4. Brand Popularity
The brand's popularity is significant, but I'm not telling you to pick the ones trending at the moment blindly. Instead, you should consider the factors that turn a brand into a household name.
Firstly, these brands were usually established years ago, and they have stood the test of time. This has also helped them gain experience. Thus, you can have a fair amount of trust in their portable and central air conditioners.
Secondly, brands are only popular when customers are satisfied with their products for a long time. There are always those viral brands that seem to spread everywhere overnight. However, they fizzle out when the hype dies and customers start finding product defects.
Therefore, maintaining consistent trust in the market signifies durability, high performance, and top quality. Also, these big brands have a reputation to uphold, which makes them highly attuned to your needs as a customer. You can depend on them for authentic window air conditioners, smooth installation, and easy servicing.
5. Your Budget
Your budget influences the air conditioner's specifications, quality, and additional features. Most importantly, having a good idea of your budget will help you choose a suitable brand.
Brands generally price their air conditioners based on the quality they provide, their post-purchase services, and their position in the market. Thus, you're likely to find the air conditioner you want within your budget if you shop around and critically compare the options. However, your budget should always be realistic because going cheap might get you into problems in the future.
For example, suppose you're considering 2 central air conditioners with similar features, but one is costlier with a 5-star energy efficiency rating, and the other is cheap but not energy star certified. So, even though you may think you're saving money by choosing the cheaper option, it'll actually weigh heavier on your electricity bill. On the other hand, the 5-star air conditioner will make up the price difference in a few months and save you some more.
Thus, have a fixed budget to keep yourself in check, but also have an open mind and analyze your options with a long-term mindset. Now, you can match this budget with the average prices of each brand and choose accordingly.
6. Customer Satisfaction And Reviews
This one's a no-brainer: you obviously need to know what previous customers have experienced. However, there are some ways to improve how you process reviews.
If you pick a well-known brand, you'll probably be overwhelmed by thousands of reviews, ranging from reverent appreciation to 3-page essays insulting everything from the products to the customer service. You need to filter through this noise by sticking to what you care about and disregarding the rest.
For example, suppose you're looking for simple central air conditioning units with manual controls. In that case, a negative review complaining about the lack of a remote shouldn't be a problem for you. Similarly, another user might be praising an air conditioner's heating mode. But if you're in an area with mild winters, you'll only need the cooling function, so you shouldn't be swayed by the features that do not matter.
Another thing to remember is that anger will always be a stronger motivator for reviewers than comfort. Picture this - your air conditioner is running perfectly, and you're cool and relaxed in your bed. In contrast, now imagine that your air conditioner has had a sudden failure and the customer helpline numbers were busy. In which case would you have a sudden burst of energy to leave a long online review about your experience? For most people, it's the negative one.
Thus, take all negative reviews with a grain of salt, and consider whether it's a general problem or a complaint about a hyper-specific situation. But it doesn't mean you should take all positive reviews at face value. Generally, it's a good practice to be wary of reviews that appear repetitively throughout the product page and use your gut instincts to judge all positive comments.
7 Best Air Conditioner Brands
1. Frigidaire - Best Well-Known And Reliable AC Brand
Pros
Familiarity
Low refrigerant needs
Stringent quality tests
Aluminum coil durability
Cons
High noise level
Frigidaire is an air conditioner and refrigerator brand under the home appliance manufacturer Electrolux, and it was originally named the Guardian Frigerator Company. It's one of the widely recognized names in the cooling and air conditioning industry. In fact, most Americans in the 1990s used the name Frigidaire to refer to any refrigerator.
Thus, it has decades of popularity and customer trust. However, its expertise lies not just in home air conditioners but also vehicular systems. Frigidaire has been one of the top suppliers of inbuilt air conditioners for cars ranging from Rolls-Royces to Jaguars.
Additionally, it strives for the maximum Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio in its appliances. In fact, it produced the first split air conditioner with a Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio as high as 25.5.
Nowadays, Frigidaire outsources the manufacturing processes to Nortek Global HVAC and thoroughly tests every AC unit to maintain its standards. They use a test named Demand flow to check the efficiency of every air conditioner, eliminating the need for human testers to go through every single machine.
Additionally, Frigidaire is a suitable option if you're looking for a reliable air conditioner within your budget. Although it has fewer choices regarding air conditioner models, the features are helpful, and you can easily find what you're looking for in its catalog. Moreover, each product line has specifications fine-tuned to customers' needs over the years.
However, if you're opting for a Frigidaire air conditioner, remember that they're generally noisier than their alternatives. The noise can be anywhere from 57 to 70 decibels, depending on the model, which is around the level of a crowd or a busy highway. But if you usually don't notice the sounds after a while, you'll find no issue with your air conditioner.
Typical Warranty: 10-year parts warranty and comfort pledge | Customer Service: Mostly responsive and speedy | Market Expertise: 105 years | Additional Services: Installation, servicing, out-of-warranty repair
Dave Lennox founded this company in 1895, and it later evolved to be known as Lennox International Inc. It's based in Texas and conducts HVAC business around the world.
I'm including it on my list for its many benefits, the primary one being the high efficiency of the Lennox air conditioners. This is achieved through superior quality products and a range of power-saving options. For example, you can switch your air conditioner's energy source from your building's wiring to the gas, and vice versa. This'll help you pick the option that saves you the most on monthly bills.
Also, the air conditioners have thermostats and intelligent options that will control your room temperature while preventing wastefulness. They'll measure your temperature and only cool and warm you as much as you require, cutting down on unnecessary spending.
Additionally, Lennox provides more options for you with their 3 air conditioner ranges named Merit, Elite, and Dave Lennox Signature Collection. Of these, Merit is the most affordable, while the Signature Collection has 10-year warranties and higher prices. Elite is the middle ground, with a delicate balance between prices and efficient features. Also, because of the eco-friendliness, you can choose a Lennox product that qualifies for deductions from your tax.
Lennox even offers quick and safe installation services for a fee. This installation charge is the reason the prices of most of their air conditioners are unpredictable. However, you'll be benefited from investing in this service. Lennox provides experienced mechanics who can install your air conditioner with more ease and efficiency than any other professionals, and you can contact them if you encounter any issues.
Thus, overall, Lennox lies on the high end of air conditioner costs, but it provides quality and services to match. If you can fit it into your budget, it's a suitable choice that you won't regret.
Typical Warranty: 5 years for Merit and Elite, 10 for Signature | Customer Service: Some quality reduction in the last two years | Market Expertise: 128 years | Additional Services: Installation, annual servicing
Less energy-efficient air conditioner than most competitors
American Standard is an affordable, convenient HVAC brand providing durable central air conditioning units and reliable services. It was established 130 years ago, making it one of the oldest brands in the HVAC industry.
It's an ideal brand if you live in a harsh area with extreme weather. American Standard conducts extensive tests to ensure its products are durable against physical impact, heavy rain, thunderstorms, scorching summers, and hail. Thus, you can go for it if you're in an area with frequent tornado possibilities or unforgiving sun.
However, its warranties are tricky. You get two types of warranties: One for the essential parts and another for the scroll compressor. The basic parts warranty is fair, and you can replace failing parts in reasonable scenarios. However, most other HVAC companies provide more extended scroll compressor warranties than American Standard, so you should exercise caution and consider if you can keep it safe after the warranties expire.
It also includes innovative home automation options in its AC systems. Installing the American Standard Home mobile app allows you to connect to your central AC system and thermostat anywhere, anytime. Thus, you can control the temperature even when you lose your remote, accidentally damage it, or are too busy with work to look for it. Additionally, you can turn the AC on while returning from work, and it'll cool the space for your arrival.
Furthermore, it offers ACs in 3 series. The Silver air conditioners are single-stage, and they are the most affordable. Moving up, the Gold series has two-stage ACs with energy efficiency. Finally, Platinum is the most premium tier and has an AccuComfort feature. Thus, your Platinum AC can save on your energy bill by adjusting the heating and cooling to use the least power.
Typical Warranty: Basic (5-year) or Extended (10-year) | Customer Service: Streamlined and courteous | Market Expertise: 130 years | Additional Services: Installation, care & repair
Coleman has been operating since 1958, and it's known for its sleek ACs with exemplary warranties. Its compact designs are suitable for small rooms, dorms, or offices. The ACs work fast with minimum noise, and you'll be satisfied with their functioning for years.
However, most Coleman ACs aren't ideal for those who need smart features and high-technology controls. The most advanced features here are an intelligent thermostat and energy-efficient control, but it's a solid option if you care about affordability and durability more than smart features.
Further, Coleman provides reliable warranties. For most of their ACs, you'll have a 10-year warranty and free servicing for the first year. Also, some of their products have a lifetime compressor warranty. However, it's important to note that the warranties are only valid if you register your AC system within 3 months of installing it. Additionally, because of the money-back guarantee, you get a refund if your AC fails to work even after repairs.
I also need to mention that you can only get the money-back guarantee if you get your AC installed by Coleman's mechanics.
What's more, it saves you more in the long run. Because of the energy efficiency, its ACs may qualify for tax cuts, depending on your chosen model. Coleman also provides financing through Synchrony Financial and Fortiva Retail Credit. Thus, it's clear that the HVAC company designed its products with accessibility and comfort in mind.
At 53 decibels, Coleman ACs are some of the quietest ones on the market. That's about the noise level you'd expect in a library! So, you can work or sleep peacefully without even noticing it.
Also, its pricing is suited to your specific needs. The AC has a basic price, but a technician can also visit your work or living space to give you a more accurate quote. It's based on your installation requirements, area, and more.
Typical Warranty: 10 years | Customer Service: Helpful | Market Expertise: 123 years | Additional Services: Annual tuneup, installation
Willis Carrier, the inventor of the modern air conditioner, founded the Carrier Global Corporation in 1915. These days, it's based in Florida, United States, and distributes heaters and ventilators along with its original line of the HVAC system.
According to customers, Carrier is a generally expensive HVAC brand, but its reliable engineering and market leader position make it worthwhile.
Out of all the air conditioner brands on my list, this has exceptional noise levels and energy-efficient systems. The sound is as quiet as 51 decibels, while the highest Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio that it can reach is around 26. Thus, you can go for Carrier units if you don't mind investing in a suitable AC from an experienced brand.
What's more, its ACs are divided into various categories that'll streamline your choice. Its comfort series values affordability above all else so that you might find a good deal in your range. Moving to a higher tier, the Performance air conditioning has suitable features and durability at a reasonable rate. Finally, the Infinity series has the best ACs of the brand, with the quietest performance and highest energy conservation rates.
Furthermore, the Infinity air conditioning has variable compressor speeds that can run on an inverter. Thus, they have a high degree of consistency, and you'll enjoy a comfortable atmosphere in your room without sudden cold or warm periods.
To make things better, Carrier products have guaranteed refunds for one year if you're dissatisfied with their functioning. However, this is only applicable if Carrier authorizes the HVAC contractor that sold you the AC, and you should ensure this before making a decision.
Finally, the one thing some customers found lacking in this brand was the warranty. With Carrier's expertise and promises, its 10-year warranty may seem below average to a few. Also, this doesn't include the refrigerant fluid, extra parts, or tune-ups. Thus, it's only suitable for those who are okay with being responsible for most of the AC's technical maintenance after installation.
Typical Warranty: 10 years on functional parts only | Customer Service: Responsive | Market Expertise: 108 years | Additional Services: Installation
Trane's operations began in 1885 under James Trane and his son. Aside from the HVAC system, it also supplies management systems for your apartment and office.
In 1984, American Standard purchased A-Trane. However, they are still making products under separate brand names. Since the AC systems are manufactured in similar warehouses, most customers report similar features, with minute differences in the outward appearance, warranty, and prices.
Like most HVAC companies, Trane has 3 series of air conditioners arranged in ascending order of features and cost. The XL air conditioning is budget-friendly and has minimal features. However, if you have a restricted budget, it's best not to go for the XL products. According to most reviews, it's because you can get the exact specifications at even lower budgets from other air conditioner brands.
However, the XR and XV series make Trane stand out in the market as a supplier of reliable air conditioning. XR air conditioning has the most efficient features within a reasonably priced catalog. Also, the XV series has high efficiency that'll actually cost you less by saving your electricity bill over the years.
What's more, these two series have air conditioners with a Spine Fin Coil. If you don't know, this coil is more durable than its alternatives because its aluminum constituent is resistant to wear and tear. Further, it's engineered to cool your home or office with speed and power optimization.
Adding to the advantages, Trane provides good warranties. It has a 10-year part warranty, and choosing the most suitable AC units can get you a 12-year warranty on the compressor. So, if your air conditioner parts fail before their time due to defects, the company takes responsibility and replaces them for free.
However, there's a catch, and I'll help you be wary of a mistake many previous customers made. You should remember to register your AC unit within 2 months of buying it. Otherwise, the warranty reduces to 5 years.
Typical Warranty: 10 years + extended warranty on compressor | Customer Service: Difficult to reach | Market Expertise: 138 years | Additional Services: Installation, parts replacement
Rheem is well-known among homeowners for offering intelligent features and Wi-Fi smart home control at competitive rates. Founded in 1925 and situated in the HVAC industry in the 1950s, it provides reliable and high-quality air conditioners on a budget.
Also, Rheem is one of the HVAC companies striving to reduce their carbon footprint on the planet. Currently, it aims to half its greenhouse gas emissions and eliminate its waste by its centenary in 2025. Furthermore, it's creating an energy-efficient line of the HVAC system that cuts the overall footprint into half its current value. You can invest in Rheem Manufacturing Company if you want to support a future-oriented brand striving to protect our planet.
Although, I must note that Rheem's affordable rates come with some stipulations. Since the parts are on the cheaper side, they're more likely to fail because of extreme climate or overuse. And when they fail, the repair costs are so high that it would be wiser to buy a new AC unit at that point.
Another fallacy many users commit is cutting down on central AC installation costs by hiring locally. Since Rheem doesn't require internally certified mechanics to install your air conditioner, you can opt for cheaper, external options. However, if your technician isn't perfect, it'll lead to more repair needs in the future, thus costing you more.
After reading this far, you're probably curious about Rheem's warranty. It's pretty standard and reasonable, with 10-year parts warranties on most AC units and 5-year assurances on a select few. Also, you can replace your central air conditioning with a new HVAC system free of charge, but only if your situation falls into specific categories that make the failures entirely dependent on the company's faults.
Overall, Rheem produces suitable middle-range air conditioners compatible with Alexa voice control and EcoNet Thermostats.
Typical Warranty: 5 or 10 years | Customer Service: Quick and helpful | Market Expertise: 98 years | Additional Services: Optional installation, repairs
When choosing an AC brand, some additional features can help you decide. Apart from the brand's product quality, customer service, insurance, and warranty contract, you should also be on the lookout for extra features that make your AC more convenient and safe. I've listed some possible attractions below.
1. Anti-Bacterial Filters
Of late, people have grown more aware of the invisible contaminants surrounding us. Although perfectly filtering air conditioners are yet to be invented, you can start taking disease and infection prevention measures today by investing in an AC with anti-bacterial filters.
These filters have fine meshes that prevent several small particles from entering your house. This includes bacteria, airborne animal waste, and pollen allergens. Thus, you'll stay safer with minimum changes in your AC maintenance routine.
Therefore, look for air conditioner brands that provide this filter because it signifies a consideration for the customer's safety.
2. Dehumidifier
Have you ever dealt with one of those days when the air moisture is just intolerable? It makes you feel sweaty and uncomfortable, and it ruins your hair. However, you worry that turning on your cooling AC will only worsen things.
For these situations, a dehumidifier is your buddy. It has a chemical called a desiccant that slowly absorbs the moisture from your room until you're relaxed. So, when you compare the features of two HVAC brands, look for a company that builds dehumidifiers into their central air conditioners. It'll bring you more value for your money and make your AC unit function in more than one weather condition.
3. Heating Mode
Maybe you're moving to a new part of the country with scorching summers, and you're not concerned with anything beyond immediate relief from the heat. Despite this, you should try to think about other times of the year. Usually, places with unbearable summer heat are far inland, and they also have extreme winters. Thus, if you don't play smart now, you'll need a new heat pump in a few months.
Some air conditioner brands have started including heaters in their ACs to combat this issue. Of course, not all AC units from a brand will have central heating. It depends on many factors, including the AC size, budget, and brand expertise.
However, you should look for a brand supplying inbuilt heaters and make the additional investment. Look at it this way: you're getting an AC and a central furnace in one.
4. Auto Clean
Are you stressing about the cleaning frequency of your AC? If you live alone or are busy most of the day, regularly cleaning your AC on your own can be challenging. However, most people also shy away from hiring external cleaners so frequently.
When you choose a brand offering auto-cleaning central air conditioners, you reduce the time you spend obsessing about your AC's current filter state and cleaning it by hand. This smart system uses a timer and sensors near the filter to know when it should take some auto-cleaning measures.
Of course, this cleaning won't be perfect, and the AC will require a manual cleanup eventually. However, the frequency is significantly reduced, and the filters will stay clean and safe for much longer after every wash.
Benefits Of Choosing The Best Air Conditioner Brand
After reading the factors to consider and additional features, you're probably aware of some ways you can benefit by taking some time to choose the most suitable AC company. From my experience, here are a few surprising ways my life improved when I chose the right brand. They may help you decide or convince you to adjust your requirements.
Benefit 1:
You can dial customer service if you notice your central air conditioning system having an issue. They'll respond immediately, and you'll have a mechanic at your doorstep the next day. No more long waits as your requests get pushed around from person to person!
Benefit 2:
Sometimes, it's unavoidable to have some manufacturing defects in your AC unit. However, you need not panic about the wasted money. The brand will immediately replace the malfunctioning parts or even the whole AC unit if the fault lies on its side.
Benefit 3:
You can buy an AC once, use it and carry it with you when you transfer to new areas. It will last for years and become your constant companion.
Benefit 4:
When the tornado sirens start wailing, you can focus on the safety of yourself and your loved ones while staying stress-free about how well your central air conditioning system will put up with the weather.
Benefit 5:
Energy star, energy efficiency, and SEER ratings are hard to conceptualize from a homeowner's perspective. However, you'll understand its efficient energy use when you notice significant reductions in your energy consumption over the months.
Benefit 6:
If you want a face-to-face conversation with a representative, you'll usually find a physical outlet near you because the brand is well-known.
Tip
When choosing an AC brand and analyzing customer satisfaction online, pay more attention to the reviews that include an image. It's a small addition that lends a lot of credibility to the claim and experience of a faceless review.
Conclusion
And now we're at the end of my list of the best air conditioner brands. I hope you found this guide helpful and thorough.
As you can see in the list, some of these air conditioner brands are quite similar, while others couldn't be more drastically different. From specifications, options, and manufacturing plants to the external look and affordability, the major AC brands are constantly competing and conversing with each other.
Thus, you should know what you're looking for and stick to it, even when facing dazzling features or disappointing but cheap options. There is no ultimate best brand on this list, which all comes down to how you think you'll fare with their products.
Thus, maintain a reasonable budget, think critically, and choose the best AC brand for your home.
Finally, I want to mention some HVAC brands that are my personal favorites. Frigidaire is a widely known name that offers security and reliability. True to this, their products are sturdy and efficient.
I favor American Standard for a budget buy because of its commitment to weather resistance. Also, its energy efficiency and smart control are commendable.
The LG 11,500 BTU through-the-wall air conditioner edges over the others because it cools a room quicker, thanks to the turbo fan and dehumidifier. Options from Koldfront and Whirlpool are also dependable because of their multiple fan speeds.
Rising temperatures and high humidity levels make summers unbearable, and without an air conditioner, keeping yourself cool in the heatwave is nearly impossible. Now choosing an air conditioner may seem easy, but believe me, it isn’t because of the numerous factors that need to be considered.
To save you from the hassle, I’ve put together a list of the 7 best through-the-wall air conditioners.
Best Through-The-Wall Air Conditioning Units
Here is the list of the 7 best through-the-wall air conditioners that you can use to comfortably cool your living space.
This LG 11,500 BTU air conditioner is sturdily built and weighs around 80 pounds. Upon unboxing, I found the brand sends all accessories one would need to install this unit– AC power plugs and sockets, a mesh filter, and a trim kit. The box also contained a remote control, an installation instruction manual, and a 1-year warranty card.
After skimming through the instructions, I started the installation – preparing the wall sleeve, inserting the unit, and attaching the ground wire. In less than 60 minutes, the air conditioner was ready for use, so installation won’t be much of a chore if you’re into DIYs.
Like installation, maintenance is also easy-peasy– simply wash the filter occasionally to ensure the unit functions efficiently.
Moving on, this AC unit has a cooling power of 11,500 BTU, so it works well in rooms up to 530 square feet. Further, this through-the-wall air conditioner is equipped with a turbo fan, which is why it cools a room within 30 minutes.
What I liked about this air conditioning unit is that it allows users to customize the cooling experience, thanks to the 3 cooling speeds. And like most window air conditioners, this unit also features 3 pre-programmed timers that add to the user’s convenience.
Settings can be tweaked either by using the digital control panel or the remote control supplied in the package. Outfitted with a zero ozone depletion potential (ODP) R-32 refrigerant, this in-wall air conditioner has a combined energy efficiency rating of 10.6. Likewise, its seasonal energy efficiency ratio is 13, which is decent.
Though not an Energy Star-certified unit, it still comes with an energy saver mode to reduce electricity consumption.
This air conditioning unit can be used as a dehumidifier in spaces with high humidity, as its dry mode reduces moisture levels well. Moreover, its auto restart feature is a thoughtful addition by the brand, because of which the unit restarts itself automatically after a power outage.
Cooling Power: 11,500 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 13 | Floor Area: 530 Square Feet | Volts: 115 Volts
Lighter than the LG air conditioner, the Koldfront through-the-wall unit is usable all year round, even in cold weather because of its heating capabilities. Alongside 8,000 BTU of cooling power, this air conditioning unit comes with 4,000 BTU heating capacity.
Weighing around 66.6 pounds, this through-the-wall air conditioner boasts a lightweight design. And since it’s finished in white, it blends well with modern and traditional decor, adding elegance to the space.
On the front, it has a digital control panel in the top-right corner, next to which are air louvers. And beneath the two sits lie the air filter, which is easy to maintain, as you can wash it yourself.
Similar to other wall AC units, the digital panel features buttons for most settings. Besides the power on/off button, it has the sleep mode, energy saver, and fan speed button. Even the temperature can be increased or decreased via the control panel, while the backlight in the digital panel makes it easy to see the temperature in the dark.
While testing the remote control, I found it was quite intuitive and responded quickly to the user’s command. I pressed the sleep button from the bed, and the AC immediately switched to sleep mode. What’s even better is that it can be used from any corner of a 350 square feet room.
What sets it apart from other wall-mounted air conditioners is its air louvers, which can be adjusted in 4 directions. Now speaking of the performance, this wall-mounted air conditioner cools small to medium-sized rooms efficiently. Thanks, to the 3 fan speeds, you can create a cozy and comfortable space by adjusting the fan setting.
Plus, installing this unit isn’t troublesome if you already have sleeved installed on the walls. However, if the sleeves aren’t installed, make sure you order them because the brand doesn’t supply them. Not to forget, this air conditioning unit is sold in 4 sizes, so pick accordingly.
Cooling Power: 8,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 9.6 | Floor Area: 350 Square Feet | Volts: 115 Volts
EXCEPTIONAL COOLING AND HEATING: This powerful through the...
COOLING AND HEATING FLEXIBILITY: With 8-way directional...
What I like
Sold in 3 cooling capacities, including 12,000 BTU and 14,000 BTU
Serves as a supplemental heating solution
Comes with a quick-access air filter, making cleaning an easy chore
Covered with a 1-year warranty
What I don't like
Doesn’t operate on a standard 115 Volt electrical outlet
This air conditioner has made its way onto my list because it serves as a cooling and electric heating system. Boasting a cooling capacity of 10,000 BTU, this packaged terminal air conditioner is suitable for a space of 450 square feet. Bedroom, living room, or dining room– you can install this unit anywhere you want.
Even the heating capacity of this wall air conditioner is 10,000 BTU. In overly cold climates, it can be used as a supplemental heating solution.
Like most air conditioners, this unit by Whirlpool allows users to improve indoor comfort, thanks to the 3 cooling fan speeds. Between high, medium, and low, you can adjust to whichever setting you feel is best to lower the temperature of the indoor air.
On this unit, there are 4 adjustable modes– auto, fan, dry, and cool mode. Switching to cool mode will cool a room, whereas the fan mode circulates air throughout the space.
Setting the AC to dry mode reduces moisture levels in a space, so it can be installed in your basement too. Meanwhile, the air conditioner sets the temperature by detecting the room temperature if switched to auto mode.
The customization options are further completed by an integrated, 24-hour programmable timer, which helps users manage the active time of their unit. Although onboard electronic controls are easy to use, it comes with a remote control, which adds to the convenience.
This Energy Star-certified AC has a SEER of 9.7 and lowers energy consumption if switched to eco or sleep mode. Both modes ensure you have a comfortable sleeping experience while saving on electricity bills.
I must also mention its louvers can be adjusted in 8 directions.
Cooling Power: 10,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 9.7 | Floor Area: 450 Square Feet | Volts: 230 Volts
Cooling and Heating: Offers 14,000 BTU cooling and 10,600...
Fan Speeds and Operation Modes: Features three fan speeds...
What I like
Serves both as a dehumidifier and supplemental heating solution
Air filter improves indoor air by trapping dirt, impurities, and pet danders
Built-in compliance with standards set forth by UL
Comes with everything needed to install the unit, including sleeves
What I don't like
Isn’t backed by a manufacturer’s warranty
Although the Koldfront 8,000 BTU air conditioner ticked off all the boxes, including efficiency and longevity, it couldn’t be used in large spaces because of its cooling capacity.
So, when it was time to install an air conditioner in my living room, I ordered this 14,000 BTU air conditioner from Koldfront. Right out of the box, I liked the compact design of this unit, although it’s slightly heavier than the 8,000 units.
Thanks to the white coating, it adds a touch of class to whichever space you install it in.
On the front part are the air filter, air louvers, and a digital control panel. Starting with air louvers, they can be adjusted manually without a remote control to whichever direction you want the air to flow. Next is the digital panel that is equipped with buttons for almost all settings, from the power button to the mode button.
Like most through-the-wall air conditioners, I found that taking off the filter and removing dirt, pet dander, and other impurities was quite easy. All you need is a mild detergent and lukewarm water to clean the filter, and that’s it! Therefore, cleaning the filter isn’t a time-consuming task.
While the settings can be adjusted via the control panel, the supplied remote control makes it easy for users to control the unit without having to get up. Even when the room is dimly lit, you can increase the temperature or switch between modes easily using the remote control, thanks to the backlight in the LCD.
Instead of ozone-depleting refrigerant, it features R-410A refrigerant, which doesn’t contain chlorine or bromine. So, this AC won’t contribute as much to environmental damage as other air conditioners.
With a cooling capacity of 10,000 BTU, it has a heating capacity of 10,600. Therefore, it can be used as a supplemental heating solution during cold winter months. That isn’t all; it works as a dehumidifier too.
Koldfront air conditioners are usually integrated with energy saver mode and sleep mode, and this unit is no exception. That means it keeps you cozy without increasing your electricity bills.
And if safety is your top priority, you’ll be pleased to learn that this wall-mounted air conditioner is UL-certified.
Cooling Power: 14,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 9.3 | Floor Area: 700 Square Feet | Volts: 230 Volts
Equipped with both air conditioner technology and heating function
1-year limited warranty
What I don't like
Compressor of the unit is slightly noisy
The AMANA through-the-wall air conditioner caught my attention because of its unique design.
Boasting a compact body, this wall-mounted air conditioner is slightly slanted at the top, where the air louvers and the control panel sit. While the air louvers supply cool air to the room, the control panel allows users to make adjustments as per their preferences. On the front rests the air filter that purifies indoor air by trapping all kinds of impurities.
Sporting a white profile, this AC seamlessly blends with all kinds of decors and adds charm to the space because of its vintage design.
This AC, however, hasn’t earned a spot on my list only because of its aesthetics. Even when it comes to functionality, this unit lived up to its claims.
Where most wall and window air conditioners are integrated with 3 modes, this wall-mounted air conditioner has 4 modes– fan, energy saver, cool and heat mode.
Setting the unit to the cool mode will cool a space of 550 square feet well, whereas the fan mode will only circulate air within a space. While the cool mode cools a room, the heating function makes the space snug in winter. Therefore, it’s among those few air conditioners that are usable throughout the year.
Designed to save power, the energy saver feature is further supplemented by sleep mode. Energy saver mode only saves power, but the sleep mode adjusts the humidity and temperature while reducing energy consumption for a comfortable sleeping experience.
What separates it from other through-the-wall air conditioners is its high SEER of 14.00.
Quite similar to other air conditioners, this air conditioner comes with 3 fan speeds. Once the room is cooled at high speed, you can switch to medium or low speed to maintain the temperature.
AMANA has designed the unit to be user-friendly, and the addition of the remote control testifies to that. Much like the control panel, the remote control has buttons to adjust each and every setting. Not only can you turn the wall air conditioner on/off, but you can also switch modes and fan speeds from a distance with ease.
Last but not least, it’s covered with a limited 1-year warranty.
Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 14 | Floor Area: 550 Square Feet | Volts: 120 Volts
Can be controlled via the digital panel, remote control, and smartphones
Robustly built unit
Quieter than most other air conditioners
What I don't like
Requires professional installation
Slightly different from other through-the-wall air conditioners in design, the Friedrich WallMaster Smart Through-The-Wall Air Conditioner is built to last for years to come. Thanks to the impact-resistant front cover, this wall air conditioner won’t get damaged easily.
Relying on R-410A refrigerant, this air conditioner is integrated with almost all features found in other air conditioning units. Like, its fan speed can be customized between low, medium, and high. Furthermore, a 24-hour timer makes it easy to set the number of hours you want the device to operate.
But it differs from others in regard to the air louvers– they can be adjusted individually in the direction where the cold air is needed. It also comes with a smart fan to auto-adjust the fan speed in order to maintain a consistent temperature.
Besides the control panel, this wall-mounted air conditioner can be controlled in 2 ways– the remote control and your smartphone.
As it’s a Wi-Fi-integrated unit, you can control it via the FriedrichConnect mobile app. Download it, pair the unit, and tweak the settings via voice commands. What’s even better is you can invite other family members to manage the unit, so whoever uses it can adjust it as needed.
Adding to the ease of use is the check filter reminder, as the filter light illuminates every time the filter gets dirty. So, whenever the light blinks, remove the filter and wash it to clean the impurities from it.
Much like other WallMaster models by the brand, this wall-mounted air conditioner is engineered with Quietmaster technology, so it’s quieter than most other units I’ve tried to date. In addition, this vibration-isolating unit comes with dense blower insulation that blocks outdoor noise from entering the space.
The environmental impact of this AC is relatively lower than the traditional wall air conditioners, and its Energy Star certificate testifies to the same.
Since this wall air conditioner mounts flush to the exterior wall, installing it yourself would be dangerous. Novices shouldn’t try to install the AC themselves because even the slightest mistake can damage the unit.
All in all, this wall air conditioner with a cooling capacity of 15,400 BTU is a reliable option for spaces up to 700 square feet.
Cooling Power: 15,400 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 9.4 | Floor Area: 700 Square Feet | Volts: 230 Volts
Enjoy comfortable noise levels with our preferred units'...
LED display clean filter indicator 24 hour timer
What I like
Integrated with multiple modes, including sleep and dry mode
2-year limited warranty on parts
LED display clean filter indicator notifies when the filter needs to be cleaned
Equipped with eco-friendly refrigerant
What I don't like
Requires 230-Volt outlet to function
Engineered with dripless technology, the Impecca wall air conditioner is one of the most low-maintenance units on my list. That’s because it evaporates and expels moisture from the exhaust hose or duct (flow), just like portable air conditioners.
At first glance, this wall air conditioner appeared to be a unit from the nineties; even the remote control is slightly different compared to the present-day devices. People who want to add a classic touch to their interior decor should consider adding this air conditioner to their room because of its vintage design.
This 14,000 BTU through-the-wall air conditioner, with the help of energy-efficient technology, cools a room of 700 square feet quickly and efficiently.
Whether you’re sitting on the extreme left or right, its 4-way air louvers can direct the airflow to wherever you set it– up, down, left, or right. Auto, cool and dry– this through-the-wall air conditioner offers 3 cooling modes.
Even the fan speed is customizable, as you can choose between auto, low, medium, and high.
Moving forward, a control panel is equipped on the anterior of this wall air conditioner towards the top-right corner. It contains buttons for, more or less, every setting. Like, you can switch modes, and fan speeds, increase or decrease temperature and adjust other settings with the touch of a button.
There’s even a check filter indicator on the panel so that you can keep tabs on it and clean the filter when needed. Upon switching to the energy saver and sleep mode, this air conditioner consumes less energy without compromising on the cooling experience.
As you’d expect, the package includes a remote control to modify the settings from a distance.
Programming the unit to turn on/off at a certain time is also possible with this wall air conditioner because of the 24-hour programmable timer. And if there’s a power outage, the unit restarts automatically when power is restored. So, if that happens at night, you won’t wake up drenched in sweat, as the unit will restart itself once the power is restored.
Though equipped with a powerful compressor, it is a reasonably quiet unit. Meaning it doesn’t produce a loud noise while running, which is impressive.
Cooling Power: 14,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 13 | Floor Area: 750 Square Feet | Volts: 230 Volts
Buying Guide For The Best Through-The-Wall Air Conditioner
Learning about the best through-the-wall air conditioners certainly helps individuals shortlist those that would be a worthy addition to their space. However, deciding which one to order from among them on the basis of pros and cons isn’t simply enough knowledge.
There are quite a few factors that individuals need to take into account when ordering an air conditioner for their residential or commercial space. In this section, I’ll walk you through some important factors which, if kept in mind, can help you make a sound decision.
Without further ado, let’s check them out!
Cooling Capacity
So, among all factors, what’s most important is the cooling capacity of the air conditioner.
Now, the cooling capacity of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems is measured in BTUs (British Thermal Units). Basically, this tells you the amount of heat the air conditioner can eliminate from the indoor air. Taking that into account, the higher the BTUs, the more efficiently the unit will cool the room.
Through-the-wall air conditioners are supplied in varying cooling capacities, from 8,000 BTUs to 15,000 BTUs. Figuring out which unit out of them will cool your space efficiently is slightly tricky, especially if you’re using an AC for the first time.
However, I’ll simplify it for you: measure the square feet of the space where you intend and multiply it by 20. The answer you get by multiplying the square feet by 20 is the number of BTUs you need to lower the temperature of the room.
Anyone who isn’t confident in their mathematical skills can search for BTU calculators and use them to ascertain which air conditioner you should go for.
Remember, a unit with too high a cooling capacity will cool a space quickly without any dehumidification, whereas one with a low cooling capacity will not cool it at all. So, measure the space properly before you order a unit for your space.
Efficient Energy Use Or Energy Efficiency
For homeowners, energy conservation is a priority; you must always look for through-the-wall air conditioners that are energy efficient.
Keep in mind not all units available on the market are energy efficient, so you need to be careful when shopping for one. Almost all units come with an energy efficiency rating (EER), which gives users a picture of how much energy the wall air conditioner is likely to consume while running.
Generally, the energy consumption is affected by the cooling capacity of the unit. Therefore, the higher the cooling capacity, the more electricity the unit will consume. Like, a wall air conditioner of 18,000 BTUs will require a lot more energy than wall air conditioners with an 8,000 BTU capacity.
One of the easiest ways to ascertain energy efficiency is to divide the watt of the units by their BTUs. You can do this for all kinds of units– be it through the wall or window air conditioners.
As a rule of thumb: the higher the energy efficiency rating, the less energy the air conditioners use.
Almost all through-the-wall air conditioners have an energy efficiency rating between 9 and 11, with a few scoring as high as 14. Definitely, the wall air conditioners with a high EER will cost more than those with a low EER. But that’s a one-time cost, and you’ll save a considerable chunk every year on utility bills.
Along with the EER, don’t forget to check the Energy Star rating to see if it’s certified for energy efficiency. Although there are options with 1 or 2 stars, going for a unit with a 5 Energy Star rating will be the best bet.
Energy Star-rated wall air conditioners consume about 15% to 30% less energy than units that aren’t certified. Hence, opting for an Energy Star-rated unit will be a wise decision.
Noise Level
Much like a window air conditioner, a through-the-wall air conditioner is equipped with a compressor and an air handler. The former generates cold air, while the latter blows it into the room with the help of a large fan.
Because of this dual design, through-the-wall air conditioners are noisier than central air conditioners, whose air handler is hidden in the attic, and the compressor is outside.
Unlike a central air conditioner, a through-the-wall air conditioner is installed in a room where individuals work, relax or sleep. Therefore, going for a wall air conditioner whose noise output is low will create a comfortable environment.
Most through-the-wall air conditioners produce about 61 dB of noise while running, whereas some models produce as low as 50 dB even at the highest settings. Furthermore, a few brands engineer their wall air conditioners with Quietsmart technology, further dampening noise.
If you’re among those who like working in a quiet space, don’t forget to check the noise output of the wall air conditioner at both low and high settings.
Heating Function
A handful of brands integrate their through-the-wall air conditioner with a heating element.
One of the significant benefits of going for such units is that you need not spend extra money on a heating system. And in places with overly cold climates, these can be used as a supplemental heating solution along with a heater.
A through-the-wall air conditioner that plugs into a 115-Volt electrical outlet will have a heating capacity of about 5,100 BTUs. Such heating output will warm a space of 144 square feet excellently.
Meanwhile, through-the-wall air conditioners that rely on a 230-Volt outlet can heat a large space because of their high heating output, i.e., 10,600 BTUs. Precisely, such an air conditioner will heat a 500 square feet space perfectly.
Note that this heating function is meant to be used in conjunction with a heater or a furnace.
Therefore, if you reside in a city where the winters are harsh, a through-the-wall air conditioner with a heating function will be an excellent choice. But if you live in places with an idyllic climate all year round, the heating function won’t serve its purpose. In that case, you should go for units with air conditioning technology and save money.
Input Requirement
The input requirement of a through-the-wall air conditioner is generally indicated in Volts.
Every household, except for a few, is equipped with a standard electrical outlet of 115 Volts. The majority of air conditioners supplied on the market are compatible with 115-Volt electrical outlets.
But, air conditioners with a high cooling capacity require a 230-Volt electrical outlet to operate. So, if you decide to go for units of high capacity, you will have to call an electrician for electrical wiring.
Installation
Now, most people don’t pay attention to the installation of the unit, but it’s one of the most important factors that one must consider.
To begin with, not all wall air conditioners are easy to install because they are too heavy to handle or don’t come with clear instructions to mount the unit. Now, either way, hiring professionals is considered to be a safe solution lest you want your unit to get damaged.
But often, most units come with detailed instructions and each and every accessory from sleeve to fasteners. Therefore, the installation wouldn’t be a challenge when it comes to such units.
When ordering an AC, go through customer reviews to learn how easy or difficult it is to install the unit.
Maintenance
How well you maintain the unit decides the efficiency and longevity of the air conditioner.
Considering that, no one would want to go for a unit that requires frequent maintenance. Modern-day through-the-wall air conditioners come with washable and reusable filters. So, when they get dirty, you can always take them off, remove dirt and dust by washing them and put it back in place.
Through-The-Wall Air Conditioner FAQs
What are the advantages of using a through-the-wall air conditioner over other types of air conditioners?
There are several advantages of using a through-the-wall air conditioner, and they are as follows:
1. Better Cooling Capacity
Compared to window units, through-the-wall air conditioners cool a space better and more efficiently because of higher BTUs. Additionally, they are equipped with large fans, which supply cool air to space quicker than window ACs.
2. Does Not Block The View
Window AC units expel heat from the room via the exhaust hose that passes through the window, thereby blocking the view.
Conversely, a through-the-wall air conditioner exhausts humidity or warm air from the space through the hose in the walls. Unlike the window unit, it’s not installed in windows but on walls in a pre-set sleeve. Therefore, through-the-wall air conditioners do not block the view.
3. Easy On The Pockets
When compared to other air conditioners on the market, through-the-wall units are relatively inexpensive. You can even get energy-efficient units with high cooling capacity at an affordable price. Therefore, you won’t have to spend a huge chunk on upgrading to a through-the-wall air conditioner.
How do I properly maintain and clean my through-the-wall air conditioner?
Maintaining a through-the-wall AC unit is fairly easy.
As far as the air filter is concerned, you can wash it with mild soap and lukewarm water to remove all the impurities. Then wipe it with a clean, dry cloth before installing it back in place.
To clear the gunk from the evaporator coils, apply mild detergent and water on them and wipe it with a clean cloth.
Once in a while, you should wipe the exterior of the cabinet with a slightly wet cloth. Never attempt to clean the entire unit yourself, as you may damage components like the heat pump. Also, schedule a professional once or twice a year for maintenance and routine inspection to ensure components like the capacitor are working fine.
Conclusion
Through-the-wall air conditioners are cost-effective alternatives to central and window AC units. Because they are mounted on the wall, they do not occupy any floor space, like portable air conditioners.
With the 7 best through-the-wall air conditioners at your disposal, have you decided which one to get from Amazon for your home? If not, let me help you decide by sharing my top picks.
Without a doubt, the LG Through-The-Wall Air Conditioner takes the crown because of its quick cooling capacity and ability to reduce moisture levels in a space. The Koldfront Through-The-Wall Air Conditioner is a close second because of the 4-way adjustable air louvers, easy-to-clean filters, and 2-year warranty.
Doing groceries is fun until you are left with the dilemma of stacking them in the fridge, almost like you are stacking stones with fear that one wrong move and everything will fall apart.
Worry not; upright freezers are becoming popular because of how many items you can put into one freezer.
If you're like me, who constantly runs out of space for my frozen foods, then an upright freezer might be the one to solve your storage space problems.
The only problem is which upright freezer is the best for you. Why? As you can see, thousands of upright freezers are on the market today, and choosing one can be challenging.
Fortunately, I have done the hardest part of trimming down your choices to 9 of the best upright freezers today.
What Are the 9 Best Upright Freezers You Can Buy?
These are simply the best upright freezers on the market today.
They are all packed with convenient features that will make your life easier, and there is nothing to worry about having limited space.
The Frigidaire Brand has given us the best upright freezers in recent years.
This upright freezer, courtesy of Frigidaire, is made to keep your fruits, foods, and veggies frozen for longer periods while having plenty of extra storage space for additional items.
This upright freezer features EvenTemp technology that allows cold air to circulate evenly inside while reducing warm spots and keeping uniform temperature across all door shelves.
Most upright freezers don't have features like this, and it is a sight for new eyes knowing some of these features make the upright freezer purchase all worthwhile.
Overall, I'm impressed with the capacity of this upright freezer.
It has four freezer shelves, and while the upright freezer capacity is smaller than others, the internal layout's orientation is more than enough to keep your food frozen longer than expected.
Size: 29 x 27.75 x 67.75 inches | Capacity: 15.5 cubic feet | Product Weight: 143 pounds | Frost Type: Frost-free | Control Type: Electronic temperature control
The Insignia Frost-Free Upright Convertible Freezer is not your average upright freezer, as it's equipped with convertible features perfect for homes with small spaces.
In addition, it can handle any ambient temperature range between 5 to 109 degrees and regulate internal temperature with just a simple knob. I find this the best upright freezer for families on a budget.
It doesn't cost that much but packs the necessary features you want to keep your frozen fruits and food longer than usual.
The only problem with this upright freezer is you have to manually defrost it by simply unplugging the freezer. While I don't consider this a major drawback.
Size: 22.4 x 21.7 x 56.3 inches | Capacity: 7 cubic feet | Product Weight: 191.8 pounds | Frost Type: Manual defrost | Control Type: Mechanical
Don't let the size of this upright freezer fool you; despite its size, its food storage capacity is more than enough for a family of four. This is the best upright freezer if you need extra freezer space.
What I love about this product is despite its size, the internal layout makes it easy for me to store my food and frozen fruit without problems. It's wallet-friendly, and its 3 cubic feet capacity doesn't feel like it.
It feels this isn't a compact upright freezer. Despite putting all my groceries inside, I was shocked at how much storage space was left for me. It also has a reversible door for added convenience.
Size: 21.3 x 22.7 x 34.9 inches | Capacity: 3.0 cubic feet | Product Weight: 57.2 pounds | Frost Type: Manual | Control Type: Mechanical
GE's 17.3 Cubic Feet Upright Freezer ranks on top of the upper echelon in storing your meat, ice cream, and frozen fruit on a whole new level.
It comes with fixed shelves at the top, two adjustable wire shelves at the middle part, and two deep drawers that are great for storing food.
Other features making this upright freezer convenient are its easy-to-use temperature control panel, LED lighting, and a lockable freezer door to keep your kids from accessing the inside.
Overall, its large capacity creates more floor space for your entire home while keeping your frozen veggies and fruits frozen longer than expected.
Its consistent internal temperature range and circulating cold air should avoid food waste.
Size: 32 x 64 x 31 inches | Capacity: 17.3 cubic feet | Product Weight: 195 pounds | Frost Type: Frost-free | Control Type: Electronic
Energy efficiency is often the major factor when making money splurges, as it can save you money in the long run. Since upright freezers are plugged in 24/7, you'd want an energy-efficient upright freezer.
Look no further than the GE Garage Ready Frost-Free Upright Freeze, as this will be more than enough to hold loads of food, veggies, and fruits while keeping electricity consumption to a minimum.
Another feature that makes this one of the best upright freezers on the market today is it can handle ambient temperatures in your garage, making it a good addition, especially if you find yourself working longer.
Lastly, it has an audible temperature alarm, a lock with a key, and slide-out freezer bins. The electronic temperature control allows controlling temperature inside without releasing cold air, which is impressive.
Size: 31.3 x 32.8 x 76.5 inches | Capacity: 21.3 cubic feet | Product Weight: 215 pounds | Frost Type: Frost-free | Control Type: Digital
AMPLE STORAGE CAPACITY: Easily store backup meats, frozen...
SPACE-SAVING DESIGN: The flush back design and recessed...
What I like
Adjustable wire shelves
Reversible door
Compact and sleek
Adjustable temperature control
Power outage safe
What I don't like
No frost-free features
If you're cramped up on floor space and are looking for the right upright freezer on the market, look at the Frigidaire Upright Freezer Platinum design series.
It's the best upright freezer for homeowners with less floor space and looking for a reliable upright to store their food. This upright freezer has reversible door features, which makes it more impressive.
The sleek and elegant design makes you think this upright freezer is worth a premium, but thankfully it's not. It's the best upright freezer for compact space while packing several features that are icings on the cake.
Its sliding storage basket and LED lighting make it visible in the darkest environment. Superb performance, and you can feel the cold air circulating inside.
Size: 21.26 x 22.24 x 55.91 inches | Capacity: 6.5 cubic feet | Product Weight: 93.8 pounds | Frost Type: Manual defrost | Control Type: Mechanical
The GE FUF14DLRWW Garage Ready is one of my top nine picks because it serves its purpose extremely well. For one, it has a ton of storage space for the price, and the product is also Energy-star certified.
Another feature that makes this upright freezer impressive is its clever storage orientation. It locks your frozen food up securely while accessing other snacks, foods, and beverages.
This model is also garage-ready, as it can withstand temperatures from 0 to 100 Fahrenheit with no problems.
It also has a turbo freeze setting, lock, and key, and it is power outage safe as it can hold frozen food for 48 hours.
Size: 62 x 28 x 32 inches | Capacity: 14.1 cubic feet | Product Weight: 168 pounds | Frost Type: Frost-free upright freezer | Control Type: Electronic
This upright freezer, courtesy of Insignia, is a great addition if you want to squeeze more freezer space for some of your frozen goods, fruits, and veggies.
While it has a small capacity, this model makes up for it with its internal design. It has reversible door features that are great for families having cramped spaces.
Controlling the internal temperature is quick and easy with a simple knob, and the cool air radiates throughout the entire freezer inside. This model is also noted for being garage-friendly.
The only downside I found with this upright freezer courtesy of Insignia is you have to unplug the upright freezer to manually defrost the entire thing, which I feel is quite a bummer.
Size: 22.4 x 21.7 x 56.3 inches | Capacity: 7 cubic feet | Product Weight: 99.2 pounds | Frost Type: Manual | Control Type: Mechanical
If you have all the money looking for an amazing upright frost-free freezer, the Whirlpool WSZ57L18DM 17.7 cu. Ft. SideKicks might just be up to the challenge of becoming one.
What I love about this product is its thoughtful design; it has a shallow depth and a wider opening giving you easy access to frozen foods and goodies.
It can also operate under extreme temperatures from 0 to 110 Fahrenheit, making it a great garage freezer for anyone. Its compressor constantly bombards cool air inside to ensure a uniform temperature.
Lastly, it can trap cold air inside for up to two days to ensure your food doesn't go to waste. The auto-close door functions and door alarm are like the cherry on top for this great upright freezer.
Size: 33 x 72 x 28 inches | Capacity: 20 cubic feet | Product Weight: N/A | Frost Type: Frost-free | Control Type: N/A
Before you go to your local store and make your purchase, there are some things you need to consider when looking for the right upright freezer.
Capacity
The capacity of an upright freezer is often measured in cubic feet, which means the higher the number goes, the higher the freezer's capacity.
However, as the capacity increase, so does the price. So, I recommend you weigh everything out, as you can only go as far as your money goes.
The average capacity of most freezers is around 16 cubic feet, and anything above that is more than enough to keep foods frozen for your entire family.
But if you have a bigger family, you can always opt for a much larger capacity to accommodate every piece of grocery you have.
If you don't need a bigger capacity, you might want to opt formini freezers.
Temperature Control
Temperature control is a major factor when choosing the best upright freezer.
In most freezers today, the interior temperature can range from -10 to 10 degrees Fahrenheit, which is more than enough to store food for long periods of time.
To get the best upright freezer possible, consider what type of food you will store to ensure it never goes to waste and prevents untimely spoilage.
Defrosting
There are two types of defrosting, manual and automatic. A manual defrosting freezer means ice and frost will slowly build up over time, and the only way to defrost is by manually unplugging the cord.
This part usually takes time as you need more time to melt the ice away before returning your goods.
On the other hand, an automatic upright freezer doesn't have to go through this routine. Instead, the upright freeze regulates itself to ensure foods and goodies remain frozen without frost buildup.
While most automatic upright freezers are pricier than manual-defrosting freezers, nothing beats the convenience it brings you and your family.
Freezers will run 24/7, so having an energy-star certified freezer is a surefire way to keep electrical costs to a minimum.
An upright freezer that has energy-star certification uses energy efficiently while still operating at normal settings.
Additionally, airtight insulation and doors will keep cold air inside, allowing the freezer to keep the whole foods and goodies frozen longer while using less energy.
Additional Features
Some additional features can help make your life easier when storing food.
Door Safety Lock
Whenever you have kids at home, it is important to have upright freezers with door-safety lock features. Kids are always curious and often wonder what's inside the fridge.
To avoid this problem, it is better to be safe than sorry, which is why it is highly recommended to have door safety locks rather than nothing at all.
Ice Maker
Upright freezers with ice makers are a plus. Nobody wants to sip room-temperature water when everything is hot during the summer.
While this is optional, having an ice maker will do wonders, especially during summertime. Most of the time, these freezers have this feature already installed.
Touch Screen
Most of the time, upright freezers with touchscreen features are already at premium prices. While this feature can be enticing, I find it not useful enough for that added price.
Upright freezers still work the same way with freezes having a touchscreen. They can keep your food frozen for long periods without this additional miscellaneous feature that only adds to the cost.
Wheels
Having built-in caster wheels can make your life easier when moving your freezer from one location to another. Fortunately, most freezers today are equipped with this kind of feature.
However, you must check if they are installed to ensure you can smoothly change your freezer's location.
Shelves
Having more than five door shelves is a plus if you're looking for an upright freezer. Remember, you need an upright freezer to accommodate frozen fruits, veggies, and foods.
The higher the number of shelves, the more it can accommodate. The same goes for having more than five door bins; having more than five spacious door bins is advantageous for you.
Again, this depends on how much stuff you will put inside your upright freezer.
Interior Lights
Having interior lights is a bonus. This feature is helpful whenever you crave that ice cream or smoothie late at night. It keeps every stored food visible within your grasp.
Thankfully, most freezers today have built-in interior lights that make your life easier when trying to find your stored food in the dark.
Upright Freezers FAQs
If you have additional questions regarding upright freezers, you might find some answers below.
How Do You Do Temperature Control in an Upright Freezer?
Temperature controlling is usually done by either a single push-button or a temperature control knob.
How to Avoid Freezer Burn?
Freezer burn happens when stored foods are exposed to cold air, causing them to lose moisture. To avoid this problem, the best solution is to keep your stored food in airtight bags or containers.
What Is Better, a Chest Freezer or an Upright Freezer?
For me, personally, it is just a matter of personal preference. It also depends on the intended use of the freezer. The only difference I can see from these freezers is how you open them.
Chest freezers mostly lay flat on the ground and can be opened from the top, whereas upright freezers can be opened on different sides.
For chest freezers, you might want to take a look at this if you plan on buying achest freezer.
Conclusion
There are a lot of brands selling dedicated freezers to many consumers. Some of these reputable brands include Frigidaire, GE, Magic Chef, and Whirlpool, to name a few.
Regardless of which one you choose, what I've listed on top should serve its purpose of keeping your stored foods frozen for longer periods of time without fear of spoilage.
This article about the best upright freezers should give you plenty of options to add to your home. If you're planning to opt for a refrigerator, you might want to take a look at the best refrigerators.
A chest freezer can be an excellent investment for those who need extra storage space for frozen foods.
Whether you're a large family or someone who likes to stock up on bulk items, a chest freezer can provide you with the added space you need.
In this article, I'll look at the best chest freezers on the market, their features, and what to consider when choosing one.
I'll discuss different sizes, energy efficiency, temperature control, and capacity to help you make an informed decision.
Best Chest Freezers
A chest freezer is designed to provide additional frozen food storage space or keep food cold.
Here are my top picks for the best chest freezers on the market right now!
[Large Capacity] With a capacity of 7.0 cubic feet, Midea...
[Adjustable Temperature Control & Fast Cooling Design]...
What I like
Energy efficiency
Compact design
Affordable price
Easy access to temperature change
What I don't like
Manual defrost
Only comes with one wire basket
No interior light
This 7-cubic-foot model from Midea might be worth considering if you're searching for an affordable chest freezer for small spaces.
The chest freezer includes a removable wire storage basket to help keep frozen foods organized and handy. Sadly, the limited number of bulk storage baskets limits the number of frozen goods you can place in this compact freezer.
Additionally, the chest freezer offers an external dial temperature control, allowing users to change the temperature without opening the freezer and letting cold air escape.
However, you must manually defrost this chest freezer, which can be time-consuming and inconvenient.
In addition, this Midea Chest Freezer has no interior light, making it difficult to see what's inside in low lighting.
When I trialed this product, I noticed the freezer also contains hinges that can hold the door open at 45 and 75-degree angles, allowing easy access to the contents without holding the door open.
※ 【MAX & ECO MODE】- Eco mode is the function which can...
What I like
Portability
Large Capacity
Energy-efficient
What I don't like
Expensive
Requires power source
For individuals who need to transfer frozen goods or keep them frozen while they are away from home, the ICECO portable refrigerator freezer offers the perfect answer.
The ICECO is a portable freezer. Its sturdy handle and wheels allow you to move it around easily, making it one of the best portable freezers.
Despite being a portable refrigerator, the ICECO JP40 has a large capacity of 40 liters, enough to hold up to 60 cans of soda or beer.
With a weight of 38.8 pounds, the ICECO JP40 Portable Freezer is lighter than some other portable refrigerators, which may make it more convenient to transport.
The ICECO is an energy-efficient, high-performance compressor that can run on a 12/24V DC power source. It also has an Eco mode that can help save power.
This device has an adjustable temperature range between -7 and 50 degrees Fahrenheit for frozen and chilled goods. But this is not just your typical refrigerator.
After conducting experiments with it, I found the following:
If you select the ECO mode, the compressor will use less energy and won't turn on until the interior temperature has climbed by 6 to 9 degrees from the set point.
If you select MAX, the device will cool down more quickly. Each model comes with 12/24 DC and 110- to 240-volt AC cables, enabling use in homes and cars.
Are you trying to find the best chest freezer for a garage? Think about the 15.7 cubic foot Garage Ready chest freezer from GE.
The GE Garage Ready Freezer can be used to store and arrange frozen meats, ice cream, and other items inside the 15.7 cubic-foot capacity and four sliding storage baskets.
It comes equipped with multiple sliding bulk storage baskets for easy access to frozen items.
My findings showed that users could use a second-level rail to position one to two removable wire baskets at various heights. The power-on indicator light allows users to know if the freezer is running.
Moreover, it includes GE's Power Outage Guarantee, which ensures that the inside temperature will remain below freezing for at least 48 hours during a power outage.
This could be a hassle for some, but it is worth noting that it doesn't have an automatic defrost feature, so you'll need to defrost the deep freezer periodically.
By alerting users if the freezer's temperature starts to rise, the temperature alarm can help prevent food waste. Also, the safety lock and key feature enable users to secure their food.
PERFECTLY QUIET - Unlike other chest freezers, the Northair...
OPTIMAL STORAGE - At 3.5 Cubic Feet, the Northair Chest...
What I like
Energy-efficient
Easy to use
Compact design
What I don't like
Manual defrost
No temperature indicator
Limited warranty
With this Northair 3.5 cubic foot chest freezer, you may save your utility bills. This small device helps users save money by using as little as 0.45 kWh of energy every 24 hours.
The Northair Chest Freezer - 3.5 Cu Ft is Energy Star rated. This translates to lower energy bills and a more environmentally friendly appliance.
Additionally, as per my expertise, the soft-close lid mechanism and silent compressor technology maintain a low noise so users won't disturb the rest of the house.
Other freezer features include the external adjustable front temperature controls and auto-hold hinges. However, unlike most chest freezers, this freezer has no alarm to alert you if the temperature rises above a certain level.
All-Purpose Deep Freezer Chest – Ideal for storing meats,...
Consistent Cabinet Temperatures – Utilizing a 1/5 hp...
What I like
Large capacity
Stainless steel construction
Digital thermostat
What I don't like
Expensive
Heavy and bulky
The KoolMore chest freezer is nice if money is no object. It's a powerful machine with the features you wish more home appliances had.
The freezer features a sleek, modern design with a stainless steel exterior that looks great in any kitchen.
This freezer has two sliding clear glass doors rather than a hinged top. When combined with bright LED lighting, you'll always be able to see inside without opening the doors.
Based on my observations, I can easily move this big, strong unit when cleaning the floors because it has optional casters. It is also simple to drain extra water when defrosting.
Being an expensive freezer, the KoolMore 16-Cubic-Foot Chest Freezer is a high-end appliance with a luxury price tag, making it less accessible than many chest freezers.
When shopping for a chest freezer, there are a few key factors to consider:
First, you should think about the size of the freezer you need. Choosing a size that will fit the available space and meet your storage needs is important.
Second, you should consider efficiency. Look for models with an Energy Star rating, which indicates that they are energy efficient, even during a power outage
Some models also feature frost-free technology, preventing frost and ice buildup, making maintenance much more manageable, and keeping food frozen without the freezer burn.
Consider the storage size and features. Some freezers come with hanging baskets or storage baskets for extra freezer space.
Some may even have a temperature alarm for when the internal temperature gets too hot or if too much cold air is escaping the chest freezer.
Chest Freezers vs Upright Freezers
Chest freezers and upright freezers are both standalone appliances designed for long-term storage of frozen food, but they have some key differences:
Storage size: Chest freezers tend to have a larger storage size than upright freezers. This is because they are designed with an open storage area.
Footprint: Chest freezers have a smaller footprint than upright freezers with the same storage capacity. This means that they take up less floor space.
Organization: Upright freezers come with shelving and compartments that make them easy to organize. Chest freezers require more effort to organize and access items.
Cooling: Chest freezers are better at cooling goods as they are deep freezers. Cold air sinks to the bottom, keeping food cooler than an upright freezer.
Chest Freezer FAQs
Need to know more about buying a chest freezer? Here are the most frequently asked questions.
What Is the Difference Between Mini Freezers, Upright Freezers, and Refrigerators?
The main difference between a mini freezer, an upright freezer, and a refrigerator is their size and purpose.
A mini freezer is a compact unit designed to fit on a countertop or in a small space and is typically used to store a small number of frozen foods.
An upright freezer is larger than a mini freezer and is designed to stand upright, with shelves and compartments for easy organization of frozen foods.
On the other hand, a refrigerator is designed primarily for storing perishable food items such as fruits, vegetables, and dairy products at a temperature above freezing.
To deal with frost in your freezer, you should first unplug the freezer and remove all of the food. Then, use a plastic scraper to remove the frost from the walls and shelves carefully.
Once you have removed as much of the frost as possible, use a damp cloth or sponge to clean the freezer’s interior. Be sure to dry the interior completely before plugging it back in.
Yes, a chest freezer can be worth buying if you need additional freezer storage space or want to save money by buying bulk and freezing food.
Chest freezers can also be more energy efficient than upright freezers, and they can keep food frozen for longer periods in the event of a power outage.
However, it’s important to consider the cost of the freezer and any additional energy costs before making a purchase and whether you have the space to accommodate it.
Summary
Here's a summary of my top picks when choosing a chest freezer.
Choosing the best chest freezer requires consideration of several factors, such as size, energy efficiency, price, and features.
It's important to assess your freezer storage needs and available space to select a chest freezer with adequate capacity.
Researching various brands and models, reading customer reviews, and comparing prices can help you choose the best chest freezer for your home.
The Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler is the best evaporative cooler if you are looking for a portable, compact and powerful unit. The second best option you can find is COSTWAY 3-in-1 Portable Air Conditioner, having 10000 BTU, a remote and an LCD panel.
Evaporative coolers, also known as swamp coolers, are a cost-effective and eco-friendly way to cool your home or office. They work by evaporating water to cool the air, rather than using refrigerants.
Using the best evaporative cooler will help you stay comfortable in dry climates since they are suitable for industrial and residential purposes. But there are several options available on the market and I have shortlisted the top 10 products to help you choose the best portable evaporative air coolers.
Best Evaporative Coolers
Here is the list of the 10 best evaporative coolers that you can use to keep your home comfortable and cool during the hot summer months.
Experience Superior Cooling: Embrace the evaporative air...
Transform Your Living Space: Adapt to any environment with...
What I like
Can cool up to 950 square feet with 3100 CFM
Easy to operate with three simple controls
Manual and continuous fill options available
Uses 3-sided, rigid, high-density cooling pads for cooler air
Economical and safe with automatic overheating protection
What I don't like
Only powered by a corded electric source
This portable, indoor evaporative cooler is designed for industrial and residential use in warehouses, construction sites, outdoor shops, restaurants, patios, porches, garages, workshops, camping, and tailgating. It can effectively cool large spaces with a coverage area of up to 950 square feet.
The fan has a height of 37 inches, a width of 17 inches, and a depth of 25 inches. It weighs 40 lbs and has an operating weight of 131 lbs. Moreover, it comes with four heavy-duty locking casters, which make it easy to move the unit from one location to another easily.
You will find a water reservoir capacity of 10.3 gallons and a water level indicator, making it easy to monitor the water level. Thanks to the continuous fill option you can attach a household hose with the included float adaptor, eliminating the need to watch and fill the water tank manually.
The fan utilizes 3-sided, rigid, high-density cooling pads for increased evaporative surface area, producing cooler air. It has a maximum CFM of 3,100 and a maximum noise level of 59 dB. To use the fan effectively, place it in front of an open window or door while keeping another one open for air to exhaust from the room. Also, run the fan on FAN ONLY mode for 30 minutes daily to dry the filter.
Voltage: 115 volts | Wattage: 250 watts | Warranty: 1 year | Air Flow Capacity: 3,100 CFM
Multifunctional air cooler with fan and dehumidifier features
Powerful cooling system with 10,000BTU and wide-angle oscillation
Quiet operation with noise no more than 55 dB
Convenient 24h timer and remote control
What I don't like
Manual adjustment required for vertical oscillation
The 3-in-1 Multifunctional Air Conditioner is the perfect solution for cooling your home or office since it has a premium fan and dehumidifier, equipped with four modes and two-speed adjustments to meet your needs. Moreover, the easy-to-use LCD panel allows for effortless operation and monitoring.
This air cooler boasts a powerful cooling system with 10,000 BTU, while it can swing horizontally up to 65° (automatically) and vertically up to 100° (manually adjusted), making it perfect for most spaces. Its 4 four universal casters and built-in handle also ensure easy mobility and versatility to cool any area you choose.
I found it has a 24h timer function that provides flexibility to fit your schedule. And this air cooler operates quietly, producing 55 dB of noise, which makes it ideal for use during sleep or rest. Plus, the sleep mode can automatically adjust the fan speed to prevent overexposure to cold air.
This air cooler comes equipped with a remote control that can operate the device from a distance of up to 16 feet, making it extremely convenient for the user. Additionally, the cooler includes an overload protection feature that ensures safe operation by preventing damage from overvoltage. The device also features a built-in handle for easy carrying.
Voltage: 120 volts | Wattage: 1020 watts | Warranty: 1 year | Air Flow Capacity: 320 CFM
3-in-1 Evaporative Air Cooler: VAGKRI cooling fan offers 3...
Powerful 3X Evaporative Cooling: VAGKRI air cooler features...
What I like
Three cooling processes: air, water, or ice
Powerful fan motors and 3-sided intake for efficient cooling
Ice compartment for extreme heat conditions
120° oscillation and 700 square feet coverage for larger spaces
8-gallon water tank for hours of cooling
What I don't like
Maintenance required (cleaning and filter changes)
The VAGKRI Portable Evaporative Cooler is an appliance that combines the features of a fan, humidifier, and air cooler, to create a comfortable environment. It features three different cooling models, allowing you to choose between air, water, or ice cooling to suit your preference.
This air cooler can deliver cool air quickly and efficiently with its powerful fan motors and 3-sided intake panels. It also comes equipped with an ice compartment, which makes it an excellent choice for extreme heat.
Plus, the evaporative cooler is designed to cover larger spaces with 120° oscillation and 700 square feet of coverage. It produces 2,100 cubic feet of cold air a minute, making it suitable for use in various environments, including homes, offices, and other commercial spaces.
You will love the 8-gallon water tank, providing hours of cooling without frequent refills, while you can also manually add water from the top or attach a garden hose for uninterrupted cooling. The appliance is equipped with an electronic control panel that is user-friendly. And the full-function remote control guarantees further convenience, making it possible to adjust the settings from a distance.
Voltage: 115 volts | Wattage: 105 watts | Warranty: 1 year limited warranty | Air Flow Capacity: 2100 CFM
Voice Control: Delivering comfort at your command; Alexa and...
Less Noise, Exceptional Rest: Enjoy a fresh, comfortable,...
What I like
Versatile
Large water tank
Wide-angle oscillation
All-in-one touch panel
Reusable ice boxes
What I don't like
Requires frequent refilling
The Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler provides a cool lake breeze during hot and dry summer days and nights with its 80-degree wide-angle oscillation, which covers a large area. You can enjoy the cool breeze from up to 20 feet away using the remote.
It is a versatile appliance that can function as a fan and a humidifier, perfect for arid regions, as it cools rooms using less energy and adds humidity. Additionally, the quiet sleep mode and three fan speeds allow for custom comfort.
With its all-in-one touch panel, you can easily customize your cooling experience because it offers a full range of functions, including humidifying, oscillation, fan speed, and timer settings. The water level indicator and alert even allow you to check the water level quickly without pulling the tank out.
Moreover, the low water alert blinks when it's time to add water, so you'll never have to worry about forgetting to fill it up. The 1.06-gallon large water tank can run for up to 8 hours, keeping your room cool and moist overnight.
This Air Cooler comes with reusable ice boxes that you can freeze and put into the tank to maximize cooling. However, it's important to note that you should use a soft cloth or gloves to move the ice boxes and avoid touching them with your hands to prevent frostbite.
Voltage: 120 volts | Wattage: 50 watts | Warranty: 1 year | Air Flow Capacity: 212 CFM
FAST EXCELLENT COOLING: The air cooler features 3...
SUPER AIR VOLUME with LESS ENERGY: Not let the normal swamp...
What I like
Quick cooling with high-density evaporative pads and powerful fans
Super air volume while using less energy
Large 10.6-gallon water tank with easy top refill design
Portable with four rolling casters
What I don't like
Large water tank may be difficult to refill for some users
With three high-density evaporative cooling pads and powerful fan motors, this air cooler produces cold air quickly and efficiently. The included ice packs enhance the cooling effect, making it ideal for use in large spaces of up to 900 square feet.
Unlike traditional tower fans, this air cooler blasts air at 3531 CFM using less energy. Wider oscillation ensures that the cold air is distributed evenly throughout the space, making it an excellent alternative to air conditioners.
It features a sizable 10.6-gallon water tank to keep the evaporative cooling fan working for more hours. Low-Max water line helps you monitor the water level for timely refills, and a drainage port at the bottom makes maintenance more convenient.
The top-refilled design makes refilling the water tank a breeze without needing a hose or bending over. Additionally, with four rolling casters, this portable evaporative cooler can be moved easily to any space, making it perfect for use in backyards, garages, or gyms.
STAY COOL & COMFORTABLE: The Portacool Jetstream 230...
PROVIDES COOLING THROUGH EVAPORATION: Portacool's...
What I like
Efficient and versatile cooling design
High-quality evaporative media for optimal performance and durability
Oscillating louvers for larger cooling area
Easy maintenance
Liquid level indicator with automatic pump shut-off
What I don't like
Evaporative cooling limitations in high humidity
The Portacool PACJS2301A1 Jetstream 230 Portable Evaporative Cooler is a versatile and efficient cooling solution, thanks to its compact design and powerful cooling capabilities. One of the critical features of this evaporative cooler is the Kuul Comfort MicroTech evaporative media, made in the USA exclusively for Portacool products. This high-quality media ensures optimal cooling performance and is designed to last for many years of use.
It also comes equipped with oscillating louvers, which help to cool a larger area more effectively. Additionally, the sizable two-inch drain makes cleaning and maintenance easy and efficient.
This cooler features a liquid level indicator with an automatic pump shut-off to protect your investment for added convenience. And with its durable construction and Portacool Protect lifetime warranty, you can trust that this product will provide reliable cooling comfort for years to come. The warranty is applicable on the housing against manufacturing defects, while it has a 3-year warranty on all electrical components,
Voltage: 110 volts | Wattage: 158 watts | Warranty: 3 years on electrical components; Lifetime on housing | Air Flow Capacity: 3600 CFM
EvaSMART air cooler CREATES YOUR OWN COOL PERSONAL CLIMATE...
FOR PERSONAL USE - Cools the area in front of the device up...
What I like
EvaSMART creates a cool and moist local microclimate
Cools, humidifies, and cleans dust particles from the air
Amazon Alexa compatible
Environment-friendly
What I don't like
The cartridge needs to be replaced every 3-6 months
EvaSMART air cooler is a portable and efficient device that uses natural evaporative technology to create a cool personal climate. This 3-in-1 device cools, humidifies, and cleans the air of dust particles to make your living space healthier. It's perfect for personal use as it cools an area of up to 2.5 - 3.5 sq m, making it suitable for use on a desk, couch, or bed.
This device is operated via a mobile application and can be connected to various Smart Home assistants like Amazon Alexa with voice commands. It has an LED display that shows the temperature of both incoming and outgoing air, and you can choose from various light colors for your water tank lighting to suit your mood.
I found it was easy to install; you just need to pour water in the tank, plug it in, set the Wifi on, and enjoy. The working principle of the EvaSMART is based on natural water evaporation technology, making it the most efficient evaporative air cooler of its type. It takes hot air and makes it cool and moist even in dry climates.
However, it's not recommended to use it when the humidity is higher than 70% in your room. EvaSMART is also environmentally friendly due to its low power consumption and innovative, fully-inorganic, biodegradable material inside the EvaBreezeTM.
Not to forget, each easily replaceable cartridge lasts 3-6 months, depending on use and air and water quality.
Voltage: 110 volts | Wattage: 12 watts | Warranty: 1 year | Air Flow Capacity: 87 CFM
Experience Superior Cooling: Embrace the evaporative air...
Transform Your Living Space: Adapt to any environment with...
What I like
Compact size and sleek design
Three hi-density XeL50 rigid media panels
80% more evaporation surface
One-year manufacturer's warranty included
What I don't like
Only suitable for personal use, not for larger spaces
The Hessaire 5,300 CFM Evaporative Cooler is a compact and aesthetically pleasing cooling device that delivers exceptional performance, surpassing larger coolers in terms of cooling ability. It achieves this by expanding its air-intake areas and using hi-density XeL50 rigid media comprising three panels instead of one on most mobile coolers.
This design provides more air-intake area, reduces pre-rotation of the air to the prop, and lowers static pressure, allowing for more efficient air delivery. The hi-density XeL50 media also provides 80% more evaporation surface than regular density media, translating into higher evaporation efficiency and cooler temperatures.
It is important to note that this unit is not an air conditioner, which makes it an energy-efficient alternative that saves on electricity costs. It is best used in dry climates or open spaces, and it is recommended to leave windows and doors open to limit the rise of humidity and promote better air ventilation in the room.
This Portable Evaporative Air Cooler is made of durable polypropylene material and comes in a sleek grey color. Its compact form factor makes it ideal for personal use, and it has a 14.6-gallon reservoir capacity and can cover an area of up to 1600 square feet. The cooler is lightweight at 56 pounds, making it easy to move around as needed. It has a button control system and three different speeds, allowing easy adjustments according to your needs.
The cooler operates quietly with a sound level of 63 dB and has a wattage of 430, making it an energy-efficient option. It runs on a standard 115-volt power source and comes with a one-year warranty from the manufacturer.
Voltage: 115 volts | Wattage: 500 watts | Warranty: 1 year | Air Flow Capacity: 5300 CFM
Efficient Cooling for Workspaces: Cool-Space 400 Evaporative...
Generous Water Capacity: Utilize a standard garden hose for...
What I like
Can cool air up to 33 degrees
Large 46-gallon water tank for up to 10 hours of use
8-inch thick cooling media is treated to resist algae growth and withstand cleaning
Virtually silent direct-drive motors
What I don't like
Requires a water source for prolonged use
The Cool-Space 400 Evaporative Cooler is a powerful and efficient solution for cooling your space without needing costly traditional A/C. Depending on your location's ambient temperature and humidity, this cooler can cool air up to 33 degrees, thanks to its 36-inch fan and 6,400-9,700 cfm output.
Equipped with a large 46-gallon tank, the Cool-Space 400 can run for up to 10 hours without being connected to a water source, offering maximum portability for immediate spot-cooling. The cooler's low water indicator also ensures you're always aware of the water level.
The 8-inch thick cooling media is the industry's most influential and longest-lasting, treated with a thermosetting resin to resist algae growth and withstand frequent cleaning. Its design prevents dirt and other particles from penetrating the substrate, ensuring it stays effective for longer.
Cool-Space's variable-speed controls make maintaining the perfect temperature for your space as simple as turning a dial, with virtually silent direct-drive motors delivering precise cooling. The motors are designed for both power and efficiency, helping to keep your space comfortable while keeping running costs low.
Powerful Air Cooler: Indoor evaporative air cooler or swamp...
Convenient Placement: Super low power consumption 288W &...
What I like
Ideal for hot/dry climates where humidity levels are low
Low power consumption and powerful airflow
Remote control, low water alarm, energy-saving timer, and adjustable humidification dial
Can be used for both cooling and humidification
What I don't like
Only suitable for small to medium spaces
The Honeywell Evaporative Cooler is an excellent solution for hot and dry climates in the southwest and Midwest regions of the US. It provides powerful 525 CFM airflow, perfect for spot-cooling small to medium spaces such as living rooms, bedrooms, dens, covered patios, and garages. It has a low power consumption of only 288 watts.
This evaporative cooler has several features, including a carbon dust air filter and remote control. low water alarm, energy-saving timer, adjustable humidification dial, and an ice compartment.
In addition to cooling, this air cooler can also be used as a humidifier during winter months, providing a moist, cool breeze to cool you down. However, it's important to note that this is not an air conditioner and should not be expected to cool as efficiently as a refrigerated AC. Its tank is detachable for easy maintenance.
The Honeywell 525 CFM Indoor Portable Evaporative Air Cooler has a freestanding design and a reservoir capacity of 7.9 gallons. It is made of durable plastic and comes in a sleek gray color. Its floor area coverage of 320 square feet makes it perfect for personal use in residential spaces.
Voltage: 120 volts | Wattage: 288 watts | Warranty: 1 year on parts and labor | Air Flow Capacity: 525 CFM
When selecting a cooling unit, it's important to consider the size of the area you want to cool. Choose a unit with appropriate CFM (cubic feet per minute) for the space you want to cool. A unit with insufficient cooling capacity will not be able to effectively cool the area, while a unit with excessive cooling capacity will be wasteful and inefficient.
Water Tank Capacity
If one wishes to avoid frequent refilling of the cooler's water receptacle, it is imperative to opt for a model with a larger water tank capacity. By doing so, the cooling process may persist for a longer duration without necessitating the replenishment of the tank. Nonetheless, it is essential to acknowledge that a larger tank capacity may also result in a heavier and more unwieldy unit.
Airflow Direction
Different coolers are designed to provide airflow in different directions. Some models allow for vertical airflow, while others provide horizontal airflow. Consider the layout of your space and your desired cooling pattern to choose a unit that can provide airflow in your desired direction.
Noise Level
If you plan to use your cooler in a home or workplace, it's important to consider the noise level of the unit. Some coolers can be quite loud, which can be disruptive to those around you. Look for models with low noise levels to ensure a comfortable and peaceful environment.
Energy Efficiency
It is an important consideration when choosing a cooler. Choose a model with a higher SEER (Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio) rating for better energy efficiency. This will help you save money on energy bills and reduce your carbon footprint.
Maintenance
Maintenance is an important consideration when choosing a cooler. Look for units with easy-to-clean filters and minimal maintenance requirements to save time and effort. Regular cleaning and maintenance will ensure that your cooler performs at its best and has a longer lifespan.
Warranty
A warranty is important for protection against defects and other issues. Consider an extended warranty period for added peace of mind. This will ensure that you can get repairs or replacements if anything goes wrong with your cooler within the warranty period. Be sure to read the terms and conditions of the warranty carefully to ensure that you understand what is covered.
Evaporative Cooler FAQs
What is an evaporative cooler?
An evaporative cooler, also known as a swamp cooler, is an air conditioning unit that uses water evaporation to cool and humidify the air.
How does an evaporative cooler work?
An evaporative cooler draws dry and hot air through moistened pads or media, which evaporates the water and cools the air. The cooled air is then circulated throughout the space.
What are the different types of evaporative coolers?
The different types of evaporative coolers include portable, window-mounted, ducted, and direct evaporative coolers.
How do I choose the right size of an evaporative cooler for my home or office?
The right size of an evaporative cooler depends on the size of the space to be cooled. You should consult the manufacturer’s recommendations or consult with an HVAC professional.
How often should I clean and maintain my evaporative cooler?
You should clean and maintain your evaporative cooler at least once a year or more if you use it frequently. This includes changing the pads or media, cleaning the water reservoir, and checking the pump and fan.
How much water and electricity does an evaporative cooler consume?
The water consumption of an evaporative cooler varies depending on the size and usage but typically ranges from 3-15 gallons per day. The electricity consumption is also relatively low compared to traditional air conditioning units.
How does an evaporative cooler compare to other air conditioners?
Evaporative coolers are typically less expensive and more energy efficient than traditional air conditioning units. However, they are less effective in humid climates.
Can I use an evaporative cooler in a humid environment?
Evaporative coolers are not effective in humid environments because the air is already saturated with moisture, so the water in the pads or media cannot evaporate and cool the air.
How long does an evaporative cooler typically last?
An evaporative cooler lifespan depends on the unit’s quality and how well it is maintained, but they typically last 10-20 years.
What are some popular brands of evaporative coolers?
Popular brands of evaporative coolers include Honeywell, Hessaire, Breezair, and Champion
Conclusion
After further analysis, I believe that the Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler is the best evaporative air cooler for those needing exceptional performance from a compact unit. Its features, such as the Air Swing Delivery System, provide maximum coverage and is ideal for outdoor cooling.
The second best option that stands out in the list is the COSTWAY Portable Air Conditioner, which is equipped with a built-in handle and 4 universal casters. You can try out these options to remain cool and calm during the summers or conduct your own research after reading the buyer’s guide and FAQs.
One of the reasons artists prefer to use watercolor is its transparency, by using high-quality watercolor paint one could create depth through the use of glass objects and their reflections.
However, this can make painting clear and reflective objects like glass quite tricky, very different from painting grass with watercolors. Many watercolor artists often challenge themselves to paint transparent objects in a photorealistic manner for an extra edge and to convey a sign of expertise.
So, how to paint glass with watercolor sound impossible to achieve? Don't worry, as we have come up with some basic steps and tips that will help to make the painting process a tad simpler regardless of whether you use watercolor pads or watercolor paints in tubes. Remember to practice before beginning to paint, as replicating the right shapes is the first step toward capturing the reflectivity of glass.
So, without further ado, let's get started!
How To Paint Glass With Watercolor
Materials Required To Paint Clear Glass
Before you can begin the process of painting, it's important to gather all the art supplies. Here are some of the things you'll need:
Some fine watercolor brushes
Masking fluid
Watercolor paints
Watercolor paper
Graphite pencil
Eraser
Two containers with water
You should also print out a photo of a glass object that you'd like to draw. It's best to start with an object that has been placed in front of a white background. Make sure to study it for a while to note how light interacts with glass, creating highlights and shadows. Some artists like to think of these areas as jigsaw puzzles that need to be arranged in the right manner.
Another thing we would like to point out is the importance of having a color palette dominated by grays and blues. Even though we perceive glass as colorless, mixing grays, blues, and the occasional white will help the painting process.
Steps To Paint Glass With Watercolor
1. Make The Drawing
As we have stated already, one of the most important steps in painting realistic glass objects is to create a good outline. With the help of your reference photo, make a fine representation of the object on watercolor paper. Remember to be light-handed with the pencil, as deep impressions look bad when applying watercolor paints.
While sketching, don't forget to add the thickness of the glass as it helps the object stand out from the background. Through the sketch, you must mark the shapes with hard-line edges. In turn, this will help you divide the drawing into areas that can be easily filled with colors. Pay extra attention to adding the small curved lines present in a glass, representing the distortions.
2. Apply Masking Fluid
One of the easiest tricks used by watercolor artists is to place masking fluid in places of highlights and reflections. Having said that, some people prefer to directly start with a watery light gray paint and place it in the dark areas of the drawing.
You can easily figure out the light and dark areas using a nine-value scale. Use the values 0-1 for highlights and 8-9 for dark areas usually seen in the thick edges of the glass.
3. Applying the First Wash
Let the masking fluid dry completely and wet the paper with a wash of clean water. Mix a bluish-gray paint, and use a thin brush to add the form shadow and the cast shadow of the glass while the paper is wet.
4. Applying Second Wash
After the first wash has dried, start the paint by darkening the cast shadow. Next, use a wash of light warm gray to highlight the color of the glass. Also, add a warm yellow-gray wash in the foreground to signify the light source.
5. Paint The Background
If your glass is placed against a colored background, it's time to add that color to your painting. Any shade of blue usually works well when painting water or glass. Remember that you'll need to use a similar color while adding the areas with distortions to the glass.
6. Add The Midtones To The Glass
You might have noticed distortions while looking through a glass, which usually takes place due to refraction. Remember the curved lines you drew at the beginning? Take a similar color to the background and apply it to the mid-tones, which would help the object look cohesive with the settings.
7. Add Another Layer Of Distortions
This time you should take a darker shade of the color used in the mid-tones and add them to areas with a value of 6-7. Let this dry, and then darken up the color a bit more to paint areas with a value of 8-9. At this point, your glass would appear three-dimensional.
We want to point out that beginners often forget to add colors to the bottom of a glass. Don't repeat the mistake, as the thick bottom of the glass often demands some of the darkest tones.
8. Fixing The Reflections
Start this step by removing the masking fluid once the last layer of paint has dried. If some of the reflections seem too bright, you can apply a wash of light bluish-gray paint to tone them down.
Tip
When painting glass with watercolor, it's also important to consider your left hand. Holding the glass in your left hand lets you observe how light interacts with the surface and use this information when painting. This can help you capture the unique qualities of glass, such as reflections and refractions, and make your painting more convincing.
FAQs Related To Painting Glass With Watercolor
How can I achieve a convincing illusion of three-dimensionality when painting glass with watercolor techniques?
Use light washes to portray the transparency of the glass, and gradually build up the darker tones to create the illusion of volume.
How can I avoid making the glass in my artwork look too flat or glossy?
Vary the intensity of the colors and use dry brush techniques to create texture and subtle variations on the surface of the glass.
Can I use masking fluid to paint glass with watercolor techniques?
Yes, you can use masking fluid to preserve areas of white paper or to create crisp edges when painting glass with watercolor.
What should I do if I make a mistake while painting glass with watercolor techniques?
Try to lift the paint with a damp brush or sponge. If that doesn’t work, let the paint dry completely and gently scrape it off with a blade. Alternatively, you could incorporate the mistake into your composition.
What are some tips for creating a composition that features glass objects using watercolor techniques?
Experiment with different lighting conditions and angles to capture the reflections and distortions in the glass. Consider the placement of the objects with one another and the background.
Are there any special considerations when painting stained glass with watercolor techniques?
Consider the colors and patterns of the stained glass and use them as inspiration for your painting. Notice how light passes through the glass and creates colorful shadows on surrounding surfaces.
Paint Glass With Watercolor Final Words
With that, we have come to the end of this guide. You must have noticed that we haven't gone too deep into the process. That's because the crux of the technique lies in figuring out the shapes made by the distortions.
If you're still confused about starting to paint glass with watercolor, first try observing how light interacts with transparent objects. You can even begin by creating some rough sketches of glass objects and the shapes made on them by different angles of illumination.
Also, definitely try the color mixes on a piece of scratch paper before applying them to your painting. And bear in mind that it's best to work from light to dark when working with watercolor. If you would like to experience different materials when painting with watercolors, you can also use watercolors on wood, certainly a fun experience!
Until next time, goodbye, and take care!
PS: If you are looking to paint on glass, and create glass ornaments, glass bottle centerpieces, custom mugs for your friends, or even plates for decor you can find the best paints for glass here.
It goes without saying that the baby shower party is a very important yet expensive event, full of happiness and joy. A simple calm day at the end of a tumultuous journey in which the entire family is embarked. For these joyful moments we have curated a list of 22 insanely creative low costs DIY decorating ideas for your baby shower party; you will find here simple decorations infused with creativity, ornaments realized by DIY enthusiasts in no time.
Few of these can be realized with a pair of scissors and colored papers only, some are using balloons creatively while a few require the attention of the entire guest list. Cast a glance at the gallery and surge inspiration from the design that appeals to you the most.
Creative Low Cost DIY Decorating Ideas
#1 Colorful Drops of Water Showering the Baby Presents Beautifully From a Cloud
We would love to hear your opinion on these simply extraordinary crafts in the comment section below. This is a very special moment that will mark the end of one short journey and beginning of an endless joyful one full of happiness.
In the constantly changing and raging rental market, finding the right apartment for your needs, budget, and taste has become quite difficult. Keeping up with trends is another issue young people usually want to take into consideration. Location is crucial as well as internal layout and available space and possibilities of organizing that space in a functional and aesthetically pleasing manner.
A common misunderstanding appears in this context, the difference between a studio apartment and one bedroom, regarding the issue of footprint and, implicit, budget. Both of the options are highly sought for youngsters and young starting families, thus a clarification of the two terms is in order for an acknowledged purchase or documentation.
Although the difference is one that most consider quite small and mundane, these interchangeable types of apartments have one vital distinction. A one-bedroom apartment or a single as it is most often referred to consists of a living room, a kitchen, a bathroom, and a separate bedroom, with or without a balcony or terrace. The space allocated to this type of apartment varies from zone to zone and extra features will add more to the necessary budget for renting or purchase of such a space. As design is concerned, here the possibilities are endless, depending on personal taste and chosen style.
A light Scandinavian theme can fit even the smallest one-bedroom, allowing natural light to flow in and visually connect and amplify the spaces.
A studio apartment whatsoever is composed of a single large room with an open kitchen and an enclosed bathroom. It is a single unit, with an open plan layout where the entire daily activities are accommodated: living, dining, cooking, studying, and sleeping. This is usually considered a disadvantage, making renting fees smaller than the ones allocated to a one-bedroom and the inhabitants are usually students or single individuals who spend most of their time at the office and make use of the studio for sleeping arrangements alone. The advantage of a studio apartment lies in the versatility it offers in terms of available organizational possibilities and design options. Partitions are often used, in the form of actual walls that divide the space, usually the bedroom area for intimacy or as transparent movable walls made from almost anything from wood, glass, rope, or even rice paper with an Asian inspiration. Storage space issues might occur, although when confronted with a smaller space people usually tend to be more careful about the tendency of overcrowding the space, limiting their purchases, and investing in smart creative, usually hidden, storage options. There is also the option of a large studio, usually found on the upper floors of apartment buildings, with rather high price tags and an overall worn-out, industrial-style appeal, preferred by local artists and designers. Such a space will most definitely increase the monthly bills in comparison with the simple, classical, one-room studio apartment and whereas the one-bedroom offers you more space and made a tad more comfortable, a studio apartment comes cheaper.
When the layout allows it, one can fit both a bed and a couch in a studio apartment. The kitchen area can be left open to communicate visually with the living area created.
A glass partition can define the bedroom space as a physical and mental limit although not a visible one. The above example features an enclosed closet space and an open kitchen in direct relation to the dining and living space.
In the context of acoustics, one-bedroom apartments often provide better sound insulation compared to studio apartments, as the separate bedroom is enclosed by walls. Conversely, studio apartments have an open-plan layout, causing the sound to travel more freely between areas like the living room, kitchen, and sleeping space.
To improve acoustics and mitigate noise disturbances in small apartments, here are three non-invasive, rental-appropriate solutions:
Acoustic Panels: Decorative, lightweight panels that absorb sound and prevent echoes. Available in various designs and materials, like foam or fabric.
Soft Furnishings: Rugs, curtains, and upholstered furniture to reduce noise and improve overall comfort. A thick area rug can minimize footsteps noise and act as a floor insulator.
Modular Room Dividers: As discussed in our 30 Room Dividers Perfect for a Studio Apartment article, certain room dividers can help diffuse sound and serve as visual barriers between functional areas.
Considering the above-mentioned difference which of the two, studio apartments or one-bedroom would you choose if you were to purchase one? Feel free to share your input in the comment section below.
New York - an urban jungle brimming with life, color, and energy, is constantly evolving and presenting a dynamic landscape for artists to capture.
From the iconic yellow cabs to the glittering skyscrapers, every corner of New York is a sight to behold. So, it’s no surprise that the diverse neighborhoods, rich history, and classic landmarks of NYC have inspired artists for ages, wouldn't that make it an extraordinary watercolor plein air painting?
You are right!
That said, among all other mediums, I believe the unique vibrancy of watercolors is ideal for capturing the essence of the city that never sleeps. In this step-by-step guide, I’ll take you through everything you need to know to create a stunning watercolor painting of the bustling streets in NYC in a simple, and beginner-friendly guide.
So, grab your watercolors and brushes, and let’s get artsy!
How To Paint New York In Watercolor
First things first - you must have a set of watercolor paints and watercolor brushes that are comfortable enough for you to use throughout the process. You obviously don’t need to splurge on expensive art supplies, but it definitely helps to find something that works for you. Also, note that unlike some of my previous works, this painting requires quite a lot of colors, so I recommend investing in a set of at least 12 colors, you can learn more about the types of watercolor paints here but don't forget to mix colors to discover new shades and colors as you paint.
That said, here’s a list of equipment I’ll be using for today’s artwork:
Paint: Daniel Smith George Politis MA Set 1 6x5 | Paper: Saunders Waterford Watercolor Paper - White, 300gsm | Brush: Princeton Aqua Elite Professional 4 Piece Set 4850
As always, I’ll start today’s painting with a rough sketch. I’ll lightly sketch two cabs as the main subject of my composition. Notice how I’m adding details in the first step already? Well, that’s because, considering how busy the streets of NYC are, I think it’ll be best to draw every little detail right away. This will make coloring easier and prevent mistakes in the later steps.
However, there’s no right or wrong way to sketch. I’m making it detailed today, but usually when I’m making natural landscapes, I stick to the basics and add details later. So, you can proceed according to your expertise and comfort level.
Before you paint, always remember to start with the largest area with no details in between. As such, I’ll start by painting the sky. Since it’s the first layer, I’ll use just a light flush of blue and keep the brush wet enough for the paint to spread seamlessly. But make sure the brush is not dripping wet unless you want the colors to bleed and the paper to tear, even with the proper watercolor paper.
Just be slow and careful, and paint very lightly. You can always darken certain parts later. This will help you achieve a more realistic and lifelike look.
Coming to the star of the show - NYC’s signature yellow cabs!
Start with a light yellow layer and paint both the cabs, leaving the windows and headlights. Again, you can always build up the saturation later, so paint with very little pressure. Otherwise, you might end up painting over smaller areas that aren’t supposed to be yellow!
Similarly, paint the windows and tires too. I’m using brown, but you can opt for gray, black, or blue. Here, too, you can begin painting roughly and add more color later. As you can see, I’ve left some portions blank to mimic the effect of shiny mirrors reflecting the city lights.
Now, switch to a smaller brush for the finer details, like the grille, bumper, headlights, etc. In this step, make sure your brush is not as wet as it was in the previous steps. This is because you’d want to paint more precisely now, and a dripping brush will only make things messy.
Again, I’m using brown for a muted effect, but you can always use black or make the parts of the cab more realistic with metallic colors. Basically, feel free to experiment!
With the same brush, I’ll also add some colorful details on the top of each cab.
Thereafter, you can proceed to add some shading to the cab. Doing so will create more depth and dimension. Here, all you need to do is swipe a single line wherever you want the shadows to fall, and it’ll instantly bring your painting to life!
Next, I’ll paint the skyscrapers that make NYC dazzle from miles away. I’m going back to the thick brush I used for painting the first layer.
First, I’ll use gray and lightly paint the building in the center. Similarly, I’ll use other muted shades like lavender and brown for the rest of the buildings. I’d like to reiterate that you need not make any details right now. Simply block the general colors of each building to get the overall color scheme right.
Once the first layer of the building is completely dry, I’ll paint tiny windows, doors, and other architectural features on each. I’m experimenting with various shapes to add a bit of variety.
As you can see, I'm adding small horizontal windows to the gray building, while the lavender building is full of vertical windows. For the last building, I’m going to add some stripes, giving it a modern, curved look.
Since the billboard has a lot of different details, I’ll continue using the thin brush to paint it, despite it being the first layer. Here, I’ll go all out with vibrant colors like green, blue, purple, red, and yellow. I’m adding various patterns to some parts and keeping the rest simple with just some swipes of paint.
Alternatively, you can add logos of popular brands or product pictures on the billboard. Or how about adding your own name instead of signing at the bottom of the painting? Well, the sky’s the limit when it comes to art, so don’t be afraid to paint what your heart pleases.
Now, I’m not an expert on billboards, so I definitely don’t know what I’m painting here! I’m simply relying on my memory and adding little details here and there to make the painting look more realistic. You could even check reference pictures on the internet to create a more accurate cityscape.
But for the purpose of this easy-to-follow guide, I’m not focusing on perfection. As long as it looks like a billboard, I’m good!
Of course, no cityscape is complete without the road, so I’m simply painting it with some brown watercolor. Again, you can use black, gray, or any suitable color. You could even paint a zebra crossing if you’re feeling creative!
Lastly, I’ll make a lamp post by the sidewalk, illuminating the already-glimmering streets of New York. And with that final touch - my rendition of NYC’s vivacious streets is ready. I can already hear the heavy traffic and smell some freshly baked bagels with cream cheese!
You could add more details to the composition, like some people crossing the road or an airplane far away in the sky. Simply continue to refine the painting, adding details and adjusting colors as needed until you are happy with the overall composition.
Or, you could take a completely different route and paint the city in the evening or at night. For the former, I recommend changing the color of the sky to orange or pink and using muted colors for the rest of the composition for a mellow “evening” vibe.
On the other hand, the night scene in New York is absolutely fantastic. So, I recommend adding lots of lights all around the street and keeping the background pitch dark for a stunning contrast.
Once the painting is complete, allow it to dry completely. I suggest adding a protective varnish or frame if it meets your expectations. If not, remember that painting is a process of trial and error. So, don't get discouraged if something doesn't turn out quite right. Just keep practicing and experimenting until you find what works best for you.
Before I sign off, I want to encourage beginners to use a reference picture of New York. Besides checking the main subject and colors, pay attention to the direction of light in the reference image. This will help you create realistic shadows and highlights.
Choosing the right materials can also help make the process a lot smoother and more rewarding. However, don’t be afraid to make mistakes! Trust the process, and don’t worry too much about the outcome, do exercise with other watercolor guides: How to Paint Amsterdam with Watercolor and How to Paint Berlin with Watercolor are great tutorials to try!
With practice, patience, and perseverance, you'll soon be able to capture the vibrant energy and character of New York City in your watercolor paintings.
A Pioneer mini-split heat pump costs more than a window air conditioner or portable unit, allowing you to alter the temperature in each room. But opt for a wall unit delivering high energy efficiency for a more budget-friendly option.
Choosing a suitable air conditioner for your home that offers effective cooling but doesn’t incur high energy bills can be confusing. Moreover, you can’t afford to spend frequently on repairs and must opt for a reliable model backed by a warranty.
When facing the same dilemma, I spent a bit more and got a Pioneer mini split unit. Today I will explain what it has to offer.
Overview Of Pioneer Mini Split
As far as air conditioner brands go, Parker Davis HVAC Systems are among the most popular. Founded in 1995, the company is well-known for manufacturing high-quality heating, air conditioning, and cooling equipment that proves energy-efficient.
One such unit is the Pioneer Mini Split system, available in three models -
Ductless
Multi-zone mini split system
With duct
Among these, the ducted model has 2 further variations, including a central split and ceiling concealed system. And within these 2 models, you will find six cooling capacity options, ranging from 9,000 to 48,000 British Thermal Units(BTU). These products even have a Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio(SEER) number, complete with an Inverter++ of 230V.
The multi-zone mini split system can be further classified into dual, triple, quad, and quid zone models with 4 cooling capacity options. You can choose any model with a cooling capacity ranging from 9,000 to 24,000 BTU, featuring an outdoor and indoor unit as component choices.
Apart from these options, the ductless mini split system has 5-mounting variations, namely -
Ceiling cassette
Wall-mounted WYT
Floor mounted
Wall mounted WYS
Floor-ceiling mounted
Together, these ductless units have 7 cooling capacity options, starting from 9,000 BTU and going up to 48,000 BTU. You can choose from 2 SEER options - Inverter+ and Inverter++, available at 115V and 230V.
Along with these features and upgrades, every Pioneer Mini Split system comes with -
An indoor unit
An outdoor unit
Flare connection leak guard sealer
Wireless remote control
Benefits Of The Pioneer Mini Split Unit
After telling you about the different mini-split systems available, let me shortlist certain benefits of any Pioneer system.
1. Environment-Friendly
One of the best features of Pioneer mini splits is their eco-friendly performance, and they are more eco-friendly than other mini split systems or a window air conditioner. This is because they run on the R-410A refrigerant that doesn’t lead to ozone depletion while decreasing UV radiations on the Earth’s surface.
2. Remote Control And Leak Detector
Two of the most important accessories of the Pioneer mini split system are the inclusion of a remote and leak detector. You will find that these mini-split systems consist of a wire control and front desk feature complete with an infrared remote to turn on/off the air conditioner even from a distance.
They also come with a refrigerant leak detector that automatically prevents leaks after discovering a leakage. This reduces the chances of damage and keeps the condenser safe.
3. Anti-Cold Air Function
The anti-cold air function of the Pioneer mini split system works well with several Pioneer mini splits equipped with different seer and mounting options. As a result, finding a suitable AC for your requirements becomes easier.
Disadvantages Of The Pioneer Mini Split System
The price is one of the few downsides of the Pioneer mini split system. They cost more than other brands or window units, especially considering the installation charges. These units can only be installed by a professional due to their slightly complicated assembly instructions.
So, people on a tight budget would invariably think twice before bringing one of these mini-splits home.
Pioneer Mini Split Review: Overview Of Features
To better explain the effectiveness and shortcomings of a Pioneer mini split system, I have narrowed down the essential aspects and looked at each point in detail.
1. Energy Efficiency
Any Pioneer HVAC system or mini split system guarantees efficient energy use with a high SEER rating of 16 to 19.5 and a high-quality compressor. Thanks to this rating, you can determine how much energy the unit will consume to manage your electricity expense better.
The Pioneer mini split system also has a high energy efficiency ratio of 19.
2. Performance
If you have a large room ranging between 200 and 500 square feet, opt for the mini split system with a 12,000 BTU pump. This will guarantee effective cooling and optimum performance with heating, ventilation, and air conditioning or dehumidification.
3. Durability
One of the best parts about Pioneer mini split units is their high durability. The brand has used only the best parts to manufacture all components, including the outdoor unit, remote control, installation kit, and ductless inside unit.
4. Filtration
Like most mini split models from Pioneer, the filters are easy to maintain as they are removable and washable. When you clean the filters after regular use, they prevent dust particles from hampering the longevity of the unit. Moreover, you can enjoy better performance with the turbo mode, provided you choose the right filter, as several options are available.
5. Price
The cost of a Pioneer unit varies depending on the model you want to use. Mini split systems with a duct cost between $1,268 and $3,998, whereas the ductless models are priced around $798-$4,288.
The least costly option is multi-zone mini split units ranging from $298 to $778. However, you will have to pay more for additional accessories, like -
Optional filters
Condensate drain hose extension
Convertor adapters
Flare connection leak guard sealer
Programmable thermostat
Replacement remote controls
Wrapping tape
Piping kits
Drain hose extension
The price for these upgrades varies from $0.99 to $134.99.
6. Maintenance
To keep the mini split system in top condition and ensure it performs at optimum capacity to deliver effective cooling, it’s essential to invest in proper maintenance and care of the unit. The first thing I do before cleaning mini-split systems is shut down the power and disconnect them from the circuit.
This reduces the chances of accidents, allowing me to check the vents for dust and debris. Cleaning the vents properly is important to prevent bacteria, germs, and allergens from breeding within the unit and affecting the air quality.
I also use a disinfectant kit with the air conditioner to guarantee healthy air circulates throughout the room. Along with that, always use a clean and damp cloth to wipe the outdoor window unit and filters. While cleaning them, check whether the filters and outdoor vents appear frayed or damaged to opt for timely repairs or replacements.
Apart from these components, the pipes gather a lot of dust and dirt debris that you can remove with a commercial disinfectant. Use a clean cloth to remove all impurities and prevent blockages, mold, and mildew from the condensing unit.
Most importantly, keep all household furniture away from the line of the air vents for uninterrupted airflow. Do the same for the outdoor unit, installing it away from outdoor furniture for the best results.
7. Installation
Only an HVAC professional and technician can install your preferred mini split wall unit because the steps are complicated. DIY enthusiasts with knowledge of using an installation kit may be tempted to assemble the unit, but it would be wise not to.
From experience, I can tell you that following instructions is challenging, and improper assembly increases the chances of damage. Tech support will tell you only a licensed professional can check whether the indoor and outdoor units have the same capacity, voltage, and efficiency.
Most importantly, always take professional assistance to identify the right location for installing the mini split system. This should ideally be some spot with proper air circulation, a firm base, and smooth drainage. As a rule, find a spot away from direct sunlight, obstructions, flammable items, and heat.
8. Additional Benefits
The brand provides a 5-year warranty for all its mini split systems, ensuring you can repair a unit without spending a fortune. Note that the warranty is active from the day of the installation and applies to commercial and residential air conditioning systems. I checked the brand website and found the warranty covers -
Diagnosis
Removal
Installation
Repair and replacements
Costs of all supplies and materials required
9. Value For Money
All things considered, and after reading through the above factors, you can rest assured that Pioneer mini split systems are worth the investment. Although you might have to spend a bit extra compared to other window units, the high SEER rating, powerful cooling, variable speed mode, and positive reviews from other consumers make it worthwhile.
Pioneer Mini-Split AC FAQs
How long do pioneer mini split systems last?
There is no definite answer regarding how long a pioneer mini split system might last. But with proper care and reliable use, these systems can last for 10-15 years.
Does a mini split system run all the time?
It’s important to ensure that a mini split system runs all the time because it uses less energy and maintains a consistent temperature, in such instances. Most importantly, there’s no need to turn the units on/off or adjust the temperature when you’re not at home, like with a central cooling and heating system having a thermostat.
Are pioneer mini split systems loud?
Pioneer mini split models are among the quietest units available on the market, with an average noise emission of 32 decibels.
How much power does a pioneer mini split system use?
On average a pioneer mini split system uses 600 watts of power. Some owners have noticed that the running cost of their units is less than 600 watts and around 560 watts. But this mostly depends on a person’s cooling needs and the same system may require 800 watts of power for effective cooling.
Why does my mini split system keep turning off?
If your mini split system keeps turning off, there’s a problem with the unit. They are designed to run 24/7 but if the compressor excessively overheats, ductless mini split systems may shut off frequently. In some cases, older compressors are susceptible to breaking down and you will have to switch to a modern compressor to use the air conditioner at optimum capacity.
Conclusion
The Pioneer mini split is the best option for people looking for a high-quality unit that reduces environmental impact. You can also choose from numerous products based on the size of the apartment, energy-efficient performance, and your specific requirements.
Moreover, with multi-zone systems, you can raise or lower the temperature in every room easily for greater versatility. These units are a fantastic alternative for other high-end air conditioners without compromising performance.
And positive reviews from happy customers vouch for the same, so don’t hesitate to try them out!
One of the most sought-after units available out there is the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW air conditioner. Although, this is a discontinued product, no longer available on the market.
But is the hype surrounding this unit justified? This is one of the many questions we'll answer today, ensuring that you have all the facts to decide for yourself.
It's true that the designers have added several quality functions, making this model a top choice for most people. For instance, it comes with an innovative whisper mode for noise reduction, a user-friendly interface, and a powerful filter for removing impurities.
However, that's not to say it doesn't need improvement. So, we've tried to highlight all these aspects in our guide, discussing why it's popular, while highlighting the areas that could be concerning for potential buyers.
We've also broken down this guide into different sections; all you need to do is note these points for future reference. Without further ado, let's begin.
POWERFUL YET QUIET: Cool rooms up to 450 square feet in...
SAVE ENERGY, COOL THE ROOM YOU’RE IN: By cooling only the...
Why Buy This Product?
We'll begin by discussing the positive features of this model, making it stand out in the market. For your benefit, we've narrowed down the essential attributes in a point format to ensure a better understanding.
Powerful Cooling Capacity
The most striking aspect of this unit is its powerful cooling capacity, giving it an edge over other models. You'll see it has a total capacity of 12,000 BTU, one of the highest going around. So, let's take a closer look at how it manages to cool the air.
We found that this device captures moisture from the air and recirculates it back to cool your office or home. To do so, it dehumidifies and cools the air simultaneously by removing 54.95 pints of moisture daily. As a result, this air conditioner is suitable for places with humid climates.
Dehumidifier
Now, users may choose to operate only the dehumidifier, having several benefits. When used without air-cooling, this machine removes more moisture, around 86.65 pints of moisture-laden air daily. Hence, it makes your home more inhabitable throughout the changing seasons, making you feel comfortable.
BioSilver Air Filter
Another fantastic upgrade is the inclusion of a BioSilver air filter. This ensures that the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW removes bacteria, dust and traps pollen along with moisture. As a result, the air inside your home will be cool and clean, meaning it's perfect for users who have dust allergies and breathing issues.
User-friendly
The designers have included a remote control for managing its different functions. This proves particularly useful for both youngsters and older people, meaning they won't have to walk to the unit. Instead, they can operate the air conditioner by adjusting the temperature, power, and dust removal function from any convenient spot.
Portable
We loved the inclusion of castor wheels, meaning you can position it in any suitable spot. In that regard, its lightweight design proves useful as you don't need to use much energy to push it around. Plus, these castor wheels are durable and they won't wear out after regular use.
Energy-Efficient
A significant advantage of using the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW is its energy efficiency. You can control the power without compromising on performance, thereby keeping electricity consumption to a minimum. Hence, it delivers a longer runtime without any hassle.
Window Venting Kit
Other than that, the engineers have also included a window venting kit for easy installation in most standard windows. It comes with the necessary instructions, allowing you to assemble the components in the correct order. Once fitted, you can consistently maintain the indoor conditions of your room.
Additionally, you can make customizations, which highlights its efficiency, making this unit suitable for most homes.
Whisper Mode
Now, it's well-established that most air conditioners produce a sound when turned on. So, the engineers of the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW have developed a whisper mode, ensuring that there's no irritating sound.
Overall, even when used at full blast, this model has a low decibel rating of 53. Additionally, the whisper mode reduces noise emission by half. But how exactly does it work?
You can activate the whisper mode at the touch of a button, which changes the fan's settings for more efficient output. In spite of that, this air condition manages to remove a large amount of air, comparable to a high-fan setting, with reduced noise emission.
We must mention that you shouldn't start the device in this mode. Instead, for the best results, allow it to cool the room to the desired temperature before switching to the whisper mode.
Temperature Indicator
Users will love its display screen as the designers have used three colors to highlight the different settings. Apart from looking attractive, all colors have a specific purpose, delivering the best user experience. Therefore, when you set the desired room temperature, it displays the setting in one color.
As the room temperature comes down, approaching the desired value, a second light pops up, highlighting its progress. Finally, when your room is at the correct temperature, a third light helps display the results. In this way, you remain informed about the performance while it ensures easy viewing from across the room.
Real Feel
We must now discuss its real feel function, delivering the best indoor conditions. It helps balance the ideal humidity level with your desired temperature setting, meaning you won't feel uncomfortable in any room.
This feature comes in handy throughout the year and helps first-time users find the right setting. Long story short, if you're unsure about the cooling capacity value for any room, enable the real feel function for the ideal atmospheric conditions.
Sturdiness
Finally, this is a durable unit capable of delivering long-lasting performance. We assure you it will be worth the investment, allowing users to enjoy its reliable output in all conditions.
What Could've Been Better?
Now, it's time to look at the areas which need improvement. Firstly, some users have felt that the price of the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW is a bit steep, leading to second thoughts about the purchase. Having said that, you must realize that this is a quality unit, and you need to have a flexible budget for buying top products.
Other than that, it's slightly bulky, which is an inconvenience. While you won't face difficulty moving it across the floor, it can be tiring to take this air conditioner upstairs or downstairs. Therefore, if you're looking for a lightweight model, it would be best to consider other options.
Moreover, if you have horizontal windows, it might be difficult to install this unit; you’ll need to talk to the supplier before making a decision. While it fits into vertical windows without any hassle, modifications are a must to mount it on horizontal windows.
Pros
Cooling capacity of 12,000 BTU
Whisper mode for greater comfort
User-friendly interface complete with remote control
BioSilver air filter for removing impurities
Temperature indicator with triple color display
Cons
May not fit in vertical windows
Slightly pricey
DeLonghi America PACAN120EW Buyer's Guide
It's time to progress to our buyer's guide, where we'll be discussing other important factors you need to consider before making the purchase. Although we've covered most of the attributes in the previous two sections, you can note the following points for better understanding.
Versatility
Before buying an air conditioner, you need to look at its versatility. Due to rising temperatures and global warming, the best models no longer focus on just cooling but improve the quality of life. Be it summer, winter, or monsoon, your air conditioner must be capable of dealing with the changing seasons while proving eco-friendly.
Price
Another essential factor for buyers is the price, and you need to be flexible with your budget to make the correct purchase. Premium-quality units usually cost more due to their all-round coverage and better functions.
It would be best to spend a few extra bucks and not compromise on performance. Buying an air conditioner is an investment and choosing a slightly pricey yet reliable model ensures that it delivers consistent output for a long time.
Ease Of Use
Modern air conditioners must be user-friendly for older people and youngsters to understand the functions. We've seen how the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW has an uncomplicated interface to help users manage its different features.
Moreover, the designers must detail all the instructions clearly with the help of diagrams so that you can operate it without any hassle.
Durability
Lastly, irrespective of your choice, an air conditioner must be durable to withstand regular use. It takes time to lower indoor temperatures in extreme heat while the components must hold up well for long-lasting performance. In that regard, the designers need to remember that air conditioners must be capable of consistent cooling.
Fortunately, the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW has the necessary sturdiness, guaranteeing reliable output. It won't wear out easily, plus its innovative filter mechanism helps lower maintenance.
DeLonghi America PACAN120EW Verdict
That's all there is to know about the DeLonghi America PACAN120EW; hopefully, you can now reach a decision.
Given its many exciting features, you'll have a fantastic experience using this model. It's modern, stylish, and comes with all the relevant functions for the best results.
Although you'll need to spend slightly more, its quality performance makes it worth the purchase. It's time now to take your leave, but we'll be back with more exciting product reviews.
Until then, enjoy the coolness and fresh air produced by this powerful air conditioner!
Discover the different types of painting techniques that have captured the imagination of famous artists and art lovers alike throughout history. From abstract painting to realistic to miniature painting, read about the unique characteristics of each genre.
Welcome to the colorful world of art! From the delicate brushstrokes of watercolor to the bold and vibrant hues of acrylic, paintings have the ability to evoke emotions and capture moments in time. At least, I, for one, am always enchanted by a good painting!
Whether you're an art enthusiast or a curious newbie, today I will take you on a journey through various painting techniques and styles. Who knows? You may discover a whole new world of artistic possibilities!
Timeless Beauty of Classic Masterpieces
Ah, classic masterpieces! These painting styles have stood the test of time and continue to captivate audiences even today.
1. Baroque
This art style emerged in the 17th century and is characterized by dramatic lighting, vivid colors, and ornate details. Baroque artists sought to convey intense emotion and movement, often depicting religious or historical scenes.
One of the most well-known Baroque artists is Gian Lorenzo Bernini, a famous artist of sculpture and architecture. His works, such as The Ecstasy of Saint Teresa, showcase the Baroque painting style with their intricate details and dramatic poses.
Overall, the Baroque style represented a departure from the restrained classicism of the Renaissance. Its emphasis on emotion and movement paved the way for the expressive painting styles that followed.
2. Byzantine
Byzantine art is a unique blend of Greek, Roman, and Christian traditions, resulting in a distinctive art style that was both spiritual and worldly. One of the hallmarks of Byzantine art is the use of icons, which were paintings of religious figures meant to be used for devotional purposes. These icons were often adorned with gold leaf and precious stones, giving them a sense of otherworldliness.
But Byzantine art wasn't just limited to icons - it also included mosaics, frescoes, and illuminated manuscripts. These works were often commissioned by the wealthy and powerful, who wanted to show off their purity and wealth.
And while Byzantine art may seem ornate and intricate, it was also highly symbolic, with each element carefully chosen to convey a particular meaning.
3. Renaissance Art Style
Speaking of the Renaissance, this period from the 14th to 17th centuries marked a resurgence of classical ideals and artistic innovation. Famous artists such as Leonardo da Vinci and Michelangelo produced some of the most iconic works of all time during this era. Renaissance art is characterized by its realism, perspective, and attention to detail.
Renaissance art was not only limited to paintings but also included sculpture, architecture, and other painting mediums. It reflected a renewed interest in the classical past, as well as a focus on humanism and individualism.
One of the most famous works of Renaissance art is Leonardo da Vinci's Mona Lisa, known for its enigmatic smile and use of sfumato, a technique that creates a soft, smoky effect.
4. Rococo
Rococo art is known for its extravagant style and delicate details, often featuring pastel colors and intricate designs. It starkly contrasts the more subdued nature of watercolor paintings, which rely on the transparency of pigments to create a soft, dreamy effect on the canvas.
However, despite these differences, there is a certain charm to be found in combining these two painting styles. Imagine a rococo-inspired portrait painting with delicate watercolor washes highlighting the subject's features.
Or perhaps a landscape painting with a rococo-inspired border, painted in watercolor hues to create a sense of depth and texture. The possibilities are endless for combining different art styles and techniques. Experimenting with different painting mediums is a great way to explore the boundaries of what's possible in art.
If you're looking for a lighthearted escape from the seriousness of other art movements, Rococo might be just what you need!
5. Romanticism
Romanticism was a reaction to the rationalism of the Enlightenment. This 19th-century painting style emphasized emotion, individualism, and imagination. Romantic paintings often featured sublime landscapes and historical or mythological scenes.
Romanticism was a period of rebellion against the prevailing social norms of the time, and artists sought to break free from the strict conventions of academic art. They celebrated nature, often depicting it in all its grandeur and beauty, and embraced the individual spirit over conformity.
One of the most iconic Romantic artists is Eugene Delacroix, whose works such as Liberty Leading the People and The Death of Sardanapalus convey a sense of emotional intensity and passion. His use of bold colors and dynamic compositions capture the essence of Romanticism.
6. Trompe-l'œil
Trompe-l'œil is a French term meaning "deceive the eye," and that's exactly what this art style aims to do. Trompe-l'œil paintings are so realistic that they appear three-dimensional or even real. This painting style has been used throughout history to create optical illusions and trick the viewer's perception.
Trompe-l'œil paintings often feature everyday objects, such as a letter or a book, as if they were sitting right in front of you. Some famous artists have even taken it a step further, creating entire rooms or scenes that look like you could walk right into them. The level of detail and precision required to create a convincing trompe-l'œil painting style is truly remarkable.
This painting technique has been popular throughout history, particularly in the Baroque and Renaissance periods. Even today, trompe-l'œil can be found in modern arts and advertising. It's an art style that truly captures the imagination and challenges our perceptions of reality.
7. Gothic Art
Gothic art emerged in the late Middle Ages and is characterized by its ornate, decorative style. Gothic paintings often feature religious subjects and were used to convey a sense of awe and reverence. The intricate details and towering structures of Gothic architecture are also reflected in the style's paintings. Gothic art is a fascinating and dramatic style that has captured people's imaginations for centuries.
One of the most striking features of this art form is its intricate and delicate details, which are often enhanced by the use of bright colors and elaborate patterns. Gothic art was also used to tell stories, particularly religious ones. Many Gothic paintings depict scenes from the Bible or the lives of saints.
Overall, Gothic art is a striking and powerful style that has impacted the art world. Its influence can be seen in many different art styles, and its legacy continues.
These classic masterpieces are a testament to the enduring power of art and the creativity of the human mind.
From Chaos to Precision: Modern Styles in Painting
Let's dive into the world of modern painting movements! From the colorful chaos of Fauvism to the mathematical precision of Geometric Abstraction, there's a painting style for everyone to create art, appreciate and enjoy.
8. Abstract Expressionism
First up on our list of modern movements in painting technique is Abstract Expressionism. This art style emerged in the 1940s in the United States and quickly became one of the most influential art movements of the 20th century.
Abstract Expressionist paintings are characterized by their large size, bold colors, and spontaneous brushwork. The famous artists who created these works sought to convey emotion and to feel through their art rather than depict recognizable objects or scenes.
Some famous Abstract Expressionist painters include Jackson Pollock, Mark Rothko, and Willem de Kooning. Their works are still highly prized by collectors today and can be seen in museums worldwide.
9. Cubism
Next is Cubism, which developed in the early 20th century in France. This movement is known for its use of geometric shapes and the fragmentation of form.
Cubist painters sought to depict the world from multiple viewpoints rather than a single, fixed perspective. This resulted in works that appear almost abstract at first glance but, upon closer inspection, reveal recognizable objects and scenes.
Pablo Picasso and Georges Braque are two of the most famous Cubist painters. Their works continue to inspire artists today and can be seen in many major museums.
10. Dadaism
Welcome to the chaotic and irreverent world of Dadaism! This movement emerged in the early 20th century as a response to the horrors of World War I. It rejected traditional artistic conventions to embrace randomness, absurdity, and nonsense.
Dada artists sought to undermine the seriousness of the art world by creating intentionally nonsensical pieces, often incorporating everyday objects or even garbage into their works. Some of the most famous Dada works include Marcel Duchamp's "Fountain," which was simply a urinal turned upside down and signed with a fake name, and Hannah Höch's photomontages, which blended images from popular culture into surrealist collages.
11. Fauvism
Fauvism was a French painting style that emerged in the early 20th century and is characterized by its use of intense, saturated hues and its rejection of traditional representational techniques. Fauvist artists aimed to capture the emotional impact of color rather than realistic depictions of the world around them.
One of the defining characteristics of Fauvism is its use of vibrant watercolors. Famous artists like André Derain and Henri Matisse often used watercolor oil paints to create bold and expressive works that capture the intensity of their subjects.
For example, Derain's "The Dance" features bright oranges, pinks, and yellows in a fierce depiction of a dance scene. At the same time, Matisse's "Joy of Life" portrays a group of nude figures in a lush, colorful landscape painting using vivid watercolor washes.
These works showcase the unique ability of watercolors to convey emotion through color and brushwork, which made them a natural fit for the Fauvist movement.
12. Geometric Abstraction
Looking for something a bit more cerebral? Then you might enjoy the clean lines and mathematical precision of Geometric Abstraction. This style, which emerged in the early 20th century, was characterized by its use of simple geometric shapes and its rejection of figurative art.
Geometric Abstraction artists aimed to create a sense of order and structure through their works, often using precise, repetitive patterns and shapes to achieve this effect.
Some of the most famous Geometric Abstraction pieces include Kazimir Malevich's "Black Square," which is simply a black square on a white background, and Piet Mondrian's "Composition II in Red, Blue, and Yellow," which features bold, primary colors arranged in a grid-like pattern.
13. Minimalism
Less is more, as they say, and that's certainly the case with Minimalism. This movement, which emerged in the mid-20th century, is characterized by its use of simple, stripped-down forms and its rejection of ornamentation and excess.
Minimalist artists aimed to create works that were as basic and essential as possible, often using industrial materials and emphasizing the physicality of the artwork itself.
Some of the most famous Minimalist pieces include Donald Judd's untitled boxes, which are rectangular metal or plexiglass forms, and Dan Flavin's fluorescent light installations, which use light as the medium for the artwork.
14. Neo-Expressionism
Finally, if you're looking for something with a bit more emotional punch, then Neo-Expressionism might be up your alley. This movement, which emerged in the 1980s, was a reaction against the cool, detached aesthetics of Minimalism and other modernist painting styles.
Neo-Expressionist artists aimed to create works that were raw, visceral, and emotionally charged, often using intense colors and thick, gestural brushstrokes. Some of the most famous Neo-Expressionist pieces include Jean-Michel Basquiat's graffiti-inspired paintings, which blend street art with fine art, and Anselm Kiefer's massive, layered canvases, which explore themes of history and memory.
So there you have it, folks - a quick tour of some of the most exciting modern painting movements! Whether you prefer the emotional punch of Neo-Expressionism or the clean lines of Minimalism, these painting styles continue to inspire and captivate artists and art lovers worldwide.
Realism and Beyond
The world of art is vast and varied, with countless painting styles and movements that have emerged throughout history. Each movement has its unique characteristics and techniques and has been shaped by the social, cultural, and political forces of its time.
15. American Impressionism
One of the most prominent movements in the late 19th century, American Impressionism, was heavily influenced by the French Impressionist movement. American artists who Impressionism inspired aimed to capture the essence of a moment in time through the use of light and color.
They often depict scenes from everyday life, such as landscapes, urban settings, and leisure activities. One of the most notable American Impressionists is Mary Cassatt, who is well-known for her delicate and intimate portraits of women and children.
Another famous American Impressionist is Childe Hassam, who was known for his vibrant and colorful paintings of New York City, capturing the bustling energy of the city in a way that was both lively and captivating.
16. Tonalism
Tonalism is an American art style that emerged in the late 19th century. This movement is about creating art emphasizing color and light to create a mood or atmosphere.
Tonalists often depicted landscapes, focusing on the mood and emotion that the scene evokes rather than the specific details of the scene. Tonalism is known for its muted colors and hazy, atmospheric quality.
Some of the most well-known Tonalists include James McNeill Whistler, who created many paintings of the Thames River in London, and George Inness, who created many paintings of the American landscape.
17. Social Realism
Social Realism is an art movement that emerged in the 1930s. This movement is all about creating art that reflects the social and political realities of the time. Social Realists often depicted everyday people, including the working class and marginalized communities.
Social Realism often deals with issues of poverty, inequality, and injustice. Some of the most well-known Social Realists include Diego Rivera, who created many murals that depicted the struggles of the working class, and Ben Shahn, who created many paintings that addressed issues of social and political justice.
Through their powerful and thought-provoking works, Social Realists sought to shed light on the harsh realities of society and inspire change toward a more just and equitable world.
18. Pointillism
Pointillism is an art movement that emerged in the late 19th century. This movement is about creating paintings using small dots of color that blend together to create a larger image.
Pointillists use precise brushwork and attention to detail to create paintings that are incredibly detailed and vibrant. Pointillists often depicted everyday scenes like landscapes, cityscapes, and portraits.
One of the most well-known Pointillists is Georges Seurat, who created many paintings using this technique, including his famous work "A Sunday Afternoon on the Island of La Grande Jatte." Pointillism produces paintings that are both dynamic and captivating, with a luminous quality that is unmatched by other techniques.
19. Hyperrealism
Hyperrealism is all about creating paintings that look almost like photographs. Hyperrealists use precise brushwork and attention to detail to create paintings that are so realistic they can be mistaken for photographs.
Hyperrealism often depicts everyday scenes like cityscapes, still life paintings, and portraits. A prominent Hyperrealist is Audrey Flack, who is known for her incredibly detailed still-life paintings that are created by painting layer upon layer of paint to create a sense of depth and texture.
Hyperrealism requires a high level of technical skill and a keen eye for detail. Hyperrealists often spend countless hours studying their subjects, photographing, and making sketches before beginning their paintings. The resulting works are often larger than life and create a sense of wonder and amazement in viewers who may question whether they are looking at a painting or a photograph.
20. Regionalism
Regionalism is an American art movement that emerged in the 1930s. This movement is about creating art that reflects the cultural traditions and values of specific regions within the United States.
Regionalists often depicted rural life, including landscapes, people, and animals. Some of the most famous Regionalists include Grant Wood, known for his iconic painting "American Gothic," and Thomas Hart Benton, who created many paintings of the American Midwest.
By emphasizing the importance of regional identity and culture, Regionalists helped to establish a sense of national pride and unity during a time of significant change in America. Today, Regionalism remains an integral part of American art history, serving as a reminder of the rich diversity and complexity of American culture.
21. Contemporary Realism
Contemporary Realism refers to the art movement that emerged in the late 20th century and is still prevalent today. This movement is all about creating art that truly represents the world around us.
Contemporary Realists use precise brushwork and attention to detail to create paintings that look almost like photographs. You'll often find them painting everyday scenes like cityscapes, still lifes, and portraits.
A prominent Contemporary Realist is Chuck Close, who is known for his massive portraits that are created by meticulously painting individual squares to create a larger image.
22. Early American Folk Art
Early American Folk Art is a type of painting technique that emerged in the late 18th and early 19th centuries. This art was created by everyday people who didn't have formal art training. Instead, they used their unique painting styles and techniques to create arts that reflected their everyday lives.
Early American Folk Art often depicts everyday scenes like farm life, rural landscapes, and portraits of family members. One of the most well-known Early American Folk Artists is Edward Hicks, who created many paintings of animals, including his famous "Peaceable Kingdom" series.
Each painting style and movement has its unique story to tell, and through the work of talented artists, we can glimpse into the past and understand the world from their perspective. By studying and appreciating these painting styles, you can gain a greater understanding and appreciation of the diverse and rich history of painting.
Artistic Traditions in Various Cultures
Famous artists often utilize different tools and techniques to achieve their desired effects. For example, some painters use a palette knife for more precise lines and texture. Others may use a heat gun to create intricate designs in sandpainting or to speed up the drying process of their work.
In addition, some painters may use a varnish or emulsion to add a glossy finish to their paintings, while others may focus on waterproofing their work to preserve it for a longer period.
In terms of materials, painters have used a variety of substances throughout history. Milk, for instance, has been used in casein paint, a type of paint that dries quickly and produces vibrant colors.
Graphite, on the other hand, is a common material used in pencil drawings and can be manipulated to create various shades of gray. Textiles have also been used in painting, such as silk in Chinese art, to add texture and depth to works.
Furthermore, different regions and cultures have their unique traditions and styles of painting. Japanese painting, for example, often incorporates calligraphy and gesture, while East Asian art may focus on the concept of balance and harmony. The Netherlands, on the other hand, has a rich history in figure painting, while Paris has been a hub for modern art and innovation.
Visual Art Forms
Visual art has always been a captivating and inspiring medium for people, with each form showcasing the artist's unique vision and creativity. From bold acrylic paintings to delicate ink drawings, every artwork has its charm.
Watercolor has been a favorite medium for many famous artists throughout history. So, grab your paintbrush and immerse yourself in the world of watercolor!
23. Acrylic Paints
Acrylic painting is a famous painting technique that uses water-soluble acrylic paints. Acrylics can be used on various surfaces, including canvas, paper, wood, and even metal.
One of the reasons why acrylic painting medium is so popular is because of the range of effects it can create. From bold and bright colors to subtle and muted tones, acrylic paint can create various textures and finishes.
Acrylic paint can be diluted with water to create a watercolor-like effect, or it can be layered to create a thick and textured surface. With its versatility, fast-drying properties, and easy cleanup, acrylic painting is a perfect choice for creating beautiful and long-lasting artwork.
24. Charcoal Drawing
Charcoal drawing is a traditional technique that uses charcoal sticks to create dark, smudgy lines. This technique is perfect for creating atmospheric pieces of art that evoke a sense of mystery and emotion.
Charcoal drawing is also known for its versatility, allowing artists to create various effects by varying the pressure and texture of the charcoal on the surface. It's an excellent technique for capturing the mood and tone of a subject, mainly when working with subjects like portraits, landscapes, and still life.
Artists often favor charcoal for its ability to create dramatic contrast and depth, and its forgiving nature allows for corrections and adjustments to be made easily. Whether you're a beginner or an experienced artist, charcoal drawing is a skill worth mastering.
25. Egg Tempera Paintings
Egg tempera paintings are a fascinating technique used for centuries to create stunning works of art. It's known for its unique texture and luminous finish, which makes it a popular choice for artists who want to create works of art with a timeless feel.
One of the most distinctive features of egg tempera painting medium is using egg yolk as a pigment binder. This gives the painting a rich, creamy texture that's hard to achieve with other types of painting. In addition, egg tempera dries quickly, which allows artists to create intricate details and fine lines with precision.
26. Watercolor Painting
Watercolor painting is a beautiful medium that offers a lot of creative freedom to artists. With their unique properties, watercolors can create various effects, from delicate washes to bold, vibrant colors. This versatility makes it a popular choice for artists who enjoy experimenting with different techniques and styles.
The watercolor painting medium also offers a lot of room for experimentation and creativity. Because the paint is water-soluble, it can be used in various ways, from thin washes to thick, opaque layers. Artists can also use various tools, such as brushes, sponges, and even salt, to create unique textures and effects.
Overall, watercolor painting is a wonderful medium that offers a lot of creative possibilities to artists. Whether you're a beginner or an experienced artist, there is always something new to learn and explore with watercolors. So why not give it a try and see what beautiful creations you can come up with?
27. Encaustic Painting Style
Encaustic painting is an incredibly versatile medium that allows artists to experiment with various textures and colors to create unique works of art.
The encaustic painting technique involves mixing pigments with melted beeswax and then applying the mixture to a surface, typically a wooden panel painting. The wax is then heated and fused onto the surface, creating a durable, long-lasting encaustic painting.
One of the advantages of encaustic painting is that the wax can be layered and built up to create a rich, textured surface with depth and dimension. The hot wax painting can also be carved and manipulated with tools to create intricate designs and patterns. Encaustic painting allows artists to create various effects and explore techniques to achieve their desired results.
28. Fresco Painting Medium
This ancient technique has been around for centuries and is still used today by many artists. So, what exactly is fresco painting? Well, it's a form of painting where pigment is applied to wet plaster on a wall or ceiling, creating a stunning mural lasting hundreds of years.
One of the most impressive things about the fresco painting technique is how it captures light and color. The wet plaster absorbs the pigment, making the colors part of the wall. This creates a unique depth and richness that can't be achieved with other painting techniques.
Another fascinating aspect of the fresco painting technique is the history behind it. This technique was used by the ancient Egyptians, Greeks, and Romans and was later revived during the Italian Renaissance. Many of the most famous frescoes in the world can be found in churches and cathedrals throughout Europe.
29. Gouache Painting Medium
Gouache painting is a medium that is often overlooked, but it definitely deserves some attention. It is a type of opaque watercolor used by artists for centuries.
One of the unique qualities of gouache is its versatility. It can be used for various applications, from illustration and design work to fine abstract art. Gouache paintings have a distinctive look that sets them apart from other painting mediums.
The opaque nature of the paint means that the artist can paint light colors over dark without needing multiple layers. This makes gouache painting a great choice for creating vibrant, colorful compositions.
30. Ink Wash Painting
Ink Wash Painting is one of the oldest and most versatile forms of artistic expression out there. It involves using various tools to create lines and shapes with ink on a surface, such as paper or canvas. The beauty of ink drawing lies in its simplicity and ability to convey various emotions and moods.
Many artists work exclusively with ink, while others use it as a starting point before moving on to other painting mediums. Some artists combine ink with watercolors or oil paints to create stunning mixed-media pieces.
Ink drawing is a fantastic way to experiment with different techniques and styles, and it's accessible to artists of all levels. So why not grab your pen or brush and start creating your own ink masterpieces today?
31. Oil Painting
The oil painting technique is a timeless and beloved form of the abstract art medium that has been around for centuries. It's a medium that allows for incredible depth, texture, and richness of color. The process of oil painting involves mixing pigments with oil, usually linseed oil, to create a paint that can be applied to a canvas or other surface.
But, as with any art form, the oil painting technique takes time and practice to master. From choosing the right brushes and oil paints to understanding color theory and composition, there are many elements to consider. However, the beauty of oil painting lies in the process itself. The tactile experience of mixing colors and applying paint to a surface can be both meditative and exhilarating.
32. Pastel Painting Technique
One of the most appealing aspects of a pastel painting is its ability to capture the softness and delicacy of subjects such as flowers and landscapes. Pastel paintings have a distinctive, powdery texture that gives them a unique visual appeal. They are also known for their ability to create vibrant, luminous colors that can bring a painting to life.
However, pastel painting can be challenging, as it requires a delicate touch and a great deal of patience. Pastels are a dry medium, and unlike paint, they cannot be mixed on the canvas. Additionally, the powdery texture of pastels can make them difficult to control, so it takes skill and practice to master this medium.
Despite the challenges, pastel painting remains a famous and beloved medium among artists and art enthusiasts alike. It offers a unique and expressive way to capture the beauty of the world around us, and its versatility allows for a wide range of painting styles and techniques.
Visual art forms are a beautiful and dynamic way for artists to express their creativity and share their unique perspectives with the world. No matter the medium, each piece tells a story and invites the viewer to connect with the artist and their message. So, grab your brushesand let your imagination run wild!
Futuristic Flair
As the world becomes increasingly complex and technology advances, artists have embraced futuristic themes in their work. From the streets to the galleries, there is a growing fascination with the possibilities of the future.
33. Graffiti Art
A graffiti artist does more than just spray-painting random words or images on walls. It's an art form that's been around for decades, and it's only getting better. The vibrant colors and intricate designs are a feast for the eyes, and they have the power to transform dull, drab buildings into works of art.
One of the most exciting things about graffiti art is its temporary nature. You never know when or where the next masterpiece will appear. It could be on a busy street corner or tucked away in a hidden alley. Either way, the thrill of discovering a new piece of graffiti art is like finding a hidden treasure.
In short, graffiti art is more than just a bunch of words and images on a wall. It's a dynamic and evolving art form that has captured the imagination of graffiti artists and art lovers alike. So next time you're out and about, keep your eyes peeled for a piece of graffiti art. Who knows what you might discover?
34. Afrofuturism
Afrofuturism is an exciting artistic movement that combines elements of science fiction, fantasy, and Afrocentricity. It's a celebration of African culture and identity while also exploring the future of black people in the world. Think of it like an imaginative blend of Sun Ra, Octavia Butler, and George Clinton, with a healthy dose of funk and soul thrown in for good measure
One of the coolest things about Afrofuturism is how it uses science fiction and fantasy to imagine new possibilities for black people. In a world where black people are often portrayed as marginalized or oppressed, Afrofuturism creates a space where black people can be powerful, creative, and visionary. It's a way to dream of a future where black people are at the forefront of innovation and progress.
35. Street Art
Street art is a form of creative expression that takes art from the confines of a gallery and puts it on the streets. It's an art form that thrives in public spaces and encourages artists to create pieces that speak to the community. Whether it's a giant mural or a small sticker, street art is an important part of modern culture.
Another great thing about street art is that it's often created by anonymous artists. This anonymity adds an air of mystery and intrigue to the art form, making it even more fascinating to observe. It's also a way for artists to escape the traditional art world, which can be exclusive and limiting.
Whether it's through the raw energy of graffiti, the thought-provoking messages of street art or the Afrofuturist visions of black artists, the theme of the future has inspired a wide range of artistic expressions. As we continue to look to the horizon, we can expect to see even more exciting and innovative creations that push the boundaries of what we thought was possible.
Diverse World of Painting: Styles, Techniques, and Influential Artists
Various types of painting include ink wash painting, Chinese painting, cave painting, spray, fresco-secco, portrait miniature, en plein air, mixed media, and Western painting. These styles utilize a range of materials, such as aerosol, chalk, vellum, resin, and vitreous enamel paint. Famous artists use different techniques, including chiaroscuro, texture mapping, and drip painting, to achieve their desired effect.
Painters throughout history, including Michelangelo, Rembrandt, Claude Monet, Vincent van Gogh, Salvador Dalí, Caravaggio, Johannes Vermeer, Wassily Kandinsky, Andrea Mantegna, Edvard Munch, Sistine Chapel, Andy Warhol, have contributed to the diverse world of painting.
Different cultures, such as Japan, Italy, China, and Greece, have their own unique artistic traditions, including calligraphy, Veduta, Warli, and Madhubani art. In contemporary times, technology has revolutionized the art universe with the use of computer programs, water-miscible oil paint, and aerosol spray dispensers. Painting can be a powerful form of expression, conveying messages, allegories, and emotions.
FAQs Related To Types of Painting
What is expressionism in painting?
Expressionism is a modernist movement in art that originated in Germany in the early 20th century. It’s characterized by bold colors, exaggerated forms, and emotional intensity, with the aim of expressing the artist’s inner feelings and experiences.
How do artists use space in their paintings?
Artists use space in their paintings to create a sense of depth, perspective, and composition.
What materials and techniques are used in traditional Indian painting?
Traditional Indian painting uses a variety of materials, including natural dyes, minerals, and precious stones, as well as traditional tools such as bamboo pens and brushes made from animal hair.
What distinguishes photorealism from other painting styles?
Photorealism is a painting style that seeks to replicate a photograph in exact detail, often with the aim of challenging our perceptions of reality. It’s characterized by hyper-realistic detail and precise attention to lighting and shadow.
How does the use of beeswax impact the texture and appearance of a painting?
When mixed with pigment, beeswax can create a rich, textured surface that is both translucent and opaque. It can be used to create a variety of effects, including depth, luminosity, and a sense of movement in hot wax painting.
What are some techniques for achieving the desired effect with oil painting?
Techniques for achieving a desired effect with oil painting include layering, blending, glazing, impasto, and scumbling. Each technique can create a unique effect, depending on the artist’s intention.
What are some benefits and challenges associated with digital painting compared to traditional painting techniques?
The benefits of digital painting include greater flexibility, faster workflow, and easier editing capabilities. Challenges include the need for specialized software and hardware, as well as a potential loss of tactile experience.
How does an artist's chosen style impact the way they approach a painting?
An artist’s chosen style can impact everything from their subject matter and color palette to their brushwork and composition. It can also influence their conceptual art approach and the message they are trying to convey through their work.
How do art movements emerge and evolve over time?
Art movements emerge and evolve over time as artists respond to the cultural, political, and social climate of their time. Factors that contribute to their popularity and longevity include their influence on subsequent generations of artists and their ongoing relevance to contemporary issues.
What distinguishes pop art from other styles of contemporary art?
Pop art or digital art is characterized by its use of popular culture imagery, such as advertising, comic books, and mass-produced goods. It often employs bright, bold colors and a sense of irony or satire.
How do different types of painting strokes contribute to the overall look and feel of a painting?
Different types of painting strokes, such as short or long, thick or thin, can create different textures, tones, and moods in a painting. For example, short, choppy strokes can convey a sense of energy and movement, while long, flowing strokes can create a more serene or peaceful atmosphere.
How is linseed oil paint used in oil painting, and what are some alternative binders that artists may use?
Linseed oil paint is a common binder used in oil painting to mix with pigments and create paint that can be applied to a canvas. It dries slowly and allows for the blending and layering of colors. Some alternative binders that artists may use include walnut oil paint, poppy seed oil paint, and safflower oil paint, which have different drying times and properties.
How do artists create the illusion of three-dimensional space on a two-dimensional surface?
Overlapping objects in a painting can create a sense of foreground and background while varying the scale of objects can create a sense of distance. Perspective can create the illusion of depth by drawing lines that converge towards a vanishing point. Shading and lighting can also be used to create a sense of form and volume in a painting.
So, there you have it - a colorful exploration of some of the many types of painting out there! From the bold, bright hues of expressionism to the delicate lines of miniature painting, the world of painting art is a vast and varied one.
Whether you're an artist yourself or simply an appreciator of the arts, I hope this overview has inspired you to explore new styles and techniques or to simply enjoy the beauty of the paintings around you.
And with new technologies and materials constantly being developed, the world of paintings is sure to continue evolving and expanding in exciting ways. So pick up a brush, choose your colors, and let your creativity flow.
The best TV mounting height and viewing angle depend on several factors, which can vary considerably from one case to the next. These factors include the TV size, viewing distance, clearance required, and location, among others.
Having the best TV-watching experience does not depend just on the quality of your TV.
There are other factors at play as well, and these include the height at which the TV is mounted and its viewing angles. Unsurprisingly, many people find it immensely confusing to determine the proper height at which the TV should be mounted for the best viewing experience.
This guide aims to help solve the problem by answering that question.
Factors Determining The Optimal Mounting Height For Your TV
It is crucial to determine the right height for mounting your television before starting to drill. Not doing so can lead to wastage of resources and time and also cause damage to your walls.
Aside from that, positioning the TV at an improper height can lead to discomfort while watching and will require removal and reinstallation, resulting in a lot of hassle. That is why you need to keep in mind a few factors when mounting the TV.
1. TV Size
When planning to mount your flat screen TV on the wall, the first thing to do is to measure its size. This size will determine how high it should be and will also help you get an idea of how much space it will require. Additionally, such information will be useful in case additional accessories need to be installed.
When taking measurements, make sure to measure the distance between the TV center to the floor. Also, the TV size is always measured diagonally, not horizontally or vertically. To help you out, I’ve mentioned some of the common distances ideal for different-sized TVs here.
In the case of 42-inch TVs, there should be a distance of 56 inches between the floor and the TV center. Similarly, 55-inch TVs should be mounted at a distance of 61 inches, while 65-inch ones should be mounted at a distance of 65 inches. Finally, 70-inch TVs should be mounted at a distance of 67 inches from the TV center to the floor.
2. Viewing Distance
The optimal viewing distance will closely depend on the TV size. Ideally, this distance should not be so much that the details are lost, nor should it be so less that it requires straining your neck. A larger distance between the viewer and the TV can result in a less enjoyable experience, while a smaller one can cause headaches.
Also, the viewing distance or VD will be affected by the optimal height, which will depend to a large extent on personal preference. You can divide the TV size (in inches) by 0.55 to know the optimal viewing distance.
Alternatively, you can use the following formula - (VD)=TVS*1.67. For instance, if you have a 55-inch TV, the optimal viewing distance will be 55*1.67, which will be 92 inches.
3. Viewing Angle
Another essential factor to keep in mind when mounting your TV is the viewing angle and eye level. This has to be calculated from the sitting position in which you are going to watch TV. Absolute precision is not required, but try to get a general idea of the location where the TV should be mounted to provide a great viewing experience without causing any pain.
If you want to be sure, follow the guidelines laid down by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). According to this, the viewing angle should not exceed 30 degrees. That being said, the maximum that the majority of people incline their heads when watching TV is between 10 and 15 degrees.
4. Individual Height
Individual Height is another factor to keep in mind when mounting your TV. And this problem becomes more complicated as the number of people watching increases. This is because people with different heights may find different viewing heights and distances comfortable. So, there is no standard solution that can fit everybody’s needs.
In such cases, you should think of the people who will be watching the TV and mount the TV accordingly. This will require measuring the ELH, which is the distance between the floor and your eyes while watching TV and is measured in inches.
Measure the distance from the average eye level to the floor while sitting. This will ensure that the TV should be comfortable for the maximum number of people.
5. Hanging Height And Location
The TV hanging height will also be determined by its location and will, in turn, determine its viewing angle. For instance, if the TV is to be mounted in a game room, there will most likely be a laid-back couch that will decide the optimal viewing height and viewing distance.
This will require considering the reclining angle or RA, which depends on your sitting position. Normally, when a person is sitting straight and watching TV, their torso forms a 90-degree angle with the floor, and the RA is zero.
But when you recline, the RA changes and has to be measured from the vertical angle. If you tend to recline more, the TV mounting height will need to be higher. And as mentioned, the maximum reclining angle lies between 10 and 15 degrees.
Additionally, different rooms will have seating options with varying heights. For instance, in the case of an open floor plan, there may be bar stools or a low chair or sofa. These may make it difficult to determine the best height for mounting your flat-screen TV.
In such cases, the best approach is to take the average of all sitting heights or the most used height when calculating the distance to the TV screen. Alternatively, if it is located in a home gym or game room, where most people watch TV standing up, I suggest using the average standing height when taking measurements.
6. Other Factors
There are some other factors that can determine the TV mounting height as well. For instance, a structural element, appliance, or furniture might prevent mounting the TV at the optimal viewing height. If that is the case, position the TV close to the viewing level while leaving space between the TV and the obstruction.
Such obstructions may include an entertainment center or shelves, in which case you should leave around four to six inches of space. And if you have children, it is a good idea to mount the TV at such a height that it is unreachable.
Some people also like to mount the TV over the fireplace, in which case, you need to install non-combustible barriers between the TV and the fireplace. This will protect the TV screen from damage caused by heat. Additionally, for such installations, I would advise checking the building regulations before installing the TV.
Determining The Ideal Viewing Angle
When mounting your TV, try to get the TV screen perpendicular to the eye level of the people watching it. That said, newer TVs come with high refresh rates, wider viewing angles, and greater clarity that allow more freedom so far as viewing angles are concerned.
So, even if you have the TV screen set at more than 25 degrees horizontally, you can still get a good experience while watching. It is more important to try and reduce glare while maximizing viewing comfort than focusing on the viewing angle itself.
Steps To Determine The Ideal TV Mounting Height
Before mounting your flat-screen TV, I recommend consulting with other household members to ensure that everyone gets the best experience while watching TV. You can use paper and a tape measure to mark the area where the TV will be mounted and ask the other household members to take a look. This will help ensure that it is the right spot for TV mounting.
Make sure you have all the necessary tools and the proper mount kit for the process before starting. Then, follow these steps to determine the ideal TV mounting height.
1. Attaching The Mounting Arms
First, you will need to screw the vertical brackets or mounting arms included in the mounting kit to the TV back. Once each bracket is attached, secure it to the wall plate in the same manner as when completing the assembly.
2. Taking Measurements
After the adjustable brackets have been secured to the wall plate, you need to measure the height of the mounting center up the wall. Take these measurements from three horizontal spots, and mark each spot using a pencil. This will indicate the point where the TV centerline will rest.
3. Determining The Top And Bottom Markings
Once you know where the TV centerline will lie, divide the TV height by two. Then, take a measurement of this distance and use a pencil to mark it over the center counting mark. This point will be the place where the TV top will lie against the wall.
Repeat the process for the TV bottom as well.
4. Creating Markings
The next step will involve creating an outline of the shape of your TV on the wall. You can use painter’s tape for the purpose and also make similar markings around the corners of the mounting plate.
5. Final Steps
Finally, use a level to check the outlines and ensure that it is the ideal TV mount height before starting the drilling process.
Calculating The Mounting Height Using A Mathematical Formula
Another way to determine the optimal TV height at which you should mount your TV is by using a mathematical formula. The formula is (TVMH) =0.22*VD+ELH. When using this formula, it is assumed that a reclining angle of 12.5 degrees exists.
To determine the height between the TV bottom and the floor, you need to measure the TV height before dividing it by two. Then, subtract this number from the result obtained by using the formula.
Or you could use another formula to calculate the screen height, which is TVMH=tan(RA)*VD+ELH. In this case, if the tan(RA) is zero, the reclining angle is absent, and you are sitting straight. So, the TV mounting height (TVMH) will be the same as the eye level height (ELH).
TV Mounting - Tools Required
Mounting your flat-screen TV may seem challenging, but using the right tools can help simplify the process considerably. That said, keep in mind that some tools are indispensable when you need to mount a TV, while others are only required to make the job easier.
The tools you will use to mount a TV include:
Power drill
Stud finder
Screws
Wall mount
Level checker
Hammer drill
Need For Additional Mounting Hardware
When considering the height at which you will mount your flat screen TV, make sure that the maximum amount viewers need to tilt their heads is 35 degrees. According to the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers, this is the maximum amount of tilt that allows comfortable viewing.
In cases where your flat-screen TV is mounted at eye level, this is easy, but when it is mounted at a significant height, it can cause neck strain. To avoid that from happening, you can lower the top of the flat-screen television, but it will require specialized wall mounts.
Instead of a standard stationary low-profile wall mount, you can use a tilting wall mount or a full-motion wall mount. A tilting wall mount can be adjusted vertically, while a full-motion one can be adjusted in different directions.
Whichever type of TV mount you choose, it should be suitable for the TV size and weight and should be easily attachable to your wall. Different types of walls, like plaster and lath walls, stud walls and block walls, require different mounts.
Benefits Of A TV Mount
A TV mount can make it easier to mount your flat-screen TV with a flat panel display to the wall and helps improve the viewing experience. It also offers other benefits, such as:
1. Helps Save Space
A TV mount can help you save a lot of space, which would otherwise be occupied by a table for keeping the TV. This means you can use the space below the TV in other, more productive ways.
2. Is Economical
Compared to a TV table, a wall mount is more economical, and you can even get different types of mounts. Thus, a TV mount is a good option if you want to save money.
3. Better Utility
In some situations, it is not possible to use a table for keeping the TV, such as when the TV has to be situated near a fireplace. TV mounts solve this problem by allowing you to mount the TV above the fireplace.
Things To Keep In Mind
1. Keep The Middle Third As The Focus
People usually focus on the middle third portion when they watch TV. That is why it should also be the area you should keep in mind when determining factors like viewing angles and viewing distance. And it is why I advise keeping the center of the TV as the point from where to estimate a comfortable viewing level.
2. Learn About The VESA Compatibility Of Your TV
Some TV manufacturers provide VESA mounting holes at the TV bottom, while others provide them in the center. Knowing the type of mounts your TV supports can make the mounting process significantly easier.
3. Consider The TV Weight
TVs can be incredibly heavy, and in many cases, it may not be possible to mount them to regular drywall using standard screws. You may need to screw into the wall studs to ensure proper support and prevent the TV from falling.
Tip
If you’re unsure about the proper height and angle for mounting your TV, I would advise calling up a professional mounting service. Such services can help determine the proper height and angle and help select the most suitable mount and additional hardware needed for the job.
Alternatively, you can get an adjustable mount that allows adjustments later after the TV has been mounted.
Conclusion
Determining the right height and angle to ensure the best TV viewing experience can be a bit challenging. However, it is possible to mount your TV as required by taking proper measurements, using the right hardware and tools, and investing adequate time.
While keeping in mind the factors mentioned above is important, it is also a good idea to plan for the future. This is especially vital if you plan to mount additional equipment on the same wall, such as a music system. Moreover, a well-placed TV mount can improve acoustics significantly by ensuring that the speakers are positioned optimally for an enhanced audio experience. Proper placement helps in directing sound waves toward the listener and mitigating distortions, thus providing an immersive audiovisual experience.
Considering the future and potential equipment additions will save you a lot of hassle in the long term and ensure the best viewing and listening experience in your home.
Spanish-style houses seem to be one of those architectural trends that never grow old.
With the rising popularity of owning a quaint home among celebrities, more people are thinking of buying Spanish-style properties. These small yet elegant properties don't just have a unique style but also represent a part of American history.
You can find these houses in different parts of the USA, mainly concentrated in areas like California, New Mexico, Arizona, and Florida, showing the influences of prominent Spanish rule. Many listings in these areas can actually lead you to a sweet deal on a Spanish-style home.
That's why it's essential to know as much as possible about the design elements and trends associated with Spanish-style homes to buy or design a suitable house. We have created a guide to help you out, which is essentially a crash course on these beautiful properties.
What Is A Spanish Style Home
History Of Spanish-Style Homes
While the earliest history of building Spanish-style homes began with the Spanish colonial era, most of the houses date back to the early 20th century. In fact, the 19th century was a crucial time when Spanish-style homes and buildings were seen more prominently.
Coming to the more modern take on the style, it gained prominence with the Panama-California Exposition that took place in San Diego between 1915 and 1917. The New York-based architect Bertram Grosvenor Goodhue was given the job of designing the exposition, and Carleton Winslow was to assist him with it.
Goodhue really wanted to make a difference with what he created and chose to go with an urban Spanish Baroque style that would immediately attract people. Rich Mexican and Spanish Churrigueresque decorations were added to the mix along with elements of Islamic and Persian styles seen in Moorish Revival architecture.
That's why the Spanish homes found since then have mostly been a blend of styles and can't be put into separate boxes dealing with architectural trends. The trend started by Goodhue was to be known as the Spanish Colonial Revival. It left San Diego with some iconic landmarks like the Giralda Tower, the Mexico City Metropolitan Cathedral, as well as the Cathedral of Our Lady of the Assumption in Oaxaca.
This trend of the Spanish Colonial Revival would eventually pick up pace in the southwestern states of the USA and give rise to several properties. They might not be as grand as the designs of Goodhue, but these Spanish-style houses were often built with a blend of Spanish, Mediterranean, and South American design elements.
And, due to the touch of a bit of modernism, or the addition of a second story, the style came to be known as Spanish Eclectic.
Characteristics Of Spanish-Style Homes
Spanish-style homes often have their unique touch added by a designer. At the same time, there are still some characteristics that bind it to its origins. These are often the telltale signs that dictate if a house has been made with a Spanish influence, so let's have a look at some of them.
A. Exterior Characteristics
What stands out in a Spanish-style home is its exterior. The beautiful yet earthy additions of either the stucco or wrought iron detailing can help a house look unique compared to others in the neighborhood. Also, some Spanish-style houses, particularly the Mission Style or Churrigueresque properties, are more ornate than usual homes.
1. Stucco Walls
One of the typical characteristics that Spanish-style homes share is the use of stucco on the thick walls. This traditional mix of lime, sand, and water helps to add texture to the exterior walls, and people like to keep the natural color of stucco or paint it white.
Other than for decorative reasons, stucco was used to prevent the house from getting too hot during the summer months. Hence, it is used in Spanish-style homes for practical purposes while adding a rustic look.
2. Roof Tiles
Spanish-style homes look incomplete without the use of the iconic red roof tiles. They can either be laid flat or hipped based on the design of the roof. And the tiles definitely help to add more character to the house by contrasting with the white stucco walls.
These tiles are usually made with terracotta and have an "S" or barrel shape. Apart from being an eco-friendly roofing option, terracotta tiles have long been used to line roofs for keeping the house cooler during hot days.
Use of these tiles can often be found in the Spanish-style homes of California and Florida. On top of that, these tiles may last for a long time and need little to no maintenance when installed properly.
Although typically red, more modern-style Spanish homes can have colorful tiles on the roof.
3. Stone And Brick
Apart from the use of stucco, stones or bricks can be used in Spanish-style homes, particularly those having a more Mission Revival approach. A stone path is often added to these homes to give them a more luxurious yet unpolished look.
You may find these brick or stone paths in the inner courtyard or driveway of the homes. In Mission Style homes, you may even find the exterior walls featuring carved stonework, similar to that used in churches built by the Spanish settlers.
4. Wood Support Beams
On having a look at traditional Spanish or Pueblo-style homes, you'll find wooden beams jutting out of the walls. This was due to the use of wood to hold up the weight of adobe or mud bricks used in making the homes. These days, the wooden beams you see in Spanish-style homes tend to be more decorative than functional, enhancing the look of plain stucco walls.
5. Wonderful Arches
Another common characteristic of homes made in the Spanish revival architecture style is the use of arches. These can be clean, defined arches or more subtle ones, as seen in Mediterranean-style homes. If there's enough space, designers may even think about building an arcade - a pathway of arches.
Apart from the typical gates or entrances, the arch might also be added to windows or even as small details to the walls, such as gable vents. You should note that arches weren't really incorporated into the traditional Spanish homes, as earlier people preferred small square windows to ward off the wind.
However, the addition of arches in modern homes, especially in Spanish Eclectic style homes, can make the building look impressive and welcoming.
6. Asymmetrical Design
A stark difference between the usual modern homes and the Spanish-style homes would be in the layout. Spanish homes have an asymmetrical design with prominent cross-gables and side wings, while some have a distinct L-shape.
Along with the basic asymmetrical layout, these houses also tend to have multi-level roofs. Rounded parapets and turrets might be added to the roofs for extra design elements. And though not common in Spanish Revival or Eclectic styles, tower-like chimneys can be seen in some homes.
Overall, you can never expect two Spanish-style homes to have the same design. There are some instances, like in the Monterey style homes, where the design is more symmetrical and similar to that of the English Colonial-style houses.
7. Courtyards
There's no doubt that Spanish-style homes are far more welcoming, especially because of the greenery and the presence of a courtyard.
Instead of the usual lawn or backyard, a Spanish home would have an outdoor or interior courtyard. Plus, in warmer areas like California or Florida, adding more drought-tolerant plants like cacti or succulents is the norm.
Landscaping is crucial to add a touch of greenery to these homes, which helps the earthy tones of stucco or stones to pop even further. On top of that, if there's a bit more space, Spanish houses may even have small fountains or reflecting pools. They are the perfect location for idling away your summer holidays when the temperatures are soaring.
8. Minimal Ornamentation
One more noticeable thing about the exteriors of Spanish-style homes is the presence of little to no ornamentation. The design includes slimmer trims, and when there is a bit of ornamentation, it's usually to highlight the arches. Some homes have wrought iron accents, such as moderately ornate window grills, gates, or simple wall fixtures.
B. Interior Characteristics
Just like the exterior of a Spanish-style house, the design elements of the interior are subdued and more laid-back. You can even see the continuing aspects that bind the interior to the exterior, such as the wooden beams or the arch pathways. Here are some of the common characteristics in the interiors of Spanish-style homes:
1. Indoor Stucco
Similar to the exterior of a Spanish-style home, you can find stucco on the interior walls. It might be a bit smoothed down compared to the outside, but the earthy tone of the walls does stand out. The best part is that the stucco creates a blank canvas for the entire room, letting you add any décor pieces irrespective of their color.
2. Exposed Beams
On visiting a Spanish-style mansion or even a small home, you'll most likely find high ceilings supported by exposed wooden beams. In a modern Spanish home, it is decorative in nature, with the dark wooden texture adding to the earthy or more natural quality of the property. Furthermore, the unified color of these exposed wooden beams creates uniformity between the different rooms.
3. Patterned Tiles
Usually found in Mediterranean-style homes, the patterned or decorative tiles have also become a staple in the interiors of Spanish-style architecture. These elaborate tiles help to add the much-needed color into a space that's mostly brown-white owing to the use of stucco and heavy wooden pieces.
Some of the common use of decorative tiles include in the risers of a staircase, accents on the walls, or even on the floors if you're feeling adventurous. The use of Mexican hand-painted ceramic tiles can add a bit more pizzazz due to the blue, green, and yellow colors.
4. Elaborate Fireplaces
Seen commonly in Spanish colonial homes as well as other Spanish-style homes are elaborate fireplaces. This help to add a focal point to the otherwise plain living area. Often the mantel is quite elaborate and even touches the ceiling. The fun fact is that many people are keeping to choosing these spectacular fireplaces while adding modern elements to other parts of their houses.
5. Wrought Iron
Wrought iron has become an inseparable part of this architectural style, most often seen in the Spanish eclectic style homes. The heavy and dark features of wrought iron pieces stand out among the stucco walls, especially when used as light fixtures. Other than that, wrought iron goes really well with traditional wooden pieces of furniture, which have been stained to be a dark brown color.
6. Wooden Furniture
When it comes to Spanish-style homes, another décor element is the use of heavy wooden furniture. These pieces usually complement the wooden support beams present in the ceilings. The furniture usually has a rich brown color, with intricate carvings, and may call back to the Spanish Baroque elements. It's like the furniture itself adds details that might be otherwise missing in the simple home of stucco walls.
Along with the furniture, you'll also find the use of wood in the case of cabinetry throughout the homes. This is true for Spanish Eclectic style homes and more traditional Spanish colonial architecture.
7. Proper Window Coverings
As you might know by now, Spanish-style homes are usually present in states known for hot summers. It also means that the days are going to be quite bright, so the windows need to have substantial drapery to limit the rooms from getting too hot. This is especially true for Spanish Eclectic style homes where arched glass windows have replaced the small windows of Spanish colonial or revival houses.
You can also use the drapes to add complementing color to the rooms if selecting rich shades of red, blue, yellow, and orange. Some even use floor-to-ceiling drapes in neutral shades with proper liners to stop the heat from entering the rooms through the windows.
Different Types Of Spanish-Style Homes
We have already talked about the Spanish style being more of an umbrella term to define various blended architectural elements. Hence, we thought that it would be better to shed light on some of the styles that have been popular over the years while building Spanish homes.
1. Mission Revival
Mission Revival is a style where the homes are similar to that of the Spanish churches built by the Spanish missions. These homes have a relatively simple façade adorned by arched entrances, low roofs, and at times bell towers. Most of them also make use of classic stucco walls and Spanish tiles.
Quite popular in California, the Mission Revival style was used for residential and public buildings. Buildings of this style were specially built between 1890-1915. Some instances of Mission Revival buildings include the Mission Inn of Southern California and the Louis P. and Clara K. Best Residence and Auto House in Davenport, Iowa. Another beautiful home in this style is the Henry Bond Fargo House of Illinois with its stone carved façade.
2. Pueblo Revival
Pueblo Revival is inspired by the living spaces that used to be designed by Puebloans, a native tribe of the Southwestern United States. Like, natural elements like stucco and heavy rounded wood beams known as "vigas" were used to build these homes during the 1920s to 1930s.
These homes usually have flat roofs covered in Spanish-style tiles and walled courtyards or patios. The Pueblo Revival homes often had a red earthen façade compared to the other Spanish styles. La Fonda on the Plaza, a historic Santa Fe hotel, is a notable Pueblo Revival building.
3. Monterey
The Spanish-style homes of Monterey, California, are said to be unique as they are inspired by the blended style of Thomas O. Larkin. This man started building his homes in 1835, which was way before the Spanish Revival architecture.
What makes the buildings stand out is the design aspects lent from French, Spanish, and English styles of architecture. Hence, in Monterey-style homes, you find flat roofs with adobe walls with spectacular upper and lower balconies. The exteriors are also symmetrical as opposed to the usual Spanish-style homes.
Currently, the Larkin House and the José Castro House are great examples of this architectural style.
4. Floridian
As you can understand, the Floridian architecture style is specific to the state, and it has some key differences, especially in the form of the design elements. In place of the more subdued and plain adobe or stucco walls, homes from the Florida Renaissance borrowed from Moorish and Spanish Baroque styles. You can often find geometric windows, ornate columns, and heavily decorated facades in these buildings.
5. Spanish Eclectic
You'll find that most newly built Spanish-style homes may have a blend of Spanish elements taken from the above-mentioned architectural styles. Along with that, modern elements can be built to create a unique place, such as a featureful office space or a game room that deviates from traditional Spanish-style homes.
These homes also tend to have a split level or added balconies to make them stand out. Hence, to make it less confusing, this blending of style and addition of modern elements is called the term "Spanish Eclectic."
Spanish Style Home FAQs
Q1. What is a Spanish-style house called?
Spanish-style houses can be called by various names such as Pueblo, Monterey, Mission style, Moorish, and Spanish Revival, based on their architectural style and influences. You may even hear people refer to them as Mediterranean-style homes because of the similar construction with additional French or Italian architectural influences.
To simplify the answer and avoid confusion, you can just refer to them as Spanish-style homes. More people have started to term the style as "Spanish Eclectic" to honor the distinct qualities of each building, especially the inclusion of modern touch.
Q2. What makes a Spanish-style home?
A Spanish-style home is made when the different defining Spanish characteristics are added to make a space. The common among these is the red roof tiles, stones, white stucco walls, courtyards, and homes with lots of arches.
One can make a Spanish-style home either based on the Revival movements, which somewhat closely follow the traditional elements. They may even create a new Spanish home in the eclectic style by blending the traditional with the modern.
However, what truly makes a Spanish home is its earthy tones and cozy environment created with the use of natural materials.
Q3. What do Spanish homes look like?
Spanish-style homes stand out due to the unique characteristics like terracotta tiled roofs, courtyards, visible stucco sidings, and the presence of arches in the design. Most of them are single-story homes with an asymmetrical shape and cross-gables or side wings. And, the houses might have a hipped or a flat roof with parapets.
Often little to no embellishments are present on the exterior of a building, but you may find some detailing around the arches. However, some homes have details added by finely crafted wrought iron, especially on windows, stair railings, and gates. Some homes even have exposed wooden support beams and small windows to mimic the look of traditional Spanish homes.
Overall, the aim behind adding these features is to create a warm and earthy space with the influence of natural elements, making landscaping an integral part of any Spanish-style home.
Q4. What is a Pueblo-style home?
A Pueblo-style home is usually designed according to the styles followed in Pueblo Revival architecture. Similar to Spanish-style homes, natural materials like adobe (sun-dried mud), stucco, and stones are preferred to create the homes.
The Pueblo-style homes were primarily built in New Mexico and Arizona during the early 20th century. Inspiration was mainly taken from the traditional multifamily mud homes built by the Pueblo Indians. It is also said to have drawn influence from the Spanish Mission and Territorial Styles.
Like the Spanish houses, the Pueblo Revival homes are built using heavy wood components in the form of doors, ceiling beams, and posts. However, a slightly different characteristic is the inclusion of square windows and rounded exteriors.
Q5. How to modernize a Spanish-style home?
The sky's the limit when it comes to modernizing a Spanish-style home. One of the best parts is that the Spanish Eclectic style of building homes has incorporated both modern and traditional elements of Spanish architecture.
A common way to modernize these homes is to start with the kitchen by opening it even further to make it spacious. You can add islands like modern homes or the required appliances to make the space more useful.
Another way to add a modern touch would be to use more minimalistic furniture in the space of the heavy wooden ones. Many people also like to replace the small windows with bigger glass windows while creating natural arches commonly used in Spanish architecture.
However, our most adventurous way of modernizing Spanish-inspired homes is through the bathroom. Adding colors like black or gray can change up the look and make it look starkly different from the rest of your home. You may even use marble in the bathroom or build a walk-in shower to change the traditional approach
Q6. How to decorate a Spanish-style home?
Decorating Spanish-style homes isn't that hard as you can make it easy with only earthy tones. When choosing drapes and other fabrics for the house, try out colors like brown, yellow, blue, red, or orange. We especially feel that Spanish home décor looks spectacular with the use of natural fabrics like cotton or linen.
Another popular aspect of Spanish-style homes is the use of wrought iron. Apart from the usual fittings used in a home, you can even get wrought iron pieces to add a highlight to spaces. These may be in the likes of wrought iron candelabra, small knick-knacks, or even elaborate artwork.
Moreover, the use of a traditional rug with colors like red, green, or blue can complement the floor tiles and the white stucco walls. You can even choose to decorate rooms around the theme of the rugs to make the space more cohesive. Lastly, try to focus on lighting the rooms, and we recommend adding at least a couple of pendant lights around the home.
Final Words
That's everything we had to tell you about Spanish-style homes. We hope the information will help you decide on either decorating or owning one of the lovely properties.
You can easily tweak the décor of the average home to include some of the elements seen in various Spanish architectural movements. And remember to have fun, as there are no restraints for using only specific elements.
With that, it's time for you to go and check out Spanish-style homes!
Zero Breeze Mark 2 is a portable AC unit made with innovative technology that doesn’t require AC power plugs and sockets for charging. Besides its ergonomic design and built-in compressor, this portable air conditioner stands out for its ability to harness solar power.
This battery-powered air conditioner from Zero Breeze has taken the air conditioning market by storm with its built-in mini compressor that removes the hassle of adding water or ice. Marketed by IndieGoGo, Zero Breeze Mark 2 became incredibly popular due to its energy efficiencyclaims, as it consumes very little power to produce cold air.
However, since this off-the-grid air conditioning unit isn’t available in usual outlets, many people are on the hunt for a detailed review of the product to make an informed decision. And here I’m with it!
Zero Breeze Mark 2 Review
What I like
Ergonomic, clean design
Requires no power outlets
Removable 24-volt lithium-ion battery
9.6 EER rating
Low noise level
Dump protection
Dual-house dissipation pipe
What I Don't Like
Expensive
Low cooling capacity
1. Design
Many air conditioning brands have attempted to design an ergonomic AC unit with a portable battery that eliminates the need for an electric wall outlet. These portable AC units include BougeRV, amongst others, which are ideal for RVs and campers. However, these aren’t as efficient and energy-saving for long-term use in high temperatures.
After looking for an ergonomic AC unit for my motorhome for a long time, I finally discovered Zero Breeze, who has come up with a functional design and powerful battery that is minimalist and lightweight.
Their latest model, Mark II, has a handle with a comfortable grip and easily accessible controls, including modes, speeds, and power on/off; however, the major theme of this design is its ‘one-button access’. This means that you can turn on the device, lock the battery attached, and install and dissemble the drain hose, all with a single button.
Moreover, unlike traditional portable ACs, the Zero Breeze Mark 2 is a lightweight unit measuring only 11 inches long and 10 inches wide, so it’s easy to carry and pack - perfect for camping and tents. Adding on to that, it is splash-resistant because of its built-in IPX4 protection.
2. Battery Life
Considering the battery life of a portable air conditioner as expensive as Mark II is very important. According to Zero Breeze, the average battery life of the portable AC unit at the highest setting is five hours. Although some reviews mention that it actually lasts for 3 hours, the lower settings can actually extend the battery life to five hours, if you don’t run the portable AC continuouslybut with intervals.
Powered by a removable 24-volt lithium-ion battery, this Zero Breeze AC has a battery twice the size of its previous model. It easily connects to the portable AC, but you need to tether it to a USB adapter.
Warning
I recommend against keeping it running for a long time, as it can lead to overheating and damage. Plus, buying a replacement lithium polymer battery will cost you a fortune!
3. Charging Time
One of the major selling points of Zero Breeze Mark II is its 3 to 5 hours of charging time, which is quite nominal when it comes to battery-operated devices. Of course, since it has a chargeable battery, you’d need to charge it eventually whenever the battery is low.
If you prefer uninterrupted cooling, this portable air conditioner also allows you to operate it while attached to a wall outlet. This is especially beneficial during the summers when there is excess hot air build-up in your living space.
There’s also the option of car charging, but from my personal experience, the whole process takes a lot longer than using an AC adapter.
4. Performance
Unlike other portable air conditioners, the Zero Breeze Mark 2 has a built-in micro compressor that can efficiently regulate temperature and distribute cold air up to 40 ft. This portable AC has enough cooling capacity to reduce ambient temperature by 30 degrees to combat heat. Moreover, you can easily carry it to different rooms and corners while attached to the electrical outlet as it weighs less than 20 pounds.
However, the Zero Breeze Mark 2 is not a smart air conditioner that connects to Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa for remote control. But, despite not having smart controls, the AC produces very low noisedue to its speed condenser.
5. Filtration
Like every other air conditioner, the Zero Breeze Mark 2 has a venting hose that helps drain water and refrigerant without making a mess. These portable air conditioners also produce hot air through their heat exhaust system during cooling, so it’s best to keep the hose where it can safely exhaust the heat.
But sometimes, the vents might be blocked with dirt or grease, so keep an eye out and use a cleaning brush to remove the build-up. Overall, the Zero Breeze Mark 2 has a good filtration system to maintain a cooler environment.
6. Energy Efficiency
As I already stated before, these battery-powered devices can run for 3 to 5 hours, depending on usage, and require 5 to 6 hours to charge fully. What’s more, this AC unit is one of the very few products I’ve come across that can harness power from solar panels - no wonder it’s popular among campers!
With this innovative solar power feature, this portable AC takes efficient energy use to the next level. You can buy a connected wire to support the panels and harness battery power even when there’s no electricity. Plus, it features a sleep mode for saving energy when it has reached the ideal temperature.
7. Cooling Power
Even though it’s portable and doesn’t require a power source, the Zero Breeze Mark II isn’t designed to cool the entire house. But, Mark II’s 2,300 BTU cooling power can produce enough cool air for small spaces like vehicles (RVs and motorhomes), boats, a small tent, or a compact room.
Its cooling effect may seem insignificant compared to 8,000 or 12,000 BTU units, but this unit can be very effective for spaces measuring up to 120 square feet. So, despite being able to perform better in small spaces, the Mark II unit can lower the temperature of a space by 30 degrees in ten minutes!
This is a good upgrade from the Mark I model which has a capacity of 1,000 BTU-not enough to cool even small rooms.
8. EER Rating And Voltage
You might be worried about the electricity consumption of a battery-operated AC unit like this, but it only uses 240 Watts of power. To operate the Zero Breeze Mark II, you’ll need a 24V AC or DC jack output to power the 10-amps unit.
Furthermore, Mark II has an impressive EER rating of 9.6, which is higher than most portable air conditioners in the market. On top of that, battery-operated devices are usually more energy efficient, and this coupled with the EER rating will help you save money long-term.
9. Noise Levels And Weight
You wouldn’t want portable units that make a significant amount of noise and disrupt the natural tranquility of your surroundings - be it camping in the woods or relaxing at home. Zero Breeze kept this requirement in mind while designing their Mark II, as it has a sound output of only 52 dB. This noise level is similar to that of a standard refrigerator, so you’re sure to get both peace and cooling.
However, even such low noise may seem unbearable if you’re huddling in a small tent in the woods. Thankfully, Mark II has a sleep mode that is super quiet and perfect for sleeping and nighttime.
As already mentioned, the Zero Breeze Mark II is a lightweight unit despite having a hefty battery with high energy. The brand has tackled the weight issue by using lithium-ion batteries, which support most of its body weight.
10. Resilience
The exterior of this AC unit is durable enough to come in handy in camping adventures, and its solar panel features allow you to use it without electricity. It’s also quite lightweight and doesn’t take up too much space, so you can easily carry it around in your car or RV.
Moreover, it doesn’t require frequent upkeep like adding water or changing filters, which is something you must do for all portable ACs. However, you must ensure you have a working power adapter and that the exhaust and drain hoses are installed properly.
11. Dump Protection
In cases where the outdoor environment isn’t conducive to dumping the air conditioning waste, the unit will turn itself off to prevent any damage to the internal components. If this happens, you would need to drain the pipe and place the hose in an area where it can dump the waste. However, if there’s no obstruction for drainage, Mark II will work just fine.
12. Dual-Hose Dissipation Pipe
Zero Breeze’s Mark II has a unique feature for transferring heat from an interior, enclosed space to the outdoors. It is essentially a dual-house dissipation pipe that works like a mini air exchanger and helps the portable AC cool a space more efficiently. This is one of the reasons why Mark II stands out for its quality and innovation.
13. Price And Availability
Of course, with such advanced features and convenient controls, it’s no surprise that Zero Breeze Mark II is expensive. However, the pricing of this product is a bit complicated, so you’d need thorough research to help you come to a decision. I’ll walk you through the different prices to eliminate the ordeal of looking up the product.
Zero Breeze Mark II is available in four configurations, with the starting price being around a thousand dollars - however, this package excludes everything but the battery. The complete Mark II kit, including the DC charger, has a higher price tag; however, paying a little extra will get you a complete kit with two batteries. With two lithium-ion polymer batteries, you’ll get up to 6 to 10 hours of run time, even when set at the highest speed.
Further, if you want a separate battery in case of any damage or just want to be on the safe side, it’ll cost a few hundred dollars. I’d recommend not buying a battery separately, as it costs almost half the price of the system itself. The brand also has other high-end items that are compatible with Mark II, such as an AC/DC adapter and a 12V to 24V inverter.
Currently, the Zero Breeze Mark II is only sold on its official website and Tredless, so you won’t find it on popular shopping sites like Amazon or in local stores.
Available Modes: Cool, Super Cold, Fan (four levels), Sleep | Wind Speed: 4 kmh | Noise Level: 52 dB | Cooling Capacity: 2300 BTU | Weight: 16.5 lb. (including package) | Dimensions: 20″L x 10″W x 11″H
Verdict
Sure enough, all portable air conditioners with built-in compressors cost a fortune compared to traditional units. A thousand dollars is a heavy investment, given all the additional accessories you’ll need to buy to get the best out of Mark II. However, it is the only available battery-operated system that can cool a 100 square feet area by 30 degrees in a few minutes.
If you need an air conditioning unit for small spaces like boats, RVs, and motorhomes operating in humid, warm locations, you should consider the Zero Breeze Mark II. Its lightweight, portable, and easy-to-use system and one-year warranty compensate for its price and make it a better option than other comparable alternatives.
That’s all on the latest Zero Breeze Mark II. If you like this informational article, I suggest reading my article on efficiency tips for air conditioners.
After comparing the products, the Midea Duo smart HE air conditioner stays at the top with its variable-speed inverter technology. A close second is the Tosot quiet portable air conditioner featuring a new X fan technology for efficient cooling.
As important as air conditioners are, they can end up costing a significant amount to function. An easy way to reduce power consumption and stay cool simultaneously is to cool down a single room instead of the entire house. And portable air conditioners are ideal for this, so we've compiled a list of the 9 most popular and quiet portable air conditioners.
HANDY AND PORTABLE: The SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner...
THREE OPERATING MODES: The compact floor AC indoor cooler...
What I Like
Low noise output
Inbuilt dehumidifier
Portability
Digital remote control
Allergen prevention
What I Don't Like
The installation process is complicated
The SereneLife Quiet portable air conditioner is a lightweight and handy device that can be used to cool your living room, garage, office space, etc. To improve portability, the air conditioner has four wheels on each side of the portable AC that allows easy movement.
It features three different operating modes - cooling, dehumidifier, and a fan. So, for those extra hot days, you can enjoy the cooling effect of the portable AC in the most efficient manner.
The air conditioner also comprises an automatic swing mode along with a moving wind vent that enables maximum air circulation. Additionally, the swinging motion dissipates air in all directions, so you get a better cooling experience.
As for the controls, it has a digital remote with a touch button control panel to access the fan speed settings, power, sleep mode, timer, and temperature controls easily. Furthermore, the remote enables you to change the temperature unit from Celsius to Fahrenheit, based on your preference.
However, what makes this portable AC popular is that it's a quiet portable air conditioner with noise levels less than 55-57 dB. This ensures it’s ideal for use in confined spaces, such as bedrooms or dorm rooms where sound can travel quite quickly. This is despite the air conditioner having a cooling capacity of 8,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), as it doesn’t have loud compressors and guarantees undisturbed sleep.
It also acts as a purifier and keeps your home relatively safe from allergens such as dust mites, mold, and mildew. This is because allergens like mold thrive on moisture, and the inbuilt dehumidifier of the portable AC removes all excess moisture from the room.
Capacity: 1,800 cubic feet | Noise Levels: 55 dB | Cooling Power: 8000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 3
【OUTSTANDING COOLING ABILITY】- Shinco powerful ac unit...
【3-in-1 FUNCTION】- This portable ac unit is designed...
What I Like
Easy installation
Quiet portable air conditioners
LED display with easy controls
Remote control
Programmable timer
What I Don't Like
The portable AC needs to be placed near a window to function
The Shinco small Portable air conditioner is an 8,000 BTU device that is designed to cool smaller spaces with minimal noise. Ideally, this air conditioner can cool a 200 square feet room quickly. Initially, set the portable AC in cooling mode, and once it's cold enough, switch it to fan mode. This will keep the temperature regulated throughout so you can sleep comfortably.
It is also multifunctional, with three modes to choose from - cooler, fan, and dehumidifier. For further customization, the device has two-speed settings that can be set according to your preferences. Additionally, it comes with a 19.2 liters dehumidifying capacity as well as a bucketless, self-evaporating operation, allowing you to enjoy a clean, cool, and dry living space.
The controls of the Shinco Quiet portable air conditioners are pretty straightforward. They feature an LED display with easy-to-use icons that allows you to alter the cooling effect and fan speed. You even get a full-featured remote along with the portable AC for easy operation, and if you plan on using it during the night, you can set the timer to 24 hours.
With a noise level of 55 dB, this quiet portable air conditioner allows you to stay cool and wake up well-rested. Plus, installation is fairly simple, and you receive a window AC mount kit along with the product. Just place the air conditioner in your desired area and attach the 59-inch hose as well as the adjustable window air conditioner brackets. Once plugged in, turn the portable AC on to enjoy instant cooling!
Capacity: 200 square feet | Noise Levels: 55 dB | Cooling Power: 8000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 2
INNOVATIVE DUO HOSE DESIGN - Midea's industry-first dual...
INVERTER TECHNOLOGY - Engineered with the variable-speed...
What I Like
Functional Design
Remote control
Wi-Fi enabled
Quietest Portable air conditioners
Rapid cooling
What I Don't Like
Slightly expensive
The Midea Duo Smart HE portable air conditioner is the company's first hose-in-hose design allowing the unit to intake and expel the outdoor air. This functional unit can deliver balanced air circulation inside the house to prevent cold air from escaping through gaps near the windows and doors.
Additionally, the Midea air conditioner is equipped with variable-speed inverter technology, which can cool your room with more energy efficiency than standard portable air conditioners. This allows for 40% less energy consumption as compared to other air conditioning systems.
Engineered with a Duo hose design and optimized air duct system, the Midea air conditioning unit can instantly cool down the room. Its modern technology guarantees a cooling rate that is twice as fast as traditional or window air conditioners on the market.
I feel it is by far the quietest portable air conditioner among the ones on the list with a noise level of 42dB. This library-like silence allows you to sleep comfortably without being disturbed by loud compressor noises.
The controls are pretty simple and extremely convenient. You receive a remote control along with the product that enables you to adjust temperature settings and cooling modes from any corner of the room.
Further enhancing convenience is the voice control system of the air conditioner. Since the portable AC unit is Wi-Fi enabled, you can connect it to any home assistant, such as Google Home or Alexa. Once connected, simply use your smartphone to access the device and adjust the controls even when you're not home.
Capacity: 6 cubic feet | Noise Levels: 42 dB | Cooling Power: 14000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 2
3-in-1 Unit Delivers a Precise, Targeted Cool.wattage : 1345...
COOLS EXTRA LARGE ROOMS. Supplies 14000 (ASHRAE)/8600 (SACC)...
What I Like
Powerful cooling
Quiet operation
Energy-efficient
Motorized louvers
Washable dust filter
What I Don't Like
Housing isn’t insulated
The De'Longhi quiet portable air conditioners can efficiently and evenly cool down most large rooms up to 700 square feet. These portable air conditioners are built to last and offer maximum comfort at minimum energy consumption. They also feature a 4-in-one setup with a portable air conditioner, heater, dehumidifier, and fan.
This heater is quite powerful and can be used during the colder months to keep the room warm. So, you get to use the quiet portable AC unit all year round through various seasons, making it a worthy investment.
Additionally, this portable air conditioner has an auto-adjust feature that keeps the room temperature comfortable based on the humidity levels. It enables the unit to save up to 30% more energy, which makes it an efficient product.
The DeLonghi quiet portable air conditioner functions with minimal noise at sound levels of 53dB, allowing you to sleep comfortably without disruptions. Its ArticWhisperExtreme uses the latest technology to minimize portable AC sounds by up to 50%, even at maximum fan speeds.
Furthermore, the quiet portable AC unit comprises a washable dust filter screen that can be detached from the portable AC unit and cleaned. Simply keep it under a running faucet or use a handheld vacuum to clean it. But be sure to dry the filter completely before using it as moisture can lead to mold and mildew growth.
And for even airflow, these quiet portable air conditioners feature motorized louvers that swing depending on the cooling mode. This dissipates hot or cool air to each corner of the room and keeps the temperature even throughout.
Capacity: 700 square feet | Noise Levels: 53 dB | Cooling Power: 14000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 1
Powerful Cooling: Cool spaces up to 300 square feet with an...
1 Product, 3 Uses: This is not only a Portable AC but also a...
What I Like
Easy installation
X-Fan technology
Quiet operation
Multifunctional
Extendable exhaust hose
What I Don't Like
The portable AC can be slightly heavy to move around
The Tosot portable air conditioner is a powerful device that can cool an area of up to 300 square feet, making it ideal for bedrooms, office spaces, living rooms, etc. This 8000 BTU device is a 3-in-1 unit that comprises an air conditioner, fan, and dehumidifier. The dehumidifier has a capacity of 2.3 pints of water per hour, thus keeping your home much cooler.
This device is designed to function with minimal sounds with noise levels as low as 49 dB, making these portable models the second quietest portable air conditioners on the list. Additionally, the portable AC unit entails a sleep function that can optimize the room temperature during the night so you don't wake up feeling uncomfortable. And if lights are a distraction for you, you can turn on the sleep mode which will automatically turn off all the lights on the device.
As for installation, the process is fairly simple. You can use both horizontal or vertical windows to install the portable air conditioner and refer to the installation manual in case of doubts. Typically, the installation process of this unit takes less than 15 minutes and does not require mounting hardware or tools. Furthermore, the exhaust hose length can be extended from 11.8 inches to a maximum of 58.8 inches.
The portable air conditioner also features a new X-Fan technology. When activated, the X-Fab will reduce the spinning rate of the fan while keeping it spinning consistently. This process dries up the residual water in the air conditioning unit and air exhaust hose to keep the system functioning optimally. The X-Fan is also designed to be silent, so you don't get disturbed by the noise, even if the fan is cleaning itself up.
Capacity: 300 square feet | Noise Levels: 49 dB | Cooling Power: 14000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 1
HANDY AND PORTABLE: The Serene Life Portable Air Conditioner...
BUILT-IN DEHUMIDIFIER: you don’t only get the cooling...
What I Like
Cools larger rooms
Multifunctional
Low noise operation
Personalized comfort
Inbuilt dehumidifier
What I Don't Like
It is meant for sliding windows
The SereneLife portable air conditioner has a sleek, modern, and compact design that can be moved around easily. It comes with a set of wheels on each end of the device, making the portability aspect much smoother. This powerful device can be used for cooling rooms that are larger like living rooms, garages, or office spaces.
Apart from the cooling effect, the device also offers dehumidification properties that efficiently maintain the humidity levels in your room. The lower the humidity levels, the higher the cooling capacity.
Furthermore, the SereneLife portable air conditioner comes with four operating modes; cooling, heating, dehumidifier, and fan. You can set the cooling effect based on your preference to enjoy personalized comfort. Along with the cooling modes, the portable AC unit comprises an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent. This enhances the airflow quality and dissipates air in all directions. The even distribution of cold wind results in your overall room temperature being regulated and comfortable.
The controls are designed to be convenient and the portable air conditioners come with a remote. Featuring a touch control panel that includes power, mode, timer, temperature, and fan settings, the device is made more accessible. It also features a unit selector that you can use to change to Celsius or Fahrenheit based on your preference.
Since this portable air conditioner comes with an inbuilt heater, it can be used all year round with a heating capacity of 9000 BTU. The dehumidifier has a capacity of 15 liters per hour and keeps the room free of excess moisture. Furthermore, the operating noise of this unit is only 52-56dB, making it an ideal product to cool areas like bedrooms and dorm rooms.
Capacity: 2800 cubic feet | Noise Levels: 52 - 56 dB | Cooling Power: 12000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 3
Powerful & Efficient Air Conditioner - Keep your room, home,...
Simple and Easy to Use - Our innovative Air Conditioning...
What I Like
Portability
Low noise operating
Multifunctional
Oscillating vents
LED display
What I Don't Like
Needs to be placed near a window
The Airo comfort is a powerful yet functional portable air conditioner that can keep your living room, bedroom, apartment, or office cool throughout the summer. This 8000 BTU quiet portable AC is a compact yet robust system that is ideal for cooling in smaller rooms up to 200 square feet. Additionally, its intuitive functions are easy-to-use and offer a user-friendly interface.
The LED display is quite clear and can be turned on or off depending on the time it's being used. A Digital Touch button accompanies the LED display and can easily adjust the mode, timer, speed, and power functions.
Equipped with Airos comfort technology, this quiet portable AC keeps constantly moving to cool your home and regulate the room's temperature. It features oscillating vents that direct the airflow in different directions based on how you set it. This allows better airflow quality and even distribution of cool air throughout the room. It also comprises a powerful internal system that acts as a purifier and purifies the air that passes through it.
This multifunctional system is a 3-in-1 unit and comprises a dehumidifier, fan, and cooling device. This ensures that the air in the room is humidity-free and set at a comfortable temperature.
The installation process is also relatively simple, and all needed accessories are included in the packaging. You also get clear instructions with drawings on what you need to do and how to do it. Additionally, the device is also portable and has wheels on all four ends for better movement. This allows you to slide the device to another space effortlessly once you're done using it.
Capacity: 200 square feet | Noise Levels: 52 dB | Cooling Power: 8000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 3
Dual Hose, Double Effect: The hose-in-hose innovation...
Customize Your Comfort: With 5 powerful modes...
What I Like
Hassle-free installation
Quiet operation
Energy Efficiency
Personalized comfort
Dual-hose technology
What I Don't Like
It can be pretty heavy
The Dreo portable air conditioner features a dual hose (hose-in-hose) innovation that promotes better air circulation. It does this by locking the cold wind in and pushing the hot air out. The device has a high cooling capacity of 12000 BTU and blows cold air at massive distances that can reach as far as 28 feet. This makes it ideal for cooling large spaces up to 450 square feet like garages, living rooms, office spaces, etc.
These dual-hose air conditioners have five impressive, powerful cooling modes (cool, fan, auto, humidify, and sleep) that can be used based on your needs. It also features a 60 - 86 degrees Fahrenheit temperature range that allows for more customization and personalized comfort. The touch of a button can access all these features on the portable unit or the remote that comes with it.
Dreo believes in feeling more and hearing less, which is why this air conditioner is one of the quietest portable air conditioners. With noise output levels as low as 42dB, you can enjoy your peace of mind day and night. This feature also makes this portable air conditioning unit ideal for nighttime usage, as it won't cause any disruption to your sleep.
Unlike central air conditioning, the Dreo quiet portable AC unit functions at variable speeds along with the dual hose unit design to save up to 40% on energy bills and consumption. This energy-efficient system is also easy to install on any type of window, whether slide or double-hung.
Capacity: 6.14 cubic centimeters | Noise Levels: 43 dB | Cooling Power: 12000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 1
【3-in-1 Modes & Easy to Operate】- Our air conditioner...
What I Like
Washable filters
Quiet operation
Energy-efficient
Remote control
Three functionality settings
What I Don't Like
It is slightly bulky
The ZAFRO portable air conditioner is a relatively portable device that has a cooling capacity of 8000 BTU. Ideally, this device is meant to cool smaller floor spaces up to 250 square feet, such as bedrooms, dorm rooms, RVs, etc.
The air conditioner entails three functionality settings that can be used based on your preferences. These settings are designed to meet the cooling and ventilation needs without consuming excessive amounts of energy. To further heighten comfort, the air conditioner comes with a remote that can adjust the modes, power functions, temperature, speed settings, etc. This allows you to conveniently adjust your device's settings without having to get up from your comfort zone.
Furthermore, the portable air conditioner is engineered to function with little to no noise output, and its noise levels can go as low as 54 dB. This makes it ideal for bedrooms as it won't disrupt sleep due to loud compressor noises or other portable AC sounds.
Additionally, the air filters of this air conditioner can be removed and washed. So, you can get several cycles of use before you will have to replace the filter. Make sure that you clean the filter every once in a while.
Simply place the filter beneath a running faucet or use a handheld vacuum to remove the dirt. Before you put the filter back into the portable air conditioner, ensure it is fully dry. If there is moisture on the filter, it can promote the growth and buildup of mold and mildew.
Capacity: 250 square feet | Noise Levels: 54 dB | Cooling Power: 8000 BTU | Number Of Speeds: 3
The amount of noise output an air conditioner has is just one part of an entire list of factors that make the device worth using. There are other factors that need to be taken into account when choosing portable air conditioners. These factors include:
1. Noise levels
Typically, portable air conditioners make higher noise output than the market decibel rates when running on medium or high mode. If you need a quiet portable air conditioner that has a consistent noise level, opting for a unit with a noise level of 60 dB or less will help.
60dB is generally as loud as a normal conversation between two people. For better comparison, 50dB is about as loud as rainfall outside the window, and 40 dB is similar to whispering or the output of an average refrigerator heat pump.
2. Low Airflow
Apart from compressor sounds, an air conditioner makes a swirling sound when the air passes through the device. This is why higher speed settings increase the noise levels of the air conditioner. The higher the airflow, the more prominent the sounds are.
Additionally, bigger AC units such as 14000 BTU portable units are much louder in comparison to smaller units such as the 8000 BTU portable air conditioners. The reason is that a bigger unit, such as the 14000 BTU one, will have to generate a higher airflow rate. Keeping other factors aside, reducing the speed or level of airflow can most certainly help quiet down any HVAC device or portable air conditioning unit.
Based on airflow, portable air conditioners can be categorized into two types:
High airflow, moderately cold
Low airflow, cool air
The high airflow, moderately cold portable air conditioners cool the room by providing larger quantities of moderately cool air. These portable air conditioners can usually be quite loud (60dB or higher).
The low airflow, cool air portable air conditioners push out colder air in lesser quantities. Since the airflow is minimal, the noise generated from the device is lower.
3. Type Of Compressor
For most portable air conditioners, there are two kinds of compressors; A Rotary compressor and an Inverter compressor.
A rotary compressor can be commonly found in refrigerators and is a turn-on-off compressor. This essentially means that the compressor will have a set temperature that it is required to maintain. When the room temperature exceeds the set number, the portable units automatically turn on, bring the temperature down, and turn off.
When these rotary compressors kick in, they make a loud sound that can be startling if not used to. These high-pitched sounds are enough to wake someone up from sleep.
On the other hand, an inverter compressor has a variable-frequency drive (varying input voltage and frequency) that controls the inverter compressor's speed. This then modulates the cooling capacity much more efficiently.
For instance, if there is a set room temperature the AC units have to follow, they will keep delivering cooling power that maintains the temperature. They may swing back and forth slightly but do so very silently. Since these compressors are always functioning, no sudden, loud sound is caused.
4. Check the Specification Sheet
All portable units come with a specification sheet, but most times, it does not mention the unit's noise levels.
However, finding the noise level of an air conditioning unit is not a complicated task. Once you get the decibel rating, check what category it falls under. Generally, these are the categories mentioned in the specification sheets.
Noise Level
Category
51 dB
Low
59 dB
Mid
60 dB +
High
Try to opt for a device that has a decibel rating under 55 dB for the best performance.
5. BTU, Size, EER Rating
Apart from being silent, the portable air conditioner should also be functional in all aspects. This is where the rest of the cooling metrics for the AC units come in.
The first and foremost is the cooling capacity meter, the British Thermal Unit (BTU). Opting for a bigger unit, even though you don't need it, can result in more noise generated from the device. This is because bigger units have higher airflow, and when paired with a smaller space, the noise becomes all the more apparent.
Ideally, a 10,000 BTU unit is sufficient to cool down 500 square feet of living space.
The second most important metric to consider is the EER or Energy Efficiency Ratio. If the rating is above 8.5, the device is energy-efficient and will enable you to save up on energy consumption.
An example of an air conditioner with a higher EER rating is the Honeywell air conditioner with a rating of 11.67.
Lastly, the size of the portable AC units also matters. Getting heavy AC units would be impractical if you plan on moving or storing your air conditioner away after use. Similarly, the weight will not be a major concern if you need a portable unit that provides sufficient cooling and doesn't need to be moved around as much.
Verdict
After extensive research, I can confidently say that the Midea Duo Smart HE is an ideal choice for efficient cooling. The device features variable-speed inverter technology, which can improve its energy efficiency more than standard air conditioners on the market.
A close alternative to the Midea Duo air conditioner is the Tosot air conditioner. This multifunctional unit is designed to function with minimal sounds less than 49dB and the device comes with impressive smart features that enhance user comfort and satisfaction.
I hope this article helped you pick an efficient and quietest portable air conditioner. Until next time!
To paint on Yupo papers, you need paints, brushes, water, and masking tape. Before you begin painting, it is crucial that you clean your paper and then prime it (optional). There are various techniques that you can use to apply watercolor on Yupo paper, such as pouring and dripping, blending and brushwork, and stenciling and stamping.
If you have ever tried painting methods such as acrylic painting, you must know that the traditional watercolor paper doesn’t do justice to them. Yupo paper is considered to be a great alternative for such techniques of creating art.
The polypropylene fibers of this paper create a smooth and non-porous surface. This finish is ideal for watercolor painting because it allows the paint to sit on top of the paper instead of getting absorbed in it. As a result, you can create more vibrant art pieces using Yupo papers.
In this blog post, we will be taking a look at how you can apply watercolor on Yupo paper easily. We will also discuss the various techniques and materials involved in this process. Let us begin!
It does not take rocket science to guess the first and the most important material required for Yupo painting - Yupo papers! The non-absorbent surface allows the painter to create a variety of effects using different colors. Moreover, the tree-free paper is available in a range of thicknesses and sizes, and you can choose one according to your preferences.
2. Watercolor Paint
Although you can paint on Yupo papers with a variety of mediums like acrylic paint and alcohol-based ink, it works best with watercolor paint. You should ensure that the set of watercolor paints that you choose to go for are of high quality so that they work well with Yupo papers.
3. Brushes
You will require a variety of decent-quality brushes to blend the watercolor on Yupo paper. There are several round, flat, and thin brushes easily available on the market. Hence, you can buy one according to your landscape painting requirements.
4. Palette
Artists need a good-quality watercolor palette to mix their watercolors. Ideally, you should choose plastic or ceramic palettes that have a decent number of wells. Further, it is best if you go for the light-colored options because they help you stay closer to creating precise shades of colors.
5. Water
Every watercolor artist is aware of the importance of water while making a watercolor painting - and this case is no exception. Ensure that you have a jar of clean water by your side to clean your brushes and avoid any form of muddiness.
Additionally, water helps artists dilute the intensity of pigmentation on their brush. Hence, if you want to create a lighter hue on your Yupo paper, you should have a mug of water by your side to dip your brush in!
6. Masking Tape
It is best to use masking tape around your Yupo paper and secure it to your board. This will help you keep your painting surface still in a comfortable position while you create beautiful art on it.
How To Prepare For Yupo Paper Painting?
Yupo paper is synthetic, and hence, you need to prepare it before you begin working on it. Here are two steps that you need to follow to prepare your Yupo paper:
Preparing The Yupo Paper For Painting
1. Cleaning The Surface
You must use a clean surface for painting. The Yupo paper should not have any dust or dirt accumulation on its surface, which is why it is advised to clean it before using it. Use a soft dry brush or a lint-free cloth to gently clean the paper.
2. Priming The Surface
The next step in preparing your Yupo paper is priming its surface. However, the method of priming that you choose to go for depends on what kind of paint you will be painting with. Some of the most common types are listed as follows along with how you can prime your Yupo paper accordingly:
A. Watercolors
Take equal parts of water and rubbing alcohol and mix them. Transfer the mixture solution to a spray bottle and spray a layer of the mix over the surface of your Yupo paper. Ensure that the paper is not saturated in the solution, or else it might warp. Let it dry before you begin painting.
B. Acrylics
If you want to paint with acrylics, you should prime the Yupo paper using acrylic medium and water. Mix one part acrylic medium with three parts water. Dip a brush in this solution and give the paper a quick wash. And let it dry.
C. Oils
Before using oil pastel or paints, it is best to prime the sheet’s surface with an oil-based primer first. It will create a stable surface, which is much easier to paint on. Simply apply the primer on the paper using a brush (or a roller). Let it dry completely, and then begin oil painting!
Tips For Priming The Yupo Paper
While priming the surface of Yupo paper is not a difficult task, there are a few tips that you should keep in mind. Doing so will help you prevent any wear and tear to your paper, and help you bring out the best priming results. Some of them are listed as follows:
Use a fine mist while spraying the primer solution over your Yupo paper instead of a heavy mist.
Test the primer on a small scrap of Yupo paper first to avoid any unwanted effects.
Whenever you use a brush to apply the primer on Yupo paper, ensure that you use a light touch because it can get damaged very easily.
While you should consider sticking to white primers for better visibility of colors, you can choose other color options depending on the hue you wish to provide your painting with.
If you want to create abstract designs on Yupo paper, it is best to use the pouring and dripping technique. To do either (or both) of these techniques, you first need to collect the necessary art supplies like paints, palettes, brushes, pouring cups, and so on.
To prepare your paints for pouring, aim for a consistency that is somewhere between medium and thin . Next, pour this mix on your Yupo paper. Tilt the paper at different angles to allow the wet paint to blend organically. You can also use a brush to create the desired effect using the poured paint. This technique is usually used to create effects like the waterfall effect.
Many artists like combining pouring with dripping. To do the latter, all you need to do is drip a little bit of paint on the paper. Let it mix with other colors by tilting the paper, or use a brush to create desired effects.
2. Brushwork And Blending
You can never go wrong while using traditional painting techniques, and brushwork and blending fall into the same category! Since Yupo paper does not absorb the paint applied on its surface, you will have ample time to blend and work with colors.
To carry out this technique, take your choice of paint. Add a small amount of water in it to bring it to a thinner consistency. Next, use a brush to apply this color on your Yupo paper.
You can then easily blend the different shades in layers and create a variety of effects using different types of brushes or your finger. There are several tutorials on YouTube that you can refer to for this step.
3. Stenciling And Stamping
Sometimes, all your painting requires is a little depth. Stenciling and stamping are popular techniques to achieve this goal. Both of them are used to create designs and patterns in artworks.
For stenciling, place the stencil on your Yupo paper. Next, using brushes or sponges, apply paint on the open spaces of the stencil. Once you are done adding the colors, lift the stencil carefully, and voila! Your designed image is created.
Stamping is another easy process that you can use to create repeated patterns. Dip your choice of stamp into the paint and press it onto the Yupo paper.
Tip
Repeating the stamping process multiple times can help you create different patterns and designs.
More Tips And Tricks For Working With Yupo Paper
1. Using A Mister Or Spray Bottle To Wet The Surface
While the non-porous property of Yupo paper is beneficial in many ways, there is a major downside to it - difficulty in controlling water and paint flow. Hence, it is a good idea to wet certain sections of the paper for better results.
Using a mister or spray bottle to spray water on Yupo paper can allow you to create a large variety of effects, such as color runs. Such bottles also let you control the amount of water applied to the paper. As a result, the paper does not get saturated and warped.
2. Allowing Each Layer To Dry Completely Before Adding Another
If you are using a lot of water and paint while painting on your Yupo paper, it is best to allow each layer to dry completely before adding another. This is also a recommended process for other forms of painting, such as using watercolors on wood.
Since synthetic papers take longer to dry out as compared to traditional watercolor paper, adding layers onto a wet surface can lead to possible wear and tear.
Further, adding another layer of paint or water before the previous one has dried out can also lead to muddiness and unwanted effects. If you can’t wait long enough to let the paper completely dry out naturally, you can use a hair dryer, clothes dryer, or heat gun to speed up the process. However, you should be careful while doing so because excessive amounts of heat exposure may damage the paper.
3. Experimenting With Different Media, Such As Acrylics Or Alcohol Ink Art
Yupo paper is compatible with different media, such as watercolors, acrylics, and alcohol-based inks.
For instance, using acrylics on Yupo paper is a great idea. You can either dilute them with water for a watercolor effect or use them straight out of the tube for a bolder punch. Similarly, alcohol inks can be used to add different kinds of textures to your painting.
It is best if you can use a combination of different media (mixed media) to discover what suits best with your style. Experimenting with them on Yupo papers can help you unleash and broaden the horizons of your creativity.
4. Use A Palette To Mix Colors
If you like complete control over the intensity and consistency of your paints, it might not be a good idea to mix colors directly on your Yupo paper. It is always advised to use plastic color palettes to mix your colors before you begin painting. This way, you can ensure that the consistency of paints and intensity of pigment are exactly as you need them to be.
FAQs Related To Painting On Yupo Paper
What is Yupo paper and why is it different from other papers used for painting?
Traditional art papers are known to be absorbent due to their high porosity levels. This means that when we apply paint on their surface, the fibers of such papers soak the paint in. As a result, the paint dries out quickly, leaving less room for creating unique designs and textures.
On the other hand, Yupo paper is a synthetic paper made up of 100% polypropylene. It is also water-proof and stain-resistant, so you can explore your creativity and experiment as much as possible.
What kind of paints are suitable for use on Yupo paper?
It is best to stick with non-water-based media. Acrylic inks and paints, alcohol-based inks, and oil paints are a few of the many options that you can choose to go for when creating paintings on Yupo papers.
Do I need to prepare the Yupo paper before starting to paint on it?
Yes, you should prepare the Yupo paper before you begin painting it. The first step of this preparation should be cleaning the paper to remove any debris or dirt accumulation from its surface.
You may prime the paper for better results. To do so, apply a suitable fluid primer on the Yupo paper depending on the kind of paint that you will be using to paint. You can also lightly sand the paper so that your paint can stick better. These steps of preparation are optional, but the first step – cleaning – is a necessary step of preparation.
Can I use watercolor techniques on Yupo paper?
Using watercolor painting techniques on Yupo paper can be quite challenging. However, there are certain watercolor techniques that you can try out on Yupo papers.
For instance, you can layer using different paints to create a variety of layers in your artwork. You may also try out the method of lifting, which requires you to lift paint off the surface using a damp brush.
How do I control the flow of the paint on Yupo paper?
The best way to control the flow of the paint on Yupo paper is by using a spray bottle. Fill your spray bottle with a decent amount of water. Use it to spray the water on the desired section of your painting where you want to control the flow of paint.
There are various ways through which this process can help you control the flow of paint on your paper. For instance, once you spray water on the Yupo paper, you can tilt your painting in different angles or directions to let the paint flow naturally. Similarly, you may also use the techniques of manipulating the surface or use gravity to facilitate the flow.
Can I lift or remove paint from Yupo paper once it has dried?
Yes, you can easily lift or remove paint from these papers even after it has dried out.
To do so, take a cloth or paper towel and dampen it. Next, use it to scrub off the paint from the paper gently. You can also dab the paint off of the surface.
It is important to note that excessive moisture or pressure can potentially damage the surface of your Yupo paper. Hence, it is crucial to use a light touch.
What kind of brush should I use for painting on Yupo paper?
While painting on smooth surfaces, it is best to go for flexible brushes. After all, you need to have good control over your strokes to create your desired effects and textures.
A soft synthetic brush is a great option to go for while painting on Yupo paper. You may also go for a natural hair brush since it is easier to paint with it on a smooth surface.
Can I use other materials like ink, markers, or pencils on Yupo paper?
Yes, you can use other materials like India ink, markers, or pencils. However, different tools will have different effects on the paper depending on various factors.
For instance, ink can be used to create vibrant and bold components of your painting. It is translucent and smooth and blends amazingly. The effect of markers will depend on the type of marker used and the texture of your Yupo paper.
How do I protect or frame my finished Yupo paper painting?
The best way to protect your finished Yupo paper painting is to keep it away from sunlight. The UV rays of the sun turn the white Yupo paper into yellow, which can damage the overall quality of your painting. Similarly, you should store your painting away from moisture after waterproofing it.
You can frame your Yupo paper painting just like a traditional watercolor paper artwork. This will ensure that contaminants like dust and dirt do not accumulate on your painting. Hence, your artwork will stay protected and last for a long time.
Can Yupo paper be used for other art techniques besides painting?
Yes, these papers can be used for other art techniques besides painting. For instance, they can be used for printmaking to create monotype prints.
Artists like using Yupo papers for collage-making too. They stick a variety of tissues, photos, or clippings throughout the paper. This is because it is durable enough to stand the adhesive that is applied to it.
Since you can use graphite, charcoal, or watercolor pencil on it, Yupo paper is also used for drawing.
Yupo paper is a unique innovation in the field of art. It is a 100% polypropylene synthetic paper that is completely non-absorbent and non-porous. The various advantages of using this paper include a smooth surface to paint on, paints not drying out quickly, and versatility.
You can easily apply watercolor on Yupo paper by preparing it first. Clean any dust or dirt that may have collected on your paper. You can also prime its surface for better results. Then, you can use techniques such as pouring and dripping, blending, stenciling, brushing, and stamping to create paintings.
The Yupo papers allow artists to have as much fun as they want. The versatility and functionality of this paper can let you do anything from drawing to painting and creating collages.
So, let your creativity drive you to experiment with the various painting techniques on Yupo papers!
Dallas is home to some of the best furniture stores in the country, and once you check them out, you will surely be left spellbound.
Tourists from all around the country flock to this design district to buy sturdy and stylish furniture. And for natives who are trying to feather their nest, you would have to visit the right furniture store.
Some people have a knack for creative decor, while there are others that like a more classy look for their home. In whichever category you fall, there are enough options for you to explore. In fact, there are way too many, and that might lead to confusion.
To make the job easier for you, we decided to design this guide with the top 10 of our favorite furniture stores in Dallas. After much research, we were able to compile this list, and you can rest assured that it is quite exhaustive.
Without much delay, let's check them out!
Best Furniture Stores In Dallas
1. Weir's Furniture
The founders of Weir's furniture believe that styles come and go. However, quality furniture can stand the test of time. This store has been providing the best home furnishings in Dallas for the last 3 decades.
It is one of those furniture stores that will help you get new furniture, whether you are creating a new home office or redecorating the dining room.
This store is dedicated to presenting its customers with the latest outdoor and patio furniture. Whichever kind of accessories that you are looking for, rest assured that you will find it in one of their 4 stores that are spread across Dallas.
Furthermore, their helpful staff makes shopping furniture from their store worth every dollar. When it comes to living room furniture, this is one shop that we can completely rely on. Not to mention, they have their stores in both Dallas and Fort Worth.
2. Canales Furniture
Tucked in a cozy Texas lane is Canales Furniture that has managed to remain a customer favorite for living room furniture. Not only is it good for dining room decor, but you will also find some of the best outdoor furniture in this shop.
This store also has some of the best patio furniture in town. On top of that, it is a great place to purchase home accessories, meaning you will find quality appliances or contemporary lighting at the most affordable rates.
So, if you are looking to decorate the rooms in a modern fashion, this place can be your best bet.
3. DFW Home Furnishings
Located in Farmers Branch, this store opened in 2019 and has gained much popularity in a short time span. It is because of the excellent service and beautiful furniture that it provides to the clients.
We were quite impressed with the kind of modern sofas that they have in their collection. Apart from that, they house lighting, chandeliers and appliances of the top brands in the city.
During their sale season, they also offer the best discounts on inventory, rugs, and recliners. If one is in luck, they can even find lamps and chairs of their favorite brand at a heavily discounted price at their showroom.
Instead of telling you more, we suggest that you visit their store to know more about their furniture stock and service. Their address is not too difficult to locate, and in case you have any trouble, you can find the details from their website.
4. BT Furnishings For Quality Furniture
If you are looking for the best furniture stores in Dallas that have been in business for more than a decade, you need to give this shop a try. They give you the option to shop from their website, and you also have the choice of shopping directly from their store.
When you visit their showroom, you will see that they provide exceptional furnishings at the most affordable rates. Plus, they are quite popular among their customers for the exceptional service that they provide.
But their focus is not just to sell and forget about their customers. They strive to bring interest-free credit plans that will ensure that you can style the home in any way you want to.
In case you are anywhere near Fort Worth or Dallas, there's no way you should miss out on visiting their store.
5. Living Modern Furnishings & Design
In case you are looking for customized living room furniture, you cannot afford to miss out on this shop. They are one of those furniture stores in Dallas that are popular for providing customized home furnishings.
Even if you are planning to redo the home office, this store can come to your aid. They are good at adding a contemporary flair to your home decor. Next time you have a family gathering, rest assured that there will be interesting conversations about the furniture in your house.
The major reason why it made it to our list is that the owner of this company allows you to pick any of their furniture and customize it any way you want to. That's a great deal, and you are bound to leave the shop happy!
6. Room & Board For Quality Furniture
When we think of a company that makes furniture that is high on utility and beauty but less in price, Room and Board is the name that pops into our head. Be it bedroom furniture or high-end storage appliances; this store has it all. And the biggest deal that this company offers is free designing services.
You can visit their website to see if your kids like their animal rugs. Even the other members of your family might like their exquisite bed collection and the different types of floor designs that they offer. They have great dining accessories under their wing as well.
Not to mention that this company provides excellent customer service and a no-hassle return policy. We would suggest that you drop by their store location to know more about the kind of furniture that they sell.
7. Welch's Furniture
If you are checking out furniture stores in the Fort Worth area, there's no way you can miss out on Welch's Furniture. People visit this store regularly for the great outdoor furniture collection that they have and also the excellent service that they provide.
There's no arguing that the prime location of the company works to their benefit! But that does not discount the fact that they have super helpful staff. They are one of the most popular stores located at Trinity Mills, and over the decades, they have made sure that they don't have one-time customers.
And the prices of their furniture won't drive a hole in your pockets. But all the appliances and dining accessories that they house look pretty high-end. When you use them to decorate your dining room or use them as outdoor furniture, no one will be able to tell that they are budget buys.
Now, that's a win-win!
8. Zoe's Furniture
Only taking care of interior furnishing is not enough when you are decorating your house. It is also very essential that you have the right kind of outdoor furniture. And for that, Zoe's furniture is one of the best furniture stores in Dallas to check out! They have another outlet in Texas too, and you can visit that location as well.
The accessories, chairs, lamps that they offer are all within affordable prices and will surely add some life to your home decor. In case you are planning to repurpose any of your old furniture, visit their location to talk to the owner of this store to see how they can help. What makes them stand out among their contemporaries is how fun and quirky their furniture is.
9. Designer Furniture 4 Less For Best Living Room Furniture
Be it about decorating your dining room or living room, Designer Furniture 4 Less can help you turn your home into a modern dreamland. Especially when it comes to redoing your bedroom, we would suggest that you visit this store.
They are one of the most popular furniture stores in the state and have something for everyone. We love them for how versatile they are in terms of design. And they have an in-house consultancy team who can help you find what would work best for your house. So, if you are in Dallas, make sure you find their address and drop by their store.
10. Zuri Furniture
Situated in three different locations all across Dallas, Zuri Furniture is the embodiment of contemporary comfort. All their furniture is designed in a way that their clients do not have to compromise on style for the sake of comfortable use. It is only fair that one can experience both!
The multiple locations of the store is a major advantage as you can visit the one nearest to you. You can easily find their address on the internet or give them a call in case you have any difficulty finding their location.
Final Words
With that, we have reached the end of this comprehensive guide.
We hope that after reading it, you will have a good time picking out the best furniture showroom in Dallas. You can always take your kids and friends to these shops where they can help pick out what is best for decorating the house.
Be it cosmopolitan décor or a classy mid-century feel; you will surely find a shop that will suit your needs. Even if you want to introduce the most unusual of furniture, there is a shop to cater to your demands.
In case you have any other suggestions, we would love to hear about them in the comments section below. And for more exciting reads, keep a watch on this space.
This product is currently discontinued and no longer available in the market.
Portable AC’s can be a blessing in disguise, especially for people with housing restrictions and limitations regarding installations.
Gone are the days when getting a new air conditioning unit meant a time-consuming installation process and unnecessary expenditure. With the demand for portable air conditioners on the rise, you can cool any room in half the time and effort. And, in a sea of air conditioners, the Shinco YPL3-10C has stood out for many.
Now, we aren’t saying that this product is devoid of faults (technology may be advancing but not at that rate!). But, it does have many promising features, and after using this AC for a while, we strongly vouch for it.
But don’t just rely on that one sentence. Read on below for some specifics on why this product stands out from the rest.
Shinco YPL3-10C Review
Why Buy This Product?
Shinco is a popular brand when it comes to air conditioners and other home appliances. A great thing about the company is that it offers a one-year warranty, a 30-day money-back guarantee, and lifetime tech support on all products. But that’s not the only reason why it’s becoming a household name. This portable AC has a ton of other eye-catching features like...
Design
Starting with the way this product looks, it is very simple and has a seamless make. We understand aesthetics are important, and it's crucial to have a unit that does its job while looking good. This is why you will appreciate that this unit has a neutral color and can easily blend into any interior style.
When it comes to products like these, they need to be easy to handle. Fortunately, this one only weighs about 54 lbs and is much lighter than others in the market. Plus, the dimensions are 17 x 31.3 x 13 inches, making it ideal for rooms sized between 300-350 sq. ft.
It also has handles on the sides and wheels on the bottom to effortlessly transport it from one room to another. We tried rolling it on wood as well as carpet, and this unit did not disappoint.
Power
One of the most important things to expect from a portable air conditioner is its cooling power. For this purpose, it is crucial to pick one that is appropriate to the size of your room(s) so that the cooling is effective.
With the dimensions offered and a cooling capacity of 10K BTU, it can fully cool a 300 sq. ft room and partially cool a 350 sq. ft one. It is a powerful product that does not need a lot of time to cool any space, thanks to the dual-fan speeds. Moreover, the cooling is even because the air blows in four different directions.
Cost
Another essential aspect to look at when buying anything is the price. No matter how good the product may be, no one likes to spend their entire life’s savings on it.
This is why the Shinco YPL3-10C is so popular. Despite being powerful and having many exciting features, it’s budget-friendly and less expensive than most of its competitors.
User Friendliness
Having a cost-effective, powerful air conditioning unit with an ergonomic design is every homeowner’s dream. And, that is where Shinco stands out again as it does not just work efficiently but is also very easy to operate.
This unit comes with a remote control that makes it extremely user friendly and allows you to operate the unit from any point in the room. The days of standing right in front of the AC unit and aggressively pushing the buttons are long gone.
Moving on to another user-friendly feature: installation. All you need to do is spare 10 minutes of the day, connect the exhaust pipe to the unit and place the other end out of a window. In a nutshell, this AC unit has features that are mainly aimed at making it easy to use, and it does not fall short.
Self-Evaporating
One of the biggest reasons people avoid portable AC’s is because of the condensate. Many units in the market require manual emptying, which can become tedious to do daily. This is where the Shinco YPL3-10C is different.
The brand has ensured that this unit is effortless to use by making it a no-drip air conditioner. What this means is that the condensate evaporates by itself without accumulating. The unit has no water tank, and all the condensate is recycled for cooling. However, there is a tray provided on the off chance that the water does drip.
The self evaporating feature can be pretty beneficial for people living in areas with less humidity.
Safety
One prominent concern people have with portable air conditioners is safety-related. Since it is not a window-mounted AC, it can be easily accessed by kids and pets. But what makes it safe is the exhaust pipe through which hot air can be directed outside the house via windows. This prevents the heat from getting trapped in the room and keeps the unit cool to touch.
The Shinco YPL3-10C has an exhaust pipe specifically made for this unit, making the installation less tedious and safe. Plus, it has a 6-foot power cord that allows enough flexibility in terms of the unit’s placement. We advise referring to the instruction manual to ensure that the installation has been done correctly.
Extra Features
As we mentioned, the unit comes with a remote control. In addition to that, the surface of the unit has an easy-to-understand interface. All the buttons are labelled clearly, and there is a small display screen. With the availability of this feature, coupled with the remote, operating this unit is an absolute breeze.
This portable AC also has a 24 hour on/off timer, which makes it energy efficient. With this, you can set a schedule for the AC and get it to turn off automatically once it reaches the desired temperature. This way, it will help save energy and not generate a high electricity bill.
Another feature that is not available in many ACs within this price range and is appreciated by a lot of customers (and us!) is the adjustable vents. These are quite beneficial since you can easily direct the air to blow out in any direction you like. Moreover, it is particularly helpful if you do not want a full blast of air on the face.
This unit also has a built-in dehumidifier that can remove 62.4 pints of moisture, and washable filters. We suggest washing the filters on regular intervals to improve the efficiency of the AC. To sum it up, it has all the essential and additional features which make it a great buy.
What Could’ve Been Better?
As we mentioned earlier, every electronic device has faults and this one is not an exception.. However, we don’t think they overpower the benefits of the product. The first minor issue we noticed was the noise the unit made. It has a decibel level of about 55, which is considered a bit much for an AC this size.
It isn’t just us; there are a few customers who have complained about the same. One user even said that during the initial time of usage, the AC noise drowned the sound of their ringing phones. However, it isn’t something that you cannot get used to overtime, so don’t be discouraged.
Another issue we found was that the exhaust pipe tends to pop out of the window at times. There is no particular reason as to why that happens, but it’s easy to fix. Adding some tape to secure the pipe to the window will help.
Pros
Affordable unit
Lightweight and portable
Easy to assemble
Simple digital interface on the unit
Attractive design
Cons
A bit loud initially
Exhaust fan needs to be secured tightly
Shinco YPL3-10C Buyers Guide
We think, by now, it is clear that the Shinco YPL3-10C has the potential to cater to your needs. It cools any space effectively without costing a fortune. That being said, you may want to explore a bit more, and that’s fine. Finding the perfect portable AC can be a tedious task, considering the options available.
To make it easier, we have put together a buyers guide that discusses the essential features to look out for in any portable AC.
Price
Although cheaper than a window AC, a portable air conditioner can cost a considerable amount depending on several factors. The power of the unit plays a significant role in fixing the price. If you are looking to cool a large space, you will need a bigger unit which will cost more (and that is obvious).
Additionally, brand names matter too. If you want a unit that guarantees quality and service, turning to bigger and popular brands is the way to go. The only issue that there is a chance you will have to pay more. However, it will be worth it since there won’t be a need to spend money on such a unit for a long time.
Finally, additional features like a digital interface, remote, dual-functionality are all considered when fixing a price for any AC. This boxes it within the $100-$800 price range with an occasional hike to about $1000 for commercial units. Ultimately, the idea is to buy something that performs according to your expectations within an appropriate price range.
Energy
Everyone that’s looking to buy new electronics needs them to be energy efficient. Not only is this good for the environment, but it helps keep the electricity bill low. Most units displayed, online or in a showroom, have information of how much energy they utilize written on the unit itself. It is always advisable to keep an eye out for that.
Secondly, features like auto-on/off, energy-saving mode, timers, sleep mode and programmable thermostats are of great help. These automatically switch the unit off once the room reaches the temperature you set it at.
Installation
This is an essential factor since this is where portable ACs differ from window ACs. Most people buy the former because it is easy to install and can be done in under 20 minutes. The only thing requiring effort is fixing the exhaust hose to the window.
To further enable this, the unit must come with clear instructions and illustrations. Most units come with a kit and all the hardware necessary. And although installation of these units are very beginner-friendly and can be done by anyone, having an extra hand to help is always appreciated.
Room Size and BTU
For effective cooling, having a good idea of the living space is essential. It is vital to know how big or small the room is because, on the one hand, you wouldn’t want to pay more than required. On the other hand, you don’t want to buy a unit that does not cool effectively.
Keep an eye out for information on the ideal room size for any unit (manufacturers mention that at times). If it is not mentioned, we advise doing a bit of research after measuring the room. Also, remember that certain obstructions like excessive doors or thick walls can hinder the cooling process.
Ventilation
Most portable ACs come with a window kit that will allow you to set up the unit accurately. It is reasonably straightforward and can be done in any room. If the unit is kept far from the window, check how long the exhaust hose is and whether it can be extended.
There are two kinds of hoses used for ventilation. The single hose unit is the kind where only one hose takes in and exhausts the air. On the other hand, a dual-hose unit is one where there is one hose each for intake and exhaust. They both work efficiently, but the dual-hose one is more popular.
Noise
Certain electronics like washing machines and air conditioners make noise, no matter how quiet they claim to be. A noiseless machine is a myth, so it is futile to look for something that will make no noise. However, the volume is the thing to be wary of.
Noise from an electronic product can range from low white noise to “my house feels like a construction site” type noise. The key is to ensure it’s the former, not the latter. The best way to determine that is by going through reviews (like this one!). Moreover, if the units USP is that it makes less noise, it will be heavily advertised.
Additional Features
Now that we are done with some of the basics, let’s move on to the fun stuff. Having a unit that is easy to install and functions efficiently is what everyone needs, but it helps to have few extra features to make it fun. In this regard, design is the topmost priority.
A portable AC is one of the few products in the house that can be utilized in every room. This is why having a unit with a seamless make, and neutral color is preferred. This way, it does not cause any visual obstructions when kept in the room.
Moreover, since it has to be moved around, it should be easy to transport. Having wheels in the bottom and handles are appreciated since they make it effortless to move the unit.
Shinco YPL3-10C FAQ
How Is A Portable AC Beneficial?
Summer heat can be really exhausting, and for some, it can cause illness. For those people, having a portable AC in the house can reduce the chances of falling sick. Moreover, it is a smarter option when compared to a window or ductless AC since it takes less time to install and consumes less energy.
Is A Portable AC Safe To Use?
Yes! As long as the installation is done correctly. One pressing concern with these units is the release of heat from them. To make it safe for residential use, it comes with an exhaust hose which ensures the heat does not get trapped in the room.
This is why there is an emphasis on proper installation. The exhaust hose is fixed to the window to let the heat go out, and till it remains secure, there is nothing to worry about.
How Long Should The Exhaust Hose Be?
Ideally, it should be about 3-4 ft. However, it depends on the model and brand. In case you need a longer one, they are easily available to purchase. It is generally advisable to buy from the same company and not try and make your own (which is very possible).
Another thing to keep in mind is that a long hose will make it difficult for the AC to cool the room. As a general rule of thumb, a hose shorter than 10ft will allow the unit to function correctly.
Can The ACs’ Efficiency Be Improved?
Of course, it can! With time, the efficiency of any electronic device tends to deteriorate. But there are certain things that you can do to ensure it works properly. The first thing will be to install it with care and ensure that it remains secure. Keep an eye out for gaps and loose screws, as those make it worse.
You can also use the AC with the fan on since the combination of the two will cool the room faster. Additionally, keep it in a cool place under shade and make sure it is not exposed to harsh sunlight.
Shinco YPL3-10C Verdict
To sum it up, the Shinco YPL3-10C is an excellent buy. It is ideal for anyone looking for a compact unit that has a lot of power. And since the design is simple and neutral, it will blend into the room and won’t be a visual obstruction.
For the price range that it is in, it’s quite a steal. Yes, it does have its flaws but nothing a little extra care cannot fix. We think it can be a great addition to homes that often feel like a furnace during the summer months. We urge you to try the Shinco YPL3-10C out yourselves and let us know how the experience was.
Freon is a popular brand of chemical refrigerant, so both terms are often used synonymously nowadays. To determine if your AC is low on Freon, you must check the refrigerant line, the evaporator coil, supply vents, and more.
There’s nothing more annoying than an air conditioner producing warm air on a hot summer afternoon.
But things get even worse when you still end up with higher energy bills at the end of the month. Of course, no one wants to pay more for an AC that’s not working properly.
Now for most malfunctioning AC units, the culprit could be a refrigerant leak or a frozen evaporator coil. So, to help you determine the root cause of the issue, I’ve curated this informative guide explaining the signs of an AC that’s low on Freon (refrigerant).
Signs Of Low Refrigerant In An Air Conditioner
1. Supply Vents Blowing Warm Air
The job of the refrigerant is to eliminate heat from the surroundings and transfer it outside. If the AC unit is low on refrigerant/Freon, it will obviously not absorb as much heat, thereby producing warm air from the vents.
Tip
Keep in mind that low refrigerant may not be the only cause of the lack of cool air in your air conditioning unit. So, before hiring a professional, I recommend checking your AC filter. If the air filter is clogged, it may not absorb the heat effectively.
But if you have already replaced the filter and are still experiencing issues with the air temperature, it’s best to contact a professional to check for low refrigerant levels.
2. Hissing Or Bubbling Noise
Air conditioners emitting any type of hissing or bubbling sound may indicate refrigerant leaks. Basically, the hissing sound is produced by the refrigerant (Freon) leaks escaping as gas, while the bubbling sound occurs if it leaks in liquid form.
Unlike the previous point, an AC does not produce odd sounds often. So, if you hear something out of the ordinary, it most likely means that your air conditioner needs more Freon refrigerant.
3. Ice Or Frost On Your AC
In the case of low refrigerant levels, you may spot ice or frost in and around the AC system. This is because when the AC does not have enough refrigerant levels, it can cause the temperature of the entire unit to go below normal levels. As a result, you will notice ice building up on the evaporator coil and refrigerant lines.
However, you must watch out for other issues that may lead to similar ice buildup. For instance, if the AC unit has a clogged air filter or closed vents, it will obviously experience low airflow. Consequently, the evaporator coil of the air conditioner may freeze.
Hence, I suggest checking your air filter and ensuring none of the vents are closed before calling in a professional to check the air conditioner.
4. High Electric Bills
Ever noticed your electricity bills increasing despite making no temperature change to your central air cooling system? Again, it could be caused by a refrigerant leak. To help you understand this, I’ll explain the role of the refrigerant in simple terms.
So, think of it as the “blood” of your air conditioner. The AC system sends warm air blowing over the evaporator coil containing chemical refrigerant, which absorbs heat from the surrounding air and dumps it outside. If the AC is low on Freon (refrigerant), then it obviously has to work harder to get rid of the heat and cool your home. And in the end, you will end up paying a higher monthly electric bill.
But of course, like most points discussed above, high energy bills can be caused by the following as well…
1. If The AC System Is Too Big Or Small For Your Home
If you’veinstalled a new air conditioner and suddenly get a higher electricity bill, it could be that your AC is too big or small for your home. If the AC unit is too big, it may shut off repeatedly throughout the day, and if it's too small, it will have to work harder to cool the area. In both cases, the appliance is bound to use more energy, resulting in higher bills.
2. If The AC Unit Is Too Old
If your AC is always giving up on you, especially during extremely hot weather, it may be because it’s too old. For reference, a decade-old AC is more likely to become less efficient and use more energy.
3. If The Air Conditioner Has A Dirty Air Filter
As I already mentioned before, an AC system that is not working optimally and showcasing the signs discussed above could have a dirty filter. This results in restricted airflow, making your AC work harder and longer.
But if none of these factors are true and your AC fails to cool your home, contact a professional to check the refrigerant line immediately.
Use Of Freon In AC FAQs
Why is Freon being phased out?
Freon and other CFC and HFC refrigerants have been found to contribute to the depletion of the ozone layer and to global warming. As a result, many countries have agreed to phase out the use of refrigerants and replace them with more environmentally friendly alternatives.
Can I still use my air conditioning unit if it uses Freon?
Yes, you can continue to use your air conditioning unit if it uses Freon. But you may need to have it serviced and recharged with a substitute refrigerant if it develops a leak or needs to be recharged.
Can I replace the Freon in my air conditioning unit with a substitute refrigerant myself?
It is not recommended for non-professionals to attempt to replace the Freon in the air conditioning unit with a substitute refrigerant themselves. Refrigerant handling requires specialized training and equipment, and incorrect handling can be dangerous and lead to equipment damage. So, it is best to hire a licensed HVAC technician to perform this task.
Final Words
That said, refrigerant leaks can occur due to a variety of reasons, and unfortunately, most of them are out of your control. For instance, insects like ants and bees can enter the AC system and produce formaldehyde that turns into formic acid. This naturally occurring acid is corrosive and can damage copper tubing, causing Freon leaks.
Additionally, the rubber seals of the valve and assembly joints can wear out over time. So, clearly, there is no way to “stop” a refrigerant leak, and one can only prevent it with regular maintenance.
Hence, I always recommend that homeowners invest in timely repairs and maintenance of their heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems. Because let’s be real - even the best air conditioners won’t last you a lifetime. So, prevention is always better than cure.
A portable air conditioner is a standalone cooling system that is designed to cool single rooms and can be moved around easily. For the portable device to function optimally, it has to be vented based on the layout of your home.
Have you been planning to purchase a portable air conditioner but don't know how to vent it? Or perhaps you already own one and need a better alternative for venting it. Whatever the case may be, I've got you covered.
This article discusses the importance of venting a portable air conditioner and how it can be done safely and effectively.
Importance Of Venting A Portable AC
Before I begin with how you can vent portable air conditioners, let's look at why it is important to do so. Does not venting an air conditioner have any negative effects?
To answer briefly, yes, not venting your air conditioners can have negative consequences, the main being a dysfunctional air conditioning unit. To further understand this situation, let's look at how portable air conditioners function.
The main purpose of a portable air conditioning unit is to effectively cool a room or living space. However, the device needs to extract heat from the air to do that efficiently. This heat is then transferred outside so that your room stays cool for a long period.
When there are no vents for the air conditioning unit in another room or outside, it can result in the hot air being trapped inside the room. This will cause your air conditioner to cool the room much more slowly and result in your room being considerably warmer.
Furthermore, venting an air conditioner helps remove the excess moisture present in the air and keeps the overall humidity level regulated. The lower the humidity inside a room, the cooler the room gets. When there is no venting for the air conditioning, it causes the moisture levels to build up, thus minimizing the cooling effect of the AC system.
Venting allows your device to function at its maximum capacity, keeping the temperature in the room cool and comfortable at all times.
Types Of Portable Air Conditioner Vents
Portable air conditioning vents can be found in many different types. Some common ones are:
1. Sliding Windows And Sliding Door Vents
Most traditional windows and brackets are designed to be mounted horizontally at the bottom of the window. However, if you have sliding windows or sliding doors, these window brackets can be mounted vertically. Though it may require you to make minor modifications to accommodate the window brackets and ensure a snug fit, it is a simple process to install them on a sliding window.
In the case of sliding windows, you must ensure that the window bracket is long enough to fit the window opening. Air conditioners comprising double window brackets are usually the best for sliding windows.
Double window bracket units come with a standard window bracket and a second filler bracket. Once the bracket is fully set up, you can seal any opening with either Plexiglass, wood, insulation, or other filler materials.
For portable air conditioners with a single-window bracket, you will notice a significant amount of space between the window unit. This can also be filled up similarly using plywood or Plexiglass.
Furthermore, installing a portable air conditioner vent onto a sliding window is beneficial for people who need a temporary venting system. You can install it during the summer and take it off once you don't use the AC anymore in winter.
2. Casement Window Vents
Casement windows and crank windows usually open similar to doors. Due to this, a standard window kit or bracket will not work for them, but there are ways around this.
To install a portable air conditioner onto the casement windows, you must first detach the whole window from the window frame. Once the window is removed, replace it with either plastic or wood.
After replacing the casement windows with a more solid surface, you can vent a portable air conditioner as you would with sliding windows. Finally, connect the window kit to any empty space near the window.
Though it is more time-consuming, it allows you to properly vent your air conditioner regardless of what type of window you own.
Ideal Location For Venting An Air Conditioner
Finding the right location to install portable air conditioner vents is crucial for every home. Vent placement seems like a straightforward approach, but there are certain factors that most homeowners don't consider.
Placing the portable unit vents near or within the ceiling panel is an ideal option if you're looking for energy efficiency. When the vents are placed near the ceiling, air circulation increases and air moves faster through the rooms.
This allows the room to be cooled almost instantly, so you won't have to use your air conditioner for prolonged periods. Additionally, the dust and debris fall to the ground, which minimizes the chance of these vents being clogged.
If you're concerned about your carbon footprint or your AC power consumption, a ceiling vent is a way to go. When portable air conditioners vents are located near the floor, the furniture inside the room can end up blocking the vents. This leads to the hot air getting trapped inside the room and thus causing the room to cool slowly and stay on the warmer side.
Moreover, it decreases the air conditioning system's efficiency and pushes it to work twice as hard to cool the room. Placing air conditioner vents near the floor can also lead to the accumulation of dust and debris, which ultimately forms a clog. This lowers the airflow within the room and may even lead to mold and mildew growth, resulting in a major health hazard.
How To Install A Vent Kit
Using a window kit for your portable air conditioning unit is an effective solution for setting up a portable unit.
The installation instructions can vary based on the type of vent kit used and the surface on which the venting will be done. Generally, it is best to refer to the instruction manual on the vent kit itself since each kit has its own set of requirements.
However, we'll go over some steps to give you a general idea of what needs to be done while installing a venting kit.
To vent your portable air conditioning unit through a sliding window, you'll have to ensure that the window is the right height for the exhaust hose to fit. Thus, you must measure the window and the vent kit.
Next, install the window kit to the open space in the window, keeping in mind that they must form a tight seal. This prevents air leaks and stops the hot air outside from making its way into your cool room. Plus, not sealing the vent properly can lead to insects and other small bugs crawling through the space between the vent kit and the window.
Finally, attach the AC exhaust hose to the window kit and connect the vent kit to the window.
Alternative Venting Options
Venting a portable air conditioner is not always easy or possible, especially when vented through a regular window to cool rooms located far inside your house. In such cases, you'll have to find other venting alternatives.
1. Venting Through The Door
If your room needs cooling and comprises a door leading to another free space, this can be a foolproof solution for venting your portable air conditioner.
However, this might not work if the door leads to another living space. The room that would be vented to would have higher temperatures, so a room used minimally is a better choice.
This might not be a problem when you vent directly outside, but these increased temperatures can lead to several issues in another room within the house. Since the portable air conditioner venting will push heat into the room, ensure that the room is empty. At the very least, ensure that there are no items in the room that can be destroyed by the sudden spike in temperature.
If there are no alternatives but to vent the portable air conditioner to another living space, find ways to dissipate the heat. It can either be a window or an exhaust which can help push out the excess heat and keep the room temperature moderately regulated.
Moreover, you will have to minimize the air transfer because of the unconditioned and conditioned areas. Making use of a door or window sealant would help prevent air leaks and stops unwanted heat from getting into the room that is being cooled. The seal also covers the large opening when you vent a portable AC through a door.
2. Venting Through The Drop Ceiling
Yet another effective portable air conditioner venting technique is through an access panel or ceiling tile. To vent your portable air conditioning system through the access panel, you will first have to make a hole in the panel. This will create a space for the exhaust hose to be installed properly. You can also make use of a venting kit to cut the access panel till there is enough space for the exhaust hose.
When venting a portable air conditioner to the attic or ceiling, perform the entire ceiling venting process carefully. Being mindful of the humidity levels and temperature in the ceiling is also necessary. When there is excess warm air and humidity in the attic, it can cause the entire house to heat up.
An ideal way to combat this issue is by installing an exhaust hose or fan. This will exhaust hot air from the attic and keep the moisture or humidity levels under control.
3. Venting Through The Dryer Vent
Though it is possible, attaching a portable AC unit exhaust vent hose to a dry vent isn't necessarily the ideal solution. This is mainly because a dryer vent has a smaller diameter when compared to an air conditioner vent hose.
Attaching a larger vent hose to an air conditioner makes the air conditioner work much more than it usually would to get rid of excess heat from a room. This can become worse due to a flap inside the dryer vent.
On average, portable air conditioners are not extremely powerful. This limits their ability to blow air strong enough to open the flap of the dryer vent. In case you do end up venting your portable air conditioner through a dryer vent, ensure that it comprises a screen instead of a flap.
Though this method does work to a certain degree, there are still better alternatives to efficiently vent your portable air conditioner.
4. Venting Through The Wall
Portable air conditioner venting through the wall can be used as a last resort when you run out of other alternatives. A wall vent can be used to transfer the hot air outside or to another room, such as a garage or storage room.
To vent a portable AC unit through the wall, you can carve a hole that is accurately sized with the help of a jigsaw. Before you proceed with cutting the hole, ensure that the area you're about to cut does not contain any electrical wiring or plumbing.
Once the hole is cut, seal the edges with the help of silicone caulk. However, this method is unfavorable for various reasons. The main reason is that the walls will get damaged when cutting the hole.
This is not only labor intensive but also has the potential to go wrong. Secondly, when you vent warm, moist air through the walls, they can develop severe water damage, which in turn ruins the appearance of the entire surface.
Is It Possible To A Vent Portable AC Through A Screen?
To vent a portable AC unit through a screen isn't necessarily the most efficient option. No matter how well you install the vents, venting through a screen can reduce the efficiency of your air conditioning unit. However, in certain scenarios, this method can work exceptionally well.
Generally, you would have to detach the screen to vent a portable air conditioning unit through the window. But in some situations, detaching the screen is not possible.
Before venting a portable AC unit through the screen, ensure it is clean because if it is dirty, it can cause the airflow to drop and decrease your air conditioning unit's efficiency. You would also need to take into account the screen type that you'll be using. If the screen is thin, it can improve the airflow rate, whereas thicker screens do the opposite and reduce it.
To know if the screen is of the right thickness, test it by looking through it. In case you can see clearly through the screen, it would be sufficient to vent a portable air conditioner.
Is It Possible To Vent A Portable Air Conditioner Through A Return Vent?
For venting portable air conditioners, using a cold air return vent is usually not the best option. Venting your portable air conditioning system through a portable AC vent makes the machines work twice as hard.
As the portable air conditioner pushes heat further into the return vent, it travels back to your home's central air conditioning system. Additionally, your central air conditioning unit will be required to work equally hard to eliminate the room's excess heat.
Basically, all air conditioners in your home would be working more than they normally would just to eliminate heat from within the room that they're supposed to cool.
However, if this option is your last resort, it can be beneficial to a certain extent. Given that your home's central air conditioning system can cool the room and remove heat, this method would cause no further problems.
Before you decide on a venting option, it would be best to consult an HVAC specialist so that they can provide you with the right advice.
Whatever the case may be, venting your portable air conditioner through the return vent should only be done if there are no other options available. It should also be considered a temporary fix until you figure out a more permanent solution of venting your portable air conditioner.
How To Maintain Your Venting System
Like most things, the venting system of your air conditioner tends to become dirty over time. However, it should not be neglected and has to be cleaned regularly to keep the vents safe from mold growth and preventing vent clogs.
Cleaning the vents of your air conditioner is fairly easy. The quickest way it can be done is by using a handheld vacuum over the vent to suck all the dirt and debris.
On the off chance you do not own a handheld vacuum, you can use a small cleaning brush. This gives you much more control and precision than the vacuum and allows you to clean each nook and cranny of the air vent.
When you clean a ceiling vent, the dust and debris from the air vent can get into your eyes and nose, so use proper protective gear and cover them appropriately.
The air vents of most portable air conditioners can be cleaned as frequently as you see fit. Most homeowners tend to clean the air vents in their homes every four to six months. However, if you have allergies, cleaning them every month would be best.
A clean air vent can prevent dust and other particles from making their way into your home and causing lung problems or other respiratory issues. Keeping the vents clean also reduces the chance of potential damages that may call for expensive repairs and services.
Tip
Apart from cleaning the air vents, you must check them for any air leaks. Air leaks can cause the hot air to flow back into the house, making the air conditioner much less effective. If you find any air leaks, seal them immediately with high-quality sealants.
Conclusion
As you may know, venting your portable air conditioner is more of a necessity than an option. Since a portable air conditioner works with or without windows, they are extremely versatile and this feature also broadens the venting options for these devices.
If the above-mentioned tips don't seem to work, use your creativity to find more practical ways to vent a portable AC unit. Or contact a professional technician to help you with the installation.
With that, I'll be signing off. I hope these tips make your life a whole lot "cooler."
To clean AC coils, turn off the power and remove the cover of the condenser or evaporator unit. Then, wearing gloves, remove large debris by hand before spraying the coil cleaner. Leave the cleaner for ten minutes before rinsing it with water.
Air conditioner coil cleaning is part of the regular maintenance that should be undertaken at least once a year.
Dirty AC coils can affect the functioning of the system, reducing its efficiency and leading to higher power bills. Fortunately, cleaning dirty coils is one of those maintenance activities that can be performed without professional help.
And this guide will help you understand how to easily clean air conditioning coils. So, let's get started!
What Are The Main Components Of An HVAC System?
Having proper information regarding the various components of your air conditioner and their respective functions is vital when cleaning the coils. Air conditioners have several components, but three of these are the most important. These include the evaporator, condenser, and line set.
1. The Evaporator
The evaporator is situated indoors over the air handler or furnace and controls the amount of refrigerant that passes through its coil. This coil has a larger diameter at the end, which results in reduced pressure and causes the temperature and boiling point of the refrigerant to go down significantly.
Usually, the temperature of the coil is much higher than the boiling point of the refrigerant. Because of this, the refrigerant turns into a gas that can absorb heat very well. It absorbs the heat from the hot air in your home before entering the condenser.
Once this happens, the humidity in the air gets deposited on the coil, and when condensation takes place, it goes into the drain pan at the bottom. Finally, the pipe attached to the pan discharges it as wastewater into the soil.
2. The Condenser
The condenser is the unit responsible for powering the entire cooling operation. Once the refrigerant absorbs heat from the hot air in your home, it goes back to the condenser. While doing so, it goes through the different coils surrounding the compressor.
These coils are cooled by the AC fan pulling air across them, and when that happens, the refrigerant cools down and reverts to a liquid state. At the same time, the compressor increases the pressure on the refrigerant, leading to a rise in its boiling point. The liquid refrigerant is passed into the copper line and reaches the coil, from where the process can begin again.
3. The Line Set
The line set comprises a couple of copper tubes that transport the refrigerant between the evaporator and the condenser. One insulated tube is larger and is known as the suction side or low side and carries the refrigerant from the evaporator to the condenser.
Then there is the other tube, which is smaller and is known as the liquid line or high side and carries the refrigerant from the condenser to the evaporator.
Why Should You Clean Your AC Coils?
Debris, dust, dirt, and other pollutants can accumulate on the surfaces of your air conditioning coils due to factors like airflow, moisture, and tightly installed components. As more and more of these substances accumulate on the coils over time, it can reduce the heat removal capacity of your air conditioner.
In certain situations, the air conditioner coils can get so dirty that they can completely block airflow, resulting in higher energy bills due to reduced energy efficiency. Additionally, an air conditioner’s coils that have become dirty will cause the air conditioning system to work harder, reducing its operational lifespan.
It can also lead to component damage, which will require costly repairs. Here are some problems that can occur if you do not keep the air conditioning coils clean.
1. Higher Operating Temperatures
Accumulation of debris and dirt can put your air conditioning system under strain, causing various parts like compressors and fans to work harder. These will then operate at higher temperatures to make the house cooler.
2. Reduction In Comfort Levels
Besides reducing the indoor temperature of your home and cooling it down, an AC unit removes humidity to make the space more comfortable. But if the coils are dirty, the efficiency of the air conditioner can be significantly reduced, and higher humidity levels can make it quite uncomfortable to stay in the room.
3. Lower Cooling Efficiency
When dirt and dust build-up on the surfaces of the AC coils, they have to work much harder, and the heat transfer will be less efficient. This reduces the overall performance of the air conditioning system. And a malfunctioning AC unit can even harm the environment.
For instance, if the coolant is leaking, it can enter the atmosphere resulting in air pollution and posing a health hazard.
4. Higher Cooling Costs
With the reduced cooling capacity of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system, you can expect higher operational costs. Thus, you will need to spend more on maintaining better indoor air quality.
5. Faster Wearing Down Of The Air Conditioner
If you have a blocked evaporator, the compressor has to run at higher temperatures, which can put the entire air conditioning system under stress. I would like to point out here that the compressor is among the most expensive items to replace in an air conditioner. So, keeping it clean can help ensure that it continues operating optimally without needing frequent repairs.
6. System Replacements Or Repairs
When various parts and components come under stress, the utility of your air conditioner is reduced, and the unit can suffer from breakdowns. In such situations, you will need to hire professionals, replace damaged parts, and may even need to replace the air conditioning system.
How Frequently Should You Clean Your AC Coils?
Air conditioner coils should be cleaned when they become dirty, but this can vary depending on various factors. These factors include how often the AC unit is used, whether there is a filter, the frequency with which filters are changed, the number of people in the household, etc.
I strongly recommend getting an HVAC professional to conduct an inspection at least once each year before the arrival of summer. The professional can perform maintenance activities, such as cleaning the air conditioner coils, changing the AC filters, and conducting proper tests to ensure the system runs fine.
Cleaning Air Conditioner Coils
Materials And Tools Required
The first thing to ensure when undertaking an AC coil cleaning project is that you have the right tools for the purpose. Fortunately, many of the items required for such a project are present in most households. The rest can be easily obtained from any nearby hardware store. Here is a list of the tools and materials required:
Gloves
Drill or screwdriver
Nylon scrub brush
Shop vacuum
Flashlight
Garden hose or pressure washer with sprayer attachment
AC coil cleaner
Fin comb
Safety Precautions
When using a coil cleaner to clean air conditioner coils, it is important to follow certain precautions since it is a chemical substance that poses a health hazard. Make sure to use a face shield, safety glasses, and chemical-resistant clothing and gloves. Also, having proper ventilation is crucial when working with a coil cleaning solution.
If proper ventilation cannot be ensured, make sure to use an organic vapor cartridge or NIOSH mechanical filter in a respirator. Also, remember that air conditioners operate at 240 volts, so you must turn off the power before cleaning.
Accessing The Air Conditioning Coils
As I mentioned above, in air conditioning systems, the condenser coils are located outside, while the evaporator coil is situated inside. The evaporator coil is mounted in a separate cabinet on top of the furnace. Alternatively, it may be placed within an air handler unit or the coil of the fan.
While air conditioner units can vary in their construction, they usually have an access panel that can be removed using a screwdriver or a nut driver. The condenser coils present in the outdoor unit go around the various components within the indoor unit and act as side walls for the condenser unit.
There may also be a coil guard protecting the condenser coils, or they may be completely exposed. In some units, the coil is covered by an outer protective panel made of louvered metal and may not be easily visible.
Once the coils are accessible, you can determine the best way to clean them, depending on the recommendations of the manufacturing company.
Coil Cleaning Methods For Different Components
Cleaning The Condenser Coils
1. Turning Off The Power
Before doing anything else, turn off the power to the AC unit by disabling the circuit breaker, which will be located close to the unit in a small metal box. Depending on the type of circuit breaker, you may need to pull out the fuses or push a lever down to turn off the entire system.
2. Removing The Top And Side Covers Of The Condenser Unit
Use a screwdriver or cordless drill to remove the bolts securing the top cover, then do the same for the side cover. Keep the screws aside carefully, so they don't get misplaced.
3. Removing The Condenser Fan Assembly (Optional Step)
Whether you need to remove the condenser fan from the AC unit will depend on the model of the condenser unit. Removing the fan assembly will make accessing the air conditioner condenser coils easier, but it will require a great deal of expertise.
In some instances, it is possible to detach the wiring harness of the condenser fan from that of the unit easily without effort. But if the process seems too complicated, simply use a step stool to place the fan assembly on while cleaning the condenser coils.
4. Cleaning Up And Inspecting The Unit
Since the condenser unit is located outside, there may be leaves, sticks, hair, and other debris inside it, which will need to be removed. Make sure to wear gloves when doing so to ensure safety. Once the debris has been removed, check for problems like loose or damaged wires, broken pipes, or corrosion.
If such problems are present, you should call a technician to get them resolved.
5. Using A Vacuum To Clean Up The Dust
After all the debris that can be removed by hand has been removed, it is time to use a shop vacuum to get rid of the dust that remains. Use the extension attachment to clean up all the corners and hard-to-reach areas properly.
6. Fixing The Fins
The heat exchanger of the unit has fins that can easily get bent or crushed. If that has happened with your unit, use a fin comb that has fine metal tines to straighten the fins. While this is not mandatory, fixing the fins can improve the efficiency of the unit.
7. Cleaning The Protective Grill
Debris, such as twigs and leaves, can get trapped in the protective grill located on the exterior of the AC unit. You will need to remove such debris by hand and then shine a light through the grill to determine whether it is clean or not.
8. Using The Coil Cleaner On The Condenser Coils
After removing the dust from the condenser coils, use the garden hose or pressure washer to gently wash them down. Spray the cleaner within the unit, making sure to reach all four corners and even through the fins. Then, adjust the angle of the sprayer so that it releases a wide spray without too much pressure.
Once you’re done spraying, let the spray and water sit for about ten minutes.
9. Using Water To Clean The Spray
After five to ten minutes have passed, start spraying water using the hose from the inside out, working from top to bottom. Use the sprayer attachment and keep the spray wide to prevent any damage to the fins. Move to the other side after completing one side, and finally, wash the entire cabinet from the outside.
While doing this, avoid directing the spray inside the unit, as that can force the dirt and debris back inside the air conditioner.
10. Reassembling The AC unit
While the condenser coil is now clean, there are a few steps you can take to ensure that it remains clean for an extended period. One way is to prune shedding plants or deciduous trees growing close to the unit. Or you can install a mesh leaf guard over the unit to prevent debris from entering through the top.
Before reassembling the unit, let it dry out completely. Once it is dry, you can reinstall the fan and the side and top covers. Replace the screws and tighten them before turning the machine back on.
Now, let's look at how to clean the air conditioner evaporator coils located indoors.
Cleaning The Evaporator Coils
Cleaning the evaporator coil is similar to cleaning the condenser coils, but there is one major difference. Since this coil is located indoors, you cannot use a garden hose to wash it clean.
1. Turning Off The Power To The Unit And Locating The Evaporator Coils
Turn the power off at the distribution board where the circuit breaker is located before you do anything else. To locate the evaporator coil, remove the access panel on the indoor AC unit by removing the screws that hold it in place.
2. Inspecting The AC Coils
The evaporator coils are within the air handler and appear as flattened tubes. You will notice that the evaporator coil assembly is shaped like the alphabet A. And the inner area of this assembly is where the maximum amount of dirt will have accumulated.
Tip
It can be easy to get confused about where the different components go, especially when undertaking such a project for the first time. I highly recommend photographing the inside of the assembly before removing anything. This will make it easy to return the components after the cleaning process.
3. Cleaning The Coils Using A Nylon Brush
To begin cleaning, use a nylon bristle brush to remove large pieces of dirt and debris deposited on the coils. When brushing the aluminum fins, work from the top to the bottom while moving the brush along the length of the fins.
In this case, you need not focus on getting the coils completely clean and should just try to remove large chunks of dirt from the assembly. Once these pieces fall out, they can be vacuumed easily, but vacuuming the fragile fins can easily damage them.
4. Fixing The Fins
Similar to how you straightened the condenser coil fins, use a fin comb to fix them here as well. Just be careful when doing so, as the delicate fins are highly prone to damage.
5. Spraying The Foam Cleaner On The Coils
When spraying the foam coil cleaner within the evaporator coil assembly, use a large amount of the cleaner before leaving it for about ten minutes. If instructions are provided on the can of the cleaning agent, stick to them when cleaning the indoor evaporator coils.
After ten minutes have passed, use the nylon brush to remove the dirt particles and other debris left on the coils of the evaporative cooler.
6. Rinsing The Coils With Water
Once the larger dirt pieces have been dislodged, use a spray bottle to spray water onto the coils and rinse them properly. Avoid using a large amount of water, and use the shop vacuum on wet mode to remove excess water. You can do this multiple times until the coils are completely clean.
7. Putting The Coil Assembly Back Together
You need to let the coils dry properly before reassembling everything back, for which the access panel needs to be left open. Using a soft towel to dry the coils can help speed up the process a bit, but do not use a blow dryer, as that can damage the AC coils.
Once the assembly is dry, replace the cover and secure the screws back into place. Then, turn on the power at the breaker box and check how the system is running.
Alternative Solutions If Cleaning The AC Coils Doesn't Work
In certain cases, your air conditioning unit may not function properly even after cleaning the coils. In such cases, other solutions may be needed, such as replacing the coils.
However, replacing the coils of the AC unit will depend on the air conditioner model and can be quite costly. A better solution might be to replace the unit itself. The reason is that the cost of coil replacement, in addition to the cost of repairs and regular maintenance, will be more than the cost of a new AC.
And a new unit will be more efficient, helping you save money while providing better cooling with less energy use.
Alternatively, the AC coils may not be the problem, and there may be other reasons why the AC unit is not functioning properly. Such issues can include frozen coils, clogged condensers, dirty air filters, damaged compressors, etc.
If both the coils and other components are in good condition, other factors may affect the efficiency of the air conditioner unit. Houses that are not professionally sealed have air leaks because of which heat can enter inside, preventing them from being cooled properly.
Similarly, the roof or attic may not have been insulated for many years, allowing hot air to enter the house. Keep in mind that depending on when it was installed and the type of installation, insulation will deteriorate with time. So, you may need to get the insulation upgraded.
Final Thoughts
Knowing how to clean air conditioner coils can be handy if you want to improve the cooling ability of your AC quickly. But observing proper precautions is crucial when doing so, such as turning off the power before touching any electronic component and wearing protective gear when handling coil cleaners.
If you're unsure about the process, I recommend hiring an HVAC professional who, in addition to knowing how to clean air conditioner coils, possesses specialized tools for the job. In some cases, hiring such a technician may even be unavoidable, for instance, if the coil fins are so damaged that they cannot be fixed using a fin comb.
And such professionals can inspect the unit for other issues, so they can be dealt with timely, helping avoid costly repairs later on.
Putting up skirting on a mobile home is a great way to create a warm environment while adding functionality and protection to your home.
Decorating a mobile home does not have to stop at just putting up artwork inside. Adding skirting creates a high-quality finished look that also protects the home.
But deciding on a skirting finish can be a tough choice, with so many skirting options available. However, the right skirting layer can completely change the look of any mobile home for the better.
And our in-depth guide has everything you need to know when it comes to choosing the best skirting option for you. Everything from the benefits of skirting to the different materials available will be covered.
So, without further ado, let’s get started!
Mobile Home Skirting
Types Of Skirting Panels
Skirting panels are available in different materials, which offer various benefits to the mobile home itself as well as add aesthetics to the base.
Depending on the material type, the price for each skirting material can vary. On one end of the spectrum are sturdy, more expensive materials like masonry. And lying on the other end of the spectrum, we have cheaper materials that are not as sturdy.
Vinyl skirting panels are one of the most used types by mobile home owners. The benefits that vinyl brings in both aesthetics and durability make it a popular choice.
Installing mobile home vinyl skirting is incredibly easy and affordable. That said, the price can increase if you choose to double layer it to create insulated skirting for the home.
Another benefit of using vinyl siding and skirting is its environmentally-friendly composition, as it is made of chlorine from common salt and natural gas ethylene. Compared to other skirting options, it doesn’t affect the environment as much as wood and brick.
However, it’s not the thickest of skirting options on the market. There is an insulated version that is thicker and can regulate the temperature better. However, these insulated models are usually more expensive than the standard ones.
Furthermore, low-quality variants of vinyl skirting do not age well. They tend to break down quickly and lose their sheen. Weed eaters may also damage the vinyl siding, slowly breaking down the material over time.
Vinyl skirting is easy to install and work with from a contractor’s perspective. Usually, these skirting panels come in 12 feet sizes, but they can be cut to fit various terrain. In fact, it is possible to cut them as small as one-foot.
Furthermore, the installation is relatively straightforward. Each ground track is secured to the foundation with long rods that are joined together. Meanwhile, the top back is placed along the bottom of the home and the top front secures the outside length of the panel.
For a natural look, using a “rock” design as skirting is a popular choice. These are not actual rocks but rather made up of plastic that resembles a rock pattern. As such, these panels can be easily installed and are available in a number of neutral colors.
FAST DIY INSTALLATION: Our lightweight polyurethane panels...
LOW MAINTENANCE & DURABLE: Made from high-quality urethane...
Sandstone and granite are the two commonly used rock types that are replicated in these faux rock skirting panels. But there are other rock types that can be purchased to create different aesthetics and add some curb appeal to your mobile home.
Moreover, installing these skirting panels is not very labor intensive either. They can be directly installed on the manufactured housing or in the same way that you would with the vinyl skirting. Whether you install them the DIY way or with the help of professionals, the labor costs can be kept minimal, thanks to the simple installation.
What’s more, the panels are not too expensive while still giving you a natural look. Overall, it makes for an affordable and popular skirting that is second only to vinyl in terms of popularity of the material.
Similar to the simulated “rock” skirting, faux stone is designed to look like real stone. And much like the former, it’s made of polyurethane. By having a plastic construction, the resulting skirting becomes a durable vapor barrier.
FAST DIY INSTALLATION: Our lightweight polyurethane panels...
LOW MAINTENANCE & DURABLE: Made from high-quality urethane...
However, choosing to install faux stone skirting can be pretty expensive. But the good news is that this type of skirting is actually seen as an investment that raises the value of your mobile house. This is opposed to simple vinyl skirting panels, which can lower the value of the home.
Brick skirting is a high-quality option that can increase the durability of the foundation. But using real brick skirting is not always feasible, as it can become quite costly to install. That is why faux brick skirting is a popular alternative to actual brick.
Vintage Faux Brick Wallpaper.Flat print with slightly...
Each Roll is 20.8 Inches Wide by 33 Feet Long, Covering 57...
Moreover, a faux brick panel allows for the “brick” to be more lightweight than actual brick, as it’s generally made from polyurethane. Another benefit of this material is the increased resistance it offers to shifts in temperature and various weather conditions.
Additionally, an actual brick skirting entails a much more complex installation than a faux one. But depending on what you are aiming to accomplish with the skirting, either option can be viable. Whether it is for durability or aesthetics, a faux or brick skirting will definitely benefit the curb appeal of your mobile home.
5. Concrete Skirting
Concrete skirting is one of the most durable skirting options if you’re looking for a permanent and solid connection to the ground. Once you install the concrete skirting, it won’t be going anywhere as it is made of cinder blocks. The permanence of concrete skirting extends so far as being similar to a poured foundation.
One caveat to using concrete is it utilizes cinder blocks to create the skirting. What this implies is that it involves a large amount of labor and time to install it. Furthermore, the blocks need professional work in order to secure them into the ground.
Since you’ll need the help of masons and contractors, it can raise the cost of installation considerably. Although the blocks themselves are solid, they can not be considered as a bonafide permanent foundation by industry standards.
Long story short, cinder block skirting has the benefit of providing a solid foundation to mobile homes. Their strength and durability are unparalleled when compared to other skirting products. However, the cost of materials and labor fees can run quite high.
6. Metal Skirting
Among the many skirting variants available, metal is a cheap and easy to install option that is used widely. This skirting needs a two by two or two by four frame to support it. And dirt can be filled in behind the frame to provide extra support.
Not only is the metal durable, but they are also available in a variety of designs and patterns. If you choose to go the custom route, you will be happy to know these metal skirtings are paintable. Furthermore, the metal panels won’t be damaged with weed eaters or other similar equipment.
Patterns are also stamped onto the metal to create patterns, which in turn, enhances the curb appeal of the home. So, no longer are you limited to flat metal; it is the goal of the skirting company to give the customers almost any design they want.
A few popular types of metal skirting options are available in tin or steel. These materials make for a skirting that’s easy to install without compromising durability.
7. Foam Skirting
If you are looking for a skirting option that’s high on energy efficiency, then foam skirting is a solid option. It provides insulation and regulates the temperature underneath the mobile house.
Manufactured homes are usually at a loss when it comes to energy efficiency. Although a ground track can be effective to some extent in regulating temperature, it is not as good as insulation foam.
Keep in mind that while using foam as a trim piece can save money in heating and cooling, it is not the best-looking skirting option. Depending on what you want, it is possible to manipulate and shape the siding to resemble brick, cinder block, and pebbles.
Additionally, foam skirting is quite expensive, even though the panels are smaller as compared to others. Each of these panels is only two feet in length at a time, whereas others are four to five feet. These smaller sized panels are packed full of foam and are incredibly energy efficient.
However, installing foam skirting is pretty simple; it follows a process similar to brick and stone materials. As such, the labor costs can be kept to a minimum.
8. Wood Skirting
Where wood skirting shines is the versatility it offers in customization. Typically, these wood products are custom made, so they can be tailored to match exactly what you need. As there are many variants of wood and finishes, the price to install this type of skirting varies.
Furthermore, not only does the wood type vary, but the design of skirting can also be changed. Wooden skirting options are available in either the standard thick panels or as a lattice design.
Using wood as a skirting material for mobile homes does not rank high in popularity among customers. There is no need to hire an outside company or contractor to prepare or install the wood. It is even possible to cut out the middle man entirely and complete the installation yourself.
However, there are drawbacks to using this material for skirting. The most common concern is with the durability of the wood as it is regularly exposed to the elements. Wood has a tendency to shrink and swell with changing temperature, which in turn compromises its structural integrity over time.
9. Other Skirting Materials
Besides these materials, there are a few other creative options available that are easy to install and also durable. For example, old barn tin and railroad ties are two materials that are cost-efficient and sturdy.
Utilizing different materials is a viable route to go if none of the traditional is to your liking. However, you should always consider the pros and cons of materials before deciding.
Calculating Costs
In order to have a clear idea of where money is being spent, drawing up a budget plan is a good idea. For mobile home skirting, this involves a number of calculations of the dimensions of the base and how high the panels should be.
First, a measure of the length and width of the house is added together. This measurement is then considered with the average height from the ground in mind to obtain the total square footage. The square foot measurement is simply how much paneling or material is needed to make up the skirting.
Whether the materials being used are sold on the basis of panels or in square feet, a better estimate is gathered. Beyond material costs, labor costs to install the skirting track must also be considered.
Regional differences in labor depend on the type of material being used and how much skirting is needed. Environmental factors such as slopes and ditches can also have an impact on how much material or expertise is required in order to complete the job.
If you are using a unique material that is not already suitable for installation, consider the various factors carefully. In particular, pay attention to material cost, energy efficiency, and curb appeal.
Besides adding or replacing skirting to your mobile home, there are a few other methods to make your home look nicer. Although skirting is excellent in adding an extra dimension of protection, it is not always the best to look at, especially for a residential building.
As such, here are a few other options you can try to improve your mobile home’s look.
1. Doors And Windows
One of the simplest things you can do to spruce up the outside of your mobile home is to install new doors and windows. These are usually what the eye is drawn to first subconsciously—as such, having a nice set of windows and doors can really change the look and feel of the mobile home.
2. Installing Trim
Another quick and easy fix to touching up a mobile home is changing out the pre-installed trim with a higher-quality one. Usually, mobile homes have a basic trim kit around the edges that make them blend into the sea of various other mobile homes. Having a unique trim can set your home apart without spending a large budget.
Additionally, there are trim kits that can be bought and installed easily without the need for contractors. You can install the new trim yourself along with some crown molding if you so choose. These small additions add lots of character and personality to your mobile home, a great way to express yourself.
3. Upgrading The Roof
Admittedly, mobile homes are not always known for their quality roofing. Usually, they are thin and do not provide much in terms of insulation. Upgrading or installing a completely new roof can bring a new look as well as help in insulating the house better.
Of course, this renovation will require a large amount of expertise and effort, but the payoff is definitely worth the investment. A roof is the culmination of all the lower elements of the mobile home. As such, a great looking roof not only speaks to your personal taste but can save you a few bucks in heating and cooling the mobile home.
4. Adding A Basement
If a basement is within the realm of renovations you would like to have for your mobile home, it will require a bit of forethought. The mobile home must be placed on top of the basement foundation as it needs to remain solid despite having a recession underneath it.
Hiring professionals is always a good idea when working on large scale renovations such as this. After all, you don’t want to risk having the mobile home fall through the floor to the basement. Once the renovation is complete, your mobile home will begin feeling like a higher quality, solid house.
5. Installing Hardwood Flooring
Another renovation you can do to step up mobile home living quality is to install a hardwood floor. Contrary to popular belief, it is fully possible to have a hardwood floor even in a mobile home. So long as the foundation of the mobile home is solid enough to support the weight, you should have no problems.
Hardwood floors are great not just for their aesthetic value but also to help make the floors easier to clean and maintain. In a small living area like a mobile home, this becomes even more important as space is limited.
6. Install Additional Rooms
As a final suggestion, you can even install new additions to your mobile home that add more personality and functionality. These installations can be as simple as a porch in the front or a new bathroom to the side. Each room can then be given its own personality by decorating it.
However, if you want to go the extra mile, installing a large room with higher ceilings is sure to catch the eye. After all, how often does one see a mobile home with towering ceilings?
Conclusion
Hopefully, now you know a bit more about how to pick a suitable skirting for your mobile home. These simple yet effective additions can elevate the quality of your home and also allow for a sturdier base.
Mobile homes have become more complex over the years. Once the durability and safety of the skirting are taken care of, they can be adjusted to suit your personal tastes in color and texture.
Every renovation and addition to the mobile home is an investment that goes towards increasing the street’s value and the lifespan of your home. Mobile homes are not the most durable of residential places, but they can be made sturdier with this addition.
Making this investment is a great choice that has many benefits for mobile homes. What are you waiting for? Elevate your mobile home living today!
A black and white interior design is sure screaming out the strong and powerful attitude of the owner trough a classic apparel, a very bold contrast and huge color scheme that works with this amazing collection. You can use it anywhere from the living room to the the terrace and in backyard landscaping, a highly versatile combo that can mix and match everything just by adjusting the contrast and the ratio of black and white. You need a simple bright room? All you need to do is use stark white on the walls and most of the furniture and keep the gadgets as black accents.You need a Vintage Gothic Apparel? Go hardcore by using very strongly black in combination with Art Deco and Gothic motifs, you can use more iron, less glass expressing what you need trough textures and keep things as black as it`s needed.
There are hundreds of world architects and designers which just love to use black and white for contrast, mostly because such a contrast does not keep your attention fixed in, it`s a neutral way of controlling the surroundings. Take Colunata House as an example, if you look on the interior design, you will notice that even though the contrasts exists, the interior design is top notch, your attention will still go to the wonderful rocky shores, allowing you to enjoy the amazing landscape.
From another point of view, you can use such colors to make your room seem larger wider or taller depending on where you`re using the white or black; you can make a small bedroom seem huge using stark white paint or even smaller with black; in the same manner you can control the lightning and brightness of the room just b using the black and white color scheme.
There are hundreds of methods of using the black and white color scheme and hundreds of methods of transforming a home or an interior design using it, this bold and strong combination is considered a very powerful asset by any architect or designer that knows how to use it and we are obviously highlighting such setups for your dream home.
Pictures below are speaking for themselves of how far you can play with your interior design but we are really curious how are you using the black and water color scheme in your design.
For more inspiration we have posted bellow few of our articles which rely mostly on black and white :
17 Inspiring Wonderful Black and White Contemporary Interior Designs
Are you thinking about remodeling your home flooring because the color has faded and the planks emit a hollow sound?
If we are not wrong, your top two choices are solid hardwood and engineered wood flooring, as these are the most sought-after options. The allure of wooden floors may entice you to spend a few extra bucks on actual hardwood, but what if you get the same benefits at a lower cost?
Or perhaps you want a durable flooring solution that won't need replacing anytime soon. Today's guide looks at the best bits of both solid and engineered wood flooring to help you make the right call.
What Is Engineered Wood Flooring?
Engineered wood flooring is one of the most popular and reliable options on the market. It is quite similar to solid hardwood flooring, and even shares many characteristics, which we will discuss later, but the primary difference between the two is in the construction.
Most people who know about the different flooring types will tell you that engineered hardwood floors have a plywood layer in the middle. A thin hardwood layer is bonded over and under this layer to lend stability.
You should note that engineered floors can last around 40 years and are less expensive than solid hardwood floors which makes them highly desirable.
They are made of 100% wood, but the best part is that different wood species are used for designing the flooring, especially the bottom and top layers. The final result is a durable and strong product that doesn't shift after installation and can withstand weather changes.
Another reason for its increasing popularity is that the flooring works well in areas like the basement, where other options may wear out soon. Thanks to the intricate layering, the chances of moisture warping or damaging the planks are less, particularly when you have a concrete subfloor.
The only thing you must remember is that engineered wood flooring requires refinishing. The planks are wider than solid hardwood flooring, and since they arrive in prefinished form, it's essential to maintain the quality of the wood over time.
What Is Solid Hardwood Flooring?
As the name reveals, this flooring comprises solid wood and comes in many hardwood species, such as oak, walnut, and maple. But we already told you that engineered hardwood flooring is less expensive, so why choose solid wood flooring?
This is because you can refinish or sand a solid hardwood floor several times without any deterioration in its quality. Also, people don't like the thin hardwood layer of engineered floors that can be refinished just once in most cases.
You will notice that the wooden planks on a solid wood floor are longer and feature grooves and tongues on either end. It helps with installation and ensures that the planks interlock and don't shift positions after a few years.
But the catch is that you will have to nail the flooring to the subfloor, which requires expertise and precision.
Advantages Of Engineered Hardwood Flooring
Now that you have a basic knowledge of both solid and engineered hardwood flooring let's review each type, starting with the advantages of engineered flooring.
1. Pocket-Friendly
If you're looking for a beautiful flooring option but don't want to spend a fortune on renovations, premium-quality engineered flooring will bail you out. The wooden layers on the top and bottom of the planks look just like solid hardwood floors with only minor differences.
Moreover, engineered hardwoods are available at half the price of their solid hardwood counterparts. You get the best of both worlds - quality and affordability in one product.
2. Easy Installation
You will love how easy it is to assemble engineered hardwood flooring, which makes the entire process swift and hassle-free. It would be best if you had durable glue to set the flooring and prevent it from shifting. But it's also possible to nail, screw, or place it gently over the underlay, like a floating floor, due to the stability offered by its unique design.
3. Durable
A major point in favor of engineered wood floors is the sturdiness of the surface since it can resist temperature variations and moisture to retain its quality. You already know how two layers of wood sandwich the middle plywood layer - this makes it suitable for rooms with underfloor heating.
If needed, you can reinforce the flooring further and add a scratch-resistant topcoat without affecting the color, width, and style of the plank finish. Sometimes, you can confuse engineered hardwood floors with laminate flooring but remember that the latter only has a picture of wood on the top surface, instead of real wood.
Advantages Of Solid Hardwood Flooring
Solid hardwood flooring offers different benefits than engineered wood flooring, although their dissimilarities aren't profound.
1. Appearance
It's often considered the holy grail of flooring options, and even people opting for engineered hardwood floors determine its worth by its resemblance to solid wood flooring. We noticed that it's made from only one solid piece of pure hardwood and has narrower boards to deliver a refined look.
You can choose between unfinished and prefinished boards while there are several colors and species of wood for specific needs. Also, the boards are interconnected through strong seams to prevent displacement.
2. Location
Solid hardwood floors are ideal for living rooms, dining areas, kitchens, and drawing rooms. Most above-ground rooms will benefit from this flooring, provided there's little humidity or moisture. That's why manufacturers advise against installing solid wood floors in the bathroom, basement, or laundry rooms where chances of contact with water are high.
3. Longevity
The durability of solid wood flooring depends on the species of wood and finish that you wish to achieve. If you live in an area with high footfall, we recommend going with oak or hickory as these are harder varieties and can resist denting or scratching. Many brands even offer products with a lifetime warranty, so be sure to read all the information before purchasing.
While solid wood flooring isn't the best option for dealing with moisture, it's still pretty durable and can last for several years. You can even sand or refinish the surface multiple times to uphold its quality.
Hardwood Vs Engineered Wood Flooring Comparison
It's time to answer the all-important question - solid wood flooring vs. engineered hardwood, which is better? Solid hardwood and engineered hardwood floors look pretty much the same. The differences between the two are more prominent in other aspects like lifespan, cost, type of wood, etc.
1. Versatility
A solid hardwood floor has planks of different widths that range between 8 and 12 inches. This ensures that the planks tightly adhere to each other, which strengthens the seams between boards. The best part is that you can choose from various color options, wood types, and finishes to personalize the flooring according to your requirements.
An engineered hardwood floor has more options for width and is flexible, thanks to a hardwood veneer layer. But you won't get many choices in color, style, or finishes compared to solid wood flooring since the panels are available in a prefinished form.
2. Construction
Hardwood floors are made from one solid block of 100% pure wood to guarantee durability. It imparts a timeless quality to the surface and ensures value for your money. Also, most solid hardwood floors in America come from the Appalachian region and feature intricate craftsmanship to deliver color consistency, stability, and a refined grainy texture.
An engineered wood floor has three layers(as said before), with two thin hardwood layers holding the middle plywood layer in place. You should note that the core comprises 5 to 7 layers of plywood that adhere to each other through a crisscross pattern for strength. It's also made from 100% natural wood, while the middle plywood construction lends stability to the surface.
This is how engineered hardwood resists shifting and withstands humidity, moisture, and temperature changes.
3. Type Of Wood
The three most popular options for solid hardwood flooring are - oak, maple, and hickory. All three species are durable and resistant to wear and tear due to their hardness. Apart from the many colors and textures, the width of the planks ranges up to 5 inches for customizable flooring solutions.
An engineered hardwood floor comes in many of the same designs as a solid hardwood floor. But you will find unique patterns and textures owing to many softer, exotic species of wood. Hence, you can subject the flooring to specific surface treatments and colors or choose extra-wide planks, which isn't possible with solid hardwood floors.
4. Lifespan
The lifespan of solid hardwood floors depends on the protective finish and wood species. As mentioned, you can choose stronger woods to prevent scratching or denting the surface, which makes them more long-lasting compared to other options. Solid wood planks won't deteriorate even after 30 to 100 years of heavy use, provided you don't compromise on maintenance.
That's why these wood planks can be sanded and refinished multiple times.
On the other hand, the thin layer of hardwood in engineered floors reduces the chances of refinishing or sanding. If refinishing is your priority, you can opt for a thick layer of hardwood on the top, but the number of times you can do it would still be less than solid hardwood floors.
Engineered wood surfaces also resist scratching, but they are most popular for not warping or changing shapes under the influence of moisture or humidity. All things considered, solid wood has the edge in terms of longevity since engineered hardwood flooring will last slightly more than 30 years even with proper maintenance.
5. Installation Method
Solid hardwood flooring has tongue and groove boards and needs to be nailed to the subfloor underneath. These grooves ensure the planks don't move after installation, and you can re-floor major areas of the house, such as the kitchen, dining room, bedroom, or sitting area. Any area with low humidity and less moisture is good for solid wood flooring.
Installing engineered hardwood floors is equally easy, and you can either nail the planks or use click-and-lock planks to design the flooring, a popular method for constructing a floating floor. Some manufacturers also allow you to glue the planks to the concrete subfloor, and most people install it in rooms with radiant heating systems, over basements, or concrete floors.
The main point in favor of engineered wood flooring is that it can resist moisture, humidity, and other environmental factors. Since it's thinner than solid hardwood, it's ideal for creating a thin space underneath kitchen appliances or matching the height of an adjoining floor.
6. Sizes
Most types of solid hardwood flooring have planks measuring ¾ inches thick and 2-¼ inches wide. The length also varies between 12 and 84 inches, and even though you can find other lengths or size options, the planks are seldom wider than 4 inches.
Engineered wood flooring is thinner and has ⅜ to 9/16-inch boards. The planks are much wider than solid wood floors and extend up to 7 inches, while they can be 12 - 60 inches long.
7. Cost
The price of solid hardwood floors is higher than engineered wood flooring, but it depends on several factors like quality, wood species, longevity, etc. Usually, the protective finish, staining technique, and texture all add to the cost. Prefinished solid hardwood flooring costs $8 per square foot, but options are also available for as high as $15 per square foot.
Engineered hardwood flooring is more affordable, but premium options can cost as much as solid hardwood. The flooring cost varies between $2.50 and $10 per square foot, with the average cost ranging around $7. But a thicker top layer, with the option of sanding and refinishing it multiple times, and higher durability will increase the cost.
8. Soundproofing
When considering the soundproofing properties of hardwood vs engineered wood flooring, engineered wood generally offers superior noise reduction capabilities. The multi-layered construction of engineered wood flooring helps absorb and dampen sound vibrations more effectively than solid hardwood. Although both flooring types can benefit from added soundproofing measures such as underlayment or padding, the inherent structure of engineered wood inherently contributes more to noise reduction.
Engineered wood flooring consists of multiple layers, including a core of high-density fiberboard (HDF), plywood, or medium-density fiberboard (MDF) which adds stability and improved acoustic performance. The presence of these layers creates a naturally better sound barrier when compared to solid hardwood, making it a more suitable choice for spaces where noise reduction is important.
In summary, if soundproofing is a priority for your flooring project, engineered wood flooring may be a more effective option due to its unique construction and enhanced acoustic properties. This makes it an ideal choice for spaces like music rooms, home theaters, or multi-level homes where sound transmission between floors is a concern.
What are some popular engineered and solid wood flooring brands?
Popular engineered wood flooring brands include:
Bruce hardwood flooring
Somerset hardwood flooring
Mohawk Industries
Harris Wood Floors
From the Forest
Well-known solid hardwood flooring brands are:
Shaw Floors
Carlisle Wide Plank Floors
Armstrong Flooring
Bruce and Somerset hardwood flooring also manufacture premium solid hardwood planks.
How can you tell the difference between solid hardwood and engineered floors?
Pick up a loose plank and check its side to determine the type of construction. If you notice a solid wooden plank with a grainy texture, know that it's solid hardwood while multiple layers will point to engineered flooring.
Can pets scratch solid or engineered hardwood?
Solid hardwood is more resistant to scratching than engineered planks, but the latter features a premium-quality wood top layer. This protects the surface from scratch marks even when the other layers aren’t of the same wood species.
Conclusion
As you can see, solid hardwood and engineered hardwood flooring are good for specific purposes and add to a property's resale value. If durability is your primary concern, solid hardwood is the best choice and lasts longer than most flooring options.
But when you're short on cash and looking for an effective flooring solution, engineered wood floors will be worth the investment. Even in terms of maintenance, you won't have much difficulty vacuuming or wiping the planks to sweep away the dust to uphold the quality of either surface.
Before installing a flooring option, think about where you live, the amount of footfall, climatic conditions, etc., to make an informed decision.
Any kid or beginner requires good watercolor instruction books to start becoming a watercolor artist. For kids, it is very helpful to gain perspective by painting in illustrated watercolor books. This way, they can work on their watercolor techniques before moving on to landscape painting or portrait painting.
Hence, here are some of the best watercolor books available today.
THREE WATERCOLOR ACTIVITY BOOKS: The Melissa & Doug Paint...
What I like
Kid-friendly
Mess-free painting
The watercolor paint palette provided
Charming front covers
What I don't like
Low-quality paint provided
The Melissa & Doug watercolor painting book is a three-pack water-coloring book, with each painting book featuring adorable animations on the front cover: a jungle scene, barn animals, and underwater ocean scenes. Hence, this is a perfect book for children to enjoy and learn watercolor painting and coloring.
The most special feature of these books is that they include watercolor paint palettes inside on each page! This means you just need a watercolor paintbrush and a jar of water, and you are all set to paint. There is no mess-up and no cleaning required since the paints are already included in the book. This makes it an excellent painting book to give to budding artists as an introduction to watercolor painting.
However, you will require actual watercolor paints to fill in all the drawings in spite of the watercolor palette provided. This is because the quantity of paint provided is very less and they are not really vibrant or pigmented either. Nonetheless, it can be a fun activity to do with a kid.
Number Of Pages: 60 (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 8.25 x 11.2 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 6 years
Includes a watercolor paint palette and a paintbrush
Kid and beginner-friendly
What I don't like
Not enough paint included
This Ghantoy watercolor painting book is pocket-friendly and an excellent option for a small watercolor painting book. Being made of high-quality wood pulp, the paper is very durable and sturdy.
The book contains 20 different patterns to fill in with watercolor paints. The 20 thin cards can be used to create an entire beautiful painting. Additionally, you can also use each painted card as a charming bookmark. Hence, this watercolor painting book is perfect for not just kids, but also any beginners wanting to get into watercolor painting and learn new techniques.
Apart from showcasing a cute illustration, each page also includes a watercolor paint palette. So, all you need is some water and a watercolor paintbrush to get started. This means mess-free paintings and no cleaning required. This makes the watercolor painting book perfect for young aspiring artists looking to learn to paint.
Number Of Pages: 20 | Product Dimensions: 7.36 x 3.07 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
This Bamagoo set is a collection of 4 watercolor books in a budget-friendly pack. Each painting book contains 20 different drawings and 2 swatches. The two swatch cards can be used to improve painting techniques and encourage the creative process of young watercolor artists.
Since this is also a pocket-friendly watercolor book, you can use the small cards to create a big watercolor painting. Additionally, you can also use each card separately as a bookmark.
Each page also contains a watercolor paint palette. You can activate the paints using a little amount of water, and you are ready to start painting with the included handy paintbrush.
This particular set has a biological theme, consisting of animals and oceanic life. However, you can also get this same painting book in other themes like gardens, fantasy, and holidays.
Number Of Pages: 80 pages (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 7.56 x 3.23 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
Watercolor Painting Book: The book contain 20pcs different...
Easy to Use: Each page comes with 6 squares dry set of paint...
What I like
Spiral-bound
Heavy-weight paper
Minimal warping
Charming illustrations
What I don't like
Less quantity of paint
The Kawaqiwa watercolor coloring and painting book is a handy and spiral-bound painting book. The book contains 20 different illustrations to fill in with watercolor pigments. The illustrations are very beginner and kid-friendly, perfect for learning texture techniques and sample paintings.
Each page contains six squares of dried watercolor paint, which can be activated using just a little amount of water. Hence, you don’t need to worry about the storage or cleaning of leftover paint, making the painting process very easy and mess-free. Moreover, the paint pigments are odorless and non-toxic, making this painting book safe for children.
Additionally, the paper is also quite heavy-weight, not allowing the watercolor paintings to bleed through. Also, the paper shows minimal warping or buckling, making it a perfect everyday watercolor book.
Number Of Pages: 20 | Product Dimensions: 7.87 x 5.91 inches | Recommended Age: N/A
This is a set of five Pureadee watercolor painting books, each book made out of the high-quality wood pulp. These watercolor books are not just good for kids but also for beginners to start painting watercolors.
Each page included a watercolor paint palette, which is easy to activate with just a little bit of water and ready to use immediately with a paintbrush. Additionally, each book contains 20 drawings, each drawing is unique to practice your watercolor techniques.
All 5 watercolor books have a different theme: World Adventure, Wonderful Holiday, Fairytale Dream, Wonderful Forest, and Enchanted Garden. Thus, this is a great modern watercolor book set for creative watercolor art and practicing basic techniques.
Number Of Pages: 100 (20 per book) | Product Dimensions: 3.15 x 1.57 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 14 years
This is also an affordable set of 5 Avitorry pocket watercolor painting books. Made from high-quality wood pulp, the watercolor book is very safe and durable for any kid or complete beginner to use.
Each watercolor painting book contains 20 different illustrations, with the small size making each card a perfect bookmark. Additionally, you can also combine all the small, painted cards to create a big watercolor painting. This way, you can work on your common watercolor mistakes and create stunning paintings.
Moreover, each page also has its own watercolor paint palette. All the dried paint squares require just a little amount of water for their activation. You can use the included paintbrushes to practice brush techniques and improve your artistic skills.
Number Of Pages: 100 (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 8.27 x 8.27 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
Quick Comparisons Of The Top Watercolor Painting Book For Kids
Buying Guide To Watercolor Painting Books For Kids
Whether you are buying watercolor paints or watercolor books, you should always know what features to look for to make an informed purchase. This is especially true for watercolor painting books for kids since you need to check the paper's quality and safety standards. Hence, this handy buyer’s guide! Hopefully, this will help you make your decision.
1. Safety Standards
When buying something for kids, safety should be the utmost priority. This also stands true for watercolor painting books since the paper quality and paint pigments can cause harm to a child. So, before you buy a watercolor book for your kids, make sure that the paper is made from high-quality wood pulp. This will ensure its durability and non-toxicity.
As for the included paint palettes, check that the quality of the paint pigments meets the American standards for toy safety. High-quality paint pigments also mean high vibrancy and lightfastness. This way, you and your kid can enjoy and start to paint watercolor paintings.
2. Types Of Illustrations
When buying a watercolor painting book for a child, you need to consider the kid’s choices and preferences. Maybe they would like a space-themed watercolor painting book or an animal-themed watercolor painting book. So, before you go splurging your money on a pack of watercolor painting books, keep your child’s preferences in mind.
Choosing the child's preferred illustrations and drawings will also motivate them to paint more. This way, they can move on to complex techniques after practicing all the fundamentals.
3. Watercolor Book Size
The size of your watercolor painting book is important. When buying a watercolor book for your child, you need to take into account many different factors. If your child attends art classes, you need to make sure that all the art supplies fit perfectly in an art backpack, including the watercolor book.
As you read, many of the watercolor books on this list are pocket-friendly. The reason for that is that these watercolor books are perfect for beginners and art students since they can carry around the watercolor book easily. Additionally, these books are perfect options for plein-air painting.
4. Paint Quality
All of the watercolor painting books mentioned on this list include a paint palette on each page, meaning you get all the essential tools for painting right in the book. The paint palette is a few squares of dried paint stuck right on the top of each drawing. All you need is a little bit of water to activate the dried watercolor paint. This makes watercolor painting so simple, even for an absolute beginner.
But you should keep in mind that the watercolor paint palette provided will not contain high-quality pigments or be very vibrant. You can also expect the quantity to be quite less. So, you will need to keep the basic tools handy in case the provided watercolor palette does not have enough paint.
5. Age Group
Most of the watercolor books mentioned on this list have a recommended age between 3 to 10 years. So, these books are focused on helping kids to begin their journey to becoming advanced artists. Additionally, you can also use these watercolor books for beginners. Complete beginners will benefit from the practice and can use the book as warm-up exercises.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Painting Books
Can I do mixed media painting on watercolor books?
Yes, you can. Apart from watercolor work, you can also use other art mediums to paint on these books. You can color the illustrations using acrylic paints, oil paints, watercolor pencils, colored pencils, gouache, ink, etc. Thus, these books can support a broad range of dry and wet mediums.
How can my children improve their watercolor painting skills?
The watercolor books provided in this list are a perfect introduction to the world of watercolor painting. Since the illustrations are already provided, all a child needs to do is wet the paints provided and practice different painting techniques, like wet-on-wet painting, wet-on-dry painting, layering, etc. Slowly, after achieving an eye for the basic techniques, they can move on to advanced techniques.
With more experience and knowledge, you will start to notice improvements in your child’s paintings. Since these books are already illustrated, you might need to get another plain watercolor painting book so that your child can start practicing painting landscapes and trying to imitate nature.
Start with simple and small stuff like a leaf, a flower, a fruit, or a plant before moving on to more complicated concept art.
Additionally, your child can take inspiration from popular watercolor artists like Gordon MacKenzie, Cathay Johnson, Jenna Rainey, Matthew Palmer, Leslie Frontz, Jean Haines, and Ray Hendershot.
Can I paint en plein air using a watercolor painting book?
A watercolor painting notebook is very handy and easy to carry, especially a pocket-friendly one. Additionally, they even have a paint palette provided inside. This makes them exceptionally good options for plein air painting. All you need to do is carry a jar of water and a paintbrush to start painting en plein air.
Are the paints provided in the watercolor book enough?
To be completely truthful, no, they are not. You can expect the paints to be low in quantity as well as quality. They will not be very vibrant or pigmented and will also have a low lightfastness rating. Hence, it would be helpful if you kept some good quality watercolor paints around. Only with good watercolors can you really improve your painting skill.
What is some basic knowledge I need to have to begin watercolor painting?
You don’t need to have complete knowledge about paints to start painting compositions with watercolors if you are painting just as a hobby. But additional information can never go to waste. So, you can get a complete guide to watercolor painting and learn about color theory, different watercolor techniques, and different lightfastness ratings to improve your skill level.
Verdict
Coming to the end of this article, it is time to talk about the top watercolor books. The Melissa & Doug watercolor book is the best on this list due to its endearing illustrations, watercolor paint palette, and exceptionally adorable front cover.
Hopefully, this article helped you find the best beginner watercolor book for your kid or for yourself. Here’s to becoming a watercolor artist soon!
To use watercolor tube paints, squeeze out some paint on a mixing palette and use a paint brush to mix it with sufficient water, depending on the shade and consistency you desire. Then, apply the paint on paper using techniques like wet-on-dry, dry brushing, glazing, splattering, or salt technique, stippling or dry-on-wet.
Watercolor paints in tubes have always been a popular choice when creating art. They are convenient and versatile, which is why both professional and beginner watercolor artists prefer using watercolor tubes.
You can easily squeeze out the paint from the tube and mix it with water to create a variety of shades and effects. Moreover, watercolor tubes are made by mixing pigments with honey (or glycerin) and gum arabic binder, which is why they stick together so well. In this context, I consider them the clear winner in the battle of watercolor pans vs tubes.
That said, what are the painting techniques that you can try out using this paint? And what materials and preparation are required for the same? In this article, I will try to answer all these questions and more. So, let’s begin!
What Are The Materials Required To Paint With Watercolor Paint Tubes?
It is a no-brainer that watercolor paint tubes are one of the most important art supplies in this case. These types of watercolor paints are available in a wide range on the market, and you can buy several of them to create a variety of hues for your paintings.
However, only invest in a good quality watercolor paint tube brand for better results. And you should always read the label on paint tubes to get the right shade.
2. Brushes
Artists need different kinds of brushes for painting, each serving a purpose. Hence, make sure to have all the brushes that you may need. For instance, you can purchase brushes with thin bristles for detailing, whereas you should invest in ones with large bristles to paint bigger sections of your painting. Again, quality is king, so keep that in mind as well!
3. Watercolor Paper
You should use watercolor paper instead of traditional paper when using watercolor paints. This is because the former is designed in such a way that it absorbs water to stabilize the paint. Hence, they can hold the paint better on their surface.
4. Water
Always keep a jar of water near you while creating any painting to clean your brushes from time to time. Additionally, you can use this water to dilute the paints to create lighter hues for your artwork.
5. Palette
Often, your shade choice might not be readily available on the market. In such cases, you can use a mixing palette to create colors on your own! All you need to do is mix the required primary colors using a paint brush on the pallet to create the desired shades.
6. Masking Tape
Masking tape is primarily used to keep your painting still at a surface. You can also use this tool to create crisp edges or borders in your painting.
7. Pencils And Erasers
If you want to paint figures in your artwork, it is always a good idea to sketch it out first. For that, you will need pencils and erasers to draw on your sketchbook. It is advised that you only stick to the basic ones available on the market since you only need them to create a rough outline to adhere to.
How To Prepare The Paint For Use?
Preparing The Watercolor Paint Tubes For Use
1. Squeeze Out The Paint On A Clean Mixing Surface
The first step is to squeeze out your desired paint colors from their respective tubes on a mixing palette. You can also use a mixing dish if you do not have a palette.
It is best to squeeze out only a small amount of tube paint when you begin this step. Doing so will allow you to understand factors like pigmentation intensity carefully. Once you have assessed such factors, add more paint as needed.
2. Add Water
You need to add water to watercolor paints for better activation while painting. You can use a clean brush, dip it in water, and then use it to mix the paint with water.
The amount of water you add to the paint depends on several factors, such as the consistency of the paint you wish to achieve and the intensity of the hues you want to create. For instance, add more water if you want your tube paints to have a thin consistency.
3. Mix The Paint
You can use a mixing palette knife or a clean brush to mix the water and paint effectively. Use circular motions to mix the two elements thoroughly. It is an important step, and you must ensure no clumps or dry spots in the paint mixture.
4. Test The Paint
Sometimes, the pigmentation and consistency of the paint on your mixing palette may differ from what appears on paper. Hence, it is best to test the paint on scrap paper first.
Once you apply a small amount of paint on the scrap paper, assess whether or not factors like the shade of the paint seem right to you. If not, you can add more water or paint per your needs to fix the issue.
Tips For Preparing The Paint
If possible, use distilled water instead of tap water to avoid any sort of color contamination due to the mineral concentration in the latter.
Experiment with different ratios of water and paint to achieve a variety of shades and effects, such as transparent washes and opaque layers.
Label your paint mixtures with the paint colors and ratios that you used for future reference.
7 Watercolor Painting Techniques You Can Use With Tube Paints
1. Wet-On-Wet Technique
As the name suggests, the wet-on-wet technique involves the application of a wet wash on the surface of your paper before you add paint colors to it. This technique can be used to create various effects like wood grain or water ripples and is a great way of using watercolor paint tubes.
Doing the wet-on-wet technique can help you blend colors more easily. Further, it facilitates the paint to spread across the paper much more efficiently. It is most commonly used to create soft and blended backgrounds in watercolor paintings. To apply the wet-on-wet technique using watercolor tubes, you can follow these steps:
Step 1
Dip your brush in clean water and stroke it across your paper. Ensure that the paper is evenly wetted and there are no dry spots. Alternatively, you may use a spray bottle to dampen the surface you wish to paint.
Tip
You should never over-wet the paper. Since your paper may get damaged after it reaches its saturation point, it is always a good idea to stick to only moderately wetting its surface.
Step 2
Squeeze out your paint and mix it on your mixing palette. You can use different amounts of water to achieve your desired level of consistency and add different shades of tube paints to get the precise shades you want to create.
Step 3
Apply the watercolor paint directly on the wet surface of your paper. You can add more colors to blend with the background as you see fit in this step.
Step 4
Once you have created all the textures, patterns, and designs using the tube paint mixtures, let the painting dry completely. Remember that wet-on-wet paintings can take longer to dry out because the paints and the surface are wet.
Example Of Finished Paintings Using Wet-On-Wet Technique
2. Dry Brush Technique
You might like the dry brush technique if you like creating rough textures in your paintings. It requires you to apply a small amount of tube paint on a dry brush and then stroke it to create a variety of textures and highlights in your artwork.
You get a lot of control over your brush movements with this technique. As a result, you get the creative freedom to create a range of effects - from light to dark aesthetics.
The dry brush technique is popularly combined with other techniques, such as the wet-on-wet method of watercolor painting. You can follow these steps to try the dry brush technique:
Step 1
Take a clean and dry brush. Dip it in a small amount of paint and remove any excess paint using a paper towel.
Step 2
Hold the brush at a slightly tilted angle and create light strokes on your watercolor paper. Ensure that you do not apply too much pressure while doing so to avoid microtears. Wait for this layer to dry.
Step 3
Once your first layer dries out, add the next layer of dry brush strokes. Keep adding layers until you have reached your desired textures or patterns in your painting. You can experiment with different kinds of brushes, tube paint tones, as well as with textures like toothpick scratches.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Dry Brushing
3. Glazing Technique
A richly colored surface can change the look of your painting completely - and that is exactly what the glazing technique helps you achieve. It requires you to layer multiple thin washes one over the other.
The glazing watercolor painting technique can help you create a strong depth in your artwork. It can also help you strengthen the complexity of color in your painting. You can follow this step-by-step guide to apply the glazing technique easily:
Step 1
Mix the watercolor tube paints thoroughly and clean your brushes. Add water to the paint mixture as per your consistency requirements.
Step 2
Use a large damp brush to apply the first thin layer of this paint on your watercolor paper. You can also use a sponge for application. However, make sure that you do not use too much water, or else you might damage the surface of your painting.
Step 3
Let the first layer dry out completely before adding the subsequent layers. Remember that you may need to add several layers of the same color to achieve your desired textures and gradients.
Step 4
Once the layers of your glazes dry out completely, you can add fine details to your painting. These include highlights, outlines, and additional colors for a bolder punch.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Glazing
4. Salt Technique
More than washing and detailing is required to create an artwork that stands out. Hence, trying the salt technique with watercolor tubes is a great idea! It can help you create a unique texture and add an interesting visual treat to your painting.
When salt is sprinkled on the wet watercolor wash of any painting, crystalized patterns start forming on it. Since the salt crystals absorb water and pigment, a beautiful texture is produced. Here is a step-by-step guide to try out the salt technique with tube watercolor paint:
Step 1
Use a large brush to apply a wet wash on your watercolor paper.
Step 2
Add the salt crystals on the surface of your watercolor paper while the wash is still wet. You can choose your choice of salt depending on the texture that you wish to create. For instance, you can add coarse-grained salt to create rough textures or stick with fine-grained salt if you want delicate textures.
Step 3
Let the salt crystals sit on your painting until it is completely dry. This painting process can take several hours in this case since a tube of watercolor paint takes longer to dry.
Step 4
Once the paint dries, use a clean and dry brush to remove the salt crystals from the surface of your painting. Or, you can use your fingers (like how I do) to scrub off these crystals gently. Ensure that you do not apply strong pressure while doing so, or else you might damage your watercolor paper.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Salt Technique
5. Splattering Technique
If you ask me, the splattering technique is one of the best ways to create interesting and creative effects in your artwork. It requires you to spread random splatters of tube paints on your painting to create abstract effects.
Splattering can add textures and depth to your artwork and facilitate enhancing certain sections of the painting. You can use this technique to perform several tasks, such as creating an enticing background in your painting. Here is how you can use watercolor paint technique to try out splattering while painting:
Step 1
Pick the watercolor paint tubes that you want to splatter on your painting. Mix them with water to achieve the desired level of consistency in your paints.
Step 2
Dip a clean brush in this smooth mixture of paint and water. Lift it and hold it right over your watercolor paper.
Step 3
Use your free hand to tap or flick the brush. This will cause the paint accumulated on the bristles of your brush to splatter on your painting, thus creating your desired effect. Repeat the process with as many colors as you want.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Splattering
6. Stippling Technique
Stippling is a popular watercolor painting technique where a professional artist is supposed to use watercolor paint to make small dots or paint marks to create various effects. I often use this technique with watercolor tubes to create several kinds of patterns.
The key to creating a wide range of designs using the stippling technique is assessing the perfect size of dots or marks your painting needs. For instance, you can vary the density and size of your dots and marks based on whether you want to create subtle or graphic details. Here is a step-by-step guide for trying out this technique with watercolor tubes:
Step 1
Take your watercolor paper. Sketch the area you wish to stipple on using a pencil.
Step 2
Squeeze out the watercolor paint from the paint tubes on your mixing palette and dip a dry brush into it. Ensure that the brush is small, round, and clean.
Step 3
Hold the brush at a 90-degree angle over the space you wish to stipple. Then, dab its bristles lightly to create small dots and marks on your painting. You can play with spacing and pressure while creating each dot to make various designs and patterns.
Step 4
Once you have added enough dots to your painting, use another (preferably dry) brush to blend certain areas to create a softer look.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Stippling
7. Wet-On-Dry Technique
As the name suggests, wet-on-dry requires applying wet paint from the watercolor tubes to your dry paper. You will like working with this method if you want to create precise details in your paintings.
The tube paints remain in place when applied on a dry surface because they are thicker in consistency and hold their position on the paper. As a result, there is no issue of bleeding or spreading in this case. Here is a step-by-step guide to using the wet-on-dry technique to create controlled details:
Step 1
Take a bit of paint from the watercolor paint tubes and mix the pigments on your mixing tray. Using a wet brush, lift this mixture off of your plastic or ceramic palette.
Step 2
Using the tip of the wet brush, apply the watercolor paint on a dry sheet of your paper. Ensure that your brush is not dripping with water and is just damp enough to work with.
Step 3
Create all the designs and effects that you want in the first layer of your painting - fine lines, edges, and so on. Let it dry before you add the next layer of watercolor paint to the tube.
Step 4
Keep repeating the process until you achieve your desired design.
Once you have tried out the various techniques you can use with paint tubes, it is essential to clean up too. Doing so ensures that the watercolor paints in tubes won’t get degraded due to neglectful maintenance. Further, cleaning your art tools after painting with watercolor paint tubes can also help ensure that your future paintings are not muddy or dirty.
Tips For Cleaning Up After Painting With Watercolor Paints In Tubes
1. Clean Your Brushes
The bristles of your dirty brush can get hard over time, making the process of painting way more inconvenient than it is supposed to be. To avoid this issue, cleaning all your brushes right after you paint your beautiful artwork is always a good idea.
To clean your brushes, rinse them with clean water. Use your fingers to gently remove any stubborn dried paint from the bristles of your brushes. You can also use a mild soap for a better cleanup. Once you have cleaned the bristles of your brush, reshape them.
2. Clean Your Palette
Since artists use their personalized watercolor palette a lot while creating any painting, it becomes crucial for them to remove the dried paint from its surface. Working with a dirty paint palette can lead to the residue of the dried paint and dust mixing with your fresh paint - thereby causing muddiness in your fresh paint mixture.
Using a paper towel, remove the excess wet paint from the surface of your mixing palette. You can use mild soap to scrape off the dried paint from your mixing palette and rinse it under water. Hence, it is a good idea to clean your mixing palette right after you are done with one painting session.
3. Clean Your Workspace
While most artists remember to clean their mixing palettes and brushes, they commonly forget about cleaning their workspace too. Painting in a dirty workspace can cause a strong negative impact on you, such as a lack of motivation, due to the accumulation of clutter around you. Additionally, dirty tables can lead to staining on your paintings as well!
Hence, it is best to maintain a clean workspace. Collect all your art tools and put them back in their storage places. It would be best to clean your workspace with a damp cloth in areas where you might have spilled too much paint, such as tables or floors.
How To Store The Paint And Equipment Properly?
1. Store The Watercolor Tubes In A Cool And Dry Place
The best way to prevent dried watercolor paint tubes is to store them in a cool and dry box with a tight lid. Since heat and moisture speed up the tubes drying out, it is best to keep them away from areas with direct exposure to sunlight.
2. Seal The Watercolor Paint Tube Caps Properly
If you want to work with fresh paints every time you use watercolor paint tubes, you must seal their metal caps properly. By doing so, you can prevent the moisture from getting trapped inside the tubes to a great extent. Tighten the nozzle properly to prevent air from entering the paint tube.
3. Place Your Watercolor Tube Paint Set In An Upright Position
Since we squeeze out the paint whenever we use watercolor paint tubes, it is best not to store them by placing them horizontally. Instead, stick to storing your tube paint set in an upright position. This way, you can minimize the chances of your tubes leaking.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Paints In Tubes
How to restore dried watercolor paint tubes?
Most of us who have been using watercolors for a while will have old, crusty paint tubes lying around the house. As watercolors don’t really have an expiry date, you can easily restore them with a few simple steps.
Cut open the metal or plastic tube.
Remove the paint into a mixing palette or pan.
Add a bit of gum Arabic, and water to revive the paint.
Let the paint soften, and add a bit more binder or water if required.
Stir the wet paint with a toothpick to create a smooth paste for getting a consistent color.
You’ll need a little more patience while restoring old dried paints, but it’s worth it and can be done with only a few supplies.
Can you use watercolor paint straight from the tube?
Yes, you can directly pick up paint from the tube while working on a spot color. You need to unscrew the cap, and lift a little paint from the tube with a wet brush. Just make sure that the brush is absolutely clean to avoid contamination. But we don’t recommend using this technique frequently as it may promote mold growth.
How to properly store watercolor paint tubes?
After you use watercolor paint tubes, it’s pretty essential to store them properly to prevent mold growth and contamination. Remember to clean the mouth of your tubes with a damp cloth or paper towel to remove any excess paint that may get dried and clog the cap.
To avoid the paints from cracking or getting separated, store the tubes in a cool, enclosed space and an airtight container. Properly stored watercolor tubes may last a long time and remain vibrant, which can sometimes be more than ten years.
Artists love experimenting with new pure paint sets. Hence, if you are bored of using watercolor pans, it is best to switch to paint tubes. Watercolor paints are semi-liquid, highly pigmented, and can help you add bold color punches to your paintings - unlike watercolor pan cake paints.
You can use watercolor tubes to paint pigments through several kinds of painting techniques, such as wet-on-wet, dry brushing, and so on. With watercolor tubes, you have the flexibility to choose between using a watercolor paper or painting on a watercolor canvas. Even though such paints may have a higher cost price, they are definitely worth every penny!
Summing up, the best way to use watercolor paints in tubes is to experience and discover your own style. Don’t shy away from experimenting with different shades and hues, no matter how bold it may seem for your comfort zone.
If you’ve found this guide insightful, don’t forget to give my article on how to paint glassa read.
If you’re new to watercolor painting, you may think that painting natural landscapes is the best way to get the hang of the process.
However, this isn’t completely true, as you can also start your journey by painting buildings and structures. The fluidity of watercolors makes it quite easy to successfully create the effects of light, shadows, and different textures. So, you don’t have to worry about missing out on any finer details and a realistic finish!
That’s why for today’s tutorial, I will walk you through the step-by-step process of painting the famous Berlin Cathedral with watercolors. Clear your table and dive into the deets! It goes without saying that this would make a great En Plein Air painting, even if you don't live in Berlin, painting the reference and enjoying this process outdoors is worth considering!
Painting Berlin Cathedral In Watercolor
Before I explain the steps for painting the Berlin Cathedral with watercolors, let me quickly tell you about the supplies I will use today. The good news is I won’t use many watercolor paints or brushes, and you don’t need these exact products either. I am using whatever I have handy, and you can follow suit!
Paint: Daniel Smith George Politis MA Set 1 6x5 | Paper: Saunders Waterford Watercolor Paper - White, 300gsm | Brush: Princeton Aqua Elite Professional 4 Piece Set 4850
The first step for any painting, especially as a beginner, is to draw a rough sketch of the landscape or structure you have in mind on your watercolor paper. This will act as an effective reference to keep you from mixing the colors later.
My sketch today is a pretty simple representation of the exterior of the Cathedral (with domes and windows) and a bushy foreground. But you can seek inspiration from online images to better understand the overall structure and the different sections. Likewise, feel free to use a ruler for drawing straight lines.
The only thing I’d suggest here is to use light pencil strokes so that you can erase them easily without leaving any nasty marks if required. And don’t worry if sketching the structure takes more time and you have to do it multiple times.
Once you’re satisfied with the sketch, it’s time to get started with the real deal! Thin out some light and dark green with water separately in a palette and start painting the bushy foreground, using the two shades alternatively.
I am using short and quick dabbing motions to add texture as well as help the shades blend seamlessly. You can also apply more dark green to the sections where you want more shade than light. However, I haven’t covered the entire space with green, as the little white ‘‘specks’’ create a more realistic effect.
Continue doing this till you’ve completely covered the base of the Cathedral, but make sure you don’t enter the walls above.
With the foreground ready, the next step is to start painting the Cathedral walls.
For this, thin out some yellow ochre and paint the walls and the beams of the structure. You don’t need to use the same paint for all the walls, though, as we want to create the illusion of light and shadows.
So, use a darker shade of yellow or some light brown to add shadows to the walls like I’m doing here. As you can see, I’m using a deeper shade for the left side to create natural-looking shadows.
For the domes, I’ll be using a light shade of blue to paint the domes of the Cathedral, but you can also use turquoise. Thin out the paint with water and start painting these portions, barring the circular windows.
I’d suggest using only one layer of paint for the domes, as it will darken eventually upon drying. So, adding too many layers at once may make the domes appear too dark, thereby disrupting the overall balance of the painting.
Additionally, you can use the same color without adding much water to add shadows to the sides of the dome. In this case, wait for the domes to dry out completely to see how much they darken, and then take a call accordingly.
Now, take the thinnest brush in your collection and dip it in some dark brown color to paint the details of the Cathedral. Go over the joists between the upper and lower floors as well as the roof-like structures, followed by the perimeter of the walls and the circular windows.
A little tip: paint at least two lines for the triangular roofs and horizontal joists to accentuate these sections to give the illusion of dimension. This will keep your painting from looking flat. Similarly, make small strokes on the front roof and wall, as I have done here.
This step will also require a thin-tipped brush, so make sure you clean the one used in the previous step completely to eliminate any excess color. Or, you can use another thin brush if you have it handy.
I will be using some deep blue watercolor to paint some of the larger windows of the Cathedral while leaving a couple of them for the time being. Likewise, I have not painted the arch-like section of the windows on the bottom, as I felt using too much color will make for a crowded look.
Since we will be adding more details to the windows, let the base color on them dry properly to prevent it from smudging later. Meanwhile, let’s add some more details to the dome of our Berlin Cathedral.
Take a thin-tipped brush and dip it in the same color you used for painting the domes. Now, go over the ‘boundary’ of the domes using the pencil line as a reference. I am also adding a curved porch-like effect on the base of the main dome through horizontal and some vertical strokes.
You can use the same brush to add borders and fill in the circular windows on the domes like I’m doing here. For the final touch, I am using a thicker consistency of color to paint the structure of St.Paul and the apostle (besides the dome) to make it more prominent.
For this step, start by mixing some brown with yellow to paint the upper side windows. Here again, you may darken and lighten the color to create the illusion of shadows and light, respectively.
Using the same color or picking up some brown on the tip of the brush, add the boundaries of the top-most blue windows to give them dimension. Now, fill in the windows using vertical and horizontal lines to create the illusion of wooden panes. Repeat this process for the bottom windows and fill in the empty ones withthe ‘wooden panes.’
At this point, I felt my Berlin Cathedral could use some more detailing and highlights. So now, I am simply going over certain areas to create more shadows and darken the existing color.
I am also adding some brown highlights just below the dome to make the overall structure appear more vibrant.
To add the final touches, we will paint small brick-like structures on the bottom walls with some light and dark brown watercolors, again, to create the illusion of shadows and light. Use a fine-tipped brush to ensure precision, as the shapes should be clearly identifiable.
Finally, use some yellow watercolor to paint the vertical structures on the top of the three domes. And there you have it- the Berlin Cathedral painted in watercolors!
That’s all I had for you today! Although there are many detailed images of the Berlin Cathedral available on the internet, I’d advise first-timers to sketch a simple layout as I did and use only a few colors.
This way, you can focus more on practicing the different strokes and techniques of using watercolors. And once you have your hands set, feel free to sketch more complex versions and invoke life in them with the use of more colors.
As for the time being, you can practice creating light and shadows using lighter and darker shades of colors, as well as natural strokes, to create realistic effects before starting with painting the Cathedral. Or, you can use this painting as your practice guide!
Lastly, don’t lose hope if your first few trials don’t turn out perfect. Remember that practice and patience will always be the key to success, the beginner-to-expert guide on how to paint in watercolor might be helpful if you're feeling stuck!
The most common types of watercolor techniques for beginners include the wet-on-wet technique, dry brush method, and wet-on-dry technique. Lifting, layering, glazing, and the salt technique are a few additional watercolor techniques through which artists can create an enticing artwork. An understanding of the various concepts of color theory makes the overall process of creating watercolor art much easier.
Understanding how to use different kinds of watercolor techniques can help you create a wide variety of elements in your vertical or landscape painting. From textures to transitions, every step can be smoothly established if you are well-versed in such techniques.
In this article, I will be walking you through the basic watercolor techniques for beginners through which you can easily create beautiful art using watercolors. I will also be touching upon the concept of color theory.
Let’s get started!
What Are The Materials Needed For Watercolor Painting?
One of the first and most vital materials that you need to get started with watercolor painting is a decent set of paints. There are a variety of options available on the market, and you can choose the one that suits your needs the most based on factors like the diversity of colors and brands.
If you do not have much experience with watercolors, you may have to go through your share of trial and error to land on the perfect set of watercolor paints.
2. Paper
While you may want to use any kind of paper lying around your house to create art, it is best to stick to watercolor paper when trying to learn the basic watercolor techniques for beginners. The texture and design of the papers in a watercolor painting book are manufactured in such a way that water-based colors do not damage them.
3. Brush
Another essential material required for learning the various watercolor techniques is a brush. One brush is not enough to learn the basics of such techniques. As you will go through the section that covers these watercolor techniques, you will realize that creating a watercolor painting requires you to use more than one brush.
Hence, you should have at least the three primary sizes of a brush handy. These include a small, a medium, and a large-sized brush. The varying widths of the watercolor brushes will help you establish different tasks.
For instance, a big brush can be used to paint a large area whereas a small brush will help you when you want to outline a drawing. You may also use a combination of different types of brushes, such as fan, angular, flat, and linear brushes, to create a variety of effects.
4. Palette
A palette is a base that is used to hold all your paints. Its function also includes acting as a surface for all your mixing requirements. Hence, you can create new colors by mixing two or more pigments on such palettes.
There are a variety of palettes available on the market, and you can choose one that fits your needs the best. For instance, you can either go for the traditional plastic palettes or its metal alternative. If you cannot arrange a palette, you can use substitutes like paper plates too.
5. Water container
If you have ever used watercolor to paint before, you must be aware of how quickly the brushes get dirty. After all, they are constantly dipped in different shades and colors, which leads to accumulation of debris on the bristles.
All watercolor painters keep a water container by their side to clean their brushes. Moreover, water is an important medium that helps watercolors spread easily on the paper, allowing you to paint with ease.
Tip
Keep a paper towel handy as watercolor can be a messy method of painting. You can also use paper towels to add variety to your watercolor painting by creating designs and patterns.
Whenever you wish to create a soft and blended effect in your artwork, it is best to use the wet-on-wet technique. As the name suggests, this method requires you to apply wet paint on a wet surface. You may need to apply a masking fluid to protect the white areas of your art while using this watercolor technique.
This method is most commonly used for creating soft and natural transitions between colors. The colors spread easily on wet paper, which is why this technique is also used for painting a sky or clouds.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Use a spray or paintbrush to carefully wet the paper with clean water. You need to carry out this step carefully, as an excessively wet surface might ruin the paper’s quality.
One might spray the water on the canvas, or use a damp paper towel to wet the surface. Keep this paper at a 45-degree angle for easy application of watercolors.
Step 2
Take your palette and mix the colors that you want to paint with. You can either create a color by mixing two pigments or apply the paint directly on the paper as per your needs.
Using a brush, dab the paint slowly on the wet paper. Rest assured of smooth application with no visible harsh lines.
Step 3
Once you add the first layer of colors, you can tilt the paper a little to cause the watercolors to spread on the paper. But I’d suggest refraining from doing this if you don’t want the colors to bleed into each other.
Additionally, ensure that the first layer of the paint dries out completely before you repeat the cycle of adding the second layer of paint.
Tips
Ensure that the quality of paper used is decent so that it can absorb water without getting ruined.
Paint as quickly as possible, so that the wet paper does not dry out while you are in the middle of carrying out the wet-on-wet technique.
2. Dry Brush Technique
Sometimes, you may be required to add texture to your paintings. In such cases, it is best to use the dry brush technique. It requires you to only use the dry brush and not wet it so that the rough look can be brought to life.
The ideal type of paper for using a dry brushing technique is the cold pressed watercolor paper. It allows you to create elements like fur, wood, and rough ground easily. This fun technique also ensures that the paint does not lighten in terms of saturation after drying.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Choose the correct brush to create the dry brushing effect. The best one to go for in this case would be a brush with firm bristles, ideally the ones that are made of goat hair.
You can also choose the brushes that you have had for a while now since they must have absorbed a decent amount of moisture over time, thereby becoming firmer in texture.
Step 2
Make a thick paint mix and dip your brush in it. Use it to apply watercolor on a dry piece of paper. Then, create soft and quick brush strokes on the paper to give your painting a rough and textured touch to it.
Step 3
Keep adding the strokes until you feel the need to stop. Using this technique, you can also create highlights and other relevant details to the background of your painting.
Tips
Use a decent quality of paper to paint on because dry brushing may tear thin or poor quality papers.
Do not add excess paint to your brush to have more brush control over the creation of strokes in your painting.
3. Wet-On-Dry Technique
As the name suggests, the wet-on-dry technique requires you to use wet paint on a dry surface. This is the best method for beginners since it gives them a decent amount of control over the movement of brushes and paints on paper.
If you want to create a defined and crisp painting that has all its elements well defined, then you should practice mastering the technique of wet painting on a dry surface.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Take a dry sheet of paper. Wet the medium-sized brush that you will be using to create your watercolor art in clean water, and then dip it in your desired shade of watercolor.
Step 2
Apply smooth strokes to create defined shapes of the figure that you want. Since the surface of the paper is dry, you will be able to easily apply the watercolor in whichever direction you want.
Step 3
Once the paper dries out, add the next layer of paint to it. Watercolor fades to a lighter tone after drying when applied using this technique, so you might be required to layer the colors more than once to create a smooth and opaque finish.
Tips
Don’t wet the brush too much because an excessive amount of water may hamper the process of creating well-defined figures.
To prevent different colors from mixing or bleeding, add the next layer of paint only when the previous one dries out completely.
Color Theory
Why do some colors suit certain elements of art better than others? It happens due to color theory, which is the study of how different colors work with each other and how humans perceive them. Before you start exploring the various watercolor painting concepts, it is crucial that you are aware of this theory to produce better art pieces.
Colors symbolize different things, thereby affecting human emotions. The understanding of this concept helps designers and marketers create designs that people can relate to and connect to on a personal level.
For instance, red and yellow are known to induce appetite - that is the combination used by food outlets such as McDonald’s in their logo. This theory also involves understanding how different primary colors are mixed to formulate the differing shades of secondary and tertiary colors on the color wheel.
1. Basic Color Mixing
The three primary colors - red, yellow, and blue paint - do not need to be mixed with any other pigment to be created. On the other hand, secondary colors are formed by mixing an equal ratio of two primary colors in a balanced amount.
An example of this basic mixing can be mixing red and yellow paint to create an orange pigment.
Similarly, when we mix a secondary and a primary color, we obtain a tertiary color. For instance, if you mix blue, which is a primary color, with green paint, which is a secondary color created by mixing blue and yellow - you can create the shade of blue-green.
2. Complementary Colors
Understanding the concept of complementary colors and color theory can help you create a more suitable piece of artwork for your audience.
Complementary colors are nothing but the colors that lie opposite to each other on the color wheel. These opposite colors, when used together as a combination, give a more vibrant touch to your watercolor painting.
It increases the contrast of your designs as well. A few examples of complementary colors include pairs of red and green, yellow and purple, and ultramarine blue and orange.
3. Warm And Cool Colors
You can use warm and cool colors to accurately depict certain emotions through your art by setting its mood. Colors like red, yellow, brown, and orange fall under the category of warm colors. Such tones are used to give off the emotion of passion and energy.
On the other hand, colors like blue, green, and purple are cool colors. Hence, they can be used to symbolize the emotions of calmness and peace. These shades also create a sense of objects being placed far away in the painting.
Additional Basic Watercolor Techniques For Beginners
1. Glazing
If you need to create a sense of depth in your painting, or maybe add a layer of shimmer to it - glazing is one of the best watercolor techniques to do so. It involves applying a thin layer of watercolor paint over your painting, such that it appears close to being transparent.
Glazing can help you establish a variety of tasks, such as adding a rich layer over your entire painting to create a layered effect. You can also enhance a certain section of your painting to make it stand out by glazing it.
2. Lifting
No one is perfect, which is why it is common for even veteran painters to make a mistake while creating their artwork. Fortunately, watercolor techniques like lifting can help them correct such mistakes easily.
To carry out this technique, all you need to do is take a wet brush or a paper towel and blot it over your painted paper to take off the extra little pigment from it.
You can also purchase a specialized lifting tool for a more precise result. While it is a popular technique used for rectifying the mistake of adding too much pigment, you can also use it to add highlights.
3. Layering
Layering is another commonly used watercolor technique, which requires the artist to add layers and a flat wash of watercolor paint on top of an already existing layer. It is used primarily to enhance a few sections of the painting, create depth, and for adding texture to paintings.
An important thing to note about layering is that you need to wait for one layer to dry out completely before you put the next layer of watercolor paint over your art. This would ensure that the colors of your painting do not mix and bleed.
4. Salt technique
If you like giving interesting textures to your paintings, you need to try the salt technique! You need to apply paint on your paper for this and keep it wet by sprinkling a generous amount of water on it.
Next, sprinkle a decent amount of salt over the region where you wish to create the textures. The size and shape of the salt crystals will influence the design of textures formed in your watercolor painting.
Let it dry overnight. Then, remove the salt by rubbing your fingers over the textured paper. And voila! You have created an interesting textured effect.
FAQs Related To Basic Watercolor Techniques For Beginners
What are the different types of watercolor brushes, and how do I use them?
There are various kinds of watercolor brushes. The most common ones include round, flat, fan, mop, detail, and angle brushes.
You should keep them clean at all times, and reshape the bristles of your brushes to ensure that they don’t dry out.
Additionally, brushes may be categorized based on their size. Hence, there are small, medium, and large brushes as well with varying widths. You may use either of them based on factors like the area that you wish to paint.
For instance, you should use a large brush while painting the background of your painting and a small brush for precision.
What is the best way to mix watercolors to achieve the desired color?
To achieve your desired shade of color, you should always start by mixing a small amount of the necessary colors on your palette. It is important to not take a large amount directly, since there is no guarantee that you will create the shade that you want on your first try itself.
You should also use water to dilute the watercolors as and when required. Even after you feel satisfied with the shade that you have created on your palette, it is best to test it out on a piece of white paper first to ensure that it looks like the shade that you were aiming for.
How do I create different textures and effects with watercolors?
You can easily create interesting textures and effects using different watercolor painting techniques, such as dry brushing. This method requires you to dip your dry brush in paint and create a thick stroke directly on dry white paper to give off a textured and rough look.
Similarly, you can use other watercolor painting techniques such as the wet-on-wet method to create soft transitions and salt watercolor techniques to create a textured background. You may also create a look of splattered water using the splatter method, or use the method of scratching with a sharp object such as a toothpick to create textures like grass or fur.
What are some common mistakes to avoid when starting with watercolor painting?
One of the most common mistakes that people make when starting with watercolor painting is investing in cheap supplies. While buying high-quality paints and papers might seem too expensive, it is worth the outcome that you produce in the end.
Another common mistake is not letting the paper dry out completely before adding the next layer of paint. The colors bleed into each other as a result. You should also not forget to clean your brushes routinely using water and wiping them with a dry paper towel.
How do I care for my watercolor brushes and other materials?
One of the best ways to care for your watercolor brushes is to clean them right after you are done with painting. This will help you prevent any form of buildup on their bristles. Similarly, you should also reshape your brushes regularly and store your materials properly to avoid any form of damage.
It is also crucial to take care of your color palette. Since you will be mixing different shades on it, you should ensure that it is clean at all times to avoid compromising the desired shades.
Can I use watercolors on other surfaces besides paper?
You can use watercolors on other surfaces besides paper too. However, most of them need to be compatible with this form of paint. For instance, you can use watercolor paints on surfaces, such as boards and canvases that are specially designed for this medium of paint.
Apart from that, you can use watercolors on porous surfaces like wood and textile. However, you may be required to prep some of these surfaces by priming them a bit so that the colors don’t seem dull.
How do I know when a watercolor painting is finished?
Knowing when a watercolor painting is finished depends significantly on your personal goals. It is best to step back and check out the various aspects of your painting to assess whether or not they are balanced up to your desired level.
For instance, if you are making a realistic painting, you might want to evaluate whether or not your work is finished by seeing if the art needs any more detailing. Similarly, you can assess the tones of your watercolor painting and adjust the areas that seem to sway away from the intention that you had in mind.
Where can I find resources for further learning and improvement in watercolor painting?
Many free tutorials on YouTube can help you learn and improve your watercolor painting skills. You can also find relevant resources on platforms such as Quora and Reddit, where people share their experiences of anything new that they try out or take a course on reputed platforms.
Although watercolor paintings are a visual treat, the watercolor techniques to create the same may seem a little difficult to master. However, with the right amount of dedication and practice, you can easily use these watercolor techniques to paint your ideal form of artwork.
The best way to apply all these watercolor techniques is to use them as a combination of more than one method. This will allow you to create a wide variety of elements on one sheet of paper itself.
The basic watercolor techniques for beginners include wet-on-wet and dry wet watercolor techniques, dry brushing, layering, and lifting. Apart from them, you can use the salt technique or glazing to add an interesting texture to your paintings.
With that, I have reached the end of this article. Feel free to share your creativity through watercolor paintings as you experiment with the different watercolor techniques mentioned above.
Goodbye for now!
The best soundproof panels are the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels, offering excellent noise reduction capabilities without breaking the bank. That said, every panel set aims at a different requirement, and the right choice rests on the user’s preferences. Further, attenuation will only be achieved with 100% coverage of the target walls.
Creating a quiet environmentis quite important for a home recording studio, especially if you live in a noisy locale.
Moreover, a home office setup benefits immensely if it is in a quieter place, improving your productivity and allowing you to focus on the task. And to achieve this, you’ll need a set of soundproofing panels that suit your specific needs.
To help you choose the right product, I’ve curated a list of the 8 best soundproof panels that perform this task effectively.
Made from high-density materials, the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels are designed to provide sound insulation while being flame retardant, non–toxic, and corrosion-resistant. These hexagon panels can be used as wall art to decorate and are available in various colors and styles.
The material primarily used to make the Sonic panels is polyester fiber, a commonly used element for absorbing sound that is effective at noise control. For frequencies ranging from 2000 to 6000 Hz, the material can absorb more than 90% of the noise. The acoustic panels have an average NRC rating of 0.92, which is sufficient for most small and medium-sized spaces, but may not be enough for large rooms.
Sonic Acoustics panels come in a 12-panel set with a surface area of 14 x 12 inches each, which completely covers my home office room. However, the hexagon shape means that the panels can’t cover every corner of the room whole. For this purpose, the acoustic panels were made to be cut easily and affixed to the surface in the desired shape.
The set can be installed with a general-purpose adhesive that can be sprayed on walls to stick the panels in the desired positions. I was also able to use a roll of 3M double-sided tape to stick the soundproof panels to the walls after reading the manufacturer’s instructions.
The Troy Studio Acoustic Foam Panel features groove-style sound-absorbing foam that can double as wall décor. These sound panels are square-shaped, thick, dense, and non-toxic while being affordable for beginner home studio setups.
TroyStudio Foam Panels are made primarily from polyurethane open-cell foam for room reverb cancellation, echo, and noise control. This, in turn, helps improve the sound quality in a room and makes recordings much less noisy. These panels feature an NRC rating of 0.75, which is ample for small spaces and can effectively reduce undesired sound reflection once set up properly.
Installing acoustic panels of this set is as easy as cutting them up and using spray adhesive. I was able to get them up and ready using a box cutter and the adhesive, albeit with some trouble keeping them adhered to the wall.
Coming in a pack of six, 12, 18, and 36, the acoustic panels cover a lot of space per panel on the wall. With a surface area of 12 x 12 inches per panel, eight of them were enough to cover the length of my home office walls. The high surface coverage, in addition to the 2-inch thickness and low weight, make these panels suited for acoustical treatment.
The sound-absorbing foam brick has beautiful appearance and...
Made of environmentally friendly polyurethane foam. In order...
What we like
48 panels in a pack
Acoustic wedge foam sound absorption tiles
Polyurethane panels
Environmentally friendly
What we don't like
A bit less effective at soundproofing
The Xin & Log Acoustic foam panels are a set of foam bricks with a checkered pattern that absorbs sound. This checkered pattern was made with wavy triangular shapes that help with noise reduction in addition to the visual design.
These sound panels are made from environmentally-friendly polyurethane foam that is also non-toxic. A common problem with some soundproofing materials is that they have a noticeably foul odor, something that is completely absent from the Xin & Log panels.
At 12 x 12 inches, the Xin & Log panels are sized sufficiently for small or medium-sized rooms such as vocal booths, studios, and control rooms. However, the low NRC rating of 0.4 and thickness of a single inch may somewhat deter it from being effective as a sound treatment option.
The polyurethane panels are soft enough to be cut through with shears or box cutters, and they can be installed using double-sided tape or spray adhesive. And they come in a pack of 48, ensuring that you have enough acoustic foam tiles to line your walls completely with the foam panels.
You can find the Xin & Log Acoustic Panels in black and black-and-blue colors, which you can match with your preferred aesthetic schemes.
Material: Polyurethane Foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
【FASHIONABLE APPEARANCE】: This unique hexagonal sound...
【EASY TO CUTTING AND REMOVE】: Easy to cut with a sharp...
What we like
Hexagonal acoustic foam panels
Odorless and non-toxic polyester fiber
Straightforward reshaping and installation
Panels can be detached post installation
What we don't like
Thin acoustic foam panels
Available in plenty of colors, the Dekiru Acoustic panels are hexagonal soundproofing implements with bevel edges for both aesthetic and functional purposes. This design choice enables the acoustic panels to effectively minimize echo while doubling as honeycomb wall décor.
The Dekiru panels come in a set of 12 and are made with odorless, non-toxic, flame-retardant, and formaldehyde-free polyester fiber. This material remains soft and easy to breathe in, making it simple to reshape the panels. Moreover, the panels can be detached from the walls and relocated without leaving visible blemishes or holes in your walls.
With a surface area of 14 x 13 inches, the panels promise to dampen sounds by a noticeable degree. That said, I found their 0.4-inch thickness to be a point of contention, ultimately limiting how much sound the panels absorb.
As for the installation, it is simple and straightforward and can be performed using 3M adhesive tapes, spray adhesive, nails, or glue. I would recommend using spray adhesive to keep the walls free of major blemishes if you ever wish to relocate your acoustic panels.
🧽【Quick-Recovery】Be different from other Acoustic...
🔇【1 Inch but High Density】You may be concerned that...
What we like
Quick recovery acoustic panels
Wedge-style panels
Highly elastic and high-density material
High noise absorption
What we don't like
Self-adhesive may not hold for long
The HEMRLY Acoustic Foam Panels feature a wedge design on high-density and highly elastic materials for soundproofing small and medium-sized spaces. They are available in three colors: carbon black, gray, and black-gray.
These panels are self-adhesive, meaning that they come with glue applied to the non-wedge side. All you need to do is remove the cover on the back, line the acoustic tile up against a wall, and apply sufficient pressure. Installation can be completed within minutes, requiring very little effort at most. And if needed, the HEMRLY panels come with some extra tape just to be safe.
As for the soundproofing capabilities, the 12 x 12 inches panels can absorb sound and echoes from the surroundings. They can be used in recording studios or at home offices for professional needs or to create a quiet environment to relax in.
The soundproofing foam can be cut and reshaped to fit a room as necessary, and it can be machine-washed without any issues. And once compressed, the acoustic panels take a few minutes to decompress, cutting down on the waiting time before beginning installation.
Material: Acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
★ Professional Sound Absorbing Properties - Acoustic foams...
★ Quality - Our Acoustic Foam Panels are made with...
What we like
High soundproofing capability
Wedge-style design
Available in a set of 52
Can be used in various areas
What we don't like
Only available in black
The wedge-style Audiosoul Acoustic Panels come in a pack of 52, featuring sound maskingcapabilities that can reduce noise pollution and remove echoes. Made from professional-grade acoustic foam, they can be used in professional soundproofing projectsand treatments for rooms, doors, garage spaces, and more.
Owing to the acoustic foam, the Audiosoul Acoustic panels are lightweight while being quite dense, further reducing the intensity of unwanted sound reflections. Furthermore, the foam remains dense and consistently firm across its surface to keep the noise reduction high.
Covering a surface area of 12 x 12 inches, the 52-acoustic panel set will be ample to cover most spaces. But, if you do not need 52 panels, the Audiosoul panels are available in 24 and 12 packs as well, available at an affordable rate.
These panels, when combined with acoustic foam bass traps, can suppress noises of any frequency. Without a bass trap, the acoustic panels can successfully dampen the sounds of mid and high frequencies.
Installation is fairly standard in the Audiosoul sound-dampening acoustic panels; simply use double-sided tape, spray adhesive, or glue to install them to hard surfaces.
Material: Polyurethane acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
【Ultimate Audio Clarity Enhancer】 Crafted from advanced...
【Sustainable Design】 Our acoustic foam panels stand the...
What we like
High-quality polyurethane foam construction
Capable of high noise reduction
Available in three colors
Suits home setups
What we don't like
May take a few hours to expand
Designed to be used in spaces like home offices and studios, the JBER Acoustic Foam Panels are wedge-style panels that reduce outside noise in an enclosed space. These can be used to spot-treat a studio or a home recording space as well if needed.
JBER Acoustic Foam panels are made from acoustic polyurethane foam, an odorless and flame-retardant material with high noise-reduction qualities. The sound-dampening panels can improve the sound quality of recordings by reducing background noise, echo, and reverb.
You can find the JBER acoustic panels in a 12 or 48-pack in three different color schemes: black, red, and charcoal. Each panel is sized at 12 x 12 inches with a 1-inch thickness, making it sufficiently sized for most home setups. YouTubers, music producers, and podcast hosts can make use of these panels.
When combined with a layer of sound insulationpanels, the JBER foam panels can completely soundproof a room with no issues. And much like other acoustic panels on this list, the sound-absorbing panels can be resized and altered without affecting their acoustic capabilities.
Material: Polyurethane acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
Premium Material Construction：Crafted from top - grade...
What we like
Pyramid pattern for improved noise reduction
Polyurethane foam dampens reverberations
2-inch thick acoustic panels
High-density foam
What we don't like
Panels take a while to decompress
Featuring a pyramid pattern, the SD SODOCT Acoustic Foam Panels are designed to increase the contact area with sound. This leads to the absorption of flutter echoes and standing waves, which is necessary for acoustic treatment.
Made from polyurethane acoustic foam, the SD SODOCT panels are non-toxic and flame-retardant panels that control and dampen reverberation and typical background noises. This contributes to better sound clarity in recordings, video and audio calls, interviews, and more.
Each panel is sized at a standard 12 x 12 inches, with a thickness of two inches. The extra inch of thickness makes a noticeable difference in the sound-dampening qualities of a room. Adding to the noise reduction is the high material density, which sits at 25 kg/m3, deterring residual sound effectively.
The premium acoustic foam panels are easy to alter and install, owing to their soft nature. It is worth noting, however, that the panels take a day or two to decompress after unpacking.
When choosing a set of soundproofing panels, you’ll want to ensure that the product you purchase performs its task well. Sound treating a room is a necessary part of any recording studio, after all.
The best soundproofing panels reduce sound, dampen sounds and provide you with better sound quality. They can also reduce the intensity of unwanted noise and reverb, making your recordings sound clear and professional.
Here is a brief overview of each quality that most foam panels have to transform your room into a quieter place.
A. The Make
Soundproofing panels are made with all kinds of materials, ranging from natural materials like wood to artificial ones, such as foam. What each of these has in common is that they stop sound waves from entering a space, reducing any noises that come from the outside. As a result, the room becomes quieter and more suited for working or recording purposes.
Depending on the size of your room and the scale of your needs, you can choose from a host of panel materials. Each soundproofing solution will have a different way and in turn, a different level of effectiveness for successfully performing its task. Smaller rooms and spaces can work with thinner and sleeker soundproofing panels, while larger, noisier rooms require thicker foam panels.
There are more than 30 soundproofing materials to choose from at different price ranges and effectiveness, so you won’t be starved for choice. Some of the most common soundproofing material types are acoustic membranes, fiberglass, textile materials, and soundproof drywall, to name a few.
A common misconception is that an egg crate can be used as an effective soundproofing solution. While this isn’t exactly untrue since adding any kind of mass to your walls will reduce noise, the effectiveness of crates is extremely limited. So, it’s best to use materials made specifically for soundproofing purposes.
B. Noise Reduction Coefficient Rating
The Noise Reduction Coefficient Rating (NRC) is a measurement of how much sound a soundproofing panel can reduce and dampen. These ratings range from 0.00 to 1.00, with the latter being the most effective.
Small spaces don’t require much soundproofing, so you can use a panel with a relatively low NRC rating without an issue. Larger spaces, however, benefit immensely from panels with an NRC rating that approaches or is 1. Background noises and bass frequencies become an issue the larger a space is, necessitating greater soundproofing solutions.
C. Dimensions
Typically, soundproof panel sets come in bundles of six, 12, and 24, with a surface area of 1 ft2, 2 ft2, and 2ft x 4ft each.
Your set of soundproof panels should be able to cover an entire room well, and the panel dimensions determine how much of your walls they cover. An average home studio can use up to 48 1ft2, which is why most starter panel bundles come in a combination of all the panels you’ll need. These combinations may include 48 of 1 ft2 panels, 12 of 2 ft2 panels, or six of 2ft x 4ft panels.
D. Surface Pattern
Most soundproof panels come with a pattern on them to dampen any sounds, with wedged and pyramid patterns being the most widely used.
Though there is a marked improvement in the soundproofing performance of panels with patterns as opposed to those without, the pattern type makes little difference. For instance, the difference between the soundproofing performance of wedged and pyramid patterns is minimal, so feel free to choose as per your aesthetic tastes.
2. Soundproofing Principles Used
Soundproofing a room makes it acoustically isolated by reducing or outright blocking sound waves passing in and out of it. Acoustic isolation stands on five key principles, namely deflection, absorption, decoupling, thermal conversion, and constrained layer damping. Each of these principles works independently, with soundproofing panels making use of one or more of them at once for added effectiveness.
Let’s look at these principles briefly to know how your soundproof panels work and focus on which principle will net you the best results.
A. Deflection
Deflection is a principle that works by adding mass and density to the walls, floor, and ceiling of a room. The density and thickness of a soundproof panel act as a deterrent for sound waves, causing them to lose energy as they pass through the soundproof panel.
This is a principle put to use by most soundproofing panels on the market and is effective in rooms of all sizes.
B. Absorption
Have you noticed that some soundproof panels have perforations? These perforations facilitate the absorption of sound, achieving acoustic isolation while preventing reverbs, resonance, and amplification of sound waves.
C. Decoupling
Decoupling occurs when the area of the direct link between the structure and soundproof materials is reduced. This interrupts sound vibrations that travel through a room’s connectivity from one side to the other.
You can think of this principle being enforced by creating what is, effectively, a room within a room.
D. Thermal Conversion
This principle converts sound waves into trace heat energy through friction in the acoustic sound insulation membrane. Professional-grade soundproofing solutions employ this strategy to maximize noise reduction and dampening, in addition to the other principles on this list.
In contrast to some of the other principles, thermal conversion doesn’t rely on mass for soundproofing, making it standalone as a soundproofing material.
E. Constrained Layer Damping
Constrained layer damping reduces the natural resonant frequencies of a structure by using specific materials in a given ratio. This is typically enforced by applying damping compounds in the middle of two rigid panels like plasterboard or drywall.
When sounds strike these compounds, shearing forces between panels cause friction in the damping compounds, essentially converting sound energy to heat.
3. The Differences Between Soundproofing And Sound Absorption
Soundproofing and sound absorption are fundamentally different concepts, but they are often confused with one another. In truth, sound absorption is a subset of soundproofing and is chiefly used in two ways.
The voids in a stud wall can cause unwanted reverberations, which is where sound absorption materials are used as a part of soundproofing systems. Oftentimes, absorption materials are used to line the surface space of walls and ceilings to reduce soundresonance in the room by absorbing sound waves.
Soundproofing is a process that is much more involved than sound absorption, employing all manners of sound and reverb reduction techniques. The materials used for soundproofing prevent sound waves from entering or passing through a room, creating what is known as acoustic isolation.
Soundproof Panels FAQs
What is the difference between soundproofing and sound absorption?
Soundproofing is the blocking of sound from entering or leaving a space. Sound absorption, on the other hand, is about soaking up sound waves to reduce echo and reverberation within a room. Soundproof panels are designed for sound absorption.
Can soundproof panels completely eliminate noise?
While soundproof panels significantly reduce noise levels, they are not designed to completely eliminate noise. They can, however, dramatically improve the sound quality within a room by reducing echo and background noise.
Are soundproof panels safe for indoor use?
Yes. Most quality soundproof panels are designed with indoor safety in mind. They are typically fire-retardant and non-toxic. However, it’s always wise to check the product specifications before purchasing.
How many soundproof panels do I need for my room?
The number of panels needed depends on the size of your room, its shape and the sources of noise you want to address. Manufacturers often have guides or calculators to help determine how many panels you’ll need for your specific circumstance.
Do I need a professional to install soundproof panels?
Not necessarily. While a professional can ensure panels are installed for maximum effectiveness, most soundproof panels come with instructions that are easy to follow for DIY installation.
How do I install soundproof panels?
Soundproof panels can be mounted or hung on walls, ceilings, and even doors. They usually come with installation instructions that are easy to follow. Some require adhesive strips or glue, while others may need to use mounting brackets.
Are soundproof panels easy to maintain?
Yes, they are. Just use a vacuum to remove dust from the surface as needed. For tougher stains or dirt, use a damp cloth with mild soap. Be sure to check the manufacturer’s instructions for any specific care requirements.
Conclusion
Picking a soundproofing panel on a budget can be an ordeal, but it needn’t necessarily be so. After all, all that matters is that unnecessary noises are removed from your room once you soundproof it.
At the end of the day, the soundproof panel set I found to be the best was the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels. It showcases noise reduction at an affordable price point that makes it worth a recommendation. That said, the remaining soundproofing solutions are not far behind.
Some sound absorption panels offer high soundproofing capabilities, while others have a high panel count per set. Each of these products offers something for every niche and based on your personal preference, you can make an informed decision on the matter.
Are you an underground musician trying to come up with new tunes and melodies at home?
Or are you at the other end of the spectrum, sick and tired of your neighbor’s jamming sessions? Well, in both cases, installing soundproof drywall will help reduce noise and promote better relations with your neighbors!
In fact, soundproofing drywall is the most effective solution to block sound waves. And the best part is that most homeowners can install soundproof drywall themselves without requiring professional skills and knowledge.
That said, let’s get a little more into the nitty gritty of soundproofing drywall and find the best out of the lot…
Best Soundproof Drywalls
What Is Soundproof Drywall?
Also known as acoustic drywall or pre-damped drywall, soundproof drywall consists of multiple layers of standard drywall made with a combination of clay, mica, mineral gypsum, and two layers of paper. Additionally, it contains internal sound-deadening barriers usually made of ceramic/viscoelastic.
As sound travels through hard surfaces, the soft layers act as sound-absorbing materials, making soundproof drywall better than just multiple layers of drywall.
How Does Soundproofing Work?
The speed of sound is 343 m/s (1,230 km/h; 767 mph), and it travels as waves from the source to the surrounding area. Contrary to how light travels in shorter waves, sound consists of longer wavelengths too, which can diffract around walls as well as travel through the tiniest air gaps.
Moreover, unlike light, which only travels through specific media, sound can traverse through most solid materials without much change in its form and volume. Notably, metal is a superconductor of sound as it can transmit sound waves at a speed of 21,460 km/h (13,330 mph).
Sound waves are basically vibrating air particles that reach our eardrums, making them vibrate. These vibrations are “heard” as sound, so larger vibrations create louder sounds. As such, soundproofing involves adding mass and density to an area to eliminate sound transfer.
Sound Transmission Class (STC)
Developed in 1961, Sound Transmission Class (STC) is a rating given to structural surfaces based on how sound vibrations travel through them. Usually, internal walls boast an average STC of 40, while hotel walls may have an STC of 60 or more.
Given below are the STCs by audio distinguishability, STC ratings, and the level of sound that can be comfortably heard through them:
STC
What you can hear at this level*
25
Soft speech can be heard and understood
30
Normal speech can be heard and understood
35
Loud speech audible but not intelligible
40
Loud speech audible as a murmur, heard but not understood
45
Loud speech can be heard, the threshold at which privacy begins
50
Loud sounds can be heard but faintly, indistinguishable
60+
Good soundproofing starts here; most sounds do not disturb neighbors
*Values in this table relative, as they are influenced by background noise levels in the receiving room, the greater the better perceived sound insulation
Accordingly, it is imperative to know the STC score of soundproof drywall while choosing one for your room. However, you must remember that not all sounds are measured by the STC scale, as the range is at the standard decibel level of the human voice (125-4000 Hz). As such, to prevent very low-frequency and high-frequency sounds from traveling, you must consider other measures.
How Does Soundproofing Drywall Reduce Sound Transfer?
1. Dampening
Soundproof drywalls act as dead panels, which is imperative to reduce sound transmission. However, they become more effective when used with a sound-damping compound like Green Glue. Basically, Green Glue imitates natural rubber and absorbs sound vibrations. You can further employ fiberglass sound insulation to the soundproofing drywall panels to add approximately ten more points to the STC rating.
2. Insulation
According to the relationship between mass and sound, the higher the mass, the lower the frequency of vibration. As such, heavier interior walls ensure better soundproofing, so consider using a double layer of 5/8″ drywall to achieve a higher STC rating at a lower cost.
3. Decoupling
Sound waves travel from one surface to another. That’s when decoupling helps separate the drywall adhesive from the steel studs, thereby disrupting the path of sound transmission. Hence, a staggered stud wall makes an effective sound barrier.
4. Absorption
You can use a variety of sound-absorbing materials in your wall assemblies to reduce noise. Some of these materials are viscoelastic foam, rubber, fiberglass, mass-loaded vinyl (MLV), etc.
Best Drywall For Soundproofing
1. QuietRock Drywall
Known as the first sound-dampening drywall, QuietRock drywall is a popular pick among homeowners who wish to maintain privacy. The brand has been in the industry for almost two decades, so it is no surprise that you’ll find multiple drywall options catering to varying needs.
Plus, thesesoundproof drywall panelsare easy to install, making them suitable for beginners or DIY enthusiasts who wish to try their hands at framing (construction). All QuietRock drywall panels come with a tapered edge too.
Depending on your budget, you can opt for QuietRock EZ Snap or QuietRock 545, the former being a budget buy while the latter is a premium pick. However, I must add that QuietRock 545 offers the ultimate amount of soundproofing (goes up to 80 STC), which is, of course, favorable but not always required by regular homeowners.
In fact, this high-end drywall for soundproofing is often used in studios and movie theaters and not in residential areas.
Thanks to the three-layered construction of QuietRock soundproof drywall, they are much easier to install than traditional drywall. You will need minimal effort and time to snap the drywall panels into place.
Speaking of construction, the noise-reducing drywall features two layers of gypsum drywall with a viscoelastic polymer in between. The middle layer acts like a rubber compound, thereby increasing viscoelasticity and blocking sound waves of varying frequencies.
Overall, QuietRock boasts a better STC rating than the standard drywall. So, try covering the entire wall with these panels for the best result.
Quietrock Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
Core
STC*
EZ Snap
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’
2.6 lbs/ft2
QRES/Type X
48-60
EZ Snap Mold Resistant
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’
2.6 lbs/ft2
QRES/Type X
48-60
QuietRock 510
1/2”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.13 lbs/ft2
QR510/Regular
47-69
QuietRock 530
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.88 lbs/ft2
QR530/Type X
52-74
QuietRock 530RF
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.88 lbs/ft2
QR530/ Type X
52-74
QuietRock 545
1 ⅜”
48”
8’
6.25 lbs/ft2
QR545/Regular
60-80
*STC: The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
2. National Gypsum SoundBreak Board
National Gypsum is yet another brand that’s slowly emerging as a popular choice for soundproof drywall, the panels are a Gold Bond building product and they offer the Gold Bond Soundbreak acoustical panel range.
The brand offers a variety of sound-dampening drywall, but I recommend Sound Brake XP 1/2 inch Wall Board for those on a budget. However, if you’ve got more to spare, Sound Break XP Ceiling Board 3/4 inch is a high-quality drywall forsoundproofing commercial spaces. The paper in the Soundbreak panels is made from 100% recycled material and is resistant to mold, mildew, and moisture.
Generally, any National Gypsum panel boasts an STC rating of 64, thereby effectively absorbing sound transmission despite the budget-friendly price.
National Gypsum Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
SoundBreak XP Wall Board
½”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
39-51
SoundBreak XP Wall Board
⅝”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
43-63
SoundBreak XP Ceiling Board
¾”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
59-60
SoundBreak XP Retrofit Board
5/16”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
36-53+
*STC:The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
3. CertainTeed SilentFX Panels
Best known for its acoustic panels, Silent FX QuickCut, CertainTeed is another brand you can consider. Just as the Quietrock, both variants are offered with tapered edges.
Its bestseller offers a width of ⅝ inches and is easy to install, almost like the soundproof drywall panels from QuietRock. Plus, it is a fire-resistant board that can absorb airborne sound fairly well, although not as efficiently as QuietRock 545.
CertainTeed Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
SilentFX Quickcut
½”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.1 lbs/ft2
41-54
SilentFX Quickcut Type X
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.8 lbs/ft2
40-64
*STC: The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
4. CertainTeedType X Drywall
Type X drywall is another common pick from CertainTeed, more so because it offers the best of both worlds - soundproofing and fireproofing. Both regular SilentFX and Type X gypsum boards meet the ASTM C 1396 standard specification. However, the regular drywall is made with gypsum, which provides natural fire resistance but is not fire rated.
Type X drywall has special core additives that make it fire-resistant, the fire-resistant board boasts a thickness of ⅝ inches, offering a dense layer of protection. In fact, it is denser than paper and gypsum drywall. Type X boards have a UL/ULC marking on the back of each board to confirm the fire-resistance rating.
For best results, I recommend using a double type X 5/8″ drywall with 3-1/2″ of insulation and steel studs on a wood stud wall. Coupled with the green glue between the layers of drywall, you can get two hours of fire resistance and amp up the STC rating to 58.
Drywall Panel
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
CertainTeed Type X Gypsum Board
5/8"
54"
8’,9’,10’12’
N/A
50+
*STC:The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
5. Multiple Layers Of Traditional Drywall
Of course, if you have standard drywall lying around the house, you can use layers of the existing drywall to soundproof your room.
We suggest using 5-8 layers of existing drywall panels to close any air gaps that may allow sound transfer. However, doing so will shrink the size and floor space of the room and can add a lot of stress to the walls and ceilings.
Moreover, using layers of standard drywall sheets can get expensive. Not to forget, stacking standard drywall layers will take a lot more effort and time than using a single layer of drywall for soundproofing. As such, if you hire professionals for the job, using layers of traditional drywall will become all the more expensive.
How To Choose The Best Drywall For Blocking Sound Waves
Knowing the brands that manufacture the best soundproof drywall is just half the journey completed. Next comes understanding the factors you must consider to choose the appropriate drywall for soundproofing. Here are some that I keep in mind while buying soundproof drywall…
1. Installation Process
Anyone can install drywall with a few instructions, so there is no brand that particularly stands out in this aspect. However, if you choose to install more than one layer of regular drywall, the process will become relatively challenging.
I recommend going for soundproofing drywall panels instead of alternatives, especially for beginners who have no knowledge of construction. You’ll be saving a lot of time and energy.
2. Durability
Soundproofing drywall from the aforementioned brands is known to be durable. And if you add moresoundproofing material, the drywall will become tougher and more resistant to damage. In the case of accidents, too, soundproof drywall can be repaired easily.
3. Cost
Among the brands I recommended, QuietRock is the priciest, with many high-end variants available for commercial soundproofing purposes. But remember that while it may be difficult to resist the “best” drywall for soundproofing, it may not always be required, especially in residential areas.
Coming to installation, most professionals will charge similar rates, depending on the number of layers of drywall you plan to use. Overall, I suggest checking the building materials of the drywall you choose and analyzing whether the total costs will be worth it.
4. Soundproofing Preferences
Ask yourself the reason for soundproofing your space. Is it because you want a quiet space for yourself, isolated from the rest of the household? Or is one side of the house facing the traffic and the hustle and bustle of city life?
Whatever the reason may be - ensure you research soundproof drywall, the different frequencies each type of drywall can block, the installation process, and more. Checking customer reviews of the products will also help get a clearer picture of the quality and durability of the soundproofing drywall.
Moreover, if you’re looking to cut down distractions and promote productivity in a workspace, consider sound masking for the best results.
5. Frequency Of Use
If you’re considering soundproofing a room that is used often, you may want to invest in a premium option like the relatively expensive QuietRock drywall. On the contrary, if it’s a room that is used, say, once a week, you can simply add standard drywall layers.
6. Other Factors To Keep In Mind
When installed correctly, your wall assembly should be able to prevent noise and resist fire. On that note, you must ensure a gap between the soundproof drywall and the adjacent walls and ceiling. These gaps can be filled with acoustic caulking for effective noise reduction.
Moreover, switch boxes, heating pipes, vents, and other fixtures can transmit sound waves. So, I suggest using putty pads for sound damping. Also, note that resilient clips and channels can reduce sound by 12-15 STC points.
How Much Does Soundproof Drywall Cost?
Compared to standard drywall, soundproof drywall costs higher, around $50, as opposed to a $10-dollar standard drywall. But when I say that opting for soundproof drywall is more cost-effective, I mean using a single layer of it, whereas you’ll require more layers when using regular drywall.
At the end of the day, however, it comes down to your preference. If your space is relatively quiet anyway, adding a layer of traditional drywall or using soundproof curtains may do the trick!
Conclusion
The best drywall for soundproofing will definitely work better than your existing sheetrock. Although the material costs may be considerably high, it is a small price to pay for a tad bit of privacy!
Not to forget, high-quality drywall offers significant fire resistance and water absorption and prevents mildew growth. As a result, soundproofing your walls can indirectly help safeguard your health and improve your quality of life.
Finally, I recommend installing soundproof curtains, window shutters, and rugs on the entryway to soundproof your doors and windows further.
A new bathtub does not have to cost a bomb!
If you are looking for a new tub, try the acrylic models that have flooded the market due to their popularity. And while you're at it, why settle for just another tub when you have limitless options for gorgeous and luxurious tubs at similar costs?
People nowadays prefer acrylic bathtubs over others because they are affordable, easy to maintain, and above all, look great. But the question arises- which brand should you go for? Worry not; we've compiled a list of the best acrylic bathtubs for you to choose from.
We've also added a buying guide, so be sure to check that out as well.
Best Acrylic Bathtubs
From renowned brands to innovative designs, this list encompasses a range of features and styles to elevate your bathing experience. So, without further ado, here’s the list of the 14 best Acrylic Bathtubs that will transform your bathroom into a haven of relaxation and indulgence.
Modern bathtubs are a specialty of the brand Kingston Brass. They have come up with a new model, the VTDE603122L, that is made of superior-quality acrylic. With a clean and straightforward design, this acrylic bathtub would fit right into any bathroom. Along with an easy installation method, this option tops our list as one of the best acrylic bathtubs.
Product dimensions – 30-11/16" W x 60" L x 22-1/6" H |...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's start with some unique features of this white acrylic bathtub by Kingston Brass. This model is constructed using fiberglass and resin reinforcement, so there is no doubt about its durability and strength. It is comfortably sized at 30-inch width, 60-inch length, and 22-inch height and is not too heavy, weighing not more than 95 pounds.
Moreover, this acrylic bathtub has a three-wall clove installation so it can fit into your bathroom space from three sides, leaving only one open. Along with that, it also includes a tile flange and an integral tub apron. These features make the model modern and sturdy while allowing easy installation.
Speaking of the installation process, we thought the entire process of fitting this option in the bathroom was a breeze. The construction is simple and pristine, with a polished finish over the interiors. Also, this left-hand drain bathtub has a pretty good tub capacity of 58.2 gallons.
What Could've Been Better?
We couldn't find any significant issues with this product. Its sturdy design, ease of installation, along with positive customer reviews told us pretty much all we needed to know. Those of you who enjoy minimalistic designs for acrylic bathtubs will appreciate this model. However, if you're looking for an artistic approach to bathtubs, this unit may not be your cup of tea.
Pros
Effortless installation
Large capacity
Affordable
Polished and attractive appearance
Cons
Basic bathtub design
Size (inches): 60 x 31 x 22 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 64 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
We present another Kingston Brass product to you, but this one is the right-hand drain model, VTAP663222R. While it is similar to the previous unit in many aspects, this model has a few features that differentiate it from other acrylic bathtubs from this brand. Yes, it is still an alcove bathtub, but it has a larger water capacity.
Acrylic construction with fiberglass and resin reinforcement
Alcove tub with apron
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this tub by Kingston Brass is an alcove type which is a pretty popular choice for home developers and contractors. Not only does this design look great with its three sides closed and one apron for entering, but it's also easy to install.
When it comes to acrylic tubs, you need a timeless glossy finish that stays. And, this is precisely what you can expect from this acrylic bathtub. It is also quite large at 32 inches in width, 66 inches in length, and 20 inches in height. While the water depth is 16 inches before it flows over the tub, it also has a larger tub capacity at 62.17 gallons.
Also, we think that shape matters immensely when trying to find the perfect fit for the bathroom. For instance, a modern bathroom with limited space calls for a rectangular acrylic bathtub since it is the easiest to fit in a corner.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite coming at an affordable price, this acrylic bathtub appears high-end and improves the aesthetic of the bathroom. It's also spacious enough to fit tall people. However, it is a classic rectangular bathtub that may appear boring to some people. So, make a note of that if it concerns you.
Pros
Large water holding capacity
Sturdy acrylic construction
Easy installation
Can fit in bathroom corners
Cons
Very simple design
Size (inches): 66 x 32 x 20.5 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 62.17 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Up next, we have an acrylic bathtub by the well-known brand American Standard. This model by American Standard is an acrylic, white, deep soaking tub for full-body immersions. If you are looking for a tub to enjoy rose petal soaks to relieve stress, this might be the tub you are looking for!
Right off the bat, we knew we had to include this model by American Standard. It was one of the few models that checked all the boxes for a good-quality acrylic bathtub. But this product specializes in one particular feature, i.e., full-body immersion. That's right; it is so large that you can use this for deep soaks for therapeutic benefits.
In case you are wondering, this model weighs only 7 pounds because it is an under-mount or drop-in style tub. So, it's also 36 inches wide and 72 inches in length. At this length, it is easy to accommodate even those of you with long legs. Also, at 18.5 inches deep, the water level will be enough to cover the entire body.
Another good thing about this model is that it has dual molded-in armrests and a pre-leveled tub bottom. These features allow you to rest your arms and maintain good posture for the back.
What Could've Been Better?
This brand has been known for its quality and style for 130 years, and the model in question is a clear example of that. However, the installation method might not be convenient for everyone. With this model, you will need to pick and drop it in the bathtub section, which is not as straightforward.
Pros
Spacious for total body immersion
Slip-resistant tub floor
Budget-friendly
Comfortable for back and spine
Cons
Complicated installation
Size (inches): 72 x 36 x 21.5 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Drop-in | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Now we introduce to you a beautiful standalone tub by the brand Vanity Art. The model VA6610-L by Vanity Art is an oval, freestanding tub that is luxurious and comfortable for a relaxing soak at the end of the day. Thus, this high-gloss white acrylic tub is a royal option for your modern bathroom.
First of all, who can resist a tub with a high gloss finish in pure white? This acrylic bathtub is a piece of art that would be a fantastic addition to your bathroom. The model is made of lucite acrylic and is reinforced with ash-land resin and fiberglass. These ingredients should give you a good idea about the product's quality.
Moreover, this freestanding bathtub is a textbook definition of luxury mixed with comfort and chic design. The size is appropriate for modern-day bathrooms with a width of 29.5 inches, length of 59 inches, and height of 23.6 inches. It also has a flexible drain pipe that levels all four legs.
Nothing can replace the pleasure of a relaxing bath, and freestanding acrylic bathtubs give you this comfort even if you have small bathrooms. They are designed to fit in modern and traditional bathrooms alike and include sloping lines that follow your body's natural curves.
What Could've Been Better?
All you need is warm water and this tub to destress after a long day. This beautiful model is a truly stunning addition to the bathroom and can be used for any bathroom renovation. But even though this acrylic bathtub is incredible, we wish it were slightly larger than its current size.
Pros
Stain and scratch-resistant
Fits in small bathrooms
Durable fiberglass material
Easy to clean
Cons
May be too small for some users
Size (inches): 67 x 30.5 x 23.6 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Next, we have another sleek and trendy acrylic bathtub by Vanity Art, once again. The VA6814-S is a freestanding bathtub that is similar in size to other models by Vanity Art. This model comes in pure white color and has a glossy polished exterior.
We decided to check yet another Vanity Art product because this one was as unique and elegant as the previous one. This model is a drastically different style compared to the previous model we reviewed, even though there are many similarities. In our opinion, what’s similar is the use of white acrylic material, which is the best option for acrylic bathtubs.
Furthermore, this design also falls in the category of freestanding bathtubs. But the shape is much more sleek and sharp as compared to the oval designs. But what differentiates this model from the rest is the polished chrome finish that shines, giving the tub a smooth and luxurious feel.
Apart from that, with this acrylic bathtub, you can mount the tub spout, diverter, and showerhead at either end of your choice. You even have the option to add these fittings to either side.
What Could've Been Better?
This model has a durable construction, making it the ideal acrylic tub for any bathroom. We say that because there was one issue that came to our attention. With high-quality products, you would expect a scratch-resistant surface. But this tub tends to develop slight scratches over time.
Pros
Fits all bathrooms
Can add shower accessories
Anti-slip floor
Affordable
Cons
Prone to scratches
Size (inches): 59 x 29.5 x 24 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Here we have another high-end option for modern bathrooms. The 67" Luxury Freestanding Bathtub by Empava is made of white fiberglass and is very durable. It has a brushed finish that is pleasing to the eye, and the oval tub shape is comfortable to sit in.
Elegant Modern Look: Upgrade your bathroom with a...
Deep Soaking Comfort: Immerse yourself fully in the...
Why Did We Like It?
One of the first features we liked about this acrylic bathtub was the new-age design of the tub. This pure white freestanding tub that features 100% glossy acrylic complements all kinds of bathrooms.
It also sports an ergonomic design that makes it comfortable to lie in for as long as you like without straining your back.
Besides this, it has a versatile system that allows pairing with any tub filler of your choice. These additions can change the way you view bathing and transform it into a therapeutic experience. If you place this model in your bathroom, it will inevitably become the focal point due to its gorgeous curved appearance.
It is wide enough to fit one person comfortably with a length of 66 inches, a width of 31 inches, and a depth of 26 inches. Finally, it has an impressive tub capacity of 58 gallons.
What Could've Been Better?
The curved design with its pristine white glossy finish makes this option a gorgeous addition to the bathroom. However, we thought that one aspect might not make this one a good choice for everyone. It falls on the smaller side, so taller people might have a hard time fitting in.
Pros
Glossy acrylic material
It goes well with modern homes
Comfortable for long soaks
Easy installation
Cons
Slightly small
Size (inches): 66.9 x 29.5 x 26.38 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 58 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Another option we decided to include in this list was the Ruby 65 in. model by Ove Decors. This contemporary acrylic bathtub is a freestanding model that has a pop-up drain and waste overflow feature. This brand has different sizes ranging from 59 to 70 inches; however, we wanted to look at the 65-inch model.
Ove Decors has a really interesting service policy that lasts all of 25 years. They guarantee that their acrylic bathtubs will be defect-free in construction, and you can ask for repairs and services for 25 years from the purchase date. That is a confident claim, but the brand has the quality to back it up.
Essentially, the materials are entirely certified and constructed using high gloss acrylic and reinforced fiberglass. These acrylic bathtubs are incredibly durable and do not wear quickly, and they are easy to clean and maintain.
Apart from that, the design is perfect for modern-day bathrooms and is ideal for relaxing deep soaks. And the soaking depth is good enough for a medium-sized person to fit in comfortably. The best part is, this model has the correct amount of slope for supporting the back. This efficient design maximizes comfort allowing you to spend more time in the acrylic bathtub.
What Could've Been Better?
After reading some online reviews, we found that a couple of customers had issues with surface-mounted bathtub valves. They claimed that the regular-sized valves they purchased were not the correct match for this tub. So, it's better if you research further because you don't want to end up buying the wrong parts.
Pros
Service for 25 years
Ideal for immersive soaks
Sturdy material last long
No leakage issues
Cons
Accessories not easily available
Size (inches): 65 x 29.1 x 28.4 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 53.9 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Next, we have another freestanding acrylic bathtub that comes in a rounded, oval shape. This model, B-0018 by Woodbridge, is made of premium materials that other manufacturers do not as often use. The superior quality of the materials reflects in the cleaning aspect too. This acrylic tub is much easier to clean and maintain.
Now we come to another great option - an oval freestanding bathtub made of the most premium material. This acrylic bathtub is made using 100% high gloss lucite material in the color white. It is also reinforced with Ashland resin and fiberglass, making it a superior-quality product.
This elegant bathtub is 59 inches long, 31 inches wide, and 22 inches deep. It also has a decent water holding capacity of 55 gallons at any given time. The brand has taken time and care in developing a non-slip bathtub that ASTM approves. The tub floor is smooth but will still keep you safe by preventing slipping.
Apart from that, this acrylic tub is easy to maintain and clean. After purchase, it does not easily develop stains and scratches and retains its glossy finish for a long time.
What Could've Been Better?
All in all, this option was one that we could not leave out from the list. We were impressed by the inclusion of a brushed nickel drain and overflow with the packaging. To top that, they also provide a one-year limited warranty. However, this option is costlier than other models.
Pros
Strong enough to bear 1000 pounds
One-year limited warranty
Many accessories included
Comfortable design
Cons
Slightly pricey
Size (inches): 59 x 31.5 x 22.8 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 55 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
The 1957-LA-0 model by Kohler is one of the acrylic alcove bathtubs you should consider. This model is rectangular with built-in white acrylic material deemed to be the standard for most bathtub options. What's unique about this option is the integral flange which is responsible for preventing water leaks and seepage.
Luxurious, deep soaking experience with 68-gallon capacity...
Molded lumbar support and sloped backrest for enhanced...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's get one thing out of the way. The material used for the construction of this alcove tub is the regular solid acrylic material. But simply because it is common does not mean that they are not high-quality materials. This rectangular is a frontrunner when it comes to alcove tubs and can easily compete with its competitors on the market.
Apart from that, we'd like to mention a few features that make this tub worthy of consideration. This acrylic tub measures 60 inches in length, 32 inches in width, and 21 inches in height. It can also contain 68 gallons of water at any given time.
Also, it contains an overflow drain that you can use for immersed soaks. While resting in the tub, this model takes care of back support with its ergonomic design.
What Could've Been Better?
At first, we were not sure if this product would live up to our expectations, but we were pleasantly surprised. But, after digging into the product details, we found the drain kit is not included in the packaging. Basically, you'll have to spend extra to get the complete kit.
Pros
Clean design
Affordable
Fewer water spills
Easy to install
Cons
Accessories are not included
Size (inches): 60 x 32 x 21 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 68 Gals | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
While we have already mentioned a different acrylic bathtub by American Standard earlier, we had to include this one too. After all, it's not our fault that this brand has more than one option for decent acrylic bathtubs. The 2461002.020 model, in particular, is a right-hand drain-style model with a painted finish.
Americast engineered steel with glossy porcelain finish
Full Stansure slip-resistant floor surface
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this model is slightly different from the ones we have reviewed so far. Some features like the materials, finish, and functions vary from other models, but we thought you might find this option interesting. This tub is made of a material called americast, which is lighter than cast iron.
Compared to cast iron tubs, this model is far more durable too and easier to handle. Also, the final coating consists of a porcelain enamel finish which is pretty glossy, non-porous, and scratch-resistant. This coating also creates a slip-resistant floor automatically. The textured floor allows the feet to get a grip, thus preventing accidents.
Next, we have to mention the heat retention qualities of this tub. Simply speaking, it keeps the water hot for a long time for a relaxing bathing experience. Finally, the Americast backing helps to insulate the bathtub allowing for a quieter shower or bath.
What Could've Been Better?
There is no doubt that this model delivered when it came to the durability and a pleasant bathing experience. Yet, a few reviewers felt that the glossy appearance was lost after using it consecutively for a long time.
Pros
Heat retention properties
It prevents slipping and accidents
Insulates tub for quiet showering
Scratch-resistant
Cons
Loses gloss over time
Size (inches): 60 x 32 x 14 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 50 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
When it comes to minimalist designs, the Shangri-La bathtub by FerdY is by far the most pleasant and user-friendly one. This oval, freestanding bathtub has a brushed finish that gives it a glossy appearance that is generally sought after for tubs. It also has a feature that allows for heat retention.
🛀 CLASSIC DESIGN: Clean, elegant, and contained, FerdY...
🛀 A PERFECT BATHING EXPERIENCE: With 47-inch length and...
Why Did We Like It?
The first thing that caught our eye was the minimalistic yet elegant design of the acrylic bathtub. It is an oval acrylic tub that allows for deep, immersive soaks while also providing back and spine support. This model features a cast resin material that forms the perfect curves, while the hand-finished detailing adds personality to the tub.
Speaking of which, the material used for its construction is glossy white acrylic that is reinforced with fiberglass that makes it durable. Not many tubs can boast that their materials are sourced from the most environment-friendly and non-toxic courses. But this option guarantees these benefits along with non-cracking, stain-resistant, and easy-to-clean features.
Moreover, the user guide is simple to understand and gives detailed steps that will help you with the installation. It provides instructions on tub accessory placements like the plastic and brass drain pipes located on the inner side of the tub. Finally, another impressive feature is the adjustable foot leveling it provides.
What Could've Been Better?
This freestanding tub is a worthy contender for several reasons. Its double-wall insulation and its 1750-pound load capacity are only a few of the reasons. However, the use of plastic in drain pipes doesn't sound like a good idea. Our doubts were seconded by reviewers who found leakages in the tub.
Pros
Glossy and pleasing appearance
Easy installation instructions
Keeps water warm
Pre-installed brushed nickel drain
Cons
Plastic drain is not durable
Size (inches): 47.24 x 25.59 x 22.83 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 40 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Who doesn't enjoy a good soak? We're sure you would love to check a variety of tubs for soaking and relaxing before purchasing the perfect one. This is why we have searched the market and found the following product, the FT-AZ090 bathtub by the brand ANNI.
Let's face it, even though you are going to buy only one bathtub; it's nice to see the options available. And, making the right choice might seem complicated because there is no shortage of brilliant options out there. Take this model from ANNZI, for example - it's a beautiful modern glossy white acrylic bathtub that gives the feeling of a spa at home.
It's exciting to see an acrylic bathtub built of incredibly durable materials. It is Rhino Alloy certified and has the best acrylic and fiberglass in its construction. Besides, these materials are known to retain gloss over a long time and do not easily develop scratches or stains.
What's more, this high-quality bathtub is quite spacious. It measures 71 inches in length, 35 inches in width, and 30 inches deep. With a 52-gallon water holding capacity, it makes for a roomy, relaxing experience to soak in this tub.
What Could've Been Better?
While this beautiful acrylic bathtub has tons of impressive features, we think it comes with a share of drawbacks. This option is not the best acrylic bathtub for reliable customer service. A few online reviewers faced issues with the motor and airflow but did not receive a timely response from the customer service team.
Pros
Scratch and stain-resistant
Limited lifetime warranty
Perfect for a spa experience at home
High water level for submerging
Cons
Poor customer service
Size (inches): 67 x 31.5 x 28.3 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 79.26 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
While we are on the topic of bathtubs that feature several additions for maximizing relaxation, another worthy option comes to mind. Enter the Acrylic alcove whirlpool bathtub by the brand Empava! This tub has a multitude of features like a self-leveling base, removable pillow, and water jets.
[SPECIFICATIONS] Outer Dimensions: 59. 49 in. L x 29. 53 in....
[PREMIUM QUALITY] The acrylic whirlpool tub featuring...
Why Did We Like It?
While on the lookout for the best acrylic bathtub, we came across this alcove model by Empava. This tub also features water jets that improve the bathing experience. There are a total of 11 water jets spread across the tub - four near the foot area, three jets near the body, and four small ones near the lumbar region.
Besides this, the tub differs from others in shape and style. It is constructed using the best acrylic material and reinforced with fiberglass, but that's not all. It also has a stainless steel frame that has a load-bearing capacity of 660 pounds. The front panel is unique because it is made of tempered glass which adds to the appeal of the bathtub.
Furthermore, operating the system is easy due to its ergonomic controls. And, with a length of 59 inches, an average-sized person can easily fit in the tub with room to spare.
What Could've Been Better?
While this is a pretty attractive option for relaxing baths and soaks, we think a few things need care while using it. You need to handle the glass at the front of the tub with care. If too much weight is applied, the glass might break.
Yet another model we liked by the brand Empava was this 72-inch acrylic whirlpool bathtub. This model is the largest option we checked. The rectangular alcove tub can hold a tremendous amount of water, and it's also much wider than a regular tub.
Empava Whirlpool Tub with 10 Water Jets: With careful...
2 Person Whirlpool Tub:The 2 person whirlpool bathtub can...
Why Did We Like It?
Before we talk about anything else, we want to point out that this might be one of the best acrylic alcove bathtubs for two people. It has a generous length of 72 inches which is big enough to stretch legs, and the width is a comfortable 48 inches. Also, it has a timeless double-ended design with lumbar support.
Along with that, the tub has a set of 10 water jets. It has two water jets along the body, four near the feet, and four jets near the lumbar area. The 1.2 HP water pump is powerful enough to work all the jets simultaneously. You could also adjust the water pressure according to your liking.
Moreover, the three-year limited parts warranty covers the overflow, jets, knobs, and drain pipes. Even if there are any leaks, you can get a replacement within three years of purchasing.
What Could've Been Better?
Even though there are several attractive features of this option, there are some downsides too. During our research, we found that this option needed more upkeep than regular models. It is much more delicate and prone to leaks as compared to other tubs.
Now that you have seen the top options available on the market find out what features to look for before selecting the final tub -
1. Bathtub Type
Arguably one of the first things you should determine is the kind of tub required for your home. It's possible that you already have an idea about what would look best in your bathroom. An alcove type might be better suited than a freestanding acrylic bathtub if you have a smaller bathroom. Alternatively, if there is room to spare and you prefer the bathtub to take center stage, a freestanding option would be the best choice.
2. Durability
The best acrylic bathtub is one that is durable and lasts long. No one wants a bathtub that cracks soon after the purchase, and that's not the only issue with low-quality tubs. If the materials used for the construction are not up to the mark, the glossy white color fades quickly too. Make sure you select an acrylic tub that is reinforced with fiberglass. This material is super tough, and the color will remain pristine white for ages.
3. Depth
The gallons of water a tub can hold varies across companies and models. But if you are looking for complete body immersion, go for a tub that holds above 65 gallons of water. An immersion of 18 inches or above should be enough to cover the entire body.
4. Warranty
If parts happen to break or you face leaks pretty soon after purchasing, it can be costly to get these issues fixed. But, you would be saved from this stress if you had a warranty from the company. Look for a company that offers at least one year warranty for the bathtub. It's best if it provides a replacement for all parts; if not, check which parts fall under the warranty blanket.
Acrylic Bathtubs FAQ's
What are the advantages of acrylic bathtubs?
Acrylic bathtubs offer several advantages. They are lightweight, making them easier to install compared to heavier materials like cast iron. Acrylic is also a good insulator, meaning it retains heat well, providing a comfortable bathing experience. Additionally, acrylic bathtubs are highly resistant to stains, scratches, and fading, and they are available in a wide range of designs and colors.
Are acrylic bathtubs durable?
Yes, acrylic bathtubs are generally considered durable. Acrylic is a sturdy material that resists cracking and chipping. However, it is important to note that the durability can vary depending on the quality of the acrylic used. It is advisable to choose acrylic bathtubs from reputable manufacturers known for their quality and craftsmanship.
Can acrylic bathtubs be repaired if they get damaged?
Acrylic bathtubs can be repaired if they get damaged. Small scratches or scuffs can often be buffed out or repaired using acrylic repair kits available in the market. For more significant damage, such as cracks or deep scratches, it is recommended to seek professional assistance to ensure a proper and long-lasting repair.
Can acrylic bathtubs fade or discolor over time?
Acrylic bathtubs are designed to resist fading and discoloration. However, prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or harsh cleaning chemicals can potentially cause some color fading or discoloration over time. It is best to follow the manufacturer’s care instructions, avoid abrasive cleaners, and limit prolonged exposure to direct sunlight to maintain the appearance of the acrylic bathtub.
Can acrylic bathtubs be customized or modified?
Acrylic bathtubs can be customized or modified to a certain extent. Some manufacturers offer customization options, such as different colors, finishes, or additional features like jets or whirlpool systems. However, it’s important to note that major modifications may not be possible once the bathtub is manufactured, so it’s best to discuss customization options with the manufacturer before making a purchase.
How long do acrylic bathtubs last?
The lifespan of acrylic bathtubs can vary depending on usage, maintenance, and quality. Generally, a well-maintained acrylic bathtub can last for many years, even decades. High-quality acrylic bathtubs from reputable manufacturers often come with warranties that provide an indication of their expected lifespan. It’s advisable to choose a bathtub from a trusted brand and follow proper care guidelines for optimal longevity.
Conclusion
Here we reach the end of our review-based guide for the best acrylic bathtubs. While all the options we reviewed are efficient and durable, we did have a couple of favorites. For us, the clear winner was the VTDE603122L bathtub by Kingston Brass. This option is constructed using durable materials, spacious enough for long baths, and easy to install.
The second best option was the VTAP663222R model by the same brand Kingston Brass. Its glossy finish and large water-holding capacity were unmatched, in our opinion.
We hope this guide helped you pick the best acrylic bathtub for you. See you next time, take care!
Finding a furniture store with a variety of furniture styles and designs can be a tiring chore. Even more, it can be costly and have indifferent customer service.
To narrow down the search, we have compiled a list of the best furniture stores in the Chicago area where you can rest assured of the best customer service and quality furniture pieces.
Putting together your room’s aesthetic will be a breeze with these suppliers. Read on to find the best store and begin turning your house into a home!
Best Furniture Stores In Chicago
57st. Design
Truly a furniture store of Chicago-based residents, 57 st. Design has its beginnings in the city itself.
Beginning as a bookshelf builder 30 years ago, the founder started his company on the 57th street of Hyde Park. Since then, it has expanded, and now the company does everything from designing pieces to manufacturing and selling the products in their own showroom on Cermak Road.
As every piece of furniture is designed in-house, they are also able to customize anything down the inch to suit your home’s specifications.
Additionally, they give the option to buy a piece that has been pre-owned and restored for a discount. This same piece can be sold back to them, regardless of its condition; restored to its original state, and then sold to the next owner. In exchange, you get store credit to purchase your next piece of furniture.
All pieces are hardwood and finished by hand, ensuring quality that allows it to be repaired and restored back to a brand new condition. This system of circulation allows for furniture that has been built to last to actually last a lifetime.
New Age Chicago Furniture
A family-run store, New Age Chicago Furniture has been on the market since 1910. This company has been providing years of quality customer service and long-lasting furniture for Chicago’s indoor and outdoor needs.
It supplies loveseats, curio cabinets, pub tables, chaise lounges, and Cheval glass pieces, just to name a few. These are testament to the wide variety of furniture types and designs available for purchase.
What’s more, when you shop at a family-run store like New Age, they treat you like family. Their financing options can be accommodating even for those who may be getting on their feet. The New Age family does not discriminate just because you may have an unsatisfactory credit history.
Modern Classics
Inspired by the Bauhaus Modern design, Modern Classics aims to bring high-quality furniture with a mid-century modern touch that they call a modern classic.
Originally an online retail website, the store has expanded to a physical location in the Michigan Avenue Fine Arts Building to showcase its pieces. If modern furniture is what you are looking for, then Modern Classics is the perfect blend of modern styles to create a truly unique piece of furniture.
All designs are manufactured and sold by them. From daybeds to sofas and benches, the most iconic designs from the modern era are available. Every piece is handmade to ensure a quality finish can capture the essence of the original design.
There is also the option to customize the piece you select. You may opt for a different material, upholstery, or for changing the color of the finish. Additionally, they offer free shipping for any retail and design trade orders.
Plain And Simple Furniture
A unique furniture store out of Everton is the Plain and Simple Furniture boutique. What makes this boutique so unique is its entire Amish-made collection. You can choose from one of their many contemporary and traditional designs or have a custom-made piece just for you.
While the majority of their furniture is made-to-order, there are still simpler designs for instant purchases. However, the more common options are the made-to-order pieces to have complete control over design, material, and wood finish.
Employing a number of skilled Amish builders, they can modify any of their pre-existing designs available to fit your taste. Additionally, there is a choice to select what wood you would like and any other details on the piece. Standard delivery can be done within a 25-mile radius, which includes assembly and placement.
Every furniture item is a quality build from solid hardwood like maple, walnut, oak, and cherry. With excellent branding, this is a perfect option for those who are looking for simple designs.
What is more impressive than the craftsmanship is their delivery service nationwide. You can have your furniture delivered even if you aren’t in the Chicago area! More than ten years of experience will ensure that you are getting the best value for your money.
Wrightwood Furniture
For those who have a particular taste for rustic pieces of furniture, Wrightwood Furniture out of Lakeview is a perfect place to start. All the pieces have a certain Chicagoan vibe in their material of wood and dark metals. Some colorful pieces are also available, sure to catch the attention of any room.
From bedside tables to coffee tables and media cabinets, Wrightwood can help channel the Chicago spirit and energy into your home. Quite literally, if you choose to pick up one of their Chicago flag-themed items from benches or throw pillows.
Truly a unique experience with beautifully crafted furniture, Wrightwood Furniture is an excellent stop for channeling the proud Chicago spirit into your home.
Pagoda Red
A one-stop-shop for those who wish to bring a touch of the Orient into their homes, Pagoda Red offers unique antiques and furniture locally. Located on the corner of Bucktown and Lincoln Park, the 15,000-square-foot warehouse stores its collection of over 4,000 pieces.
All antiques were carefully collected over more than 20 years of traveling. Every piece has a story behind it and is sure to be the conversation starter in any room you place it in.
Besides antiques, there are beautifully designed furniture pieces with their own flair of elegance and grace. These are similarly based on traditional designs to replicate old Chinese furniture from different dynasties.
Pagoda Red may be a niche store, but it is more than enough to satisfy any search for that Oriental touch you are looking for.
Interior Define
Finding a sofa that fits your home perfectly can be a difficult chore. There is always an issue with either the sizing or material, which may not match; the smallest detail can make the most significant difference.
Interior Define allows you to take control of every aspect of your custom sofa. Everything from the size, build, legs, and material, there is not a single detail of your couch that you can not change. After picking out what you want your sofa to look like, Interior Define will do the rest,
Beyond couches, Interior Define provides their customization service to beds and chairs as well. Recently they have expanded to providing dining collections.
Ever-changing and adapting to the times, Interior Define truly defines what a modern furniture store is. The brand has its own iOS augmented reality app that can show you what your custom furniture piece will look like.
Milwaukee Furniture
Milwaukee Furniture is a family-owned establishment that has become widely recognized in the Chicago area as an assured quality provider for furniture. They have consistently been available to customers who need a refreshing new look to replace their old, worn furniture.
Milwaukee Furniture is a great budget-friendly option with a quality service paired with their range of furniture and accessories. Going to their showroom feels like being treated like family; getting great advice of what accessories or design choices would pair well. Not only are the staff friendly, but they are knowledgeable. Any question on a specific piece was answered right away from availability all the way to the different colors it came in.
Chicago Best Furniture
Carrying a wide range of name-brand furniture, Chicago Best Furniture offers excellent service and prices to match.
Established by two brothers in the business for 20 years, they worked their way up to build a chain of stores in the Chicago and Illinois area. Carrying a variety of brands such as Sealy, Englander, Ashley, and others, the choices are bountiful, and all are priced low to get you the quality furniture you need for less.
It is difficult to find the same quality name-brand furniture pieces at the price offered at Chicago Best Furniture. Their variety in furniture, as well as free delivery to your door, makes the entire buying process that much smoother.
Staff members are patient with you to determine what it is you’re looking for and what models available can fit those criteria. To have a good experience at the store is just as important as the fantastic price and any discounts offered.
Room & Board
Established in 1980, Room & Board is a beautifully designed modern furniture store on the Magnificent Mile in Chicago.
With a stunning view of the city skyline, this four-floor establishment has settings to inspire your own designs for any room. From children’s rooms to living rooms and outdoor areas, as well as matching home decor, Room & Board has a great collection to choose from.
The staff are friendly and will talk you through selecting pieces that will complement your house and personality at the same time. Understanding the rich culture that Chicago has, these Design Associates are there when you need a helping hand but also allow you to shop freely with no pressure.
Additionally, their delivery service with flat rates includes the complete package. Not only will they deliver the furniture to your door, but they will handle setup as well as clean up afterward. All this applies to every item purchased; there is no cap on how many items can be included in the one-time delivery payment fee.
Roy’s Furniture
Based in Lincoln Park, Roy’s Furniture has a welcoming environment and staff to help you have a smooth experience when buying that new bed or couch.
Providing quality furniture is what Roy’s prides itself on. While the delivery times may vary, Roy’s is able to deliver the quality it prides itself on. Customer service is a priority at Roy’s as the Design Associates will understand your needs and recommend what the best model would be to meet those needs.
Besides providing furniture, Roy’s also handles furniture customization. This can elevate a simple, basic couch into a personal, colorful one-of-a-kind work of art in your living room.
Any piece of furniture can be customized to change out the material for any you choose. To help you pick the best material, the Design Associates are knowledgeable in selecting the best material for your needs. Their catalog of materials is extensive and covers many designs and aesthetic choices.
Inside Home
Located in the Ukrainian Village neighborhood of Chicago, Inside Home is a furniture store that supplies curated pieces, both new and old.
For those who are looking for a vintage designer aesthetic, Inside Home is your friend. They specialize in Mid-Century Modern and Hollywood Regency pieces, but they can also cater to your style. Restoring old pieces to new, the staff are not only helpful in guiding you to the items you need but are friendly and conversational as well.
The furniture has a blend of both modern touches and vintage aesthetics. If you are unsure of what you are looking for, the staff of this family-owned boutique will do their best to cater to your tastes. Finding the perfect piece of furniture for you is what they strive for.
Additionally, they offer a custom, made-to-order upholstery route. Using only the best quality materials, you can determine every detail of your furniture. Anything from style, fabric, size, wood stain, and cushion inserts, the custom piece will be unique to your needs specifically.
Al-Mart Furniture & Bedding
Situated in Oak Park, Al-Mart Furniture & Bedding offers excellent prices and discounts for name-brand and quality furniture.
Affordability is the main draw when browsing Al-Mart’s collection. Offering regular discounts on their name-brand items is a common occurrence at Al-Mart. They make sure you get the furniture you need at an affordable price.
It truly is a furniture store for the Chicago people; not only are the prices low, but the customer service is exceptional. Delivery times are fast, and even on-the-spot purchases can be delivered on the same day itself.
The owner, Alan, is an accommodating businessman and understands the Chicago people. He has a hands-on approach in providing only the best customer service that will make you want to visit again.
Hay
Founded in 2002, Hay is a Danish company that aims to bring the Scandanavian design ethos to a larger audience. Being their third location in the US, their Lincoln Park branch is a 3,500 square foot area of Scandinavian designed furniture and accessories.
Combining the contemporary design of Scandinavian furniture with the modern living environment, their furniture has a fresh and simple design. Each piece is designed with extra attention given to durability and functionality.
When buying a piece of furniture or accessory from Hay, the genius of its simple design, while remaining functional, immediately stands out. From rugs to outdoor seating, you can rest easy knowing every aspect of the furniture has been meticulously designed by hand.
Cassona Home Furnishing And Accessories
Operating out of Chicago, this store is well known as a brand of high-quality service and products. All pieces in-house are American-made with a design that will add a modern touch to any home. From sofas and lift-top coffee tables to media units and nightstands, Cassona has it all.
If decorations are all you are looking for, then the store has many pieces that can help tie a room together. Sculptures, rugs, and wall art are just a few of the many different accessories they provide.
To browse their complete collection, their entire catalog is available on their website. If you can’t make it to their physical store, there is also the option to add it to your online shopping cart. They can have them delivered right to your doorstep.
Conclusion
Chicago is a beautiful city with vibrant character and people with different backgrounds all living together. The reflection of individual personality in a house is what truly makes it a home.
So, no matter where you may choose to pick up and furnish your home, the Chicagoans have your back. Fill up your home with beautiful pieces of custom furniture or more traditional designs that will never go out of style.
There is no one who can ultimately say what looks good and what doesn’t match. Express yourself through your furniture, and live life to its fullest in a house you can call home.
![80 Best Procreate Brushes for the Realm [Free & Premium Brush Sets]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/gsb-pro-7-.jpg "80 Best Procreate Brushes for the Realm [Free & Premium Brush Sets]")
![21 Best Manga Studio & Clip Studio Paint Brushes [Free Download]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/Best-Manga-Studio-Clip-Studio-Paint-Brushes-1.jpg)
1. 
